DSR 2000 Service Manual Volume 1 DSR2000_VOL1 DSR2000 VOL1

User Manual: DSR2000_VOL1

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 344 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

DIGITAL VIDEOCASSETTE RECORDER
DSR-2000
DSR-2000P
SERVICE MANUAL
Volume 1 1st Edition (Revised 1)
i.LINK/DV INPUT/OUTPUT BOARD
REMOTE CONTROL PANEL
DSBK-200
DSBK-190
DSR-2000/2000P
! WARNING
This manual is intended for qualified service personnel only.
To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire or injury, do not perform any servicing other than that
contained in the operating instructions unless you are qualified to do so. Refer all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
! WARNUNG
Die Anleitung ist nur für qualifiziertes Fachpersonal bestimmt.
Alle Wartungsarbeiten dürfen nur von qualifiziertem Fachpersonal ausgeführt werden. Um die
Gefahr eines elektrischen Schlages, Feuergefahr und Verletzungen zu vermeiden, sind bei
Wartungsarbeiten strikt die Angaben in der Anleitung zu befolgen. Andere als die angegeben
Wartungsarbeiten dürfen nur von Personen ausgeführt werden, die eine spezielle Befähigung
dazu besitzen.
! AVERTISSEMENT
Ce manual est destiné uniquement aux personnes compétentes en charge de l’entretien. Afin
de réduire les risques de décharge électrique, d’incendie ou de blessure n’effectuer que les
réparations indiquées dans le mode d’emploi à moins d’être qualifié pour en effectuer d’autres.
Pour toute réparation faire appel à une personne compétente uniquement.
DSR-2000/2000P
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
Vorsicht!
Explosionsgefahr bei unsachgemäßem Austausch
der Batterie.
Ersatz nur durch denselben oder einen vom
Hersteller empfohlenen ähnlichen Typ. Entsorgung
gebrauchter Batterien nach Angaben des
Herstellers.
ATTENTION
Il y a danger d’explosion s’il y a remplacement
incorrect de la batterie.
Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du même
type ou d’un type équivalent recommandé par le
constructeur.
Mettre au rebut les batteries usagées conformément
aux instructions du fabricant.
ADVARSEL!
Lithiumbatteri-Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig
håndtering.
Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri
af samme fabrikat og type.
Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandøren.
ADVARSEL
Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosjonsfare.
Ved utskifting benyttes kun batteri som
anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten.
Brukt batteri returneres
apparatleverandøren.
VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Använd samma batterityp eller en likvärdig typ
som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera använt batteri enligt gällande
föreskrifter.
VAROITUS
Paristo voi räjähtää jos se on virheellisesti
asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan
suosittelemaan tyyppiin.
Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden
mukaisesti.
1 (P)
DSR-2000/2000P
2 (P)
Voor de klanten in Nederland
Dit apparaat bevat een MnO2-Li batterij voor memory
back-up.
Raadpleeg uw leverancier over de verwijdering van de
batterij op het moment dat u het apparaat bij einde
levensduur afdankt.
Gooi de batterij niet weg. maar lever hem in als KCA.
Bij dit produkt zijn batterijen geleverd.
Wanneer deze leeg zijn, moet u ze niet
weggooien maar inleveren als KCA.
Für Kunden in Deutschland
Entsorgungshinweis: Bitte werfen Sie nur entladene
Batterien in die Sammelboxen beim Handel oder den
Kommunen. Entladen sind Batterien in der Regel dann,
wenn das Gerät abschaltet und signalisiert “Batterie
leer” oder nach längerer Gebrauchsdauer der Batterien
“nicht mehr einwandfrei funktioniert”. Um
sicherzugehen, kleben Sie die Batteriepole z.B. mit
einem Klebestreifen ab oder geben Sie die Batterien
einzeln in einen Plastikbeutel.
1
DSR-2000/2000P
Table of Contents
Manual Structure
Purpose of this manual .............................................................................................. 7
Related manuals......................................................................................................... 7
Contents ..................................................................................................................... 8
1. Operating Instructions
1-1. DSR-2000.................................................................................................... 1-1
1-2. DSBK-190 ................................................................................................. 1-81
1-3. DSBK-200 ................................................................................................. 1-86
2. Installation
2-1. Installation Procedure.................................................................................. 2-1
2-2. Operational Environment ............................................................................ 2-1
2-3. Operating Voltage .......................................................................................2-1
2-4. Installation Space ........................................................................................ 2-2
2-5. Supplied Accessories .................................................................................. 2-2
2-6. Optional Accessories................................................................................... 2-2
2-7. Rack Mounting............................................................................................2-3
2-8. Connectors................................................................................................... 2-5
2-8-1. Connectors/Cables...................................................................... 2-5
2-8-2. Input/Output Signals of the Connectors .....................................2-6
2-9. Installation Setup and Adjustment ............................................................ 2-10
2-9-1. Switch Settings on the Connector Panel ..................................2-10
2-9-2. Front Panel Setting ...................................................................2-11
2-9-3. On-board Switch Setting ..........................................................2-12
2-9-4. System Adjustment After Installation ......................................2-14
3. Service Overview
3-1. Location of Main Parts ................................................................................ 3-1
3-1-1. Location of Printed Circuit Boards ............................................ 3-1
3-1-2. Location of Main Mechanical Parts ........................................... 3-6
3-1-3. Location of Sensors .................................................................... 3-7
3-2. Functions of Record Proof Hole and Record Proof Plug of Cassette ......... 3-9
3-3. Removal/Installation of Cabinet ............................................................... 3-10
3-4. Removal/Reattachment of the Cassette Compartment.............................. 3-13
2DSR-2000/2000P
3-5. Removal/Reattachment of the Boards ....................................................... 3-14
3-5-1. Removal/Reattachment of the Card Boards .............................3-14
3-5-2. Extension Board ....................................................................... 3-14
3-5-3. Removal/Reattachment of the Boards ...................................... 3-15
3-6. Notes on Repair Parts ................................................................................ 3-32
3-6-1. Flexible Card Wire Replacement ............................................. 3-32
3-7. Replacement of Lithium Battery ...............................................................3-35
3-8. Fixtures and Tools list ...............................................................................3-36
3-9. Upgrading the System/Servo CPU Program Version ...............................3-38
3-9-1. Version Upgrade using the DJ-376 .......................................... 3-38
3-9-2. Version Upgrade from a PC through RS-422 .......................... 3-39
4. Error Messages
4-1. Alarm Display ............................................................................................. 4-1
4-1-1. Alarm Display when the Main Power is Turned On ..................4-1
4-2. Error Codes .................................................................................................4-3
4-2-1. Display of Previously Detected Error Codes ............................. 4-5
4-2-2. Main Codes and Sub Codes .......................................................4-6
4-2-3. Error Codes ................................................................................4-8
4-2-4. Possible Causes of Errors .........................................................4-14
4-3. Countermeasure in an Emergency ............................................................ 4-16
4-3-1. How to Take Out the Cassette Whose Tape is Slacked
(MANUAL EJECT) ................................................................. 4-16
4-3-2. Head Cleaning when Head Clogging Occurs........................... 4-17
4-3-3. Operating the VTR without A Cassette Tape .......................... 4-17
5. Maintenance Menu
5-1. Menu Structure ............................................................................................ 5-1
5-2. How to Operate Maintenance Menu ........................................................... 5-3
5-2-1. Location and Function of Switches ............................................5-3
5-2-2. How to Enter the Maintenance Menu ........................................5-3
5-2-3. How to Exit the Maintenance Menu ..........................................5-3
5-3. Contents of Maintenance Menu .................................................................. 5-4
5-3-1. Menu Data Control ..................................................................... 5-4
5-3-2. Servo Check ............................................................................... 5-7
5-3-3. Servo Adjust .............................................................................5-21
5-3-4. Tape Path Adjust ...................................................................... 5-28
5-3-5. Electrical Adjust .......................................................................5-29
5-3-6. Service Support ........................................................................ 5-38
5-3-7. Others ....................................................................................... 5-40
3
DSR-2000/2000P
6. Periodic Inspection and Maintenance
6-1. Periodic Inspection List............................................................................... 6-1
6-2. Hours Meter ................................................................................................ 6-2
6-3. Maintenance upon Completion of Repair ................................................... 6-4
6-3-1. Video Head Cleaning Procedure ................................................6-4
6-3-3. Cassette Compartment Entrance Cleaning ................................. 6-5
6-3-4. Cassette Compartment Shaft Cleaning....................................... 6-5
6-3-5. Cassette Guide Assembly Cleaning ........................................... 6-5
7. Replacement of Mechanical Parts
7-1. General Information on Parts Replacement and Adjustment...................... 7-1
7-1-1. Preparation Before Starting Parts Replacement .........................7-1
7-1-2. Drum Assembly .........................................................................7-1
7-1-3. Grease ......................................................................................... 7-1
7-1-4. Tightening Torque and Handling of Washers ............................7-2
7-2. Drum Replacement...................................................................................... 7-3
7-3. S/T Brake Assembly Replacement.............................................................. 7-8
7-4. Brake Solenoid Replacement ....................................................................7-12
7-5. Pinch Roller Replacement ......................................................................... 7-17
7-6. Elevator Cam Replacement ....................................................................... 7-19
7-7. Pinch Solenoid Assembly Replacement.................................................... 7-21
7-8. Reel Motor (T) Assembly Replacement ................................................... 7-23
7-9. Reel Motor (S) Assembly Replacement.................................................... 7-27
7-10. M Stop Solenoid Assembly Replacement ................................................. 7-31
7-11. S Tension Regulator Assembly Replacement ...........................................7-34
7-12. T Drawer Arm Assembly Replacement ....................................................7-37
7-13. TG1 Arm Assembly Replacement ............................................................ 7-39
7-14. TG8 Arm Assembly Replacement ............................................................ 7-41
7-15. Rail Assembly Replacement ..................................................................... 7-43
7-16. Capstan Motor Replacement ..................................................................... 7-49
7-17. Loading Motor Replacement..................................................................... 7-51
7-18. Reel Shift Motor Assembly Replacement ................................................. 7-52
7-19. MIC Assembly Replacement .................................................................... 7-54
7-20. MIC Holder Assembly Replacement ........................................................ 7-58
7-21. HC Roller Assembly Replacement ........................................................... 7-60
7-22. Head Cleaner Solenoid Replacement ........................................................ 7-63
7-23. Cassette Compartment Motor Replacement.............................................. 7-65
7-24. Switching Regulator Replacement ............................................................ 7-67
4DSR-2000/2000P
8. Tape Path Alignment
8-1. General Information for Tape Path Adjustment .......................................... 8-1
8-2. Tape Path Adjustment ................................................................................. 8-6
8-3. RF Switching Position Adjustment .............................................................8-9
8-4. Tape Path Adjustment Confirmation ........................................................8-12
8-5. Search Forward (x5) Waveform Check .................................................... 8-13
8-6. Search Reverse (x5) Waveform Check .................................................... 8-14
8-7. RF Waveform Raiseup Check ................................................................... 8-15
8-8. Tape Curl Check at Tape Guide ................................................................ 8-16
9. Adjustment When Replacing Board
9-1. Adjustment/Check Items When Replacing Board ...................................... 9-1
10. Electrical Alignment
10-1. Electrical Alignment Overview................................................................. 10-1
10-1-1. List of Adjustment Parts ........................................................... 10-1
10-1-2. Measuring Equipment and Tools ............................................. 10-2
10-1-3. Reference Tape for Alignment ................................................. 10-2
10-2. Audio Adjustment ..................................................................................... 10-4
10-2-1. Audio OUTPUT Level Adjustment ......................................... 10-4
10-2-2. Audio EE Level Adjustment .................................................... 10-4
10-3. Video Adjustment .....................................................................................10-5
10-3-1. INT SC Frequency Adjustment ................................................ 10-6
10-3-2. HCK Frequency Adjustment .................................................... 10-6
10-3-3. COMPONENT Y OUT Level Adjustment ..............................10-7
10-3-4. COMPONENT B-Y OUT Level Adjustment ..........................10-7
10-3-5. COMPONENT R-Y OUT Level Adjustment ..........................10-8
10-3-6. SETUP OFF Chroma Level Check (NTSC only) ....................10-8
10-3-7. S VIDEO OUT Y Level Check ................................................ 10-9
10-3-8. VIDEO OUT 1 Video/Sync Level Adjustment ....................... 10-9
10-3-9. VIDEO OUT 2 Video Level Check .......................................10-10
10-3-10. VIDEO OUT 3 Y Level Adjustment .....................................10-10
10-3-11. ENC SC Leak Adjustment ..................................................... 10-11
10-3-12. U-V Axis (B-Y, R-Y) Phase Adjustment ............................... 10-12
10-3-13. PB VIDEO OUT 1 Chroma/Burst Level Adjustment ............ 10-13
10-3-14. PB S VIDEO Chroma Level Adjustment............................... 10-15
10-3-15. PB COMPOSITE C/C Delay Adjustment.............................. 10-15
10-3-16. PB COMPOSITE Y/C Delay Adjustment ............................. 10-16
10-3-17. PB COMPONENT Y/C Delay Adjustment ........................... 10-17
10-3-18. PB INT SCH Phase Adjustment ............................................10-18
10-3-19. REF. VIDEO OUT Sync/Burst Level Adjustment ................ 10-19
5
DSR-2000/2000P
10-3-20. REF. INT SCH Phase Adjustment .........................................10-20
10-3-21. SPCK Error Adjustment......................................................... 10-21
10-3-22. COMPOSITE 4Fsc PLL DC Check/Adjustment ................... 10-22
10-3-23. REC Y Clamp Level Adjustment........................................... 10-23
10-3-24. REC Y Level Adjustment ...................................................... 10-24
10-3-25. REC COMPONENT R-Y Level Adjustment ........................ 10-25
10-3-26. REC COMPONENT B-Y Level Adjustment ........................ 10-25
10-3-27. REC A/D Y Level Adjustment .............................................. 10-26
10-3-28. REC COMPOSITE Y Level Adjustment............................... 10-27
10-3-29. REC COMPOSITE Chroma Level Adjustment..................... 10-28
10-3-30. REC S VIDEO Chroma Level Adjustment............................ 10-29
10-3-31. REC COMPOSITE Y/C Delay Adjustment .......................... 10-30
10-3-32. REC COMPONENT Y/C Delay Adjustment ........................ 10-31
10-3-33. REC S VIDEO Y/C Delay Adjustment ................................. 10-32
10-4. SDI/SDTI ................................................................................................ 10-33
10-4-1. Free Run Adjustment ............................................................. 10-33
7
DSR-2000/2000P
Purpose of this manual
This manual is the Service Manual Volume 1 for the digital videocassette recorder
DSR-2000/2000P, the option boards i.LINK/DV Input/Output Board DSBK-190 and
optional Remote Control Panel DSBK-200.
This manual contains the maintenance information of this equipment, and servicing
information necessary for parts replacement and adjustments.
Related manuals
In addition to this Service Manual Volume 1, the following manuals are provided.
..
..
.Operation Instructions
DSR-2000/2000P (Supplied with equipment)
Part number:3-867-754-12 (English; for UC, CE)
3-867-754-22 (French; for UC, CE)
3-867-754-32 (German; for CE)
3-867-754-42 (Italian; for CE)
DSBK-190 (Supplied with Model DSBK-190)
Part number:3-203-674-01
DSBK-200 (Supplied with Model DSBK-200)
Part number:3-203-675-01
DSBK-210 (Supplied with Model DSBK-210)
Part number:3-205-213-01 (1)
..
..
.Service Manual Volume 2 (Not Supplied with equipment)
Contains the semiconductor pin assingnments, parts lists, block diagrams, board
layouts and schematic diagrams.
Part number:9-955-186-22
..
..
.DSBK-210
Service Manual (Not Supplied with equipment)
Contains the maintenance information of the DSBK-210, and servicing informa-
tion necessary for parts replacement and adjustments.
Part number:9-955-268-01
..
..
.“Semiconductor Pin Assignments” CD-ROM (Available on request)
This “Semiconductor Pin Assignments” CD-ROM allows you to search for
semiconductors used in B&P Company equipment.
Semiconductors that cannot be searched for on this CD-ROM are listed in the
service manual for the corresponding unit. The service manual contains a com-
plete list of all semiconductors and their ID Nos., and thus should be used together
with the CD-ROM.
Part number: 9-968-546-XX
Manual Structure
8DSR-2000/2000P
Contents
The following is a summary of all the sections for understanding the contents of
this manual.
Section 1 Operating Instruction
Describes the contents of the operating instructions.
Section 2 Installation
This section is described in Installation Manual.
Section 3 Service Overview
Describes the replacement of the parts, the locations of the main parts and boards,
notes and so on.
Section 4 Error Messages
Describes the alarms and countermeasures to be displayed when the unit detects
abnormality.
Section 5 Maintenance Menu
Describes the maintenance menu.
Section 6 Periodic Inspection and Maintenance
Describes the periodic inspection and cleaning procedure.
Section 7 Replacement of Mechanical Parts
Describes the replacement procedures and adjustment after replacement.
Section 8 Tape Path Alignment
Describes the adjustment procedures of tape path system.
Section 9 Electrical Alignment After Replacement Boards
Describes the electrical adjustments after replacement boards.
Section 10 Electrical Alignment
Describes the electrical adjustment of each board.
1-1
DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Section 1
Operating Instructions This section is extracted
from operation manual.
1-1. DSR-2000
Digital
Videocassette
Recorder
3-867-754-12(1)
DSR-2000/2000P
Operating Instructions
Before operating the unit, please read this manual
thoroughly and retain it for future reference.
1999 by Sony Corporation
1-2 DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Table of Contents
2
Table of Contents
For customers in the USA
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with
the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference when the
equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential
area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the
user will be required to correct the interference at his own
expense.
You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not
expressly approved in this manual could void your authority
to operate this equipment.
The shielded interface cable recommended in this manual
must be used with this equipment in order to comply with the
limits for a digital device pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of
FCC Rules.
Caution
Television programs, films, video tapes and other materials
may be copyrighted.
Unauthorized recording of such material may be contrary to
the provisions of the copyright laws.
For the customers in Europe (DSR-2000P only)
This product with the CE marking complies with both the
EMC Directive (89/336/EEC) and the Low Voltage Directive
(73/23/EEC) issued by the Commission of the European
Community.
Compliance with these directives implies conformity to the
following European standards:
• EN60065: Product Safety
• EN55103-1: Electromagnetic Interference (Emission)
• EN55103-2: Electromagnetic Susceptibility (Immunity)
This product is intended for use in the following
Electromagnetic Environment(s):
E1 (residential), E2 (commercial and light industrial), E3
(urban outdoors) and E4 (controlled EMC environment, ex.
TV studio).
Owner’s Record
The model and serial numbers are located in the rear.
Record these numbers in the spaces provided below. Refer
to them whenever you call upon your Sony dealer regarding
this product.
Model No. Serial No.
WARNING
To prevent fire or shock hazard, do not
expose the unit to rain or moisture.
This symbol is intended to alert the user to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage”
within the product’s enclosure that may be of
sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of
electric shock to persons.
This symbol is intended to alert the user to the
presence of important operating and
maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the appliance.
Table of Contents
3
Table of Contents
Chapter 1
Overview
Features............................................................................. 7
System Configuration .................................................... 11
Location and Function of Parts..................................... 12
Upper Control Panel.............................................................13
Lower Control Panel ............................................................16
Subsidiary Control Panel .....................................................25
Connector Panel ...................................................................28
Usable Cassettes ............................................................ 33
Inserting and Ejecting Cassettes ..........................................34
Chapter 2
Setting/Displaying
Time Data and Text
Information
Displaying Time Data and Unit’s Operating Status—
Superimposing Text Information ............................ 35
Setting Time Code and User Bits .................................. 39
Synchronizing the Internal Time Code Generator With an
External Signal—External Lock .....................................42
Chapter 3
Recording and
Playback
Recording ........................................................................ 45
Preparations for Recording .................................................. 45
Recording Time Code and User Bit Values..........................47
Recording Operation ............................................................ 48
Playback .......................................................................... 49
Preparations for Playback .................................................... 49
Playback Operation .............................................................. 50
Dynamic Motion Control (DMC) Playback.........................55
Synchronous Playback .........................................................59
Digitally Dubbing Signals in DVCAM Format
(Optional DSBK-190 Required When Using i.LINK
Interface) ...........................................................................
61
1-3
DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Table of Contents
4
Table of Contents
Chapter 4
Editing
Automatic Editing ........................................................... 67
Overview of Automatic Editing ...........................................67
Button/Switch Settings for Editing ......................................70
Selecting an Edit Mode ........................................................ 71
Setting Edit Points................................................................72
Checking Edit Points............................................................75
Modifying Edit Points ..........................................................76
Cuing Up to Edit Points .......................................................78
Checking Edit Results—Preview .........................................80
Executing Automatic Editing ............................................... 81
DMC Editing .................................................................... 84
Overview of DMC Editing ...................................................84
Carrying Out DMC Editing..................................................85
Preread Editing ............................................................... 87
Special Editing Methods ................................................ 89
Quick Editing .......................................................................90
Continuous Editing ..............................................................91
Standalone Editing ...............................................................93
Manual Editing.....................................................................94
Adding a Narration (Sound-on-Sound) ................................95
Table of Contents
5
Chapter 5
ClipLink Operation
Overview of ClipLink Operation .................................... 97
Displaying ClipLink Log Data ........................................ 98
Detailed Data Display ..........................................................98
Cuing Up to Mark IN/OUT and Cue Points.................... 99
Cuing Up to Any Desired Position.......................................99
Cuing Up to Adjacent Mark IN/Cue Points .........................99
Rewriting ClipLink Log Data........................................ 100
Changing the Reel Number................................................100
Changing Mark IN/OUT Points .........................................100
Changing the OK/NG Status..............................................101
Adding to/Deleting From ClipLink Log Data .............. 103
Adding Mark IN/OUT Points ............................................103
Deleting Mark IN/OUT Points...........................................103
Automatically Creating New ClipLink Log Data......... 105
Chapter 6
Setup Menu
Menu System Configuration ........................................ 107
Basic Menu.................................................................... 107
Items in the Basic Menu.....................................................107
Basic Menu Operations ......................................................110
Extended Menu ............................................................. 113
Items in the Extended Menu .............................................. 113
Extended Menu Operations................................................123
1-4 DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Table of Contents
6
Table of Contents
Chapter 7
Connections and
Settings
Reference Video Signals for Analog Signal Editing .. 125
Connections for Cut Editing Using i.LINK Interface
(Optional DSBK-190 Required) ......................................
125
Connections for Digital Nonlinear Editing Using SDTI
(QSDI) Interface ...................................................... 127
Connections for Cut Editing Using SDI Interface ...... 128
Connections for Preread Editing ................................ 129
Settings Required When Connecting an External
Editing Control Unit................................................ 130
Time Code Settings on This Unit .......................................130
Settings on Editing Control Units ......................................130
Connections for Component Analog Recording ....... 131
Connections for Two-Unit Synchronous Playback .... 132
Connections for Digitally Dubbing Signals in DVCAM
Format
(Optional DSBK-190 Required When Using
i.LINK Interface) ..............................................................
133
Chapter 8
Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
Condensation................................................................ 135
Head Cleaning............................................................... 135
Periodic Maintenance................................................... 136
Troubleshooting............................................................ 137
Error Messages...................................................................139
Alarm Messages .................................................................139
Appendixes
Notes on Use................................................................. 143
Specifications ............................................................... 144
ClipLink
TM
Guide ........................................................... 147
What is ClipLink? ..............................................................147
Example System Configuration and Operation Flow ........148
Data Generated When Shooting.........................................149
Glossary ........................................................................ 152
Index .............................................................................. 155
Chapter 1 Overview
Chapter 1 Overview
7
Chapter1
Overview
Features
The DSR-2000/2000P is a
1
/
4
-inch digital videocassette
recorder using the DVCAM
TM
digital recording format.
It uses a component video system, with separate
luminance and chrominance signals and digital
processing to realize a stable, high image quality.
This unit is equipped with a variety of functions
needed for videocassette recorders and players used in
video editing. By combining two units, you can easily
assemble a cut editing system. It is also equipped with
full-fledged analog and digital interfaces to support
hybrid systems that combine conventional analog
equipment with digital equipment. Furthermore, it
supports the Sony-developed ClipLink
TM
function,
improving operating efficiency when combined with a
Sony EditStation
TM
.
The following are the principal features of the unit.
DVCAM Format
DVCAM is a professional
1
/
4
-inch digital recording
format developed by Sony from the consumer DV
component digital format (4:1:1 for DSR-2000/4:2:0
for DSR-2000P).
High image quality and high stability
The luminance and chrominance signals are encoded
separately, with a
1
/
5
compression, giving a stable high
quality video image.
Since this is a digital system, nth-generation copies
created by repeated dubbing show virtually no loss in
picture quality.
Wide track
The recording track width is 15 µm, 50% wider than
the 10 µm of the DV format. This ensures adequate
reliability for professional use.
PCM digital audio for high sound quality
The PCM encoding method yields a high audio
quality, with wide dynamic range and high signal-to-
noise ratio.
There are two recording modes: two-channel mode
(48-kHz sampling and 16-bit quantization), which
offers sound quality equivalent to the DAT (Digital
Audio Tape) format, or four-channel (32-kHz
sampling and 12-bit quantization).
Playback compatibility with DV and
DVCPRO formats
A DV cassette recorded on a DV format VCR as well
as a DVCPRO(25M) format recorded cassette can be
played back on this unit.
Note
When playing back a tape recorded in DVCPRO
(25M) format, the SDTI and i.LINK outputs (see the
section “Digital interfaces” on the next page) of this
unit are muted. Furthermore, it is not possible to
playback the cue-audio track of the tape.
1-5
DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Location and Function of Parts
Chapter 1 Overview
8
Chapter 1 Overview
Support for three cassette sizes
There are two sizes of DVCAM cassette: standard and
mini. You can use either size with this unit.
The unit also accepts L and M sizes of DVCPRO
cassette.
•The reel mechanism automatically adjusts to the size
of cassette inserted.
•The capacity of a standard cassette is 184 minutes of
recording/playback, and that of a mini cassette is 40
minutes.
Variety of Interfaces
Digital interfaces
The unit can use the following digital interfaces.
• SDTI (QSDI)
1)
This interface allows video, audio and time code
signals in SDTI (QSDI) format to be transferred at
normal speed between this unit and the ES-7
EditStation. When this unit is connected to another
DVCAM VCR, it is possible to copy compressed
signals between the two VCRs.
• SDI
2)
This interface allows the unit to input or output D1
(component) digital video and audio signals.
• AES/EBU
This interface allows the unit to input or output
digital audio signals in AES/EBU format.
• i.LINK (DV)
3)
(Optional DSBK-190 i.LINK/DV
Input/Output Board)
When the unit is fitted with the optional DSBK-190
i.LINK/DV Input/Output Board using i.LINK
technology, it can input and output digital video and
audio signals in DV format.
•SDTI-CP output (Optional DSBK-210 SDTI-CP
Output Board)
This interface allows the unit to provide an output of
I-frame pictures only (50/40/30 Mbps) complying to
MPEG2 4:2:2 Profile @Main Level. You can connect
the unit to an MPEG supporting device equipped with
an SDTI-CP input.
Note
You cannot install both of the DSBK-190 and DSBK-
210 on the unit at a time.
Analog interfaces
A wide range of analog interfaces is provided,
allowing this unit to be connected to various video and
audio devices.
• Analog video: Composite, component and S-video
interfaces are provided.
• Analog audio: There are four input channels and
four output channels. There is also support for
microphone input.
Connection to external control devices
It is possible to connect a PVE-500, RM-450/450CE,
FXE-100/100P/120/120P, BVE-900/910/2000/9000/
9000P/9100/9100P or other editor equipped with an
RS-422A interface, or a UVR-60/60P remote
controller for the built-in digital video processor, and
so forth.
Full Functionality for More
Efficient Editing
This unit has a number of functions which assist in
efficient and precise editing.
With two DSR-2000/2000P units together, you can
carry out automatic or manual editing, using either
assemble or insert editing.
The system also provides a powerful range of
functions for setting and amending edit points,
preview, review, and other aspects of efficient editing.
DMC (dynamic motion control) editing
You can save a varying speed, in the range −1 to +1
times normal speed
4)
, for an editing segment, and
automatically edit with this varying speed.
1) SDTI (QSDI): SDTI (Serial Data Transport Interface) is
the name of a standard interface established as SMPTE
305M.
This unit uses SDTI to transmit DV data, and the input/
output connectors are labled “SDTI(QSDI)”.
In indicator and menu indications, however, the
“SDTI(QSDI)” name is shortened to “SDTI”.
.........................................................................................................................................................................................
2) SDI: Serial Digital Interface is used for transferring video
signals in component digital format (D1).
3) is a trademark of Sony Corporation and indicates that
this product is in agreement with IEEE1394-1995
specifications and their revisions.
4) The positive direction refers to forward movement of the
tape, and the negative direction to reverse movement.
Features
Chapter 1 Overview
Chapter 1 Overview
9
Split editing
In insert editing, this allows the audio IN and OUT
points to be set separately from the video IN and OUT
points.
Preread editing
The audio or video on the tape can be read out using
the preread heads. The signals then can be processed
and rerecorded where they have been.
Cross-fade editing
For audio editing, you can select from cut-in editing,
fade-in/fade-out editing, and cross-fade editing.
Support for ClipLink function
This unit accepts instructions from an EditStation, to
transfer to the EditStation ClipLink log data held in the
cassette memory or index pictures recorded on the
tape. On the EditStation you can use these images and
data to carry out editing operations efficiently.
•Displaying ClipLink log data
•Changing ClipLink log data OK/NG status
•Cuing up to Mark IN and cue points provided by
ClipLink log data
•For cut editing, copying Mark IN data from ClipLink
log data
For an overview of the ClipLink function, see the appendix
“ClipLink Guide” (page 147).
Internal time code generator and reader
An internal timecode generator and reader enables
timecode compliant with SMPTE/EBU format to be
recorded and played back. This allows editing to single
frame precision.
Outputting or inputting timecode (LTC) to or from an
external device is also possible using the TIME CODE
IN/OUT connectors.
The unit is also compatible with VITC.
High-speed search function
You can carry out a picture search while playing back
in color within the range +60 to –60 times normal
speed.
When controlling the unit in shuttle mode from an
editor or remote control unit, you can search at any
speed in the range +60 to –60 times normal speed. In
jog mode a frame by frame search is possible. During
playback in the range +10 to –10 times normal speed,
high-speed audio playback is also possible.
Digital slow motion playback
Using the frame memory function, noiseless slow
motion playback is possible at any speed in the range
+1 to –1 times normal speed.
Digital jog sound function
When searching at speeds in the range +1 to +
1
/
30
or
–
1
/
30
to –1 times normal speed, the digital jog sound
function is enabled. The audio signal is saved in
temporary memory, and replayed according to the
search speed. This allows searching on the sound
track.
Video process control
For analog video output and SDI-format video output,
you can adjust the video output level, chroma signal
output level, setup level (for DSR-2000), black level
(for DSR-2000P), and chroma phase.
1-6 DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Location and Function of Parts
Chapter 1 Overview
10
Chapter 1 Overview
Features
Other Features
Menu operations for functions and
operating settings
To make it easier to use this unit for any particular
purpose, various functions and operating settings are
provided in the menu system.
Superimposing function
Timecode, operating mode, error messages, and other
text information, can be superimposed on the SDI
video signal and analog composite video signal output.
Functions for easy maintenance
•Self-diagnosis and alarm function: This
automatically detects incorrect operations or
connections, operating faults, and so forth, and
displays details of the problem, the cause, and the
action to be taken, in the control panel display
section.
•Digital hours meter: This keeps four cumulative
counts of the powered on time, the drum rotation
time, the tape transport time, and the number of tape
threadings and unthreadings, and displays them in the
control panal display section.
Compatible with wide screen aspect ratio
(16:9)
The unit can record and play back aspect ratio
information. When video accompanied by wide-screen
aspect ratio information is recorded or played back, the
unit can output the video signal also containing the
aspect ratio information.
Rack mountable
Using the optional RMM-130 Rack Mount Kit, you
can mount the unit in an EIA standard 19-inch rack
(height: 4 units).
Options
DSBK-190 i.LINK/DV Input/Output Board
This board enables cut editing between two DSR-
2000/2000P units. It also allows you to connect the
unit to other equipment provided with a Sony DV
connector to carry out editing or dubbing of digital
video and audio signals.
DSBK-200 Control Panel
When connected to the unit, you can operate the unit
remotely from the DSBK-200.
RMM-130 Rack Mount Kit
This kit can be used to mount the unit in an EIA-
standard 19-inch rack.
DSBK-210 SDTI-CP Output Board
This board enables the unit to be connected to an
MPEG supporting device (MSW-2000, MAV-555, and
so on).
Chapter 1 Overview
Chapter 1 Overview
11
System Configuration
The figure below shows example equipment that can
be connected to this unit.
i.LINK
(DSBK-190)
a)
i.LINK
(DSBK-190)
a)
SDI INPUT/OUTPUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO IN/OUT
ANALOG VIDEO I/O
S VIDEO IN/OUT
SDTI(QSDI)
INPUT/OUTPUT
SDTI(QSDI)
INPUT/OUTPUT
DVCAM camcorder DVCAM cassette
DV camcorder DV cassette
DSR-500WS/500WSP
SVO-5800/5800P
Microphone Headphones
DSR-2000/2000P (this unit)
DNW-A75/A75P
DSR-60/60P/80/80P/85/85P
Digital VCR
ES-7/ES-3 Edit Station
Analog Betacam VCR
Video monitor
Audio monitor system
DV camcorder
a) The DSBK-190 is an optional board.
1-7
DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Location and Function of Parts
Chapter 1 Overview
12
Chapter 1 Overview
Location and Function of Parts
There are four control panels as shown in the figure
below.
Connector panel
(See page 28.)
Upper control panel
(See page 13.)
Lower control panel
(See page 16.)
Subsidiary control panel
(See page 25.)
To adjust the position of the lower control
panel
You can fix the lower control panel in any position
between vertical and horizontal for ease of operation.
Handle
Lock knob
Release lever
Raise the panel by holding both ends or
both handles.
When the panel is at the desired angle,
turn both lock knobs to fix in position.
If you raise the panel to the horizontal, it
automatically locks in position.
To lower the panel, press both
release levers.
To fix the panel at an angle where the lock knobs are inaccessible
1 First position the panel at the desired angle, then without tightening the lock knobs, press the release levers
and raise the panel to the horizontal.
2With the panel horizontal, tighten the lock knobs, then press the release levers and return the panel to the
desired position, where it will lock into place.
Chapter 1 Overview
Chapter 1 Overview
13
POWER
INPUT SELECT
SDTI/i.LINK
VIDEO IN
REMOTE
9PIN
i.LINK
CH-1,1/2
CH-2,3/4
MIXING
02
1
0
-1
-2
-12
dB
OVER
dB
-20
-30
-40
-60 1
02
1
0
-1
-2
-12
dB
OVER
dB
-20
-30
-40
-60 2
02
1
0
-1
-2
-12
dB
OVER
dB
-20
-30
-40
-60 3
02
1
0
-1
-2
-12
dB
OVER
dB
-20
-30
-40
-60 4
INPUT V:SDTI
COMPOSITE
ANALOG
AES/EBU
ANALOG
SDTI
SDI SG
SDI SG
AES/EBU
SDI SG
Y-R,B
S VIDEO
i.LINK
PB FS
48k44.1k32k
REC MODE
2CH4CH
VIDEO
AUDIO
CH11/2
CH23/4
INPUT V:SDTI
COMPOSITE
ANALOG
AES/EBU
ANALOG
SDTI
SDI SG
SDI SG
AES/EBU
SDI SG
Y-R,B
S VIDEO
i.LINK
PB FS
48k44.1k32k
REC MODE
2CH4CH
VIDEO
AUDIO
CH11/2
CH23/4
Upper Control Panel
1 POWER switch
2 Audio level meters
3 Cassette compartment
1Input selection/audio mode display section
(see below)
1 POWER switch
Press the “1” side to power the unit on. When the unit
is powered on, the display windows in the upper and
lower control panels light.
To power the unit off, press the “¬”side of the switch.
2 Audio level meters
These show the audio levels of channels 1 to 4
(recording levels in recording mode or E-E mode
1)
and
playback level in playback mode).
There are two modes for audio level indications:
FULL and FINE, selected by the METER FULL/FINE
button on the lower control panel.
1) E-E mode: Abbreviation of “Electric-to-Electric mode”.
In this mode, video and audio signals input to the VCR
are output after passing through internal electric circuits,
.........................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Cassette compartment
Accepts DVCAM, DV and DVCPRO(25)
videocassettes.
For details of usable cassettes, see page 33.
1 Input selection/audio mode display section
1 INPUT display
5 PB FS display 6 REC MODE display
2 INPUT VIDEO display
3 AUDIO CH1, 1/2 display
4 AUDIO CH2, 3/4 display
but not through magnetic conversion circuits such as
heads and tapes. This can be used to check input signals
and for adjusting input signal levels.
2Input selection section
(see page 14)
3Remote control
setting section
(see page 15)
1-8 DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Location and Function of Parts
Chapter 1 Overview
14
Chapter 1 Overview
1 INPUT display
Indicates the input signal selected with the SDTI/
i.LINK button in the input selection section.
V:SDTI: Digital video signal in SDTI(QSDI) format
In this mode, you can select any audio input,
though the video signal is recorded with a delay of
two frames with respect to the audio input.
SDTI: Digital video and audio signals in
SDTI(QSDI) format
i.LINK: Digital video and audio signals in DV
format, using i.LINK technology
2 INPUT VIDEO display
Indicates the input video signal selected with the
VIDEO IN button in the input selection section.
COMPOSITE: Composite video signal
Y-R, B: Y, R−Y and B−Y component video signals
S VIDEO: S-video signal
SDI: SDI video signal
SG: Video test signal
3 AUDIO CH1, 1/2 display
Indicates the input audio signal selected with the CH1,
1/2 button in the input selection section.
ANALOG: Analog audio signal
AES/EBU: Digital audio signal in AES/EBU format
SDI: SDI audio signal
SG: Audio test signal
4 AUDIO CH2, 3/4 display
Indicates the input audio signal selected with the CH2,
3/4 button in the input selection section. The
indications available are the same as for the AUDIO
CH1, 1/2 display described above.
5 PB FS (playback audio sampling frequency)
display
Indicates the sampling frequency (48 kHz, 44.1 kHz or
32 kHz) at which audio is recorded on tape.
6 REC MODE (audio recording mode) display
Indicates the audio recording mode (2CH or 4CH)
selected with extended menu item 818.
2 Input selection section
1 SDTI/i.LINK (SDTI(QSDI) interface/i.LINK
selection) button
Each press of this button cycles through the following
input signal selection options.
•Digital video signal in SDTI(QSDI) format input to
the SDTI(QSDI) INPUT connector
When this is selected, use the CH1, 1/2 button and
CH2, 3/4 button to select the required input audio
signals.
•Digital video and audio signals in SDTI(QSDI)
format input to the SDTI(QSDI) INPUT connector
•Digital video and audio signals in DV format, using
i.LINK technology, input to the i.LINK connector
(available when the optional DSBK-190 i.LINK/DV
Input/Output Board is installed)
In the input selection/audio mode display section, the
INPUT display shows the selection made with this
button.
2 VIDEO IN button
Each press of this button cycles through the following
input video signal selection options.
•Composite video signal input to the VIDEO IN
connectors.
•Component video signals input to the COMPONENT
VIDEO Y/R−Y/B−Y IN connectors
•S-video signal input to the S VIDEO IN connector
•SDI video signal input to the SDI INPUT connector
•Video test signal (selected with extended menu item
710) generated by the internal signal generator
In the input selection/audio mode display section, the
INPUT VIDEO display shows the selection made with
this button.
INPUT SELECT
SDTI/i.LINK
VIDEO IN
CH-1,1/2
CH-2,3/4
MIXING
3 CH1, 1/2 button
4 CH2, 3/4 button
5 MIXING button
1 SDTI/i.LINK button
2 VIDEO IN button
Chapter 1 Overview
Chapter 1 Overview
15
3 CH1, 1/2 (audio channel 1 or 1/2) button
Each press of this button cycles through the following
input audio signal selection options for audio channel 1
(when in 2-channel mode) or for audio channels 1 and
2 (when in 4-channel mode).
•Analog audio signal(s) input to the AUDIO IN CH-1
connector (when in 2-channel mode) or AUDIO IN
CH-1 and CH-2 connectors (when in 4-channel
mode).
•Digital audio signal in AES/EBU format input to the
DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU) CH-1/2 connector
•SDI audio signal input to the SDI INPUT connector
•Audio test signal (selected with extended menu item
808) generated by the internal signal generator
In the input selection/audio mode display section, the
AUDIO CH1, 1/2 display shows the selection made
with this button.
4 CH2, 3/4 (audio channel 2 or 3/4) button
Each press of this button cycles through the input audio
signal selection options for audio channel 2 (when in 2-
channel mode) or for audio channels 3 and 4 (when in
4-channel mode) The input audio signal selection
options corresponding to those for the CH1, 1/2 button
described above are available.
In the input selection/audio mode display section, the
AUDIO CH2, 3/4 display shows the selection made
with this button.
5 MIXING (mixing setting on/off) button
This enables (ON) or disables (OFF) the setting for
audio input mixing made with extended menu item
819.
If the selected signal (except for analog audio) is not
supplied to the appropriate connector, the
corresponding indicator in the input selection/audio
mode display section flashes.
3 Remote control setting section
1 REMOTE button
When remote-controlling this unit from the unit
connected to the REMOTE-IN, REMOTE-OUT or
i.LINK connector, press this button, turning it on.
2 9PIN button
When carrying out remote control between this unit
and the unit connected to the REMOTE-IN or
REMOTE-OUT connector, press this button, turning it
on.
3 i.LINK button
When carrying out remote control between this unit
and the unit connected to the i.LINK connector, press
this button, turning it on.
This button is effective only when the optional DSBK-
190 i.LINK/DV Input/Output Board is installed.
REMOTE
9PIN
i.LINK
2 9PIN button
1 REMOTE button
3 i.LINK button
1-9
DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Location and Function of Parts
Chapter 1 Overview
16
Chapter 1 Overview
Lower Control Panel
FULL/FINE
PHONE LEVEL
CH-1
REC
PB
ASSEMBLE
HEADPHONES
PREVIEW REVIEW
AUTO
DMC EDIT
DELETE
MEMORY
VIDEO INSERT
CH-1 CH-2 CH-3 CH-4 TC
CH-2 CH-3 CH-4
CH-4CH-3CH-2CH-1
L
R
TRIM
PULL FOR VARIABLE
IN OUT
IN OUT
AUDIO
REC
STANDBY
EJECT REW PLAY F FWD STOP
SEARCH VARIABLE
PREROLL EDIT
PLAYER RECORDER
ENTRY SHIFT
LIST MARK PREREAD PB/EE PB MENU SET HOLD COUNTER SEL RESET
CHANNEL
CONDITION
-+
MONITOR SELECT
METER
EDIT
ClipLink
LP
VITC
INHIBIT KEY INHIBIT SERVO
SHUTTLE
JOG
COUNTER
HOURS MINUTES SECONDS FRAMES
REPEAT
NOT
EDITABLE
REC
U-BIT TC
1 METER FULL/FINE button
2 REC controls
3 PB controls
4 MONITOR SELECT buttons
5 HEADPHONES jack and PHONE LEVEL control
1Monitor/menu/display setting
section
(see page 17)
2 Display section
(see page 18)
3 Edit mode setting section
(see page 20)
4 Editing control section
(see page 21)
5Tape transport control
section
(see page 22)
6Search control section
(see page 23)
1 METER FULL/FINE button
This switches the display mode of the audio level
meters in the upper control panel as follows:
FULL: In this mode the segment of the display
corresponding to the current audio level and all
lower segments light. A marker indicating the
reference level (set with extended menu item 811)
also appears.
FINE: The display is enlarged, with a step of 0.25 dB
with respect to the reference level of 0 dB.
In this mode only the segment of the display
corresponding to the current audio level lights. If
the audio level exceeds the maximum display
level, the top segment flashes, and if the audio
level goes below the minimum display level, the
bottom segment flashes.
2 REC (recording) controls
These individually adjust the recording levels on
channels 1 to 4.
To set the recording level, put the unit in E-E mode,
pull out the control knobs and adjust the level while
watching the level meters.
When the control knobs are pushed in, the recording
levels return to the preset levels and cannot be
adjusted.
For details of selecting the E-E mode, see the description of
the REC button in the tape transport control section (see
page 22) and the PB/EE button in the monitor/menu/display
setting section (see page 17).
6 PLAYER button and RECORDER button
Chapter 1 Overview
Chapter 1 Overview
17
3 PB (playback) controls
These adjust individually the playback levels on
channels 1 to 4.
During playback, pull out the control knobs and adjust
the level while watching the level meters.
When the control knobs are pushed in, the playback
levels return to the preset levels, and cannot be
adjusted.
4 MONITOR SELECT buttons
There are four buttons CH-1 to CH-4 (channels 1 to 4)
in each of the upper (L) and lower (R) rows. Use these
buttons to select the channels for audio output via the
HEADPHONES connector on the lower control panel
and the MONITOR AUDIO connector on the
connector panel.
The HEADPHONES connector outputs stereo sound
(L and R) and the MONITOR AUDIO connector
outputs monaural sound (L and R mixed).
You can select two or more channels in either row by
pressing the buttons for the desired channels
simultaneously. The sounds of the channels selected in
the row are mixed.
In 2-channel audio recording mode (selected with
extended menu item 818), it is possible to use the
AUDIO OUT CH-3 and AUDIO OUT CH-4
connectors for monitor audio output for channels 1 and
2, respectively (use extended menu item 820).
5 HEADPHONES jack and PHONE LEVEL
control
Connect stereo headphones with an impedance of 8
ohms to monitor the sound during recording, playback
and editing.
The PHONE LEVEL control knob adjusts the volume.
6 PLAYER button and RECORDER button
When you carry out editing using a VCR connected to
the REMOTE-IN or REMOTE-OUT connector as the
player and this unit as the recorder, these buttons select
which VCR the editing control buttons and tape
transport buttons on this unit control.
PLAYER: The editing control buttons and tape
transport buttons on this unit control the external
player VCR.
RECORDER: The editing control buttons and tape
transport buttons on this unit control the recorder
(this unit).
When this unit is being used in standalone mode,
neither button functions.
1 Monitor/menu/display setting section
PREREAD PB/EE PB MENU SET HOLD COUNTER SEL RESET
1 PREREAD button
2 MENU button
3 SET button
4 RESET button
5 PB/EE button
6 PB button
7 HOLD button
8 COUNTER SEL button
1 PREREAD button
When this is lit, a preread (read-before-write) is carried
out in insert editing.
For details of preread editing, see the section “Preread
Editing” (page 87).
2 MENU button
Use this button for setup menu operations.
Pressing this button, turning it on, shows setup menus
in the time counter display (see page 18).
Press the button once more to exit from the menu
display.
For details of setup menu operations, see Chapter 6 “Setup
Menu” (page 107).
3 SET button
Use this button for setting time code and user bit
values and in setup menu operations.
For details of setting time code and user bit values see
Chapter 2 “Setting/Displaying Time Data and Text
Information” (page 35).
1-10 DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Location and Function of Parts
Chapter 1 Overview
18
Chapter 1 Overview
4 RESET button
To reset a time counter value (COUNTER) shown in
the time counter display, press this button.
Resetting the COUNTER value erases all edit points.
This button is also used for setting time code and user
bit values and in setup menu operations.
5 PB/EE (playback/E-E) button
To select E-E mode input signals for the video/audio
signals output during fast forward, rewind, still, and
standby, press this button, turning it on.
Either one of this button and the PB button is always
lit.
6 PB (playback) button
To select playback signals for the video/audio signals
output during fast forward, rewind, still, and standby,
press this button, turning it on.
Either one of this button and the PB/EE button is
always lit.
7 HOLD button
To stop updating of the time code or user bit value in
the time counter display (that is, to hold the display),
press this button, turning it on. To set a time code or
user bit value, first press this button to hold the value.
8 COUNTER SEL (select) button
This switches the value shown in the time counter
display in the following sequence: COUNTER, TC, U-
BIT.
Time counter display selection
a) The selection of TC or VITC is made by the TC SELECT
switch on the subsidiary control panel.
Selection Value displayed
COUNTER Tape running time (hours, minutes,
seconds, frames)
TC Playback time code read by the internal
time code reader or time code being
recorded.
a)
U-BIT User bit value inserted in the playback time
code or time code being recorded.
a)
2 Display section
1 Recording/playback format indicators
2 ClipLink indicator
3 VITC indicator
4 Time data type indicators 5 Time counter display
6 REC INHIBIT indicator
7 Cassette memory indicator
8 KEY INHIBIT indicator
9 SERVO indicator
!º CHANNEL CONDITION indicator
!¡Tape end alarm indicator
!™ SHUTTLE/JOG indicators
!£ NOT EDITABLE indicator
Chapter 1 Overview
Chapter 1 Overview
19
1 Recording/playback format indicators
DVCAM: This lights when a tape recorded in
DVCAM format is played back.
DV: This lights when a tape recorded in consumer
DV format is played back.
LP: This lights when a tape recorded in LP mode is
played back.
When a tape recorded in DVCPRO (25) format or any
other format than those mentioned above is played
back, none of the above indicators lights.
2 ClipLink indicator
Lights when a cassette is loaded on which ClipLink
log data is stored in the cassette memory.
For details of ClipLink log data, see the appendix “ClipLink
Guide” (page 147).
3 VITC indicator
Regardless of the data shown in the time counter
display, this indicator lights when VITC in the signal
played back or in the input video signal (in E-E mode)
is being read.
4 Time data type indicators
One of the three indicators (COUNTER, U-BIT, and
TC) lights to indicate the type of time data currently
shown in the time counter display.
COUNTER: Count value of the time counter
U-BIT: User bit data
TC: SMPTE time code (DSR-2000) or EBU time
code (DSR-2000P)
5 Time counter display
Indicates the count value of the time counter, time
code, or user bit data depending on the settings of the
COUNTER SEL button in the monitor/menu/display
setting section and the TC SELECT switch on the
subsidiary control panel.
Also used to display edit point values, edit duration
values, error messages and setup menu data.
6 REC (recording) INHIBIT indicator
This indicator is on or off according to the
combination of the setting of the REC INHIBIT switch
on the subsidiary control panel and the REC/SAVE
switch on the loaded cassette, as shown in the
following table. When this indicator is on, recording
on tape is prohibited.
REC INHIBIT indicator indications
a) It is possible to make a setting (extended menu item 107)
so that in this case the indicator flashes.
7 Cassette memory indicator
Lights when a cassette provided with a memory chip
(“cassette memory”) is loaded.
8 KEY INHIBIT indicator
This indicator lights when the KEY INHIBIT switch
on the subsidiary control panel is set to ON.
The buttons/switches to be operable even when this
indicator is on can be determined using extended menu
item 118.
9 SERVO indicator
When the drum servo and capstan servo are locked
1)
,
this indicator lights.
!º CHANNEL CONDITION indicator
This three-color indicator shows the state of the
playback signal.
Green: The state of the playback signal is good.
Yellow: The playback signal is somewhat
deteriorated, but playback is possible.
Red: The playback signal is deteriorated.
When the red indicator remains on, head cleaning
or an internal inspection is necessary.
REC INHIBIT
switch position State of the REC/
SAVE switch on
the cassette
REC INHIBIT
indicator state
ON SAVE/REC Lit
OFF SAVE Lit
a)
REC Off
1) Servo lock: This refers to the synchronization of the
phase of the drum rotation and the reference signal for the
tape transport position, so that the video heads can trace
the same pattern on the tape for playback or recording.
.........................................................................................................................................................................................
1-11
DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Location and Function of Parts
Chapter 1 Overview
20
Chapter 1 Overview
ASSEMBLE
VIDEO INSERT
CH-1 CH-2 CH-3 CH-4 TC
!¡ Tape end alarm indicator
Starts flashing when the remaining capacity of the tape
is for about 2 minutes.
!™ SHUTTLE/JOG indicators
When searching in shuttle or variable mode using the
search dial, the SHUTTLE indicator lights, and when
searching in jog mode using the search dial, the JOG
indicator lights. When the search dial is turned
clockwise causing playback to take place in the
forward direction, the · indicator lights. When the
search dial is turned counterclockwise causing
playback to take place in the reverse direction, the ª
indicator lights. When the tape is stopped, the π
indicator lights.
For more information about the search dial, see page 23.
!£ NOT EDITABLE indicator
Lights during playback of a tape that contains a
recording in other than the DVCAM format. When
this indicator is lit, the recordings contained in the tape
can be used as source material for editing, but editing
operations such as insert editing and assemble editing
cannot be performed.
This indicator also lights when the audio recording
mode selected on this unit does not coincides with that
of the loaded tape.
3 Edit mode setting section
1 INSERT buttons
Use these buttons to select the signals for insert
editing
1)
.
VIDEO: To select the video signal, press this button,
turning it on.
CH-1 to CH-4 (channel 1 to channel 4): To select
audio channels 1 to 4, press these buttons, turning
them on. You can select any number of the
channels.
TC: To select time code, press this button, turning it
on.
2 ASSEMBLE button
Press this button, turning it on, to carry out assemble
editing
2)
.
All signals (video signals, audio signals, time code
signals, and so forth) are recorded together.
1 INSERT buttons
2 ASSEMBLE button
1) Insert editing: Editing in which new video/audio is added
into the middle of existing recorded video/audio.
.........................................................................................................................................................................................
2) Assemble editing: Editing in which new video/audio is
added in sequence to the end of existing recorded video/
audio.
Chapter 1 Overview
Chapter 1 Overview
21
4 Editing control section
PREVIEW REVIEW
AUTO
DMC EDIT
DELETE
MEMORY
TRIM
IN OUT
IN OUT
AUDIO
ENTRY SHIFT
LIST MARK
-+
EDIT
6 TRIM buttons
7 AUDIO IN button and AUDIO OUT button
8 ENTRY/SHIFT button
9 IN button and OUT button
!º REVIEW button
2 MEMORY indicator
1 DELETE button
3 DMC EDIT button
4 PREVIEW button
5 AUTO EDIT button
1 DELETE button
This deletes an existing edit point.
Hold down this button and press the IN, OUT, AUDIO
IN, or AUDIO OUT button which is lit, indicating an
existing edit point. The button either goes off or
flashes and the corresponding edit point is deleted.
When the button flashes, it is necessary to set the
deleted edit point again.
2 MEMORY indicator
When memorizing the playback speed using the DMC
EDIT button, this indicator flashes as the playback
speed is captured to memory, and lights continuously
once the speed is captured.
3 DMC EDIT button
Use this button to memorize the playback speed varied
between ±1 times normal speed and carry out
automatic playback or automatic editing using the
memorized playback speed.
For information about how to carry out DMC playback or
DMC editing using this button, see the section “Dynamic
Motion Control (DMC) Playback” (page 55) and “DMC
Editing” (page 84), respectively.
4 PREVIEW button
After setting edit points, to preview the editing results
before carrying out the edit, press this button, turning it
on.
If the IN point is not set, the preview is carried out
with the point where you pressed this button as the IN
point.
During the preview the button is lit, and when the
preview ends it flashes.
5 AUTO (automatic) EDIT button
After setting edit points, to carry out automatic editing
(recording), press this button, turning it on.
If the IN point is not set, the automatic editing is
carried out with the point where you pressed this
button as the IN point.
If you pressed the PREVIEW button to carry out a
preview, when the preview ends this button flashes.
6 TRIM buttons
Use these buttons to trim an edit point to single-frame
precision.
Hold down the IN, OUT, AUDIO IN, or AUDIO OUT
button, and press one of these buttons. The MARK/+
button advances the corresponding edit point by one
frame, and the LIST/− button sets it back by one
frame.
During playback, pressing one of these buttons while
holding down the PLAY button adjusts the tape speed
by +8% or −8%, correspondingly. (Capstan override
function)
These buttons are also used for ClipLink operations
and setup menu operations.
For more information about ClipLink operations and setup
menu operations, see Chapter 5 “ClipLink Operation”
(page 97) and Chapter 6 “Setup Menu” (page 107),
respectively.
7 AUDIO IN button and AUDIO OUT button
In insert editing, to set an audio IN point or audio OUT
point separate from the corresponding video edit point,
hold down the AUDIO IN button or AUDIO OUT
button, and press the ENTRY/SHIFT button.
After you have made the setting, pressing the AUDIO
IN button or AUDIO OUT button displays the audio
IN point or audio OUT point set on the time counter
display.
1-12 DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Location and Function of Parts
Chapter 1 Overview
22
Chapter 1 Overview
8 ENTRY/SHIFT button
Use this button for setting edit points, carrying out
ClipLink operations, and so forth.
•To set a video IN point or OUT point: Hold down the
IN button or OUT button, and press this button.
•To set an audio IN point or OUT point: Hold down
the AUDIO IN button or AUDIO OUT button, and
press this button.
For more information about ClipLink operation, see
Chapter 5 “ClipLink Operation” (page 97).
9 IN button and OUT button
To set a video IN point or OUT point, hold down the
IN button or OUT button, and press the ENTRY/
SHIFT button.
After you have made the setting, pressing the IN
button or OUT button displays the IN point or OUT
point on the time counter display.
!º REVIEW button
Use this button to carry out a review of the editing
results after carrying out automatic editing.
5 Tape transport control section
REC
STANDBY
EJECT REW PLAY F FWD STOP
PREROLL EDIT
1 STANDBY button
2 PREROLL button
3 REC button
4 EDIT button
5 STOP button
6 EJECT button
7 REW button
8 PLAY button
9 F FWD button
1 STANDBY button
When a cassette is inserted and this button is off, to put
the VCR in standby mode, press the button, turning it
on.
In standby mode, the drum is rotating and the tape is in
contact with the drum. As a result, recording or
playback can start immediately.
To end standby mode, press the STANDBY button,
turning it off.
If a certain period of time (value can be varied using
extended menu item 501) elapse in standby mode, the
unit automatically switches out of standby mode to
protect the tape.
2 PREROLL button
Press this button to cue up to the preroll point (before
the IN point by the time set as the preroll time) on the
tape. You can change or select the preroll time and the
state of the unit at the end of preroll (stop mode
1)
or
still playback mode) using basic menu item 001 and
extended menu item 401.
Cuing up to edit points
Hold down the IN, OUT, AUDIO IN, or AUDIO OUT
button while pressing this button to cue up to the
corresponding edit point.
3 REC (record) button
To start recording, press this button together with the
PLAY button, turning it on.
Monitoring in E-E mode
When the unit is in stop mode, pressing this button
lights it, and you can monitor the video and audio in E-
E mode. To return to the original state, press the STOP
button.
During playback, search, fast forward, or rewind,
holding down this button allows you to monitor the
video and audio in E-E mode. In this case the button
does not light.
1) Stop mode: the state in which the device currently the
subject of operation is stopped, and the STOP button is
lit.
.........................................................................................................................................................................................
Chapter 1 Overview
Chapter 1 Overview
23
4 EDIT button
To carry out manual editing, press this button
simultaneously with the PLAY button.
Monitoring in E-E mode
When the unit is in stop mode, pressing this button
lights it, and you can monitor the input signal selected
with the ASSEMBLE button or INSERT buttons in E-
E mode. To return to the original state, press the STOP
button. During playback, search, fast forward, or
rewind, holding down this button allows you to
monitor the video in E-E mode.
5 STOP button
To stop recording or playback, press this button,
turning it on.
When you stop playback, the unit switches either to
still playback or to E-E mode according to setup menu
settings, and the settings of the PB/EE button and PB
button.
Fault display function
This button flashes when there is no external reference
signal input or the input external reference signal is not
synchronized to the input video signal. (See the
description of extended menu item 105.)
6 EJECT button
To eject the cassette, press this button. While the
cassette is being ejected, this button lights.
7 REW (rewind) button
To rewind the tape, press this button, turning it on.
8 PLAY button
To start playback, press this button, turning it on.
To operate in capstan override mode
Hold down this button, and turn the search dial.
For details of capstan override mode, see “3Search dial”
on this page.
9 F FWD (fast forward) button
To fast forward the tape, press this button, turning it
on.
6 Search control section
1 SEARCH button
To use the search dial for playback in shuttle or jog
mode, press this button, turning it on. Pressing the dial
toggles between shuttle and jog modes. In shuttle
mode, the SHUTTLE indicator in the display section
lights, and in jog mode, the JOG indicator in the
display section lights.
2 VARIABLE button
To use the search dial for playback in variable speed
mode, press this button, turning it on. Pressing the dial
toggles between variable speed mode and jog mode.
3 Search dial
Turn this to carry out playback in the modes shown in
the following table. Turning the dial clockwise lights
the · indicator in the display section and plays back
in the forward direction. Turning the dial
counterclockwise lights the ª indicator in the display
section and plays back in the reverse direction. When
the tape is stopped, the π indicator in the display
section lights.
Pressing this dial toggles between shuttle mode and
jog mode (or between variable mode and jog mode).
When playing back in shuttle or variable mode, the
SHUTTLE indicator in the display section lights, and
when playing back in jog mode, the JOG indicator
lights.
You can carry out noiseless playback in the range of ±
1 times normal speed.
SEARCH VARIABLE
1 SEARCH button
2 VARIABLE button
3 Search dial
1-13
DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Location and Function of Parts
Chapter 1 Overview
24
Chapter 1 Overview
Playback modes using the search dial
Changing the setting of extended menu item 101 enables you
to select shuttle or jog mode just by turning the search dial
without using the SEARCH or VARIABLE button.
Playback
mode Operations and functions
Shuttle Press the SHUTTLE button or the search dial
so that the SHUTTLE indicator in the display
section lights, then turn the search dial.
Playback is carried out at a speed determined
by the position of the search dial. The
maximum shuttle mode playback speed can be
changed using extended menu item 102.
Jog Press the SHUTTLE button or the search dial
so that the JOG indicator in the display section
lights, then turn the search dial. Playback is
carried out at a speed determined by the speed
of rotation of the search dial. The playback
speed range is ±1 times normal speed. The
search dial has no detents.
Variable
speed Press the VARIABLE button, turning it on, then
turn the search dial. You can control the
playback speed finely (61 steps) in the range of
–1 to +2 times normal speed.
The search dial has detents at the still position
and at the normal speed position.
The variable mode playback speed range can
be changed using extended menu item 119.
Noiseless playback is possible in the range of
±1 times normal speed.
Capstan
override Hold down the PLAY button and turn the
search dial to adjust the playback speed in the
range of ±15%. Use this for phase adjustment
between this unit and an external device
connected to this unit.
Chapter 1 Overview
Chapter 1 Overview
25
Subsidiary Control Panel
OFF ON
CHARACTER
EXT INT
CONTROL PANEL
TC GENERATOR
NDF DF
ON OFF
REC INHIBIT
VITC
OFF ON
ON OFF
KEY INHIBIT PROCESS
CONTROL
VIDEO
TC SELECT
MENU
PRESET
MANUAL
VITC TC
REC FREE
EXT INT
REMOTE LOCAL
RUN RUN
REGEN PRESET
CHROMA
PRESET
MANUAL
SET UP
PRESET
MANUAL
VIDEO
PRESET
MANUAL
CHROMA
PRESET
MANUAL
SET UP
PRESET
MANUAL
Y/C DELAY
PRESET
MANUAL
CHROMA PHASE
(HUE)
PRESET
MANUAL
SYNC
SYSTEM PHASE
SC
1 CHARACTER switch
2 CONTROL PANEL switch
3 REC INHIBIT switch
4 KEY INHIBIT switch
5 PROCESS CONTROL switch
6 INT/EXT−PRESET/REGEN switch
7 FREE RUN/REC RUN switch
8 DF/NDF switch (DSR-2000 only)
9 VITC switch
!º TC SELECT switch !¡ VIDEO knob and PRESET/MANUAL switch
!£ CHROMA knob and PRESET/MANUAL switch
!™ SET UP (DSR-2000)/BLACK LEVEL (DSR-2000P)
knob and PRESET/MANUAL switch !¢ Y/C DELAY knob and PRESET/MANUAL switch
!∞ CHROMA PHASE (HUE) (DSR-2000)/
CHROMA PHASE (DSR-2000P) knob and
PRESET/MANUAL switch
!§ SYNC knob
!¶ SC knob
1 CHARACTER switch
Select whether or not to superimpose text information
such as time code, menu settings, and alarm messages
on the video signal output from the SDI OUTPUT 3
(SUPER) connector and VIDEO OUT 3 (SUPER)
connector.
ON: Superimposed text
OFF: No superimposed text
The factory default setting is ON.
2 CONTROL PANEL switch
Select the state of the control panel when this unit is
operated.
INT: When operating this unit by its own control
panel.
EXT: When operating this unit remotely by the
optional DSBK-200 Control Panel connected to
the CONTROL PANEL connector.
The factory default setting is INT.
1-14 DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Location and Function of Parts
Chapter 1 Overview
26
Chapter 1 Overview
3 REC (record) INHIBIT switch
When this switch is set to ON, the REC INHIBIT
indicator in the display section lights, and recording on
tape is no longer possible. (See the description of
extended menu item 107.)
4 KEY INHIBIT switch
When this switch is set to ON, the KEY INHIBIT
indicator in the display section lights, and the buttons
in the upper control panel and lower control panel
specified by the setting of extended menu item 118 are
disabled.
5 PROCESS CONTROL switch
This selects the method of control of the internal
digital video processor.
REMOTE: Select this position to use an optional
UVR-60/60P or BVR-50/50P Remote Control
Unit for remote control of the internal digital
video processor.
MENU: Select this position to use the setup menu to
change the settings for the internal digital video
processor.
LOCAL: Select this position to use the subsidiary
control panel to change the settings for the internal
digital video processor.
6 INT/EXT–PRESET/REGEN (internal/external−
preset/regenerated) switch
This switch is used to make selections relating to the
time code and the internal time code generator.
(In this Operating Instructions, this switch may also be
called simply as the INT/EXT switch or PRESET/
REGEN switch depending on the contents of the
description in which the switch is referred to.)
Selection of internal/external time code
Selection relating to the internal time code generator
7 FREE RUN/REC RUN switch
This switch selects the time code run mode of the
internal time code generator.
FREE RUN: Regardless of the operating mode of
this unit, the time code value advances
continuously while the power is on.
REC RUN: The time code value advances only
during recording. When this mode is selected, set
the INT/EXT−PRESET/REGEN switch to INT−
PRESET.
8 DF/NDF (drop-frame/non-drop-frame) switch
(for the DSR-2000 only)
This switch selects the mode of advancing the time
code generator and time counter.
DF: Drop-frame mode
NDF: Non-drop-frame mode
Note
When the PRESET/REGEN switch is set to REGEN,
since the time code generator is synchronized to the
playback time code, this switch has no effect.
9 VITC switch
To record the time code produced by the internal time
code generator as a VITC, set this switch to ON.
When this switch is set to OFF, internally generated
time code is not recorded as VITC, but VITC present
in the input video signal is recorded unchanged.
!º TC (time code) SELECT switch
This switch selects the time code, TC or VITC, shown
in the time counter display.
Setting Operation of the internal time code generator
PRESET The initial value of the time code produced by
the internal time code generator can be preset
by a control panel operation or by remote control
from a device connected to the REMOTE-IN or
REMOTE-OUT connector.
REGEN The internal time code reader is synchronized to
the playback time code read by the internal time
code reader.
Setting Time code used
INT The time code produced by the internal time
code generator
By setting the switch to INT–REGEN or INT–
PRESET, you can select “PRESET” or “REGEN”
for the internal time code generator
(see the
next table)
.
EXT The external time code selected as follows.
•When the TC SELECT switch is set to TC
The external time code input to the TIME
CODE IN connector
•When the TC SELECT switch is set to VITC
The VITC time code included in the input
video signal
In this case, for the internal time code generator,
“REGEN” is always selected
(see the next
table)
.
Chapter 1 Overview
Chapter 1 Overview
27
!¡ VIDEO knob and PRESET/MANUAL switch
The switch makes the selection described below.
When it is set to MANUAL, you can use the knob to
adjust the video signal output level.
PRESET: Regardless of the position of the knob, the
video signal output level is set to the reference
value.
MANUAL: You can adjust the video signal output
level in the range ±3 dB.
You can change the adjustment range using
extended menu item 714.
!™ SET UP (DSR-2000)/BLACK LEVEL (DSR-
2000P) knob and PRESET/MANUAL switch
The switch makes the selection described below.
When it is set to MANUAL, you can use the knob to
adjust the (black) setup level (DSR-2000) or black
level (DSR-2000P).
PRESET: Regardless of the position of the knob, the
setup level (DSR-2000) or black level (DSR-
2000P) is set to the reference value.
MANUAL: You can adjust the setup level (DSR-
2000) in the range ±30 IRE
1)
, or the black level
(DSR-2000P) in the range ±210 mV.
!£ CHROMA (chrominance) knob and PRESET/
MANUAL switch
The switch makes the selection described below.
When it is set to MANUAL, you can use the knob to
adjust the chrominance signal output level.
PRESET: Regardless of the position of the knob, the
chrominance signal output level is set to the
reference value.
MANUAL: You can adjust the chrominance signal
output level in the range ±3 dB.
You can change the adjustment range using
extended menu item 714.
1) IRE: A unit for representing a video level laid down by
the IRE (Institute of Radio Engineers). The IRE is now
the IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronic
Engineers).
.........................................................................................................................................................................................
!¢ Y/C DELAY knob and PRESET/MANUAL
switch
The switch makes the selection described below.
When it is set to MANUAL, you can use the knob to
adjust the Y/C delay.
PRESET: Regardless of the position of the knob, the
Y/C delay is set to the reference value.
MANUAL: You can adjust the Y/C delay in the
range ±100 ns.
!∞ CHROMA PHASE (HUE) (DSR-2000)/
CHROMA PHASE (DSR-2000P) knob and
PRESET/MANUAL switch
The switch makes the selection described below.
When it is set to MANUAL, you can use the knob to
adjust the hue/chrominance phase (the phase
difference from a burst signal).
PRESET: Regardless of the position of the knob, the
hue/chrominance phase is set to the reference
value.
MANUAL: You can adjust the hue/chrominance
phase in the range ±30°.
!§ SYNC knob
This adjusts the output signal sync phase with respect
to the input reference signal to this unit in the range ±3
µs.
Use this adjustment when the output phase of this unit
is not accurately aligned with the reference signal
phase, or when carrying out special effects editing with
this unit and other VCRs connected to a switcher or
other equipment.
!¶ SC (subcarrier) knob
This adjusts the output signal subcarrier phase with
respect to the input reference signal to this unit in the
range ±180°.
For editing with composite signals, use this adjustment
when the output phase of this unit with respect to the
phase of the reference signal is not accurately aligned
with the subcarrier phase.
1-15
DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Location and Function of Parts
Chapter 1 Overview
28
Chapter 1 Overview
Connector Panel
REF.VIDEO
ANALOG VIDEO I/O DIGITAL AUDIO I/O(AES/EBU) SDTI(QSDI)
SDI INPUT SDI OUTPUT
i.LINK
S VIDEO
TIME CODE
MONITOR AUDIO
AUDIO IN LEVEL
AUDIO OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
(SUPER)
(SUPER)
IN
IN IN
INPUT OUTPUT
IN
1
123
2
3
IN
REMOTE-OUT
REMOTE-IN
VIDEO CONTROL
~AC IN
CONTROL PANEL
CH-1 CH-2 CH-3 CH-4
CH-1
0dBm
HIGHLOW
OFF
-6dBm +4dBm
CH-2 CH-3 CH-4
OFF
ON
75Ω
VIDEO IN
VIDEO OUT COMPONENT VIDEO
CH-1/2
CH-1/2
CH-3/4
CH-3/4
OFF
ON
75Ω
Y
R-Y
B-Y
0dBm
-6dBm +4dBm
0dBm
-6dBm +4dBm
0dBm
-6dBm +4dBm
ON
-600
Ω
LEVEL
HIGHLOW
OFF
ON
-600
Ω
LEVEL
HIGHLOW
OFF
ON
-600
Ω
LEVEL
HIGHLOW
OFF
ON
-600
Ω
1 AC IN
connector 2 Ground terminal
1 Analog video input/output section
(see page 29)
2 Digital input/output section
(see page 30)
3External device connectors
(see page 31)
4 Analog audio input/output section
(see page 31)
This figure shows the connector panel fitted with the optional DSBK-190 i.LINK/DV Input/Output Board.
1 AC IN connector
Use the optional power cord to connect this to an AC
outlet.
2 Ground terminal
Connect this to ground.
Chapter 1 Overview
Chapter 1 Overview
29
1 Analog video input/output section
REF.VIDEO
ANALOG VIDEO I/O
S VIDEO
TIME CODE
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
(SUPER)
IN
IN
IN
1
2
3
IN
OFF
ON
75Ω
VIDEO IN
VIDEO OUT COMPONENT VIDEO
OFF
ON
75Ω
Y
R-Y
B-Y
5S VIDEO IN connector
1REF. VIDEO IN connectors
and 75Ω termination switch
2REF. VIDEO OUT connector
3TIME CODE IN connector
4TIME CODE OUT connector
6S VIDEO OUT connector
7VIDEO IN connectors and 75Ω termination
switch
8COMPONENT VIDEO Y/R−Y/B−Y IN
connectors
9COMPONENT VIDEO Y/R−Y/
B−Y OUT connectors
!º VIDEO OUT 1, 2, and 3 (SUPER) connectors
1 REF. (reference) VIDEO IN connectors (BNC
type) and 75Ω termination switch
Input a reference video signal to one of these
connectors. The two connectors can be used for a loop-
through connection. When making a loop-through
connection, set the termination switch to OFF, and
when not, set the switch to ON.
2 REF. (reference) VIDEO OUT connector (BNC
type)
This connector outputs a reference video signal, except
when i.LINK is selected in the input selection section
(see page 14).
3 TIME CODE IN connector (BNC type)
Input SMPTE time code (DSR-2000) or EBU time
code (DSR-2000P) externally generated to this
connector.
4 TIME CODE OUT connector (BNC type)
This connector outputs a time code according to the
operating state of the unit, as follows:
During playback: the playback time code
During recording: the time code generated by the
internal time code generator or the time code input
to the TIME CODE IN connector.
For more information about the time code output during
recording, see extended setup menu item 611.
5 S VIDEO IN connector (4-pin)
Input an S-video signal with separated Y (luminance)
and C (chroma: 3.58 MHz for DSR-2000 or 4.43 MHz
for DSR-2000P) components to this connector.
6 S VIDEO OUT connector (4-pin)
This connector outputs an S-video signal with
separated Y (luminance) and C (chroma: 3.58 MHz for
DSR-2000 or 4.43 MHz for DSR-2000P) components.
7 VIDEO IN connectors (BNC type) and 75Ω
termination switch
Input an analog composite video signal to one of these
connectors. The two connectors can be used for a loop-
through connection. When making a loop-through
connection, set the 75Ω termination switch to OFF and
when not, set the switch to ON.
1-16 DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Location and Function of Parts
Chapter 1 Overview
30
Chapter 1 Overview
8 COMPONENT VIDEO Y/R–Y/B–Y IN
connectors (BNC type)
Input analog component video signals (Y/R−Y/B−Y)
to these connectors.
9 COMPONENT VIDEO Y/R–Y/B–Y OUT
connectors (BNC type)
These connectors output analog component video
signals (Y/R−Y/B−Y).
!º VIDEO OUT 1, 2, and 3 (SUPER) connectors
(BNC type)
These connectors output analog composite video
signals.
When the CHARACTER switch on the subsidiary
control panel is set to ON, connector 3 (SUPER)
outputs a signal with superimposed text information.
2 Digital input/output section
DIGITAL AUDIO I/O(AES/EBU) SDTI(QSDI)
SDI INPUT SDI OUTPUT
i.LINK
OUT
(SUPER)
IN
INPUT OUTPUT
123
CH-1/2
CH-1/2
CH-3/4
CH-3/4
1DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU) IN connectors
2SDTI(QSDI) INPUT connector
3SDTI(QSDI) OUTPUT connector
4i.LINK connector (optional DSBK-190
i.LINK/DV Input/Output Board)
5DIGITAL AUDIO
(AES/EBU) OUT connectors
6SDI INPUT connectors 7SDI OUTPUT 1, 2, and 3 (SUPER)
connectors
1 DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU) IN connectors
(BNC type)
Input digital audio signals in AES/EBU format to these
connectors.
The left-hand connector (CH-1/2) is for audio channels
1 and 2, and the right-hand connector (CH-3/4) is for
audio channels 3 and 4.
2 SDTI (QSDI) (Serial Data Transport Interface
(QSDI)) INPUT connector (BNC type)
Input digital video and audio signals in SDTI (QSDI)
format to this connector.
3 SDTI (QSDI) (Serial Data Transport Interface
(QSDI)) OUTPUT connector (BNC type)
This connector outputs digital video and audio signals
in SDTI (QSDI) format.
Note
If you monitor the output signal from this connector on
another device in E-E mode while making a search at
speeds in the range +1 to +
1
/
30
or –
1
/
30
to –1 times
normal speed, the signal may sound differently than it
does on this unit.
4 i.LINK connector (6-pin IEEE-1394)(optional
DSBK-190 i.LINK/DV Input/Output Board)
This connector is available when the optional DSBK-
190 i.LINK/DV Input/Output Board is fitted.
This connector inputs and outputs digital video and
audio signals in DV format.
Note
If you monitor the output signal from this connector on
another device in E-E mode while making a search at
speeds in the range +1 to +
1
/
30
or –
1
/
30
to –1 times
normal speed, the signal may sound differently than it
does on this unit.
Chapter 1 Overview
Chapter 1 Overview
31
5 DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU) OUT connectors
(BNC type)
These connectors output digital audio signals in AES/
EBU format.
The left-hand connector (CH-1/2) is for audio channels
1 and 2, and the right-hand connector (CH-3/4) is for
audio channels 3 and 4.
Digital audio signals are always output from this unit
at a sampling frequency of 48 kHz.
6 SDI (Serial Digital Interface) INPUT connectors
(BNC type)
Input digital video and audio signals in SDI (D1)
format to the left-hand connector. The right-hand
connector is for an active-through connection.
7 SDI (Serial Digital Interface) OUTPUT 1, 2 and
3 (SUPER) connectors (BNC type)
These connectors output digital video and audio
signals in SDI (D1) format.
When the CHARACTER switch on the subsidiary
control panel is set to ON, connector 3 (SUPER)
outputs a signal with superimposed text information.
Digital audio signals are always output from this unit
at a sampling frequency of 48 kHz.
3 External device connectors
1 VIDEO CONTROL connector (D-sub 15-pin)
For remote control of the internal digital video
processor, connect an optional remote control unit
such as the UVR-60/60P or BVR-50/50P to this
connector.
Note
Always power off this unit before connecting the
remote control unit.
1 VIDEO CONTROL connector
REMOTE-OUT
REMOTE-IN
VIDEO CONTROL
CONTROL PANEL
2 CONTROL PANEL connector
3 REMOTE-IN connector
4 REMOTE-OUT connector
2 CONTROL PANEL connector (D-sub 15-pin)
When using the optional DSBK-200 Control Panel to
remotely control this unit, connect the DSBK-200 to
this connector.
3 REMOTE-IN connector (D-sub 9-pin)
When controlling this unit from an editing controller
such as the ES-7, PVE-500, BVE-600/800/910, or
RM-450/450CE, connect the unit to the editing
controller via this connector using the supplied 9-pin
remote control cable.
When controlling another VCR from this unit, connect
the VCR to this connector.
4 REMOTE-OUT connector (D-sub 9-pin)
This connector provides the loop-through output for
remote control signals from the REMOTE-IN
connector.
4 Analog audio input/output section
1 AUDIO IN −6dBm/0dBm/+4dBm switches
Set these switches according to the audio input levels
to the AUDIO IN CH-1 to CH-4 connectors.
MONITOR AUDIO
AUDIO IN LEVEL
AUDIO OUT
CH-1 CH-2 CH-3 CH-4
CH-1
0dBm
HIGHLOW
OFF
-6dBm +4dBm
CH-2 CH-3 CH-4
0dBm
-6dBm +4dBm
0dBm
-6dBm +4dBm
0dBm
-6dBm +4dBm
ON
-600
Ω
LEVEL
HIGHLOW
OFF
ON
-600
Ω
LEVEL
HIGHLOW
OFF
ON
-600
Ω
LEVEL
HIGHLOW
OFF
ON
-600
Ω
1 AUDIO IN −6dBm/0dBm/+4dBm switches
2 AUDIO IN LEVEL/600Ω switches
3 MONITOR AUDIO connector
4 AUDIO IN CH-1 to CH-4 connectors
5AUDIO OUT CH-1 to CH-4
connectors
1-17
DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Location and Function of Parts
Chapter 1 Overview
32
Chapter 1 Overview
2 AUDIO IN LEVEL/600Ω switches
Set these switches for each channel as shown in the
following table, according to the audio input levels to
the AUDIO IN CH-1 to CH-4 connectors and the
impedance.
Settings of the AUDIO IN LEVEL/600Ω switches
3 MONITOR AUDIO connector (RCA phono
jack)
This connector outputs audio signals for monitoring.
The audio signals to be output from this connector can
be selected with the MONITOR SELECT buttons on
the lower control panel.
4 AUDIO IN CH-1 (channel 1) to CH-4 connectors
(XLR 3-pin, female)
Use these connectors to connect separate channels of
audio input from a player VCR or other external audio
equipment.
5 AUDIO OUT CH-1 (channel 1) to CH-4
connectors (XLR 3-pin, male)
These connectors output channel-1 to channel-4 audio
signals, respectively.
In 2-channel audio recording mode (selected with
extended menu item 818), it is possible to use the
AUDIO OUT CH-3 and AUDIO OUT CH-4
connectors for monitor audio output for channels 1 and
2, respectively (use extended menu item 820).
Audio input Switch setting
Level Impedance
−60dBs
(microphone input)
High impedance
(about 20kΩ)
LOW-OFF
(left position)
+4dBs/0dBs/−6dBs
(line audio input)
High impedance
(about 20kΩ)
HIGH-OFF
(middle position)
+4dBm/0dBm/−6dBm
(line audio input)
600ΩHIGH-ON
(right position)
Chapter 1 Overview
Chapter 1 Overview
33
Usable Cassettes
This unit can use the DVCAM cassettes listed below.
The * in each model name is actually “ME”
(indicating that a cassette memory is contained), or
“N” (indicating that no cassette memory is contained).
The numbers in each model name indicate the
maximum recording/playback time (in minutes) for
each model. For example, the PDV-184ME has a
maximum recording/playback time of 184 minutes.
Cassettes usable for playback only
L- and M-size DVCPRO (25M) cassettes are usable
for playback only.
Notes
•If you insert an incorrect type of cassette, it will be
automatically ejected.
•When operating this unit as a player, you can also use
DV cassettes on the unit. However, it is the best
choice to always use DVCAM cassettes because they
are more reliable than DV cassettes whatever your
purpose may be: playback, editing, or long-period
storage of recordings.
•Cassettes that have been recorded by a DV-format
recorder can be played back on this unit but cannot be
used for recording at editing operation such as the
setting of edit points. When you insert such a
cassette into this unit, the NOT EDITABLE indicator
lights up in the lower control panel display section.
DVCAM cassettes
The following figure illustrates the DVCAM cassette’s
appearance.
Model name Size
PDV-64*/94*/124*/184*/34* Standard size
PDVM-12*/22*/32*/40* Mini size
Mini size
Cassette memory
This memory is used to store ClipLink log data.
For details of ClipLink log data, see the
appendix “ClipLink Guide”
(page 147)
.
REC/SAVE switch
For details of this switch, see “Preventing
accidental erasure”
(page 34)
.
Standard size
Notes on using cassettes
•Before storing the cassette, rewind the tape to the
beginning and be sure to put the cassette in its storage
case, preferably on end instead of flat on its side. The
storage case of a DVCAM cassette is specially
designed to ensure a long-period storage of the tape.
Storing a cassette in any other condition (not
rewound, out of its case, etc.) may cause the video
and audio contents to become damaged over time.
•If the cassette memory connector (contact point)
becomes dirty, connection problems may occur,
causing a loss of functions. Remove any dust or dirt
from this area before using the cassette.
•If the cassette is dropped on the floor or otherwise
receives a hard impact, the tape may become
slackened and may not record and/or play back
correctly.
For information about how to check the tape for slack, see
the next section.
Checking the tape for slack
Using a paper clip or a similar object, turn the reel
gently in the direction shown by the arrow. If the reel
does not move, there is no slack. Insert the cassette
into the cassette compartment, and after about 10
seconds take it out.
Reel
Paper clip, etc.
1-18 DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Location and Function of Parts
Chapter 1 Overview
34
Chapter 1 Overview
Preventing accidental erasure
Set the REC/SAVE switch on the cassette to SAVE to
prevent accidental erasure of recorded contents.
To enable re-recording
Set the cassette’s REC/SAVE switch to REC.
When this switch is set to SAVE, the unit cannot
record on the tape.
Inserting and Ejecting Cassettes
Inserting a cassette
This unit accepts three sizes of cassette: L (standard
size), M (medium size: DVCPRO) and S (mini size).
When inserting a cassette in the unit, make sure its
tape window faces upward as shown in the following
figure.
Set to SAVE
REC/SAVE switch
REC
SAVE
Ejecting a cassette
Press the EJECT button.
Outer guides Mini size (Insert the cassette
into the middle of the cassette
compartment.)
Standard size
Tape window facing upward
Inner guides Medium size (Align the
cassette with the outer
guides, then slide it in over
the inner guides.)
EJECT button
Tape window facing upward
Chapter 2 Setting/Displaying Time Data and Text Information
Chapter 2 Setting/Displaying Time Data and Text Information
35
Chapter2
Setting/Displaying
Time Data and Text
Information
Displaying Time Data and Unit's Operating Status−
Superimposing Text Information
To display superimposed time data and text information about the
operating status of the unit on the monitor, set the CHARACTER switch
on the subsidiary control panel to ON.
When the CHARACTER switch is set to ON, the text information is
superimposed on the output of the VIDEO OUT 3 (SUPER) connector and
also of the SDI OUTPUT 3 (SUPER) connector.
To adjust the displayed text
You can adjust the position, size, and type of superimposed information
using setup menu items 002, 003, 009, and 011.
For details, see pages 108 and 109.
1-19
DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
36
Chapter 2 Setting/Displaying Time Data and Text Information
Chapter 2 Setting/Displaying Time Data and Text Information
TCR 23 : 59 . 4 0 . 18 *
PSHUTTLESTILL
a) This character can appear on the DSR-2000 only. The character to
appear in these two columns is always a colon (:) on the DSR-2000P.
4VITC field
6Operating mode
5Recorder/player selection
3Timecode generator
drop-frame mark
a)
Time data
2Timecode reader drop-
frame mark
a)
1Time data type
Information displayed
The figure below shows the time data and operation status that can be
superimposed.
Note
The example above shows the factory default configuration.
You can use setup menu item 005 to display a different type of time data in
the second line as well.
For details, see page 108.
1 Time data type
Display Meaning
CNT Count value of the time counter (COUNTER)
TCR Timecode reader timecode data
UBR Timecode reader user bits data
TCR. VITC reader time code data
UBR. VITC reader user bits data
TCG Timecode generator timecode data
UBG Timecode generator user bits data
IN IN point time data
OUT OUT point time data
AI Audio IN point time data
AO Audio OUT point time data
DUR The duration between any two of the four edit points (IN, OUT,
AUDIO IN, AUDIO OUT)
T*R
a)
Time code data from time code reader. The asterisk indicates an
interpolation by the time code reader to make up for the time code
data not correctly read from the tape.
U*R
a)
User bit data from the time code reader. The asterisk indicates that
last data is retained by the time code reader, as the new data has
not been read correctly from the tape.
a) “*” appears when data has not been correctly read from tape.
Displaying Time Data and Unit's Operating Status−Superimposing Text
Information
Chapter 2 Setting/Displaying Time Data and Text Information
Chapter 2 Setting/Displaying Time Data and Text Information
37
2 Time code reader drop-frame mark (for DSR-2000 only)
3 Time code generator drop-frame mark
(for DSR-2000 only)
4 VITC field
“ ” (blank): Fields 1 and 3
“*”: Fields 2 and 4
5 Recorder/player selection
The indication changes depending on the status of the RECORDER/
PLAYER buttons.
No display: Neither of the RECORDER and PLAYER buttons is lit.
P: The PLAYER button is lit.
R: The RECORDER button is lit.
6 Operation mode
The field is divided into three blocks, A, B and C.
•Block A displays the operation mode.
•Block B displays the servo lock status or tape speed.
•Block C displays a p mark to indicate an edit section during automatic
editing.
ABC
. Drop frame mode (factory default setting)
: Non-drop frame mode
. Drop frame mode (factory default setting)
: Non-drop frame mode
1-20 DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
38
Chapter 2 Setting/Displaying Time Data and Text Information
Chapter 2 Setting/Displaying Time Data and Text Information
Display
Block A Block B
Operation mode
STANDBY OFF Standby off mode
STOP Stop mode
F.FWD Fast forward mode
REW Rewind mode
PREROLL Preroll mode
PLAY Playback mode (servo unlocked)
PLAY Playback mode (servo locked)LOCK
PLAY Deviation from normal
speed (%) Capstan override mode
REC Record mode (servo unlocked)
REC LOCK Record mode (servo locked)
EDIT Edit mode (servo unlocked)
EDIT LOCK Edit mode (servo locked)
JOG STILL A still picture in jog mode
JOG FWD Jog mode in forward direction
JOG REV Jog mode in reverse direction
SHUTTLE (Speed) Shuttle mode
VAR (Speed) Variable mode
AUTO EDIT Automatic editing mode
PREVIEW Preview mode
REVIEW Review mode
DMC (Speed)
a)
DMC playback speed
D-PREV (Speed)
a)
DMC editing preview mode
D-EDIT (Speed)
a)
DMC editing mode
DMC-SPD (Speed) DMC initial speed setting
a) Initial speed settings or stored speed settings
CASSETTE OUT Cassette is not loaded
TAPE UNTHREAD Tape has not been threaded
Displaying Time Data and Unit's Operating Status−Superimposing Text
Information
Chapter 2 Setting/Displaying Time Data and Text Information
Chapter 2 Setting/Displaying Time Data and Text Information
39
Setting Time Code and User Bits
Setting an initial time code value
Set the buttons and switches as shown below.
Button/switch settings
To set an initial time code value, use the following procedure.
REMOTE button
CHARACTER switch
FREE RUN/REC RUN switch
INT/EXT−PRESET/REGEN switch
Buttons/switches Settings
REMOTE button Off
CHARACTER switch ON
INT/EXT−PRESET/REGEN switch INT−PRESET
FREE RUN/REC RUN switch As required
DF/NDF switch As required
RESET button
127
5
(3),4
Display section
FREE RUN/REC RUN switch
DF/NDF switch
1-21
DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
40
Chapter 2 Setting/Displaying Time Data and Text Information
Chapter 2 Setting/Displaying Time Data and Text Information
1
Press the COUNTER SEL button and select TC.
Time data type indicator TC lights in the display section of the lower
control panel.
2
Press the HOLD button.
The first digit of the time counter display
(hours:minutes:seconds:frames) in the display section begins to flash.
To set all digits to 0
Press the RESET button.
3
Confirm the JOG indicator in the display section is lit.
If not lit, press the search dial to select jog mode.
4
Select the digit to set by rotating the search dial.
The flashing digit changes to the digit on the right when you rotate the
search dial clockwise, and to the digit on the left when you rotate it
counterclockwise.
5
Set the value for the flashing digit by rotating the search dial while
pressing the SEARCH button.
6
Repeat steps 4 and 5 until you finish setting all digits.
7
Press the SET button.
If the FREE RUN/REC RUN switch is set to FREE RUN, the time
code starts to advance immediately.
To set time code to the current time
1
Set the FREE RUN/REC RUN switch and DF/NDF switch (for DSR-
2000 only) on the subsidiary control panel to FREE RUN and DF,
respectively.
2
Carry out steps 1 to 6 of the previous section “Setting an initial time
code value” to set the time code to a time slightly ahead of the current
time.
3
Press the SET button at the instant when the current time matches the
displayed time code.
Setting Time Code and User Bits
Chapter 2 Setting/Displaying Time Data and Text Information
Chapter 2 Setting/Displaying Time Data and Text Information
41
To set user bits
You can record up to 8 hexadecimal digits of information (date, time,
event number, etc.) in the time code track.
Proceed as follows.
1
Watching the time data type indicator in the display section, press the
COUNTER SEL button and select U-BIT.
2
Carry out steps 2 to 7 of the section “Setting an initial time code
value” (page 39).
Settings are made in hexadecimal (0, 1, 2,... 8, 9, A, B,... E, F).
Display section
1
1-22 DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
42
Chapter 2 Setting/Displaying Time Data and Text Information
Chapter 2 Setting/Displaying Time Data and Text Information
Synchronizing the Internal Time Code Generator With an External
Signal—External Lock
You can synchronize the internal time code generator to an external time
code signal (TC) input to this unit. Use this method to synchronize the
time code generators of a number of VCRs, or to carry out recording
maintaining the synchronization between the source video and time code.
In this case, the settings of the FREE RUN/REC RUN switch and DF/NDF
switch on the subsidiary control panel are ignored.
You can synchronize the internal time code generator to one of the
following external time codes.
•The time code (TC) output of an external time code generator or external
VCR connected to the TIME CODE IN connector
•The time code (VITC) present in a video signal input to the unit
•The time code (TC) input to the SDTI(QSDI) INPUT connector or
i.LINK connector (when fitted with the optional DSBK-190) of the unit
To synchronize to an external time code signal
Proceed as follows.
1
• When synchronizing to an external time code
Connect the time code output of the external time code generator or
external VCR to the TIME CODE IN connector.
•When synchronizing to the time code (VITC) in an input video
signal
In the input selection section, select an input video signal containing
VITC.
1
1
2
TIME CODE
OUT
IN
Setting Time Code and User Bits
Chapter 2 Setting/Displaying Time Data and Text Information
Chapter 2 Setting/Displaying Time Data and Text Information
43
2
Set switches on the subsidiary control panel as follows.
TC SELECT switch: TC or VITC according as you are
synchronizing to TC or VITC
INT/EXT–PRESET/REGEN switch: EXT–REGEN (left position)
VITC switch: ON (when recording VITC)
This starts the internal time code generator running in synchronization
with the external time code generator.
Once the internal time code generator is synchronized with the external
time code generator, even if the external time code generator
connection is removed, the internal time code generator continues to
run.
Note
When the input mode is V:SDTI, SDTI or i.LINK (the V:SDTI, SDTI or
i.LINK indicator is lit in the input selection/audio mode display section),
then setting the INT/EXT−PRESET/REGEN switch to EXT−REGEN
automatically synchronizes the internal time code generator to the time
code transferred through the SDTI(QSDI) INPUT connector or i.LINK
connector (when fitted with the optional DSBK-190).
Note that when the INT/EXT−PRESET/REGEN switch is set to EXT−
REGEN, the advance mode and frame count mode (DSR-2000 only) are
automatically set as follows.
Advance mode: free running
Frame count mode (DSR-2000 only): the same as the external time
code signal (drop frame or non-drop frame)
To check the synchronization to the external signal
Press the STOP button to stop this unit, then press the REC button.
Watch the time counter display, and check that the values displayed
coincide with the external time code values.
1-23
DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
45
Chapter3
Recording and
Playback
Recording
This section describes video and audio recording on the unit.
Preparations for Recording
Button/switch settings
Before beginning recording, make any necessary button/switch settings.
For details of the settings of each of the buttons/switches, see the pages indicated
in parenthesis.
MONITOR SELECT buttons
(page 17)
:
select the audio channels to be monitored.
POWER switch: 1 side
REC controls
(page 16)
:
adjust the audio recording levels.
Input selection section
(page 14)
: select the input
video and audio signals.
REMOTE button
(page 15)
: unlit
COUNTER SEL button
(page
18
: select the data to be
displayed (counter’s count, time
code value, or user bit value)
PB/EE button
(page 18)
: lit
INT/EXT–PRESET/REGEN switch
(page 26)
:
select the time code to be recorded.
VITC switch
(page 26)
: ON (when recording VITC)
TC SELECT switch
(page 26)
: TC or VITC (when displaying time code)
REC INHIBIT switch
(page 26)
: OFF
1-24 DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
46
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
To change the number of audio channels to be recorded
Change the setting of extended menu item 818 between 2-channel (2CH)
mode and 4-channel (4CH) mode.
Adjusting the audio recording levels
When carrying out audio recording at a reference level
Leave the REC controls pressed in. The audio signals will be recorded at a
preset reference level.
Manually adjusting the recording levels
For each channel, pull out the REC control in the upper control panel, and
adjust so that the audio level indication is 0 dB for an average volume.
Carry out the adjustment in E-E mode.
For details of selecting the E-E mode, see the description of the REC button in the
tape transport control section (page 22) and the PB/EE button in the monitor/
menu/display setting section (page 17).
To change the display range of the audio level meters
Press the METER FULL/FINE button (see page 16).
Setting the reference level
The analog input reference level is determined by the settings of the
AUDIO IN LEVEL/600 Ω switch (see page 32) and extended menu item
811. When, for example, the AUDIO IN LEVEL/600 Ω switch is set to
+4 dBm (HIGH-ON) and extended menu item 811 to –20 dB, the reference
level is set to –20 dB, causing +4 dBm analog input to be converted into a
–20 dBFS digital signal.
Recording
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
47
Recording Time Code and User Bit Values
There are the following two ways of recording time code:
•Setting an initial value, then recording the output of the internal time code
generator
•Recording the output of the internal time code generator synchronized to
an external time code generator
To set an initial value then record the time code
Use the procedure described in the section “Setting an Initial Time Code
Value” (page 39), then carry out the recording operation (see page 48).
Setting the time code value to the current time
See page 40.
Setting a user bit value
See page 41.
To synchronize the internal time code generator to an external
signal
See page 42.
1-25
DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
48
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
Recording Operation
To record, use the following procedure.
1
Insert a cassette.
For details, see the section “Inserting a cassette” (page 34).
2
Hold down the REC button, and press the PLAY button.
Recording starts, the servo locks, and the SERVO indicator in the
display section lights.
3
To stop recording, press the STOP button.
If you record to the end of the tape
The tape is automatically rewound, and stops.
You can change the setting of extended menu item 125 so that the tape just
stops without being automatically rewound when it is recorded to the end.
1
23
Recording
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
49
Playback
This section describes playback of video and audio.
Preparations for Playback
Button/switch settings
Before beginning playback, make any necessary button/switch settings.
For details of the settings of each of the buttons/switches, see the pages indicated
in parenthesis.
Time data selection
Displayed time data
Use the COUNTER SEL button to select one of counter’s count
(COUNTER), time code (TC), and user bit values (U-BIT). When you
select time code, the data displayed is determined by the setting (TC/
VITC) of the TC SELECT switch on the subsidiary control panel as
follows.
MONITOR SELECT buttons
(page 17)
: select the audio channels to be monitored.
POWER switch: 1side
PB controls
(page 17)
:
adjust the audio
playback levels.
REMOTE button
(page 15)
: unlit
COUNTER SEL button
(page 18)
:
select the data to be displayed
(see the section “Displayed time
data” on this page).
PB button
(page 18)
: lit
TC SELECT switch
(page 26)
: TC or VITC (when displaying time
code)(see the section “Displayed time data” on this page)
TC SELECT switch setting Displayed data
TC TC recorded on tape
VITC VITC recorded on tape
1-26 DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
50
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
Playback Operation
This section describes the following types of playback:
•Normal playback
Playback at normal (×1) speed
•Playback in jog mode
Variable speed playback, with the speed determined by the speed of
turning the search dial
•Playback in shuttle mode
Variable speed playback, with the speed determined by the angular
position of the search dial
•Playback in variable mode
Variable speed playback, with the speed finely determined by the angular
position of the search dial
•Playback using the capstan override function
The playback speed is adjusted temporarily according to the angular
position of the search dial, to align the playback phase with that of
another VCR.
Normal playback
First insert a cassette.
For details of how to insert a cassette, see the section “Inserting and Ejecting
Cassettes” (page 34).
To start playback
Press the PLAY button.
Playback starts, the servo locks, and the SERVO indicator in the display
section lights.
To stop playback
Press the STOP button.
Cassette compartment
Display section
STOP button
PLAY button
Playback
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
51
If you play back to the end of the tape
The tape is automatically rewound, and stops.
You can change the setting of extended menu item 125 so that the tape just
stops without being automatically rewound when it is played back to the
end.
Playback in jog mode
In jog mode, you can control the speed of playback by the speed of turning
the search dial. The playback speed range is ±1 times normal speed (can be
changed using extended menu item 116).
To carry out playback in jog mode, use the following procedure.
1
Press the SEARCH button or search dial so that the JOG indicator in
the display section is lit.
Pressing the search dial toggles between jog mode and shuttle mode.
2
Turn the search dial in the desired direction, at the speed
corresponding to the desired playback speed.
Playback in jog mode starts.
3
To stop playback in jog mode, stop turning the search dial.
1,2,3
1
Display section
1-27
DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
52
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
Playback in shuttle mode
In shuttle mode, you can control the speed of playback by the angular
position of the search dial. The range of playback speed is ±32 times
normal speed (can be changed using menu item 102).
There are detents on the search dial at the still position and at ±10 times
normal speed.
To carry out playback in shuttle mode, use the following procedure.
1
Press the SEARCH button or search dial so that the SHUTTLE
indicator in the display section is lit.
Pressing the search dial toggles between jog mode and shuttle mode.
2
Turn the search dial to the desired angle corresponding to the desired
playback speed.
Playback in shuttle mode starts.
3
To stop playback in shuttle mode, return the search dial to the center
position, or press the STOP button.
To return to normal-speed playback
Press the PLAY button.
To alternate between normal-speed playback and shuttle mode
playback
Set the search dial to the position corresponding to the desired shuttle
playback speed, then switch between normal-speed playback and shuttle
playback by pressing the PLAY and SEARCH buttons alternately.
For intermittent shuttle mode playback, press the STOP and SEARCH
buttons alternately.
Display section
1,2,3
13
Playback
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
53
Playback in variable mode
In variable mode, you can finely control (61 steps) the speed of playback
in the range of −1 to +2 times normal speed. Noiseless playback is possible
in the range of ±1 times normal speed.
(The variable mode playback speed range can be changed using extended
menu item 119.)
There are detents on the search dial at the still position and at ±1 times
normal speed.
To carry out playback in variable mode, use the following procedure.
1
Press the VARIABLE button or search dial so that the SHUTTLE
indicator in the display section is lit.
2
If the SEARCH button is lit, press the VARIABLE button, turning it
on.
3
Turn the search dial to the desired angle corresponding to the desired
playback speed.
Playback in variable mode starts.
4
To stop playback in variable mode, return the search dial to the center
position, or press the STOP button.
To return to normal-speed playback
Press the PLAY button.
To alternate between normal-speed playback and variable
mode playback
Set the search dial to the position corresponding to the desired variable
playback speed, then switch between normal-speed playback and variable
playback by pressing the PLAY and VARIABLE buttons alternately.
For intermittent variable mode playback, press the STOP and VARIABLE
buttons alternately.
Display section
1,2,3
2
1
4
1-28 DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
54
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
Playback using the capstan override function
You can use the capstan override function to adjust the playback speed
temporarily. This function is convenient for playback phase
synchronization with another VCR playing back the same program.
1
(A) Hold down the PLAY button, and turn the search dial in the
desired direction to adjust the playback speed.
The range of speed adjustment is ±15% in steps of 1%.
(B) Hold down the PLAY button, and press the TRIM buttons to
adjust the playback speed.
The playback speed can be adjusted to ±8% only.
The SERVO indicator in the display section goes off.
2
When the adjustment is completed, release the PLAY button.
The tape transport returns to normal speed, and the SERVO indicator
in the display section lights on again.
Display section
1
(A)
1
(A)
,1
(B)
,21
(B)
Playback
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
55
Dynamic Motion Control (DMC) Playback
Overview
DMC playback allows you to vary the playback speed for a certain section
of a tape, in variable mode (from −1 to +1 times normal speed), and store
the varying speed in memory for later playback at the same varying speed.
For example, during a live broadcast of a sporting event you can set the
start and end points of highlights while recording, and then provide
immediate DMC playback of those highlights.
During DMC playback the tape moves as shown in the following figure.
On-air start point Preroll point Speed variation start point Speed variation end point On-air end point
Waiting for the on-air cue
before starting DMC playback. Stop Press the REVIEW button.
Normal speed
playback DMC playback Normal speed playback
Stop
Press the REVIEW button
again at the on-air cue.
Starting DMC playback
immediately after preroll Press the PREVIEW button.
Normal speed
playback DMC playback Normal speed playback
1-29
DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
56
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
Storing a varying playback speed in memory
To store the playback speed for DMC playback, use the following
procedure.
1
Press the DMC EDIT button, turning it on.
2
Either while playing back the recorded tape, or during recording, press
the ENTRY/SHIFT button and each of the following buttons
simultaneously, to set the start and end points.
•On-air start point: AUDIO IN button
•Speed variation start point: IN button
•Speed variation end point: OUT button
•On-air end point: AUDIO OUT button
Each press turns the corresponding button on.
3
Press the SEARCH button or search dial so that the SHUTTLE
indicator in the display section is lit.
4
If you want to use the variable mode to set the varying playback speed,
press the VARIABLE button, turning it on.
5
Holding down the DMC EDIT button, turn the search dial, to set the
initial speed at the speed variation start point.
The speed you set appears in the display section. During this period the
tape does not move.
6
Press the PREVIEW button.
The tape is prerolled and played back at normal speed from the on-air
start point to the speed variation start point. On passing the speed
variation start point, the MEMORY indicator begins to flash, and
playback begins at the speed set in step 5.
MEMORY indicator
3,5,7
43
261,5 8
Display section
Playback
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
57
7
Turn the search dial to vary the playback speed.
While the MEMORY indicator is flashing, the speed variations are
stored in memory. On passing the speed variation end point, the
MEMORY indicator changes from flashing to continuously lit, and the
variable speed storing ends.
8
Press the STOP button to stop the tape.
If the MEMORY indicator lights continuously before the speed
variation end point
This indicates that the memory became full at that point. It is therefore not
possible to record more speed variation. The maximum capacity is a
duration of 120 seconds.
To amend the stored speed variation
Press the PREVIEW button.
The interval between the speed variation start and end points is
automatically played back at the stored speed. Operate the search dial as
required, to adjust the playback speed.
Setting the initial speed to normal speed
In step 5, press the PLAY button.
Executing DMC Playback
There are two methods of starting DMC playback.
•Starting playback at the on-air cue from the on-air start point
•Starting playback immediately after preroll
Notes
•To avoid operating mistakes we recommend that you use the VCR in
standalone mode when carrying out DMC playback.
•When using two VCRs connected for editing, you can only use the
recorder VCR for DMC playback, and only when both the RECORDER
and PLAYER buttons are off.
1-30 DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
58
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
You can start DMC playback using either the REVIEW button or
PREVIEW button depending on which of the above two methods you use.
To start playback at the on-air cue from the on-air start point
Use the following procedure.
1
Press the REVIEW button.
The REVIEW button lights, and the tape is cued up to the on-air start
point. After the tape is cued up, the REVIEW button flashes.
2
At the moment the on-air cue is given, press the REVIEW button once
more.
The REVIEW button lights, and playback starts at normal speed.
Between the speed variation start and end points, DMC playback is
carried out at the stored speed, and then playback continues at normal
speed and the tape stops at the on-air end point.
Starting playback immediately after preroll
Press the PREVIEW button.
The PREVIEW button lights, and after preroll, DMC playback is carried
out for the section between the speed variation start and end points, then
playback continues at normal speed from the speed variation end point.
Stopping the tape during DMC playback
Press the STOP button.
To exit DMC playback mode
Press the DMC EDIT button and the DELETE button simultaneously.
REVIEW button
PREVIEW button
Playback
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
59
Synchronous Playback
Connecting two DSR-2000/2000P units and synchronizing their tape
transport, you can carry out two-unit synchronous playback with an
accuracy of ±0 frame.
For equipment/signal connections and basic settings, see the section
“Connections for Two-Unit Synchronous Playback” (page 132).
Use the following procedure.
(In the following, the controlling unit is referred to as the recorder (this
unit) and the controlled unit as the player.)
1
Press the PLAYER button, turning it on.
2
Cue up to the player tape position where to start playback.
3
Hold down the ENTRY/SHIFT button, and press the IN button.
The player IN point is set.
4
Press the RECORDER button, turning it on.
5
Cue up to the recorder tape position where to start synchronous
playback.
6
Hold down the ENTRY/SHIFT button, and press the IN button.
The recorder IN point is set.
2,5
4
3,67
1
(Continued)
1-31
DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
60
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
7
Hold down the ENTRY/SHIFT button, and press the PREVIEW
button.
Both the recorder and player start preroll followed by synchronous
playback by the two units.
When setup menu item 004 is set to ON and 305 set to ACCUR on the
recorder side, the recorder and player tape transports are synchronized
during the preroll allowing two-unit synchronous playback with ±0
frame accuracy to start at the player and recorder IN points.
To end synchronous playback while it is in progress
Press the STOP button.
Playback
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
61
Digitally Dubbing Signals in DVCAM Format
(Optional DSBK-190 Required When Using i.LINK Interface)
In addition to straightforward tape dubbing, you can also use this unit to
digitally dub signals in DVCAM format automatically from the beginning
of the tape to the end, through an i.LINK or SDTI(QSDI) interface.
When a tape recorded on a DSR-1/1P Digital Videocassette Recorder or
DSR-300/300P Digital Camcorder is dubbed, the ClipLink log data held in
the cassette memory is also copied.
For information about connections and basic settings, see the section
“Connections for Digitally Dubbing Signals in DVCAM Format” (page 133).
Notes
•Use a tape which is recorded in the DVCAM format. A tape recorded in
DV format cannot be used as a source tape for an dubbing operation
using the AUTO FUNCTION menu.
•Regardless of the audio channel settings made in the input selection
section of this unit, dubbing is performed with the original audio
recording mode unchanged (two-channel mode (48 kHz) or four-channel
mode (32 kHz)).
•Approximately the last 2 minutes of the tape may not be copied because
of differences in tape lengths. (If an Index Picture is recorded in this
portion, it may also not be copied.)
•A continuous recorded section of approximately 5 seconds is required
before the recording start point. It is recommended to record beforehand
color bars or a similar signal at the start point of the recording tape to be
used on this unit.
Perform the following procedure.
1
On the recorder, hold down the ENTRY/SHIFT button and press the
MENU button.
The SYSTEM MENU screen appears on the monitor connected to this
unit.
4
3
2,5
1
7
(Continued)
1-32 DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
62
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
2
Using the search dial, select AUTO FUNCTION, then press the SET
button.
3
Using the search dial in jog mode, select either SDTI DUBBING or
i.LINK DUBBING, then press the SET button.
The screen changes as follows, allowing you to select a desired group
of items for dubbing.
(In explaining the subsequent operating procedure, illustrations of
screens shown when performing SDTI dubbing are used. You can
follow the same operating procedure also when performing i.LINK
dubbing.)
•A/V: Audio and video
•A/V/TC: Audio, video and timecode
•A/V/TC/CM: Audio, video, timecode, and cassette memory
(ClipLink log data)
SYSTEM MENU
SETUP MENU
AUTO FUNCTION
HOURS METER
AUTO FUNCTION MENU
SDTI DUBBING
A/V
A/V/TC
A/V/TC/CM
Digitally Dubbing Signals in DVCAM Format
(Optional DSBK-190 Required
When Using i.LINK Interface)
AUTO FUNCTION MENU
SDTI DUBBING
i.LINK DUBBING
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
63
4
Using the search dial, select a desired group of items for dubbing, then
press the SET button.
The menu screen changes as follows.
(Example: The screen displayed when A/V/TC/CM is selected.)
5
Insert the source tape in the player and the recording tape in this unit.
A message to make sure dubbing may be started appears.
If the cassette memory capacity is not sufficient
A message urging you to replace the recording tape by a tape with a
larger cassette memory capacity appears.
For more information about this, see the section “If the cassette memory of
the recording tape is not large enough” (page 65).
To cancel the dubbing operation
Press the MENU button.
SDTI DUBBING
(A/V/TC/CM)
INSERT RECORD TAPE IN
THIS VTR AND SOURCE
TAPE IN THE PLAYER VTR.
ABORT:MENU KEY
SDTI DUBBING
(A/V/TC/CM)
START SDTI DUBBING?
START:SET KEY
ABORT:MENU KEY
(Continued)
1-33
DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
64
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
6
Press the SET button.
The recording tape and source tape are both automatically wound back
to the beginning, and dubbing starts. At the same time, the screen
changes as follows.
To end the dubbing operation while it is in progress
Press the STOP button.
The dubbing operation stops and a message asking whether to copy the
contents of the cassette memory appears.
For more information about this, see the section “If you end dubbing while it
is in progress” (page 65).
When dubbing is completed
1A message “COMPLETED” appears on the monitor.
2The source tape and recording tape are both automatically rewound
to the beginning, and the cassettes ejected.
3The unit returns to the state in step 4.
7
To continue by dubbing another tape, repeat steps 5 and 6.
8
To end the dubbing operation and exit from the menu, press the
MENU button.
SDTI DUBBING
(A/V/TC/CM)
EXECUTING.
TCR 00:00:00:00
UBR 00:00:00:00
ABORT:MENU KEY
Digitally Dubbing Signals in DVCAM Format
(Optional DSBK-190 Required
When Using i.LINK Interface)
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
65
If the cassette memory of the recording tape is not large
enough
When you insert the recording tape and source tape in this unit and the
player, respectively, with A/V/TC/CM selected as the items for dubbing,
their cassette memory contents are checked automatically. If, as a result,
the cassette memory capacity of the recording tape is found inadequate, the
following message appears.
If this message appears, replace the recording tape by a tape with a larger
cassette memory capacity.
If you end dubbing while it is in progress
If you end dubbing while it is in progress with A/V/TC/CM selected as the
items for dubbing, the following message appears.
To copy the contents of the cassette memory, press the SET button.
If you do not wish to copy the contents of the cassette memory, press the
RESET button. If you press the RESET button, however, the contents of
the cassette memory may not agree with the material recorded on the tape.
SDTI DUBBING
(A/V/TC/CM)
CM MEMORY STORAGE
CAPACITY OF THE RECORD
TAPE IS TOO SMALL.
ABORT:MENU KEY
SDTI DUBBING
(A/V/TC/CM)
DUBBING IS ABORTED.
EXECUTE CM COPY?
COPY :SET KEY
NOT COPY:RESET KEY
1-34 DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Chapter 4 Editing
Chapter 4 Editing
67
Chapter4
Editing
Automatic Editing
This section describes how to carry out automatic editing with this unit and
another VCR connected to the REMOTE-IN or REMOTE-OUT connector.
Overview of Automatic Editing
With this unit, you can use the following two edit modes.
•Assemble edit mode
•Insert edit mode
(In this Operating Instructions, these two modes are also referred to simply
as assemble mode and insert mode, respectively.)
Assemble edit mode
In assemble editing, you record video and audio materials in order from
the start of the tape. In addition to video and audio, time code is also
recorded. This edit mode is convenient when you are recording on a new
tape.
Note
Before you begin assemble editing for the first time with a new tape, a
video signal, e.g. a black signal, and time code must be recorded on the
tape in advance of the recorder IN point for a length equal to or greater
than the preroll time.
1-35
DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Chapter 4 Editing
68
Chapter 4 Editing
Insert edit mode
In insert editing, you insert video, audio, and time code at desired positions
on an already recorded tape. You can insert all three types of data at the
same time or insert one of the types separately.
Note
Before you use an unrecorded tape in insert editing, a video signal, e.g. a
black signal, and time code must be recorded on all over the tape.
You can carry out DMC editing in both edit modes. In insert editing, split
editing is also possible.
To record a video signal and time code on an unrecorded tape
When recording a video signal and time code on an unrecorded tape to use
it as a recording tape in insert editing, you can use a test signal generated
by the internal signal generator of the unit. An example procedure follows.
1
Insert an unrecorded cassette in the unit and rewind it.
2
Using the VIDEO IN button in the input selection section (see page
14), select the video test signal (SG) as the input video signal.
3
Set switches on the subsidiary control panel (see page 25) as follow.
INT/EXT-PRESET/REGEN switch: INT−PRESET (right position)
FREE RUN/REC RUN switch: REC RUN
DF/NDF switch: Set as required.
4
Set an initial time code value (see page 39)
5
Carry out recording (see page 48).
Recording time code
For automatic editing, regardless of the settings of the INT/EXT−
PRESET/REGEN switch, time code is recorded continuously from the
previous time code recorded on the tape.
Using extended menu item 610, it is also possible to record time code according to
the settings on the control panels.
Automatic Editing
Chapter 4 Editing
Chapter 4 Editing
69
Sequence of editing operations
The following flowchart outlines the sequence of operations in automatic
editing with two DSR-2000/2000P units.
Sequence of Operation See
Making necessary settings
Insert cassettes.
•Insert a cassette for recording the results of
editing in the recorder.
•Insert the cassette on which material to be edited
has been recorded in the player.
Select an edit mode.
Determine edit points.
Preview the editing results.
Modify edit points as necessary.
Execute automatic editing.
Review the editing results as necessary.
“Button/Switch Settings for
Editing” (page 70)
“Usable Cassettes” (page
33)
“Selecting an Edit Mode”
(page 71)
“Setting Edit Points” (page
72)
“Checking Editing Results—
Preview” (page 80)
“Modifying Edit Points”
(page 76
)
“Executing Automatic
Editing” (page 81)
“Reviewing the editing
results” (page 83)
1-36 DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Chapter 4 Editing
70
Chapter 4 Editing
Notes on video output to the monitor
In E-E mode, the video output of the unit is delayed by the time for video
circuit processing with respect to the input video signal (8H).
Unlike the playback operations described in Chapter 3, for playback to be
carried out in edit mode with both the player and recorder specified, you
can use extended menu item 701 to delay the V-SYNC phase by 8H.
Button/Switch Settings for Editing
Before beginning editing, set buttons and switches on the recorder and
player as follows.
For details of the settings of each of the buttons/switches, see the pages indicated
in parenthesis.
Recorder settings
MONITOR SELECT buttons
(page 17)
: select the audio channels to be monitored.
POWER switch: I side
REC controls
(page 16)
:
adjust the audio recording
levels.
Input selection section
(page 14)
: select the input video and
audio signals.
REMOTE button
(page 15)
:
unlit 9PIN (when using
REMOTE-IN/-OUT) or i.LINK
(when using i.LINK) button: lit
COUNTER SEL button
(page
18)
: select the data to be
displayed (counter value or
time code value)
REC INHIBIT switch
(page 26)
: OFF
TC SELECT switch
(page 26)
: TC or VITC, when displaying time code
INT/EXT–PRESET/REGEN switch
(page 26)
: select the time code to be recorded.
Automatic Editing
Chapter 4 Editing
Chapter 4 Editing
71
Player settings
(In the subsequent description, except where the player is explicitly
mentioned, operations are all on the recorder.)
Selecting an Edit mode
Select either assemble mode or insert mode.
Depending on the desired edit mode, press the following button or buttons.
•For assemble editing: ASSEMBLE button
•For insert editing: the desired INSERT buttons (VIDEO, CH-1 to CH-4,
TC)
When you select an edit mode, the IN and OUT buttons begin to flash,
indicating that the edit points require setting.
POWER switch: I side
PB controls
(page 17)
:
adjust the audio playback
levels.
REMOTE button
(page 15)
: lit
9PIN (when using REMOTE-
IN/-OUT) or i.LINK (when
using i.LINK) button: lit
COUNTER SEL button
(page
18):
select the data to be
displayed (counter value or
time code value)
PB button
(page 18)
: lit
TC SELECT switch
(page 26)
: TC or VITC, when displaying time code
INSERT buttons
ASSEMBLE button
IN button and OUT button
1-37
DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Chapter 4 Editing
72
Chapter 4 Editing
Setting Edit Points
Of the four edit points (recorder IN and OUT points, and player IN and
OUT points) required, set any three. The last edit point is set
automatically.
In insert mode, you can set the edit points for video and audio separately
(split editing).
For details of setting split edit points, see the section “Setting split edit points”
(page 73).
To set edit points
1
Press the RECORDER button or PLAYER button to select the VCR on
which you will set edit points.
The button which you have pressed lights.
2
Turn the search dial in jog or shuttle mode, and position the tape at the
required edit point.
For details of playback in jog or shuttle mode, see the sections “Playback in
jog mode” (page 51) and “Playback in shuttle mode” (page 52).
3
At the point at which you wish to set the IN point or OUT point, hold
down the ENTRY/SHIFT button and press the IN button or OUT
button as the case may be.
When the IN point or OUT point is set, the IN button or OUT button
correspondingly lights.
4
Repeat steps 1 to 3 until three of the four edit points (recorder IN and
OUT points, and player IN and OUT points) are set.
When the IN points on both the recorder and player are set, the
PREVIEW button and AUTO EDIT button flash, indicating that it is
possible to carry out a preview or editing operation.
2
1
3
Automatic Editing
Chapter 4 Editing
Chapter 4 Editing
73
(Continued)
Notes
In the following cases, the DELETE button begins to flash and you cannot
carry out automatic editing.
•The OUT point is before the IN point.
•All four of the recorder IN and OUT points and the player IN and OUT
points have been set.
Use the DELETE button to delete a redundant edit point, or set the edit
points correctly.
For details of deleting edit points, see the section “To delete an edit point” (page
77).
Setting split edit points
In split editing, you can set the edit points for audio and video
independently. Set the audio edit points with the AUDIO IN/OUT buttons,
and the video edit points with the IN/OUT buttons.
Note that split editing is only possible when the recorder is set for insert
editing.
1
Press the appropriate INSERT button (VIDEO, CH-1 to CH-4, or TC).
The IN and OUT buttons flash.
2
Press the RECORDER or PLAYER button to select the VCR for
which edit points are to be set.
The button you have pressed lights.
3
To find the edit point, rotate the search dial in jog or shuttle mode.
For details of jog/shuttle mode playback, see the sections "Playback in jog
mode" (page 51) and “Playback in shuttle mode” (page 52).
4
Hold down the ENTRY/SHIFT button and press one of the IN, OUT,
AUDIO IN, and AUDIO OUT buttons, to set the edit point.
3
21 4
1-38 DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Chapter 4 Editing
74
Chapter 4 Editing
5
Repeat steps 2 through 4 to set the required edit points.
As each edit point is set, the corresponding button changes from
flashing to continuously lit.
Note
During split editing, if you set six or more edit points for the recorder and
player, the DELETE button starts to flash, to indicate that editing cannot
be executed. Delete all excess edit points, using the DELETE button.
For details of deleting edit points, see the section “To delete an edit point” (page
77).
Automatic setting of edit points in split editing
Split editing requires a total of eight edit points: four video edit points
(player IN and OUT and recorder IN and OUT) and four audio edit points
(player audio IN and OUT and recorder audio IN and OUT). However, as
soon as you set five points, the system automatically calculates and sets the
remaining three points. Specifically, once you have set three of the four
video edit points and two audio edit points, the remaining three edit points
are set automatically, regardless of whether these points are for the
recorder or player.
In the figure below, the edit points shown within boxes are already set. The
other edit points (recorder audio OUT point, and player audio IN and video
OUT points) are set automatically.
Note that, regardless of whether it was set manually or automatically, any
edit point can be deleted or corrected later.
You can set audio cut in, crossfade, fade in, and fade out effects using extended
menu item 317.
Recorder
Audio IN point IN point Audio OUT point OUT point
Player
Audio IN point IN point Audio OUT point OUT point
Automatic Editing
Chapter 4 Editing
Chapter 4 Editing
75
When the audio IN point is not set for insert editing of audio
only
As long as the audio OUT point is set, the VCR is ready for preview or
editing. If the audio IN point has not been set, the current tape position is
automatically used as the audio IN point.
Using a VCR without a split editing function as the player
If it is not possible to set separate audio and video edit points on the VCR
you are using as the player, by setting the audio IN and OUT points on the
recorder (this unit), then setting three video edit points, split editing is
possible.
Checking Edit Points
You can check the time value for an edit point and the duration between
two edit points by displaying them in the display section.
To display the time value for an edit point
Use the following procedure.
1
Press the RECORDER button or PLAYER button to select the VCR on
which you wish to check the edit point.
The button you have pressed lights.
2
Hold down the IN, OUT, AUDIO IN, or AUDIO OUT button
according to the edit point you wish to check.
While you hold down the button, the time value of the edit point is
shown in the display section.
1
2
Display section
1-39
DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Chapter 4 Editing
76
Chapter 4 Editing
To display the duration between two edit points
1
Press the RECORDER button or PLAYER button to select the VCR on
which you wish to check the duration.
The button you have pressed lights.
2
Hold down any two of the four edit point buttons (recorder or player
IN, OUT, audio IN, and audio OUT points).
While you hold down the buttons, the duration between the two edit
points is shown in the display section.
When only one of the two selected edit points is set
The duration between the edit point and the current tape position is
displayed.
When neither of the two selected edit points is set
The duration between the most recently set corresponding edit points is
displayed.
Modifying Edit Points
Once you set edit points, you can modify or delete them as required.
When edit points have been set incorrectly, for example when an OUT
point is located before an IN point or when the duration of editing
segments on the player and recorder do not match, the DELETE button
flashes to alert you that a preview or edit cannot be carried out. In this
case, either modify the erroneous edit point, or first delete it and then enter
it correctly.
To turn a flashing DELETE button off
The DELETE button goes off when the erroneous edit point is correct.
Automatic Editing
Chapter 4 Editing
Chapter 4 Editing
77
To modify an edit point
Use the following procedure.
1
Press the RECORDER button or PLAYER button to select the VCR on
which you wish to modify the edit point.
The button you have pressed lights.
2
Hold down the IN, OUT, AUDIO IN, or AUDIO OUT button
corresponding to the edit point you wish to modify, and press the
TRIM buttons (+ or –).
While you hold down the button, the time value for the edit point
appears in the display section; pressing the +button increases the value
by one frame, and pressing the –button decreases it by one frame.
To delete an edit point
To delete an edit point, use the following procedure. You can use the same
procedure whether or not the DELETE button is flashing.
1
2
Display section
1
2
(Continued)
1-40 DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Chapter 4 Editing
78
Chapter 4 Editing
1
Press the RECORDER button or PLAYER button to select the VCR on
which you wish to delete the edit point.
The button you have pressed lights.
2
Hold down the DELETE button and press the IN, OUT, AUDIO IN, or
AUDIO OUT button according to the edit point you wish to delete.
The edit point is deleted, and the DELETE button goes off.
Cuing Up to Edit Points
You can cue up to any edit point, or cue up to a position located a specified
amount of time before the edit start point (preroll).
To cue up to an edit point
Use the following procedure.
1
Press the RECORDER button or PLAYER button to select the VCR on
which you wish to cue up to an edit point.
The button you have pressed lights.
2
Hold down the IN, OUT, AUDIO IN, or AUDIO OUT button
according to the edit point to which you wish to cue up, and press the
PREROLL button.
The edit point you have selected is cued up.
1
2
Automatic Editing
Chapter 4 Editing
Chapter 4 Editing
79
To preroll
Use the following procedure.
1
Press the RECORDER button or PLAYER button to select the VCR on
which you wish to carry out a preroll.
The button you have pressed lights.
2
Press the PREROLL button.
The tape is wound back to a position 5 seconds (factory default setting)
before the edit IN point, and stops.
To change the preroll time
The factory default setting for the preroll time is 5 seconds, but you can
use basic menu item 001 to change this to any value from 0 to 30 seconds.
If you change the preroll time, make sure that the setting is not longer than
the recording length before the edit IN point.
Note that for automatic editing, the preroll time setting on the recorder
takes precedence.
1
2
1-41
DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Chapter 4 Editing
80
Chapter 4 Editing
Checking Edit Results—Preview
When you have set the edit points, the PREVIEW button flashes,
indicating that you can carry out a preview.
To carry out a preview, press the PREVIEW button.
The PREVIEW button changes from flashing to continuously lit, and the
preview is carried out.
At the end of the preview, the PREVIEW button flashes again.
To stop the preview
Press the STOP button.
The tape stops at the position where you pressed the button.
To return the tape to the preroll point
Press the PREROLL button.
To return the tape to the IN point or OUT point
Press the PREROLL button and the IN button or OUT button
simultaneously.
After the preview, make any necessary adjustments to the edit points, then
repeat the preview.
For details of how to modify or delete edit points, see the section “Modifying Edit
Points” (page 76).
PREVIEW button
Automatic Editing
Chapter 4 Editing
Chapter 4 Editing
81
Monitor output during a preview
During a preview, you can monitor the following video and audio on a
monitor connected to the recorder.
• From the preroll point to the IN point, you can monitor the playback from
the recorder.
• From the IN point to the OUT point, you can monitor the playback from
the player through the recorder in E-E mode.
• From the OUT point to the postroll point, you can monitor the playback
from the recorder.
The following figure illustrates this.
Executing Automatic Editing
Overview of editing operations
The figure below shows how the recorder and player operate during
editing.
IN point OUT point
Playback (recorder) E-E mode (player) Playback (recorder)
Tape transport
Preroll point IN point OUT point Postroll point
Recorder
Preroll Editing results Postroll
Recording overlap
(When editing in
assemble mode)
Stop
Player
Time flow
Playback Stop
1-42 DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Chapter 4 Editing
82
Chapter 4 Editing
Monitor output during an edit
During execution of an automatic edit, on a monitor connected to the
recorder, you can monitor the same video and audio as during a preview
(see page 81).
However, during preread editing (see page 87), only the playback from the
recorder can be monitored.
Using a single monitor for video and audio on both player and recorder
For efficient editing if only one monitor is available, use the following
method.
1
Connect the monitor to the recorder.
2
In the setup menus, set item 008 to “AUTO”.
3
Press the PLAYER button on the recorder.
This forces the recorder to E-E mode, in which the player video and
audio signals are output to the monitor.
Note
Continuous recording must exist on the recorder tape to be used in issert
editing. It is not possible to carry out editing on a section of the tape with
no signal recorded.
Starting automatic editing
When you have set the edit points, press the flashing AUTO EDIT button.
The AUTO EDIT button changes from flashing to continuously lit, and the
automatic editing operation begins.
At the end of the editing operation, the AUTO EDIT button goes off.
ENTRY/SHIFT button
DELETE button
AUTO EDIT button
PREVIEW button
REVIEW button
OUT button STOP button
Automatic Editing
Chapter 4 Editing
Chapter 4 Editing
83
To change the OUT point after starting automatic editing
operation
After starting the automatic editing operation, to end the operation before
the preset OUT point, hold down the ENTRY/SHIFT button and press the
OUT button.
The position where you pressed the button becomes the OUT point, and
editing ends.
To abandon automatic editing
Press the STOP button.
The automatic editing operation is abandoned. At the same time, the
PREVIEW button and AUTO EDIT button start flashing, and the state
before the editing was started is restored.
In this case, the IN and OUT points already set are preserved so that you
can carry out a preview or automatic editing operation again by pressing
the PREVIEW button or AUTO EDIT button.
Reviewing the editing results
After carrying out an editing operation, you can carry out a review, to
check the editing results on the monitor.
To carry out a review, after carrying out the edit, and before you set any
new edit points or make other settings, press the REVIEW button.
The REVIEW button lights, and the review is carried out.
At the end of the review the REVIEW button goes off, and the tape returns
to the OUT point.
After automatic editing, to adjust the edit points and reexecute
the edit
Hold down the DELETE button and press the ENTRY/SHIFT button to
recall the edit points. After adjusting the edit points, press the AUTO
EDIT button to carry out the edit again.
For details of how to adjust edit points, see the section “Modifying Edit Points”
(page 76).
1-43
DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Chapter 4 Editing
84
Chapter 4 Editing
DMC Editing
You can carry out variable speed editing, controlling the player playback
speed from the recorder.
Overview of DMC Editing
The following figure illustrates how the tapes move on both the player and
recorder during DMC editing.
DMC editing can be used for insert or assemble editing, but cannot be used
for audio split editing.
DMC editing cannot be carried out using the i.LINK connector.
Preroll
Recorder
IN point OUT point Postroll
Playback
DMC editing Playback
Stop
Preroll time × initial speed
Player
IN point Postroll time × final speed
Tape
moves at
initial
speed
Playback at stored varying speed
Tape moves at
final speed
Stop
Chapter 4 Editing
Chapter 4 Editing
85
Carrying Out DMC Editing
Setting the edit points and player speed
Use the following procedure.
1
Press the RECORDER button.
2
Press the ASSEMBLE button or INSERT button to select an edit
mode.
3
Press the DMC EDIT button.
The unit switches to the DMC edit mode, and the DMC EDIT button
lights.
4
Holding down the ENTRY/SHIFT button, press the IN or OUT button
to set an edit point.
5
Press the PLAYER button, to set the player IN point.
Note
It is not possible to set the player OUT point.
6
Press the SEARCH button or search dial so that the SHUTTLE
indicator in the display section is lit.
7
Holding down the DMC EDIT button, turn the search dial to set the
initial speed.
To select normal speed as the initial speed, press the PLAY button.
The speed you set appears in the display section.
8
When the initial speed setting is complete, release the DMC EDIT
button.
MEMORY indicator
1,7,10
651
9
42
3
Display section
(Continued)
1-44 DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Chapter 4 Editing
86
Chapter 4 Editing
9
Press the PREVIEW button.
The tape is prerolled and then the recorder starts operating at normal
speed and the player at the set initial speed.
10
On passing the IN point, the MEMORY indicator begins to flash: turn
the search dial to vary the playback speed.
While the MEMORY indicator is flashing, the speed variations are
stored in memory. On passing the OUT point, the MEMORY indicator
changes from flashing to continuously lit, and the variable speed
storing ends.
If the MEMORY indicator lights continuously before the speed
variation end point
This indicates that the memory became full at that point. Thus even before
the OUT point is reached, it is not possible to record more speed variation.
The maximum capacity is a duration of 120 seconds.
To quit the DMC edit mode
Hold down the DELETE button and press the DMC EDIT button.
To execute the DMC edit
Press the AUTO EDIT button.
DMC editing is carried out at the stored varying speed.
Once the editing is carried out, the stored speed variation is lost from
memory.
To check the editing results
Press the REVIEW button.
DMC Editing
Chapter 4 Editing
Chapter 4 Editing
87
Preread Editing
Video and audio signals already recorded on the recorder tape can be used
as an edit source for insert editing. This type of editing is called “preread
editing”, as the VCR uses the preread heads to read the signals in advance
from the tape.
The video signals read out by the preread heads can be sent to a video
switcher, and combined with video signals from the player for recording.
The audio signals read out by the preread heads can be sent to an audio
mixer for mixing with audio signals from the player for recording, and can
be recorded either on the original channels or on other audio channels.
Player
Y
R-Y
B-Y
AUDIO OUT
DIGITAL AUDIO(AES/EBU) OUT
AUDIO IN
DIGITAL AUDIO(AES/EBU) IN
ANALOG VIDEO OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
S VIDEO OUT
SDI OUTPUT
ANALOG VIDEO IN
COMPONENT VIDEO IN
S VIDEO IN
SDI INPUT
Video source Audio source
Video switcher Audio mixer
Digital or analog video input Digital or analog audio input
Digital or analog video
output (preread signals) Digital or analog audio
output (preread signals)
DSR-2000/2000P(recorder)
1-45
DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
88
Chapter 4 Editing
Chapter 4 Editing
2,6 1
Note
•You cannot carry out preread editing using SDTI or i.LINK signals.
•When the preread mode is selected (the PREREAD button is lit), to
prevent feedback in the loop connection, no E-E video out is available,
regardless of the operating mode of the unit. When preread mode is
turned off after preread editing, however, if the same channel remains
connected to both input and output, an E-E signal is output, and feedback
will occur. To prevent this, select PB mode as in step 1 of the following
procedure.
•As for a video switcher, use a model that is not provided with a frame
memory.
To carry out preread editing, use the following procedure.
1
Press the PB button, turning it on.
2
Press the PREREAD button, turning it on.
3
Make the necessary connections for the preread editing. (See the
illustrations on the previous page and on page 129.)
4
After selecting the desired insert edit mode, carry out the preread
editing.
For details of how to select an edit mode, set edit points, etc., see Chapter 4
“Editing” (page 67).
5
When the preread editing is completed, remove the connections.
6
Press the PREREAD button, turning it off.
Preread Editing
Chapter 4 Editing
Chapter 4 Editing
89
Special Editing Methods
This section describes the following editing methods.
•Quick editing
After selecting an edit mode, you can save on editing time by setting the
edit points and previewing (or executing) the edit at the same time.
•Continuous editing
When you execute multiple edits in succession, you can edit from the
second time on by setting the player IN and OUT points only.
•Standalone editing
You can carry out editing using as the player an external device, for
example a signal generator, which cannot be controlled remotely through
the REMOTE-IN or REMOTE-OUT connector.
•Manual editing
Without setting edit points in advance, you can carry out editing
manually while watching the monitor screen.
•Adding a narration (Sound-on-sound)
Using this unit alone, it is possible to carry out simple sound-on-sound
editing (such as adding a narration).
1-46 DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
90
Chapter 4 Editing
Chapter 4 Editing
Quick Editing
After selecting an edit mode, you can save on editing time by setting the
edit points and previewing (or executing) the edit at the same time.
1
Press the PLAYER button, turning it on.
2
Stop the tape on the player at the position you wish to make the IN
point.
3
Press the RECORDER button, turning it on.
4
Stop the tape on the recorder at the position you wish to make the IN
point.
5
Press the PREVIEW button.
A preview starts.
The tape positions determined in steps 2 and 4 are set as the player IN
point and recorder IN point, respectively.
6
Watching the editing on the monitor, at the position you wish to make
the OUT point, hold down the ENTRY/SHIFT button and press the
OUT button.
Both the player OUT point and recorder OUT point are set.
7
Carry out another preview and modify the edit points as required.
For details of how to modify edit points, see the section “Modifying Edit
Points” (page 76).
13
5,7 2,4
86
Special Editing Methods
Chapter 4 Editing
Chapter 4 Editing
91
8
Press the AUTO EDIT button.
The edit starts.
When the edit finishes, the recorder stops at the OUT point and the
player stops about 2 seconds after the OUT point.
To edit even more quickly
By skipping the preview in the foregoing procedure, you can execute the
edit even more quickly. To do so, proceed as follows.
1
Perform steps 1 through 4 of the foregoing procedure.
2
Press the AUTO EDIT button.
The edit starts.
3
Watching the editing on the monitor, at the position you wish to make
the OUT point, hold down the ENTRY/SHIFT button and press the
OUT button.
The edit ends.
The point where the edit started is set as the IN point, and the point
where the edit ended is set as the OUT point.
Continuous Editing
When you execute multiple edits in succession, you can edit from the
second time on by setting the player IN and OUT points only.
After execution of an edit, the recorder returns automatically to the OUT
point. Therefore, the recorder OUT point of the current edit becomes the
IN point of the next edit.
Section edited in previous edit
OUT point of previous edit =
IN point of next edit
Recorder
Player
Section edited in next edit
IN point OUT point
1-47
DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
92
Chapter 4 Editing
Chapter 4 Editing
To carry out continuous editing, use the following procedure.
1
Press the PLAYER button, turning it on.
2
Set the player IN and OUT points.
For details of how to set IN and OUT points, see the section “Setting Edit
Points” (page 72).
On the recorder, the OUT point for the previous edit becomes the new
IN point.
3
Press the PREVIEW button to carry out a preview.
4
Press the AUTO EDIT button.
The edit starts.
When the edit finishes, the recorder stops at the OUT point and the
player stops about 2 seconds after the OUT point.
To stop the edit
Press the ENTRY/SHIFT button together with the OUT button.
The edit ends, and the point where you pressed the buttons becomes
the OUT point.
To abort the edit
Press the STOP button.
By repeating this process, you can carry out continuous editing.
With extended menu item 326, a setting can be made so that the preceding OUT
point automatically becomes the new IN point.
1
342
Special Editing Methods
Chapter 4 Editing
Chapter 4 Editing
93
Standalone Editing
This method allows you to use as the player an external device which
cannot be controlled remotely through the REMOTE-IN or REMOTE-
OUT connector. For example, you can record a color bar signal from a
signal generator in the joints between the scenes of an already completed
tape.
For standalone editing, use the following procedure.
1
In the input selection section, select the signal being generated by the
signal generator connected to the unit.
For details of the input selection section, see page 14.
2
Press both the PLAYER button and RECORDER button, turning them
off.
3
Set the IN point and, if necessary, also OUT point.
The AUTO EDIT button flashes.
For details of how to set IN and OUT points, see the section “Setting Edit
Points” (page 72).
4
Press the AUTO EDIT button.
The edit is carried out.
12
43
1-48 DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Chapter 4 Editing
Chapter 4 Editing
95
Adding a Narration (Sound-on-Sound)
By means of preread editing with an audio mixer connected (see page 87),
you can mix in an audio signal with the existing recorded soundtrack, but
extension menu item 819 provides a simple sound-on-sound editing
function for adding a narration, using this unit alone.
To add a narration from microphone input
As an example, the following procedure describes how to record a
narration mixed with audio channels 1 and 2 already recorded on the tape,
when the microphone is connected to input audio channel 1.
In this case, first connect the microphone to the AUDIO IN CH-1
connector, and set the audio input and editing mode as follows.
•In the input selection section (see page 14), with the CH1, 1/2 button,
select an analog audio signal.
•In the edit mode setting section (see page 20), press the INSERT CH-1
and CH-2 buttons, turning them on.
After checking the above settings, use the following procedure.
1
Set extension menu item 819 as follows.
Extension menu item 819 settings (on monitor screen)
For details of extension menu item 819 settings, see page 123.
2
Press the MIXING button in the upper control panel, turning it on.
3
Carry out insert editing on audio channels 1 and 2 (CH-1 and CH-2)
while reciting the narration into the microphone.
Recording channel numbers
ITEM-819
AUDIO INPUT SOURCE
ARRANGE
ch1:
ch2:
ch3:
ch4:
in1 in2 in3 in4 tape
--------------------
on
on
on
on
Input channel numbers
94
Chapter 4 Editing
Chapter 4 Editing
Manual Editing
To carry out manual editing, start playback on the player beforehand, then
use the following procedure.
1
Press the RECORDER button, turning it on.
2
Use the search dial in jog or shuttle mode to find the edit start point
(the recorder IN point), and stop the tape just before this point.
3
Select an edit mode.
For details of how to select an edit mode, see the section “Selecting an Edit
Mode” (page 71).
4
Press the PLAY button.
The recorder begins playback.
Note
It takes about two seconds until the playback video stabilizes. For this
reason, start the playback from before the segment of video you wish
to use.
5
At the edit start point (the recorder IN point), press the EDIT button
and PLAY button simultaneously.
The edit starts.
6
At the edit end point (the recorder OUT point), press the PLAY button.
The edit ends, and the recorder continues with playback.
7
Press the STOP button to stop the recorder playback.
4,6 1
32
75
Special Editing Methods
1-49
DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Chapter 5 ClipLink Operation
Chapter 5 ClipLink Operation
97
Chapter5
ClipLink Operation
Overview of ClipLink Operation
The ClipLink function provides the following.
• Displaying ClipLink log data
• Cueing up to Mark IN/OUT points and cue points
• Rewriting ClipLink log data (reel numbers, Mark IN/
OUT points, and OK/NG status only)
• Creating additional ClipLink log data and deleting
ClipLink log data (Mark IN/OUT points only)
• Automatically creating new ClipLink log data (Mark
IN/OUT points only)
When Mark IN/OUT points are created, the scene
number and take number for them are fixed at 000 and
00, respectively.
The above operations other than automatic creation of
new ClipLink log data require the ClipLink log data
list display.
Notes
• For a tape on which index pictures are already
recorded, you cannot change any ClipLink log data
other than the reel numbers and OK/NG status.
(When index pictures are recorded on a tape, the
ClipLink log data list for the tape shows an IP
indication.)
• You cannot carry out ClipLink operation such as
“Continue” on the DSR-1/1P or DSR-300/300P/
500WS/500WSP for a tape whose ClipLink log data
has been modified on this unit.
For an overview of the ClipLink function, see the appendix “
ClipLink Guide” (page 147).
1-50 DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Chapter 5 ClipLink Operation
98
Chapter 5 ClipLink Operation
Displaying ClipLink Log Data
To display ClipLink log data, hold down the ENTRY/
SHIFT button and press the LIST/– button.
The following ClipLink log data list appears in the
monitor.
To return to the original monitor display
To exit from the ClipLink log data list and return to the
original monitor display, hold down the ENTRY/
SHIFT button and press the LIST/– button.
Detailed Data Display
To check more details related to the data item selected
on the ClipLink log data list, proceed as follows.
1
Using the search dial, move the selection mark
(asterisk) to the data item for which you wish to
display details.
2
Press the SEARCH button.
While you hold the SEARCH button down, the
detailed data display appears.
ENTRY/SHIFT button
LIST/– button
(003/196)
REEL NO XXXXXXXX
1 M 00:01:23:00 OK
2 M 00:02:35:00 OK
* 3 M 00:03:50:00 OK
4 M 00:04:03:00 OK
5 M 00:04:48:00 NG
6 M 00:04:53:00 OK
7 M 00:05:08:00 OK
8 I 00:06:13:00 IP
CLIPLINK LOG DATA LIST
OK/NG status or
IP (index picture)
indication
Mark IN/cue timecode
M = Mark IN point indication
C = cue point indication
I = Index picture address indication
Data serial number
21
(003/196)
MARK IN 00:03:50:00
MARK OUT 00:04:03:00
OK/NG OK
SCENE NO 001
TAKE NO 03
CLIPLINK LOG DATA LIST
Mark IN point
display (cue point
and index picture
addresses not
displayed)
Chapter 5 ClipLink Operation
Chapter 5 ClipLink Operation
99
Cuing Up to Mark IN/OUT and Cue Points
Cuing Up to Any Desired
Position
To cue up to the point specified by the data item
selected on the ClipLink log data list, proceed as
follows.
1
Using the search dial, move the selection mark
(asterisk) to the desired data item on the ClipLink
log data list.
When the selected data item display contains
“M” mark
The Mark IN point address is stored as the IN point
and the Mark OUT point address is stored as the
OUT point. At the same time, the IN button and
the OUT button on the control panel light.
When the selected data item display contains
“C” mark
The cue point address is stored as the IN point and
the IN button on the control panel lights.
2
Operate as follows.
• To cue up to the mark IN point or cue point
Holding down the IN button, press the PREROLL
button.
• To cue up to the mark OUT point
Holding down the OUT button, press the
PREROLL button.
This exits from the ClipLink log data list and cues
up to the selected position.
Cuing Up to Adjacent Mark IN/
Cue Points
Once you select data on a ClipLink log data list, you
can cue up to the point preceding or following the
selected data with ease without reverting to the
ClipLink log data list.
To cue up to the Mark IN point or cue point
preceding the current point selected on the
list
Holding down the MARK/+ button, press the REW
button.
During the cue-up operation is in progress, the REW
button flashes.
To cue up to the Mark IN point or cue point
following the current point selected on the list
Holding down the MARK/+ button, press the F FWD
button.
During the cue-up operation is in progress, the F FWD
button flashes.
21
MARK/+ button
REW button
F FWD button
1-51
DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Chapter 5 ClipLink Operation
100
Chapter 5 ClipLink Operation
You can rewrite the reel number, Mark IN/OUT points
and OK/NG status included in the ClipLink log data.
Changing the Reel Number
To change the reel number of the data item selected on
the ClipLink log data list, proceed as follows.
1
Using the search dial, move the selection mark
(asterisk) to the desired data item on the ClipLink
log data list.
2
Hold down the STOP button and press the SET
button.
The following setting screen appears.
3
Turn the search dial to select the digit to change.
Rotating the search dial clockwise moves the
current digit position to the right, and
counterclockwise moves it to the left.
4
Hold down the SEARCH button and turn the
search dial to change the digit indicated by an
arrow (µ).
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 until the settings for all digits
are complete.
6
When all digits have been set, hold down the
ENTRY/SHIFT button and press the MARK/+
button.
The reel number changes.
7
Hold down the STOP button and press the SET
button.
This returns to the original ClipLink log data list.
Note
If you carry out step 7 skipping step 6, the original
ClipLink log data list appears again on the monitor
and, in this case, the reel number is not rewritten.
Changing Mark IN/OUT Points
To change Mark IN/OUT points selected on the
ClipLink log data list, perform the following
procedure.
When Mark IN/OUT points are rewritten to the
cassette memory, the frame digits of the address data
are processed as follows.
For Mark IN point: Any frame-digits value is
counted as 1 second.
For Mark OUT point: Any frame-digits value is
ignored.
Rewriting ClipLink Log Data
2,7
1,3
4
6
(003/196)
*REEL NO (XXXXXXXX)
REEL NO (YYYYYYYY)
CLIPLINK LOG DATA LIST
1,3,5
64
82,7
Chapter 5 ClipLink Operation
Chapter 5 ClipLink Operation
101
1
Using the search dial, move the selection mark
(asterisk) to the desired data item on the ClipLink
log data list.
The Mark IN point address is stored as the IN
point and the Mark OUT point address is stored as
the OUT point. At the same time, the IN button
and OUT button light and the ENTRY/SHIFT
button starts flashing.
2
Perform either one of the following operations.
•Hold down the ENTRY/SHIFT button and press
the LIST/– button, exiting from the ClipLink log
data list.
•Cue up to the IN point or OUT point. (See page
99.)
3
Cue up to the tape position to be made the new
Mark IN point. (See page 72.)
4
Holding down the IN button, press the ENTRY/
SHIFT button.
The ENTRY/SHIFT button lights and the Mark IN
point address changes.
5
Cue up to the tape position to be made the new
Mark OUT point. (See page 72.)
6
Holding down the OUT button, press the ENTRY/
SHIFT button.
The Mark OUT point address changes.
7
Holding down the ENTRY/SHIFT button, press
the LIST/– button to display the ClipLink log data
list, then make sure the selection mark (asterisk) is
kept at the position of the desired data item
selected in step 1.
If the selection mark (asterisk) is at a wrong
position
Using the search dial, return the selection mark to
the desired data item.
8
Holding down the ENTRY/SHIFT button, press
the MARK/+ button.
The ENTRY/SHIFT button goes out and the Mark
IN point and Mark OUT point addresses are
rewritten.
Changing the OK/NG Status
To change the OK/NG status of the data item selected
on the ClipLink log data list, proceed as follows.
1
Using the serarch dial, move the selection mark
(asterisk) to the desired data item on the ClipLink
log data list.
2
Hold down the STOP button and press the SET
button.
The following setting screen appears.
3
Hold down the SEARCH button and turn the
search dial to change the setting to OK or NG as
required.
4
Holding down the ENTRY/SHIFT button, press
the MARK/+ button.
The OK/NG status is rewritten.
2,5
1
3
4
(003/196)
* 3 M 00:03:50:00 OK
OK/NG OK
CLIPLINK LOG DATA LIST
(Continued)
1-52 DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Chapter 5 ClipLink Operation
102
Chapter 5 ClipLink Operation
5
Hold down the STOP button and press the SET
button.
This returns to the original ClipLink log data list.
Note
If you carry out step 5 skipping step 4, the original
ClipLink log data list appears again on the monitor
and, in this case, the OK/NG status is not rewritten.
Rewriting ClipLink Log Data
Chapter 5 ClipLink Operation
Chapter 5 ClipLink Operation
103
Adding to/Deleting From ClipLink Log Data
You can add new Mark IN/OUT point data to the
ClipLink log data or delete Mark IN/OUT point data
from the ClipLink log data.
Adding Mark IN/OUT Points
Set the setup menu item 129 (CLIPLINK) to ON
beforehand, then proceed as follows.
For information about how to operate the setup menu, see
Chapter 6 “Setup Menu” on page 107.
1
Cue up to the tape position you wish to make an
additional Mark IN point. (See page 72.)
2
Holding down the IN button, press the ENTRY/
SHIFT button.
The IN button lights, and the Mark IN point
address is set.
3
Cue up to the tape position you wish to make an
additional Mark OUT point. (See page 72.)
4
Holding down the OUT button, press the ENTRY/
SHIFT button.
The OUT button and ENTRY/SHIFT button light,
and the Mark OUT point address is set.
1,3
42
5
5
Holding down the ENTRY/SHIFT button, press
the MARK/+ button.
The ENTRY/SHIFT button goes out, and the Mark
IN point and Mark OUT point data is added to the
end of the existing ClipLink log data.
Note
The volume of ClipLink log data that can be stored
in a cassette memory depends on the cassette
memory capacity as follows.
When adding to the existing ClipLink log data,
carefully watch the ClipLink log data list not to
allow the additional data to exceed the available
cassette memory capacity.
Deleting Mark IN/OUT Points
After displaying the ClipLink log data, proceed as
follows.
1
Using the search dial, move the selection mark
(asterisk) to the desired data item on the ClipLink
log data list.
Cassette memory
capacity Storable volume of data
4K bits 45 pairs of Mark IN and
Mark OUT points
16K bits 198 pairs of Mark IN and
Mark OUT points
1
3
2
(Continued)
1-53
DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Chapter 5 ClipLink Operation
104
Chapter 5 ClipLink Operation
Adding to/Deleting From ClipLink Log Data
2
Holding down the DELETE button, press the
MARK/+ button.
The specified data disappears from the ClipLink
log data list.
3
Holding down the ENTRY/SHIFT button, press
the MARK/+ button.
Note
If you exit from the ClipLink log data list skipping
step 3, the previous data is restored. The data
specified for deletion is not deleted.
Chapter 5 ClipLink Operation
Chapter 5 ClipLink Operation
105
Automatically Creating New ClipLink Log Data
To erase ClipLink log data
After displaying the ClipLink log data list, proceed as
follows.
1
Holding down the DELETE button, press the
LIST/– button.
The data shown on the ClipLink log data list
disappears.
2
Holding down the ENTRY/SHIFT button, press
the MARK/+ button.
The message “NO CLIPLINK LOG DATA”
appears on the screen and the ClipLink log data is
completely erased.
Operation Automatic creation of Mark IN/OUT points
Recording The recording starting point is made a Mark
IN point and the recording ending point is
made a Mark OUT point.
Editing The edit IN point (the video IN point or audio
IN point whichever coming first) is made a
Mark IN point and the edit OUT point is made
a Mark OUT point.
When the setup menu item 129 (CLIPLINK) is set to
ON, you can automatically create new Mark IN/OUT
points during recording or editing operation.
For information about how to operate the setup menu, see
Chapter 6 “Setup Menu” on page 107.
New Mark IN/OUT points are created as follows.
Notes
•If recording or editing is carried out when the setup
menu item 129 (CLIPLINK) is set to OFF, the
existing ClipLink log data is erased.
•If you carry out recording or editing on a tape on
which index pictures are already recorded, the
existing ClipLink log data for the tape is lost.
•The Mark IN/OUT point data automatically created
during recording or editing operation for a tape on
which no index pictures are recorded is added to the
end of the existing ClipLink log data for the tape.
In this case, if you carry out recording or editing on a
tape position linked to the existing ClipLink log data,
the link between them is lost. Therefore, when you
start creating new ClipLink log data, where on the
tape to start recording or editing must be determined
very carefully. If the existing ClipLink log data is
no longer required, erase it beforehand.
2
1
1-54 DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Chapter 6 Setup Menu
Chapter 6 Setup Menu
107
Chapter6
Setup Menu
Menu System Configuration
The setup menu system of this unit comprises the basic
menu and extended menu.
• Basic menu
This menu is used to make settings relating, for
example, to the following.
–the digital hours meter
–the preroll time
–the text information superimposed on the video
output to the monitor
–the menu banks for retaining menu settings
For detailed information about menu operation relating to
the digital hours meter, see “Digital hours meter” (page
136).
•Extended menu
This menu is used to make a wide range of settings
relating to the functions of this unit, for example, the
control panel functions, video and audio control, and
digital data processing.
Basic Menu
Items in the Basic Menu
The basic menu items (excluding the items related to
the digital hours meter) are listed in the following
table.
In the “Settings” column of the table, the factory
default settings are indicated by an enclosing box.
1-55
DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Chapter 6 Setup Menu
108
Chapter 6 Setup Menu
Basic Menu
Item number Item name Settings
001 PREROLL TIME 0S... 5S ...30S: Set the preroll time to between 0 and 30 seconds in steps of 1 second.
A preroll time of at least 5 seconds is recommended when using this unit for editing.
002
a)
CHARACTER
H-POSITION Adjust the horizontal screen position (as a hexadecimal value) of the text information
output from the VIDEO OUT 3 (SUPER) connector and SDI OUTPUT 3 (SUPER)
connector for superimposed display on the monitor.
00... 0A ...2A (DSR-2000) /00... 09 ...29 (DSR-2000P): The hexadecimal value 00 is for
the far left of the screen. Increasing the value moves the position of the characters to
the right.
003
a)
CHARACTER
V-POSITION Adjust the vertical screen position (as a hexadecimal value) of the text information
output from the VIDEO OUT 3 (SUPER) connector and SDI OUTPUT 3 (SUPER)
connector for superimposed display on the monitor.
00... 2E ...38 (DSR-2000)/00... 37 ...43 (DSR-2000P): The hexadecimal value 00 is for
the top of the screen. Increasing the value lowers the position of the characters.
004 SYNCHRONIZE When editing using this unit as a controller and an external VCR connected to this unit
via a 9-pin remote control cable or i. LINK/DV cable, this item determines whether or not
to operate the two units in phase synchronization.
ON : Operate in phase synchronization.
OFF: Do not operate in phase synchronization.
005 DISPLAY
INFORMATION
SELECT
Determine the kind of text information to be output from the VIDEO OUT 3 (SUPER)
connector and SDI OUTPUT 3 (SUPER) connector when the CHARACTER switch on
the subsidiary control panel is set to ON.
T&STA : Time data and the units status.
T&UB: Time data and user bit data. (When U-BIT is selected with the COUNTER SEL
button, the user bit data and time data arranged in that order are displayed.)
T&CNT: Time data and counter count. (When COUNTER is selected with the
COUNTER SEL button, the counter count and time data arranged in that order are
displayed.)
T&T: Time data and time code (TC or VITC).
TIME: Timecode (TC or VITC) only.
DATE: Recording date and time.
006 LOCAL
FUNCTION
ENABLE
Determine which tape transport control buttons on the control panel are enabled when
this unit is controlled from external equipment.
DIS: All buttons and switches are disabled.
ST&EJ : Only the STOP button and EJECT button are enabled.
ENA: All buttons and switches except the RECORDER button and PLAYER button are
enabled.
007 TAPE TIMER
DISPLAY Determine whether to display the counter in 12-hour mode or 24-hour mode.
+ –12H : 12-hour mode
24H: 24-hour mode
008 MONITORING
SELECTION FOR
VTR-TO-VTR
EDIT
For editing with two DSR-2000/2000P units, determine whether the recorder unit is
forced into E-E mode when the recorder PLAYER button is pressed to view the player
playback signals on the monitor.
MANU : Do not force the recorder into E-E mode.
AUTO: Force the recorder into E-E mode.
009
a)
CHARACTER
TYPE Determine the type of characters such as time code output from the VIDEO OUT 3
(SUPER) connector and SDI OUTPUT 3 (SUPER) connector for superimposed display
on the monitor.
WHITE : White letters on a black background.
BLACK: Black letters on a white background.
W/OUT: White letters with black outline.
B/OUT: Black letters with white outline.
Items in the basic menu
(Continued)
a) When setting items 002, 003, and 009, watch the monitor screen, and adjust to the required state.
Chapter 6 Setup Menu
Chapter 6 Setup Menu
109
Items in the basic menu (continued)
a) When setting items 011 and 015, watch the monitor screen, and adjust to the required state.
Item number Item name Settings
011
a)
CHARACTER V-
SIZE Determine the vertical size of characters such as time code output from the VIDEO OUT
3 (SUPER) connector and SDI OUTPUT 3 (SUPER) connector for superimposed
display on the monitor.
×1: Standard size
×2: 2 times standard size
015
a)
MENU DISPLAY Determine the type of characters in menu text output from the VIDEO OUT 3 (SUPER)
connector and SDI OUTPUT 3 (SUPER) connector for superimposed display on the
monitor.
WHITE : White letters on a black background.
BLACK: Black letters on a white background.
W/OUT: White letters with black outline.
B/OUT: Black letters with white outline.
016 ALARM Select whether or not to display alarm messages.
OFF: No alarm messages.
LIMIT : Display alarm messages only during recording or editing.
ON: Display alarm messages.
099 MENU GRADE For setup menu operations, select whether to display the basic menu information only or
both the basic menu information and the extended menu information.
BASIC : Display the basic menu information only.
ENHAN: Display both the basic menu information and the extended menu information.
Item number Item name Settings
B01
B02
B03
B04
B11
B12
B13
B14
RECALL BANK 1
RECALL BANK 2
RECALL BANK 3
RECALL BANK 4
SAVE BANK 1
SAVE BANK 2
SAVE BANK 3
SAVE BANK 4
Set to ON to recall menu settings from menu bank 1.
Set to ON to recall menu settings from menu bank 2.
Set to ON to recall menu settings from menu bank 3.
Set to ON to recall menu settings from menu bank 4.
Set to ON to save current menu settings to menu bank 1.
Set to ON to save current menu settings to menu bank 2.
Set to ON to save current menu settings to menu bank 3.
Set to ON to save current menu settings to menu bank 4.
017 SUB STATUS
DISPLAY SELECT Select supplementary status information superimposed on the output from the VIDEO
OUT 3 connector and SDI OUT 3 connectors to the monitor.
OFF : Nothing of supplementary status information
TIC MODE: Indications of the operating mode of internal time code generator
AUDIO MIX MODE: Indications of input audio mixing
TAPE REMAIN: Remaining capacity of the tape
1-56 DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Chapter 6 Setup Menu
110
Chapter 6 Setup Menu
Basic Menu
Basic Menu Operations
This section describes the basic menu display and how
to change the settings.
For information about how to use items B01 to B14, see the
section “Menu bank operations (menu items B01 to B14)”
(page 112).
Displaying the menu
Press the MENU button.
The F FWD button and VARIABLE button light and
the setting of the currently selected menu item appears
in the display section of the lower control panel.
To display the full item name
Hold down the F FWD button.
MENU button
Display section
VARIABLE button
F FWD button
Item number (flashing) Setting
Item name
To display the item group name
Items in the menu are arranged in groups, by the 100's
digit of the item number. To display the name of the
group to which the currently selected item belongs,
hold down the VARIABLE button.
To display menus on the monitor
Set the CHARACTER switch on the subsidiary control
panel to ON, then press the MENU button.
You can now view the menu as shown in the following
figure on a monitor connected to the VIDEO OUT 3
(SUPER) connector or SDI OUTPUT 3 (SUPER)
connector.
Item group name
*HO1:OPE HOURS - 102
HO2:DRUM HOURS - 52
HOUR METER
-------
Group name for the
currently selected item
Cursor indicating the
currently selected
item
Chapter 6 Setup Menu
Chapter 6 Setup Menu
111
Changing the currently displayed menu
item
Turn the search dial.
Turning the search dial clockwise increments the item
number, and turning it counterclockwise decrements
the item number.
When you turn the search dial, the item number
changes at a rate depending on the search dial position
(when the SHUTTLE indicator is lit) or on the search
dial rotation rate (when the JOG indicator is lit).
To skip from one item group to the next
Hold down the VARIABLE button, and turn the search
dial.
Changing a menu item setting value
To change the setting value of the currently displayed
menu item, use the following procedure.
1
Hold down the SEARCH button, and turn the
search dial.
Search dial
SHUTTLE
JOG
SHUTTLE/JOG indicator
VARIABLE button
12
The setting value changes at a rate depending on
the search dial position (when the SHUTTLE
indicator is lit) or on the search dial rotation rate
(when the JOG indicator is lit).
2
When the desired setting value is displayed, press
the SET button.
This saves the new setting value, and the menu
display disappears from the display section.
To abandon making a change
Press the MENU button before pressing the SET
button.
The menu display disappears from the display
section without the new setting value being saved.
Resetting the menu settings to their
factory default values
1
Press the MENU button.
The menu appears in the display section.
2
Press the RESET button.
3
Press the SET button.
The menu settings are reset to their factory default
settings.
31 2
Setting value (flashes while changing)
1-57
DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Chapter 6 Setup Menu
112
Chapter 6 Setup Menu
Basic Menu
Menu bank operations (menu items B01 to
B14)
This unit allows four different complete sets of menu
settings to be saved in what are termed "menu banks"
numbered 1 to 4. Saved sets of menu settings can be
recalled for use as required.
To jump to menu item B01
You can recall any required menu by turning the
search dial after pressing the MENU button.
If you press the MENU button first, then the
COUNTER SEL button, you can jump directly to
menu item B1 or H01. The recalled menu item toggles
between B01 and H01 every time you press the
COUNTER SEL button.
Saving the current active menu settings
Set one of menu items B11 SAVE BANK 1 to B14
SAVE BANK 4 to ON, depending on which of the
menu banks you wish to save in, then press the SET
button.
Recalling settings from a menu bank
Set one of menu items B01 RECALL BANK 1 to B04
RECALL BANK 4 to ON, depending on which of the
menu banks you wish to recall from, then press the
SET button.
Current active
menu settings
Recall
Save Menu bank 1
Menu bank 2
Menu bank 3
Menu bank 4
Recall
Save
Recall
Save
Recall
Save
Chapter 6 Setup Menu
Chapter 6 Setup Menu
113
Extended Menu
Items in the Extended Menu
The extended menu contains the following items.
In the Settings column of the table, the factory default
settings are indicated by an enclosing box.
Item number Item name Settings
101 SELECTION FOR
SEARCH DIAL
ENABLE
Select how the unit enters the search mode.
DIAL : Press the SEARCH or VARIABLE button or, except during recording/editing, turn
the search dial.
KEY: Press the SEARCH or VARIABLE button.
Menu items in the 100s, relating to the control panels
102 MAXIMUM TAPE
SPEED Specify the maximum tape speed in search mode (shuttle) or F.FWD (fast forward)/
REW (rewind) mode.
105 REFERENCE
SYSTEM ALARM Select whether or not to display a warning when the reference video signal is not
supplied or is out of phase with the input video signal.
OFF: No warning.
LIMIT : Flash the STOP button as a warning only when the reference video signal is out
of phase with the input video signal.
ON: Flash the STOP button as a warning.
107 REC INHIBIT
LAMP FLASHING Select whether to keep lit or flash the REC INHIBIT indicator when recording is
prevented with the REC INHIBIT switch on the subsidiary control panel set to OFF.
OFF : Light the REC INHIBIT indicator.
ON: Flash the REC INHIBIT indicator.
108 AUTO EE
SELECT When a cassette is inserted and the PB/EE button is lit,select the operation modes in
which input video and audio signals are automatically handled in E-E mode.
S/F/R : In STOP/F FWD (fast-forward)/REW (rewind) modes
STOP: In STOP mode
109 FORCED EE
WHEN TAPE
UNTHREAD
During tape threading and unthreading, or when no cassette is inserted, select whether
the PB/EE button controls the output signal PB/EE setting.
ON : No control (the signal is always an E-E signal).
OFF: Control.
Sub-item
1 SHUTTLE Specify the maximum tape speed in search mode (shuttle).
X16: Maximum 16 times normal
X32 : Maximum 32 times normal
X60: Maximum 60 times normal
2 F.FWD/REW Specify the maximum tape speed in F.FWD/REW mode.
X32: Maximum 32 times normal
X60: Maximum 60 times normal
X85 : Maximum 85 times normal
MAX: No maximum tape speed is specified.
Note
When this item is set to MAX, the playback video signal is muted.
(Continued)
1-58 DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Chapter 6 Setup Menu
114
Chapter 6 Setup Menu
Extended Menu
Item number Item name Settings
Menu items in the 100s, relating to the control panels (continued)
118 KEY INHIBIT
SWITCH
EFFECTIVE AREA
Sub-item
Select which switches and buttons can be operated when the KEY INHIBIT switch on
the subsidiary control panel is set to ON. The following sub-items control different sets
of switches and buttons independently.
REMOTE
SELECT Select whether the REMOTE button on the upper control panel is enabled.
DIS : Disabled.
ENA: Enabled.
1
CONTROL
PANEL Select which switches and buttons on the control panel of this unit as well as the
external control panel connected to this unit are enabled.
DIS : All switches and buttons are disabled.
EDIT: All switches and buttons for editing operations are disabled.
ENA: All switches and buttons are enabled.
3
2MON./ INPUT
SEL Select whether the buttons in the input selection section on the upper control panel and
the MONITOR SELECT buttons on the lower control panel are enabled.
DIS : Disabled.
ENA: Enabled.
119 VARIABLE
SPEED LIMIT IN
KEY PANEL
CONTROL
Select whether to rewind the tape automatically when recording or playback reaches the
end of a tape.
DIS: Do not rewind the tape automatically.
ENA : Rewind the tape automatically.
125 AUTO REW
Select the playback speed range when carrying out playback in variable mode from the
control panel of this unit.
OFF : –1 to +2 times normal speed
ON: 0 to +1 times normal speed.
117 CONTROL PANEL
SELECTION Select the control panel function when the CONTROL PANEL switch on the subsidiary
control panel is set to EXT.
SW : Only the control panel connected to the CONTROL PANEL control connector on
the connector panel functions.
PARA: Both the control panel connected to the CONTROL PANEL connector and the
control panel of this unit function.
116 JOG DIAL
RESPONSE Select the tape speed characteristics for the search dial rotation rate in jog mode.
TYPE1 : Tape speed varies linearly over the range –1 to +1.
TYPE2: Tape speed varies stepwise as shown in the figure below
a)
over the range –3 to
+3. (Characterized by a zone around –1 and +1 where the tape speed is independent
of the rotation rate)
TYPE3: Tape speed varies linearly over the range –3 to +3, as shown in the figure
below
b)
.
a) b)
+3
+1
-1
-3
FWD
FWD
RVS
RVS
+3
-3
FWD
FWD
RVS
RVS
Speed
(reverse)
Rotation rate
TYPE 2 TYPE 3 Speed
Rotation rate
(Continued)
Chapter 6 Setup Menu
Chapter 6 Setup Menu
115
Item number Item name Settings
Menu items in the 100s, relating to the control panels (continued)
129 CLIPLINK Select whether to create ClipLink log data.
OFF : Do not create.
ON: Create.
When recording, the recording starting point is made a Mark IN point and the recording
ending point is made a Mark OUT point. When editing, the edit IN point (the video IN
point or audio IN point whichever coming first) is made a Mark IN point and the edit OUT
point (the video OUT point or audio OUT point whichever coming second) is made a
Mark OUT point.
Note
If recording or editing is carried out when this item is set to OFF, the existing ClipLink
log data is erased.
130 DISPLAY DIMMER
CONTROL Set the brightness of the audio level meters.
0 ... 1 ...6 : Set in this range. 0 is the brightest, and 6 the dimmest.
Item number Item name Settings
201 PARA RUN Select whether or not to use synchronized operation for two or more VCRs.
DIS : No synchronized operation.
ENA: Use synchronized operation.
Note
To use synchronized operation for two or more VCRs, set this item to ENA on all of the
VCRs.
Menu items in the 200s, relating to the remote control interface
Item number Item name Settings
Menu items in the 300s, relating to editing operations
305 SYNC GRADE When editing in phase-synchronized mode with item 004 set to ON, select the target
phase synchronization accuracy.
ACCUR : ±0 frame accuracy.
ROUGH: ±1 frame accuracy.
301 VAR SPEED
RANGE FOR
SYNCHRONIZATION
Select the playback speed range when carrying out playback in variable mode from a
remote control unit connected to the REMOTE-IN connector or REMOTE-OUT
connector.
–1~+1: –1~+1 times normal speed.
–1.5 ~+2 : –1.5 ~+2 times normal speed
306 DMC INITIAL
SPEED Select the initial speed automatically set when carrying out DMC editing.
MANUAL : The speed determined by the rotation of the search dial.
PLAY: Normal playback speed.
STILL: Stationary.
±0.03~±1: Speed set in the range ±0.03 to ±1 (select from ±1, ±0.5, ±0.03, ±0.2, ±0.1.)
(Continued)
1-59
DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Chapter 6 Setup Menu
116
Chapter 6 Setup Menu
Extended Menu
Item number Item name Settings
Menu items in the 300s, relating to editing operations (continued)
307 AUTO-DELETION
FOR
INCONSISTENT
DATA
Select what happens when an erroneous edit point is set.
MANU : A warning is given by flashing the DELETE button on the lower control panel.
The operator must manually delete the unnecessary edit point .
NEG&E: When inconsistent edit points are set, such as when an OUT point is before an
IN point, or an audio OUT point is before an audio IN point, or when too many edit
points are specified, the previously set edit point is deleted.
NEG: When inconsistent edit points are set, such as when an OUT point is before an IN
point, or an audio OUT point is before an audio IN point, the previously set edit point
is deleted. When too many edit points are specified, the DELETE button on the
control panel flashes to give a warning.
Note
Pressing the button corresponding to an edit point to be deleted and the DELETE button
simultaneously deletes the edit point. If an erroneous edit point is set (the DELETE
button is flashing), editing is not executed.
(Continued)
308 SELECTION OF
STD/NON-STD
FOR ANALOG
VIDEO IN
When no signal is input to the REF. VIDEO IN connector, select whether or not to
synchronize the playback circuits with the input analog video signal.
STD : Synchronize. Use this setting when a standard signal is always input (forced STD
mode).
N-STD: Do not synchronize. Use this setting when the input video signal is unstable
(forced NON-STD mode).
When using a VCR with no built-in time base corrector (e.g. a home-use VHS-system
VCR), select N-STD.
311 ANALOG AUDIO
EDIT PRESET
REPLACE FOR
CH1
312 ANALOG AUDIO
EDIT PRESET
REPLACE FOR
CH2
313 ANALOG AUDIO
EDIT PRESET
REPLACE FOR
CH3
314 ANALOG AUDIO
EDIT PRESET
REPLACE FOR
CH4
Items 311 to 314: When using an editor (PVE-500, BVE-600, etc.) or a remote controller
which cannot control digital audio edit preset, select how to activate edit preset of each
digital audio channel on this unit using the analog audio edit preset function of the editor
or remote controller.
Set edit preset of each digital audio channel (channels 1 to 4) of this unit on or off
according to the analog audio preset specified by the remote controller or editor.
NO DEFINITION
ANALOG CH1: Follow edit preset of analog channel 1.
ANALOG CH2: Follow edit preset of analog channel 2.
ANALOG CH1+CH2: Follow edit preset of analog channel 1 or 2.
The default settings for each item are as follows:
311: ANALOG CH1
312: ANALOG CH2
313: NO DEFINITION
314: NO DEFINITION
317 AUDIO EDIT
MODE Specify the type of editing for audio signals.
CUT: Cut editing (discontinuity in audio signal may result at the editing point, causing
noise during playback.)
CROSS FADE : Cross-fade
FADE: Fade in and fade out
IN OUT
IN/OUT
Chapter 6 Setup Menu
Chapter 6 Setup Menu
117
Item number Item name Settings
318 EDIT RETRY When editing with two DSR-2000/2000P units, select the operation if the recorder was
not synchronized in time. (Make this setting on the recorder.)
OFF: Editing is not carried out, and the unit stops.
ON : The editing is automatically retried (up to twice).
327 AUDIO MODE
CHANGE Select whether to allow audio data recorded on tape in two-channel mode (or four-
channel) to be re-recorded in four-channel (or two-channel mode).
OFF : Do not allow re-recording in a different audio mode.
ON: Allow re-recording in a different audio mode.
When this item is set to ON, the type of editing for audio signals is always a cut editing.
Menu items in the 300s, relating to editing operations (continued)
319 PREREAD
SELECT Specify the preread editing operation.
A/V : Preread for both audio and video.
AUDIO: Preread for audio only.
VIDEO: Preread for video only.
The preread operation can be controlled with the PREREAD button on the control panel
or from the 9-pin remote control interface.
326 AUTOMATIC IN
ENTRY AFTER
AUTO EDIT
Select whether or not to automatically set the OUT point of the previous edit as the next
IN point at the end of an automatic edit.
OFF : No automatic setting.
R: Set recorder IN point automatically.
R & P: Set recorder IN point automatically, and also player IN point in two-VCR editing.
Item number Item name Settings
401 FUNCTION MODE
AFTER CUE-UP Select the state that the unit goes into after a cuing-up operation.
STOP : Stops (the STOP mode).
STILL: Still playback (in search mode).
Note
When controlling this unit from the BVE-800 editor, set this item to STOP.
Menu items in the 400s, relating to preroll
403 AUTOMATIC
PREROLL
REFERENCE
ENTRY
Select whether or not the edit IN point is automatically set by pressing the PREROLL
button when the IN point is not set before starting preroll.
DIS : IN point is not set automatically.
ENA: I N point is set automatically.
335 OUT
REFERENCE
SELECT
When signals are input to both of the REF. VIDEO IN connector and the VIDEO IN
connector, determine which input signal to use as the reference signal.
REF VIDEO : Use the signal input to a REF. VIDEO IN connector as the reference video
signal.
The input video signal to be edited is required to be in synchronization with the
reference video signal.
VIDEO INPUT: Use the input video signal selected with the VIDEO INPUT button in the
INIPUT SELECT section.
1-60 DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Chapter 6 Setup Menu
118
Chapter 6 Setup Menu
Extended Menu
Item number Item name Settings
501 STILL TIMER Select the time delay from the tape transport stopping (either the "STOP" mode" or the
still playback mode in search mode) until the unit automatically switches to the tape
protection mode, in order to protect the rotary heads and the tape.
0.5S... 1M ..5M: Set the value in the range 0.5 seconds to 5 minutes.
Menu items in the 500s, relating to tape protection
502 TAPE
PROTECTION
MODE FROM
SEARCH
Select the operation of the protection mode to protect the rotary heads and tape when in
the still playback mode in search (jog/shuttle) mode.
STEP : Step forward at
1
/
30
normal speed at the time interval set with STILL TIMER.
STDBY: Switch to Standby OFF mode (the unit not on standby).
Item number Item name Settings
Menu items in the 600s, relating to the time code generator
601 VITC POSITION
SEL-1 For DSR-2000
Select a line to insert the VITC in.
12H ... 16H ... 20H: Select any line from 12 to 20.
Note
You can insert the VITC signal in two places. To insert it in two places, set both items
601 and 602.
For DSR-2000P
Select a line to insert the VITC in.
9H ... 19H ... 22H: Select any line from 9 to 22.
Note
You can insert the VITC signal in two places. To insert it in two places, set both items
601 and 602.
602 VITC POSITION
SEL-2 For DSR-2000
Select a line to insert the VITC in.
12H ... 18H ... 20H: Select any line from 12 to 20.
Note
You can insert the VITC signal in two places. To insert it in two places, set both items
601 and 602.
For DSR-2000P
Select a line to insert the VITC in.
9H ... 21H ... 22H: Select any line from 9 to 22.
Note
You can insert the VITC signal in two places. To insert it in two places, set both items
601 and 602.
Chapter 6 Setup Menu
Chapter 6 Setup Menu
119
Item number Item name Settings
605 TCG REGEN
MODE Select the signal to be regenerated when the time code generator is in the regeneration
mode (i.e., when the PRESET/REGEN switch on the subsidiary control panel is set to
REGEN, or the unit is in automatic edit mode).
TC&UB : Both the time code and user bits are regenerated.
TC: Only the time code is regenerated.
UB: Only the user bits are regenerated.
Menu items in the 600s, relating to the time code generator
607 U-BIT BINARY
GROUP FLAG
610 REGEN
CONTROL MODE When editing with two DSR-2000/2000P units, if you use the control panel for editing
operation, select whether or not the time code is automatically regenerated.
AS&IN : In editing with this unit as the recorder, regardless of the setting of the INT/
EXT–PRESET/REGEN switch, in assemble and insert editing, the time code
generator regenerates according to the time code on the tape.
ASSEM: In editing with this unit as the recorder, regardless of the setting of the INT/
EXT–PRESET/REGEN switch, in assemble editing only, the time code generator
regenerates according to the time code on the tape.
MANU: Regardless of whether this unit is the recorder or player, the time code
generator operates in accordance with the PRESET/REGEN setting of the INT/EXT–
PRESET/REGEN switch.
FULL: Regardless of the REMOTE button setting, when any of the ASSEMBLE,
VIDEO, CH-1 to CH-4 and TC buttons is lit, the time code generator regenerates
according to the time code played back from the tape.
611 TC OUTPUT
PHASE IN EE
MODE
Select the time code output mode for output from the TIME CODE OUT connector in E-
E mode.
MUTE : Mute the output.
THRU: Output the time code input to the TIME CODE IN connector as it is.
V-IN: Output the time code with the same phase as the input video signal phase.
V-OUT: Output the time code with the same phase as the output video signal phase.
612 TC OUTPUT
MUTE IN
SEARCH MODE
Select whether to mute the output from the TIME CODE OUT connector in search (jog/
shuttle) mode.
ON : Mute.
OFF: Do not mute.
Select the user bits to be used in the time code generated by the time code generator.
000 : Character set not specified.
001: 8-bit characters compliant with ISO 646 and ISO 2022.
010: Undefined.
011: Undefined.
100: Undefined.
101: SMPTE 262M page/line multiplex system.
110: Undefined.
111: Undefined.
613 VITC OUTPUT Select the time code to be output as VITC.
OFF: Do not output VITC.
TC: Output TC after converting it into VITC.
VITC : Output VITC.
1-61
DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Chapter 6 Setup Menu
120
Chapter 6 Setup Menu
Extended Menu
Item number Item name Settings
Menu items in the 700s, relating to video control
Item number Item name Settings
715 VIDEO GAIN
CONTROL Adjust the video output level.
00H to 200H to 3FFH
Items 715 to 720 : Settings for controlling the video processing system according to the menu settings.
716 CHROMA GAIN
CONTROL Adjust the chroma output level.
00H to 200H to 3FFH
717 CHROMA PHASE
CONTROL Adjust the chroma phase.
00H to 80H to FFH
718 SETUP LEVEL
(DSR-2000)/
BLACK LEVEL
(DSR-2000P)
Adjust the setup level (DSR-2000)/black level (DSR-2000P).
00H to 200H to 3FFH
701 SELECTION OF
VIDEO/SYNC
DELAY
An E-E video signal is output delayed with respect to the video input signal by the time for
video circuit processing. With this item, select whether or not to delay the sync signal
attached to the output video signal by an amount corresponding to the video signal delay.
SYNC : Delay the sync signal by the corresponding amount before attaching it.
VIDEO: Attach a sync signal with the same timing as the input signal.
720 SYSTEM PHASE
SC
Adjust the subcarrier phase.
00H to 3FFH
705 EDGE
SUBCARRIER
REDUCER MODE
Select whether to enable the edge subcarrier reducer (ESR).
ON : Enable.
OFF : Do not enable.
When playing back a composite signal, set this to ON.
708 CHROMA PHASE
ROTATION MODE Select the phase rotation mode for chroma phase control.
The effect of this setting applies to the output levels of all of the composite video, S
video, SDI and component video signals.
U/V : Select this setting when observing the unit's composite video output level using a
composite vectorscope.
PB/PR: Select this setting when observing the unit's component video output level using
a component vectorscope.
713 VIDEO SETUP
REFERENCE
(DSR-2000 only)
Select whether to remove the setup (7.5%) from the input analog video signals and
whether to add the setup (7.5%) to the output analog video signals.
714 VIDEO ADJUST
RANGE Select the variable range of the VIDEO and CHROMA knobs when the PROCESS
CONTROL switch on the subsidiary control panel is set to PANEL.
–3~+3 : –3 dB to +3 dB
WIDE: – ∞ to +3 dB
Sub-item
INPUT LEVEL1
2
OUT PUT LEVEL
Whether to remove the setup from the input.
0.0% : Do not remove.
7.5%: Remove.
Whether to add the setup to the output.
0.0% : Do not add.
7.5%: Add.
710 INTERNAL VIDEO
SIGNAL
GENERATOR
Select the test signal to be output from the internal test signal generator.
CB100 (DSR-2000P only): 100% color bar signal
CB75: 75% color bar signal
BB: Black burst signal
Default setting: CB100 (for DSR-2000P)/CB75 (for DSR-2000)
Chapter 6 Setup Menu
Chapter 6 Setup Menu
121
Item number Item name Settings
Menu items in the 700s, relating to video control (continued)
729 CLOSED
CAPTION BLANK
(DSR-2000 only)
Select whether to mute the closed caption signal to be superimposed on the 1st and
2nd fields of the output video signal.
Sub-item
FIELD 1
1
2 FIELD 2
Select whether to mute the closed caption signal to be superimposed on the 1st field of
the output video signal.
OFF : Do not mute.
ON: Mute.
Select whether to mute the closed caption signal to be superimposed on the 2nd field of
the output video signal.
OFF : Do not mute.
ON: Mute.
Note
When you make settings for items 715 to 720, set the
PROCESS CONTROL switch on the subsidiary
control panel to MENU. When it is set to MENU, all
controls on the subsidiary control panel are disabled.
Item number Item name Settings
801 DIGITAL JOG
SOUND Select whether to adjust the audio playback speed during slow playback.
OFF: Do not adjust the audio playback speed.
ON : Adjust the audio playback speed.
Menu items in the 800s, relating to audio control
802 DIGITAL AUDIO
MUTE IN
SHUTTLE MODE
Set the audio muting conditions during shuttle playback.
OFF : Not muted.
CUEUP: Muted during cue-up or preroll operations.
FULL: Muted in shuttle mode.
807 AUDIO OUTPUT
PHASE Select the output timing of an audio playback signal. The reference position corresponds
to a setting of 80H; when the setting is less than 80H, the output timing is advanced,
and when it is higher than 80H, the output timing is delayed. (80H = 128 samples =
approx. 2.7 ms, 1 sample = approx. 20 µs)
0 ... 80 ... FF : Setting in this range.
(Continued)
723 INPUT VIDEO
BLANK
(DSR-2000P only)
Switching blanking on or off for the 335th line of the input video signal. Select the
reference video signal to use.
Sub-item
LINE335 THROUGH : Do not mute.
BLANK: Mute.
731 WIDE MODE Determine whether to retain wide-screen aspect ratio information accompanying video
being recorded or played back.
AUTO : When video being recorded or played back is accompanied by wide-screen
aspect ratio information, retain the information.
ON: Whenever recording or playing back video, retain wide-screen aspect ratio
information.
OFF: Ignore wide-screen aspect ration information.
1-62 DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Chapter 6 Setup Menu
122
Chapter 6 Setup Menu
Extended Menu
Item number Item name Settings
Menu items in the 800s, relating to audio controll (continued)
814 OVER RANGE
DISPLAY HOLD Select whether to hold the audio level meter OVER display.
OFF : Do not hold.
ON: Hold.
818 AUDIO REC
MODE Select the audio recording mode.
2CH : 2ch, 48 kHz mode
4CH: 4ch, 32 kHz mode
819 AUDIO INPUT
SOURCE
ARRANGE
Select the audio input signals to be mixed when the MIXING button is lit.
For details, see the section “Making settings for mixing an audio input signal (extension
menu item 819)” (page 123).
820 AUDIO OUTPUT
CH3/CH4 SELECT Select the signals to be output from the AUDIO OUT CH-3 and AUDIO OUT CH-4
connectors.
LINE : Output the audio channel-3 and audio channel-4 signals from the AUDIO OUT
CH-3 and AUDIO OUT CH-4 connectors as they are.
MONI: Output the monitor audio L-channel (CH-1) and monitor audio R-channel (CH-2)
signals from the AUDIO OUT CH-3 and AUDIO OUT CH-4 connectors, respectively.
Item number Item name Settings
902 SYSTEM EE
MODE Select the bypass E-E mode or system E-E mode.
OFF : Bypass E-E (ordinary setting)
ON: System E-E
When this item is set to ON, the output delays 3 frames with respect to the input
(excluding the SDTI and i.LINK inputs/outputs).
Menu items in the 900s, relating to digital process
812 AUDIO OUTPUT
LEVEL Select the analog audio output reference level.
+4dB : Set the analog output level of the signal at the reference level to +4 dBm.
0dB: Set the analog output level of the signal at the reference level to 0 dBm.
–6dB: Set the analog output level of the signal at the reference level to –6 dBm.
813 PEAK HOLD TIME Set the peak hold time for the audio level meter in the range of OFF (no peak hold) to
1.5 seconds in 0.1 second steps.
821 AUDIO
ATTENUATE
WHEN DV TAPE
PLAYBACK
When playing back a tape recorded in consumer DV format, select whether to attenuate
the audio output level.
OFF: Attenuate.
ON : Do not attenuate.
808 INTERNAL AUDIO
SIGNAL
GENERATOR
Select the operation of the internal audio test signal generator.
SILNC: Silent signal.
1KHZ : 1-kHz, –20 dB FS sine wave signal.
When you select SG as the audio input in the input selection section of the upper control
panel, the audio test signal generated by the internal audio test signal generator is input.
811 AUDIO
REFERENCE
LEVEL
Select the audio reference level (headroom) for recording on tape.
–12dB
–16dB
–18dB (factory default for DSR-2000P)
–20dB (factory default for DSR-2000)
Chapter 6 Setup Menu
Chapter 6 Setup Menu
123
Extended Menu Operations
To use the extended menu, set basic menu item 099
MENU GRADE to ENHAN beforehand.
In the extended menu, you can carry out the same
operations as in the basic menu except setting of sub-
items.
To set sub-items
Operate as follows.
1
Turn the search dial to select the desired menu
item.
For information about how to select a menu item, see
the section “Changing the currently displayed menu
item” (page 111).
2
Holding down the STOP button, turn the search
dial to select the desired sub-item.
3
Holding down the SEARCH button, turn the search
dial to change the value for the selected sub-item.
31
2
Making settings for mixing an audio input
signal (extension menu item 819)
Using extension menu item 819, you can mix audio
input signals, dub an audio input signal over a channel
previously recorded on the tape, or mix an audio input
signal with an audio channel recorded on the tape
(sound-on-sound).
To carry out the extension menu item 819 settings, use
the following procedure.
1
Select extension menu item 819.
For details of selecting a menu item, see the section,
“Changing the currently displayed menu item” (page
111).
2
Press the STOP button.
The following displays appear in the display
section of the lower control panel and on a monitor
connected to this unit.
Display section
Recording channel number
24
3
6
Input channel number
Item number Setting
(Continued)
1-63
DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Chapter 6 Setup Menu
124
Chapter 6 Setup Menu
Extended Menu
Monitor screen
3
Holding down the STOP button, turn the search
dial to move the cursor to select a combination of
input and recording channels.
4
Holding down the SEARCH button, turn the
search dial to set the channel selection made in
step 3 to on or off.
To select an input channel for recording
For the selected recording channel, set the desired
input channel to on.
To record, mixing more than one input signal
For the selected recording channel, set two or more
of the input channels to on. All of the input
channels set to on for each recording channel will
be mixed for that channel.
To switch on the sound-on-sound setting
In addition to the selected input channel(s), set
“tape” to “on.”
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each of the recording
channels.
6
Press the SET button.
This saves the settings.
Cursor (shows the item selected for menu operations)
ITEM-819
AUDIO INPUT SOURCE
ARRANGE
ch1:
ch2:
ch3:
ch4:
in1 in2 in3 in4 tape
--------------------
on
on
on
on
*on
Recording channel numbers
Input channel numbers
To enable the setting of extension menu item
819
Press the MIXING button in the upper control panel,
turning it on.
When the MIXING button is off, the settings of
extension menu item 819 are ignored, and the input
channels and recording channels are recorded one-to-
one. It is not possible to carry out mixing or channel
switching.
Note
When 2-channel mode (2CH) is selected for audio
recording (see extended menu item 818), the settings
made with this item for input channels 3 and 4 (in3 and
in4) as well as recording channels 3 and 4 (ch3 and
ch4) are invalid.
For example, when input channels 1 and 3 (in1 and
in3) are set to on for recording channel 1 (ch1), in 2CH
mode, only the signal from input channel 1 is recorded
on recording channel 1.
Chapter 7 Connections and
Settings
Chapter 7 Connections and Settings
125
Chapter7
Connections and
Settings
Reference Video Signals for Analog Signal Editing
In order to provide stable video and audio signals for
analog editing, it is necessary to input a reference
video signal synchronized with the video signal to the
REF. VIDEO IN connector and set the REF. VIDEO
IN 75 Ω termination switch to ON.
Connections for Cut Editing Using i.LINK Interface
(Optional DSBK-190 Required)
Using two DSR-2000/2000P units, each fitted with the
optional DSBK-190 board, as a pair of player and
recorder, you can configure a cut editing system.
You can use the same system also to digitally dub
signals in DVCAM format through an i.LINK interface
(see page 61).
REF. VIDEO IN connector
and 75 Ω termination switch
It is also possible to use an i.LINK-compatible
camcorder such as the DSR-500WS/500WSP as the
player and carry out cut editing.
1-64 DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Chapter 7 Connections and
Settings
126
Chapter 7 Connections and Settings
DSR-2000/2000P (recorder and player) settings
i.LINK(DSBK-190) i.LINK(DSBK-190)
1
DSR-2000/2000P (recorder) DSR-2000/2000P (player)
16-pin to 6-pin i.LINK cable (supplied with the DSBK-190)
Control Setting (recorder) Setting (player)
REMOTE button Unlit Lit
i.LINK button Lit Lit
SDTI/i.LINK button i.LINK i.LINK
(input selection section)
Connections for Cut Editing Using i.LINK Interface
(Optional DSBK-190
Required)
Chapter 7 Connections and
Settings
Chapter 7 Connections and Settings
127
Connections for Digital Nonlinear Editing Using
SDTI (QSDI) Interface
This unit can be connected to an ES-7 EditStation to
configure a digital non-linear editing system. Using the
SDTI (QSDI) interface, you can transfer video, audio,
timecode, and other compressed data between this unit
and the EditStation.
The unit supports ClipLink functions, enabling index
pictures recorded on tape and ClipLink log data stored
in cassette memory to be transferred to the EditStation
in an instant.
For an overview of the ClipLink function, see the appendix
“ClipLink Guide” (page 147).
The following is a connection diagram for digital non-
linear editing system in which this unit serves as the
recorder.
For connections of the EditStation’s peripheral devices (the
control panel, the disk unit, etc.) and the player, refer to
your ES-7 Operating Instructions.
1
1
1
2
REF. VIDEO IN
REMOTE-IN
SDTI(QSDI) INPUT
SDTI(QSDI) OUTPUT
BB OUT
RECORDER
QSDI OUTPUT
QSDI INPUT
ES-7
DSR-2000/2000P (recorder)
DSR-2000/2000P (recorder) settings
Control
REMOTE button
9PIN button
SDTI/i.LINK button (input selection
section)
REF.VIDEO IN 75Ω termination
switch
Setting
Lit
Lit
SDTI
ON
1 75 Ω coaxial cable (not supplied)
2 RCC-5G 9-pin remote control cable (supplied)
1-65
DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Chapter 7 Connections and
Settings
128
Chapter 7 Connections and Settings
Connections for Cut Editing Using SDI Interface
For a cut editing system using this unit together with a
DNW-A75/A75P Betacam SX VCR using an SDI
connection, the following figure shows an example of
the connections. In this example, the DNW-A75/A75P
is used as the recorder and this unit is used as the
player.
DNW-A75/A75P (recorder) settings
DNW-A75/A75P (recorder)
SDI OUTPUT
REF.VIDEO OUT
1
1
2
REMOTE-IN
REMOTE1-OUT(9P)
SDI INPUT
REF. VIDEO
INPUT
1 75 Ω coaxial cable (not supplied)
2 RCC-5G remote control cable (supplied)
DSR-2000/2000P
(player)
DSR-2000/2000P (player) settings
Control Setting
REMOTE button Lit
9PIN button Lit
REF.VIDEO IN 75ΩON
termination switch
Control Setting
REMOTE buttons Unlit
Chapter 7 Connections and
Settings
Chapter 7 Connections and Settings
129
Connections for Preread Editing
For a preread editing system using two DSR-2000/
2000P units together with a video switcher, audio
mixer and editing control unit, the following figure
shows an example of connections.
DSR-2000/2000P (recorder)
Control Setting
REMOTE button Lit
9PIN button Lit
VIDEO IN
VIDEO OUT
VIDEO
OUT
REF.VIDEO
IN
REMOTE-IN
IN 2
PGM OUT
REF OUT
REF OUT
REF OUT
IN 1
RS-422A
IN
MASTER
OUT
IN
RS-422 GPI
REMOTE
RS-422
RS-422
REF IN
REF.VIDEO IN
11
4
1
1
1
1
22
3
33
2
REMOTE IN
AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2
AUDIO OUT CH-1/CH-2
AUDIO OUT
CH-1/CH-2
DSR-2000/2000P (recorder and player) settings
DSR-2000/2000P (player)
Video switcher (BVS-3200C,
DVS-2000C, etc.)
Audio mixer (SRP-V200, etc.)
Editing control unit (BVE-2000, etc.)
175 Ω coaxial cable
(not supplied)
3RCC-5G 9-pin remote
control cable (supplied)
2 Cable with XLR connectors
(not supplied)
4RCC-5A/11A 15-pin
parallel control cable
(not supplied)
1-66 DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Chapter 7 Connections and
Settings
130
Chapter 7 Connections and Settings
Settings Required When Connecting an External
Editing Control Unit
When connecting an external editing control unit to
this unit and using this unit as a recorder, make the
following timecode settings on this unit and VCR
constant and DIP switch settings on the editing control
unit.
Timecode Settings on This Unit
Make the following time code settings for this unit.
Settings on Editing Control Units
Make the following settings according to the editor
model.
For FXE-100/120 (NTSC)
Set the VCR constants as follows.
For FXE-100P/120P (PAL)
Set the VCR constants as follows.
For BVE-910/2000
Set the VCR constants as follows.
•When using the DSR-2000 (NTSC)
•When using the DSR-2000P (PAL)
Control Setting
INT/EXT–PRESET/REGEN
switch INT–PRESET (right position)
FREE RUN/REC RUN switch FREE RUN
For RM-450 (NTSC)
Set the VCR constants as follows.
•Left DIP switch
•Right DIP switch
For RM-450CE (PAL)
Set the VCR constants as follows.
•Left DIP switch
•Right DIP switch
For BVE-800
Set the VCR constants as follows.
When using the DSR-2000 (NTSC)
•SW2
•SW3
When using the DSR-2000P (PAL)
•SW2
•SW3
For PVE-500
Use the factory settings as they are.
Switch No.
76543210
Setting OFF ——OFF ————
Switch No.
12345678
Setting ON OFF ON ON —ON ON —
Switch No.
76543210
Setting OFF —OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON
Switch No.
76543210
Setting OFF ——OFF ————
Switch No.
76543210
Setting ON —OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON
Switch No.
12345678
Setting ON OFF ON ON —ON ON —
Switch No.
12345678
Setting ON ON ON OFF —ON OFF OFF
Switch No.
12345678
Setting OFF OFF OFF ON —ON OFF OFF
Byte No.
123456789
10 11 12 13 14 15
Setting 80 14 00 96 05 05 03 80 0A 08 FE 00 80 5A FF
Byte No.
123456789
10 11 12 13 14 15
Setting 81 14 00 7D 05 05 02 80 0A 07 FE 00 80 4C FF
Byte No.
Block 1 Block 2
123456789
10 11 12 13 14 15
Setting 80 14 00 96 05 05 03 80 0A 08 FE 00 80 5A FF
Byte No.
Block 1 Block 2
123456789
10 11 12 13 14 15
Setting 81 14 00 7D 05 05 02 80 0A 07 FE 00 80 4C FF
Chapter 7 Connections and
Settings
Chapter 7 Connections and Settings
131
2
1
1
2
COMPONENT VIDEO IN
(Y,R−Y,B−Y)
AUDIO
OUT
TIME CODE IN AUDIO IN
CH-1 AUDIO IN
CH-2
COMPONENT
OUTPUT
CH-1
CH-2
TC OUT
Connections for Component Analog Recording
The following shows connections for a system in
which analog playback signals from another recorder
or player are recorded on the DSR-2000/2000P. In this
system, the video signals are analog component signals
and the audio signals are recorded from audio channels
1 and 2.
Note
In this case, the DSBK-170 Analog Component Iuput/
Output Board is required.
DSR-2000/2000P (recorder) settings
Control Setting
Videocassette recorder/
player such as
UVW-1600/1600P
DSR-2000/2000P
(recorder)
1 Cable with XLR connectors
(not supplied)
2 75 Ω coaxial cable (not supplied)
REMOTE button Unlit
VIDEO IN button (input
selection section) Y–R, B
CH1,1/2 button and
CH2,3/4 button ANALOG
AUDIO IN LEVEL/600Ω
switch (connector panel) Normally, +4 dBm, 600Ω (HIGH-
ON)
1-67
DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Chapter 7 Connections and
Settings
132
Chapter 7 Connections and Settings
Connections for Two-Unit Synchronous Playback
The following shows connections for synchronous
playback using two DSR-2000/2000P units.
In the following, the controlling unit is referred to as
the recorder and the controlled unit as the player.
For information about how to carry out two-unit
synchronous playback, see the section “Synchronous
Playback” on page 59.
REF.VIDEO OUT
REMOTE-IN
REMOTE-OUT
REF.VIDEO IN
1
2
DSR-2000/2000P (player) settings
Control Setting
REMOTE button Lit
9PIN button Lit
DSR-2000/2000P (recorder) settings
Control Setting
REMOTE button Unlit
Setup menu item 004 ON (Synchronize.)
OFF (Do not
synchronize.)
Setup menu item 305
(When synchronizing,
synchronization accuracy)
ACCUR (±0 frame)
ROUGH (±1 frame)
REF. VIDEO IN 75 Ω
termination switch ON
DSR-2000/2000P (recorder) DSR-2000/2000P (player)
1 75 Ω coaxial cable (not supplied)
2 RCC-5G 9-pin remote control cable (supplied)
9PIN button Lit
Chapter 7 Connections and
Settings
Chapter 7 Connections and Settings
133
Connections for Digitally Dubbing Signals in
DVCAM Format
(Optional DSBK-190 Required When
Using i.LINK Interface)
You can use this unit to digitally dub signals in
DVCAM format automatically from the beginning of
the tape to the end, through an i.LINK or SDTI(QSDI)
interface.
For information about how to carry out digital dubbing, see
the section “Digitally Dubbing Signals in DVCAM Format”
(page 61).
Connecting two DSR-2000/2000P units using
the i.LINK interface (DSBK-190 i.LINK/DV
Input/Output Board)
Make the same connections and settings as described
in the section “Connections for Cut Editing Using
i.LINK Interface” (page 125).
DSR-2000/2000P (player) settings
Control Setting
REMOTE button Lit
9PIN button Lit
DSR-2000/2000P (recorder) settings
Control Setting
REMOTE button Unlit
9PIN button Lit
SDTI/i.LINK button SDTI
(input selection section)
SDTI(QSDI) OUTPUTSDTI(QSDI) INPUT
REMOTE-INREMOTE-OUT
1
2
DSR-2000/2000P (player)
1 75 Ω coaxial cable (not supplied)
2 RCC-5G 9-pin remote control cable (supplied)
DSR-2000/2000P (recorder)
Connecting two DSR-2000/2000P units using the SDTI(QSDI) interface
When connecting this unit with a DSR-60/60P/
80/80P/85/85P/1000-series/1000P-series unit
using the SDTI(QSDI) interface
Replace the DSR-2000/2000P (player) shown in the
above diagram with a DSR-60/60P/80/80P/85/85P/
1000-series/1000P-series unit and make the same
connections as shown above.
The SDTI(QSDI) interface connector of the DSR-60/
60P/80/80P/85/85P is marked “QSDI(OUTPUT)”.
1-68 DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Chapter 8 Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Chapter 8 Maintenance and Troubleshooting
135
Chapter8
Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
Condensation
If you move the unit suddenly from a cold to warm
location, or if you use it in a very humid place,
moisture from the air may condense on the head drum.
This is called condensation, and if a tape is run in this
state, the tape may stick to the drum and can be easily
damaged. To lessen the risk of this occurring, this unit
is equipped with a condensation detection system.
If condensation occurs while the unit is
operating:
The alarm message “MOISTURE HAS BEEN
DETECTED.” appears on the monitor screen, and the
alarm message “HUMID!” in the display section of the
lower control panel. At the same time the unit ejects
the cassette automatically. If this happens, leave the
unit’s power on and wait until the alarm messages
disappear.
If the condensation alarm messages appear
immediately after powering on:
Leave the unit powered on and wait until the alarm
messages disappear. You cannot load a cassette into
the unit while the alarm messages are being displayed
Once the alarm messages disappear, the unit is ready
for use.
Head Cleaning
Always use the DVM12CL (mini-size) or DV12CL
(standard size) Cleaning Cassette to clean the video
and audio heads. You can run the cleaning cassette for
10 seconds per cleaning operation. Follow the
instructions for the cleaning cassette, as inappropriate
use of the cleaning cassette can damage the heads.
To clean the heads
Insert the cleaning cassette. This automatically starts
cleaning. You cannot operate any tape transport
control buttons other than the EJECT button during the
cleaning operation.
After about 10 seconds, the cleaning cassette will be
automatically ejected.
1-69
DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Chapter 8 Maintenance and Troubleshooting
136
Chapter 8 Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Digital hours meter
The digital hours meter can provide seven items of
information about the operational history of the unit.
The information can be displayed in the display
section of the lower control panel and also, by text
superimposition, on the monitor connected to the unit.
Use the information as a guide in scheduling periodic
maintenance.
For periodic maintenance, cousult your Sony dearler.
Display modes of the digital hours meter
H01: OPERATION mode
Displays the total number of hours the unit has been
powered on in units of 1 hour.
H02: DRUM RUNNING mode
Displays the total number of hours the drum has run
with tape threaded in units of 1 hour.
H03: TAPE RUNNING mode
Displays the total number of hours the unit has been in
fast forward, rewind, playback, search, recording or
editing (except for stop and still) mode in units of 1
hour.
H04: THREADING mode
Display the total number of times tape has been
threaded in the unit.
H12: DRUM RUNNING mode (resettable)
Same as H02 except that the count is resettable.
This can be used as a guide in determining when to
replace the drum.
H13: TAPE RUNNING mode (resettable)
Same as H03 except that the count is resettable.
This can be used as a guide in determining when to
replace such components as stationary heads and pinch
roller.
H14: THREADING mode (resettable)
Same as H04 except that the count is resettable.
This can be used as a guide in determining when to
replace, for example, the threading motor.
To display the hours meter
Press the MENU button, then turn the search dial to
display the required item in the display section and on
the monitor connected to the unit.
To exit from the hours meter
Press the MENU button or SET button.
To jump to H01
Press the MENU button, then the COUNTER SEL
button.
Every time you press the COUNTER SEL button,
menu item H01 or B01 is recalled alternately.
Periodic Maintenance
Display section
SET button
MENU button
Search dial
COUNTER SEL button
Chapter 8 Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Chapter 8 Maintenance and Troubleshooting
137
Troubleshooting
If an alarm message appears in the display section or
on the video monitor connected to this unit, or if the unit appears to be malfunctioning, please check the
following before contacting your Sony dealer.
Operation problems
Tape problems
Time data problems
a) In these states, alarm messages appear in the display section and on the monitor screen.
Symptom Cause Remedy
The unit’s control buttons do
not work. The KEY INHIBIT switch on the
subsidiary control panel is set to ON. Set the KEY INHIBIT switch on the subsidiary
control panel to OFF.
The CONTROL PANEL switch on the
subsidiary control panel is set to EXT. •Set the CONTROL PANEL switch on the
subsidiary control panel to INT.
•Set extended menu item 117 to PARA.
The unit’s transport control
buttons (PLAY, F FWD, REW,
etc.) do not work.
The REMOTE button is lit and menu item
006 (LOCAL FUNCTION ENABLE) is set
to ST&EJ or DIS.
a)
Turn off the REMOTE button and, on the
subsidiary control panel, set the KEY INHIBIT
switch and CONTROL PANEL switch to OFF and
INT, respectively.
No cassette is loaded.
a)
Insert a cassette.
Symptom Cause Remedy
Recording is not possible. The cassette’s REC/SAVE switch is set
to SAVE.
a)
Set the REC/SAVE switch to REC, or use
another cassette.
The REC INHIBIT switch on the
subsidiary control panel is set to ON. Set the REC INHIBIT switch on the subsidiary
control panel to OFF.
The NOT EDITABLE indication
appears in the display section. The recording mode selected on this unit
does not coincide with that of the loaded
tape.
a)
•Set the unit for the same recording mode as with
the tape.
•When your current purpose is recording, you
can use the tape currently loaded in the unit.
The recording format of the currently
loaded tape is DV or DVCPRO. •You can use the currently loaded tape as a
source tape for playback and editing.
•You cannot use the tape as a recording tape for
editing.
Symptom Cause Remedy
Cannot set the time data to an
optional initial value. The PRESET/REGEN switch on the
subsidiary control panel is set to
REGEN.
a)
Set the PRESET/REGEN switch on the
subsidiary control panel to PRESET.
The counter value is selected as the time
data for display (the COUNTER indicator
is lit in the display section).
a)
Press the COUNTER SEL button to light the TC
(time code) or U-BIT (user bits) indicator in the
display section (the counter value cannot be
preset).
The tape is running, but the
time data does not appear in
the display section.
The HOLD button has been pressed. Press the button once again to exit the time code
preset mode.
The U-BIT indicator is lit in the display
section.
a)
Press the COUNTER SEL button to light the
COUNTER (counter value) or TC (time code)
indicator in the display section.
1-70 DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Chapter 8 Maintenance and Troubleshooting
138
Chapter 8 Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Input problems
a) In this state, an alarm message appears in the display section and on the monitor screen.
Monitor problems
Audio problems
Symptom Cause Remedy
Data is not superimposed on
the monitor screen. The CHARACTER switch on the
subsidiary control panel is set to OFF.Set the CHARACTER switch on the subsidiary
control panel to ON.
The monitor is not connected to the
VIDEO OUT 3 (SUPER) or SDI OUTPUT
3 (SUPER) connector of this unit.
Connect the monitor to the VIDEO OUT 3
(SUPER) or SDI OUTPUT 3 (SUPER) connector.
(You must make this connection to display any
type of text on the monitor.)
The image on the monitor
screen is too bright. The 75 Ω termination switch for video
input on the monitor is in the OFF
position or a 75 Ω terminator is not fitted
to its video input connector.
Set the 75 Ω termination switch to ON or connect
a terminator.
The image on the monitor
screen is too dark. In a video signal loop-through connection
of video monitors, 75 Ω termination
switches for video input on monitors
other than the loop-end monitor are in
the ON position.
Set the 75 Ω termination switches to OFF on all
monitors other than the loop-end monitor .
The image is too dark when
recording a composite video
signal.
Symptom Cause Remedy
Turning the REC controls does
not change the audio input
levels.
The REC controls are pushed in. Pull out the REC controls.
Turning the PB controls does
not change the playback audio
output levels.
The PB controls are pushed in. Pull out the PB controls.
Troubleshooting
Symptom Cause Remedy
It is not possible to record an
SDTI signal. No SDTI signal is input to the unit.
a)
Connect an SDTI (QSDI) signal to the SDTI
(QSDI) INPUT connector.
Chapter 8 Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Chapter 8 Maintenance and Troubleshooting
139
Error Messages
This unit is provided with a self-diagnostic function
that detects internal abnormalities. When it detects an
abnormality, it outputs an error message to the monitor
connected to the unit and indicates an error code in the
display section of the unit.
Note
To display error messages on the monitor screen, set
the CHARACTER switch on the subsidiary control
panel to ON.
Error02-603
ERROR
AN ERROR HAS BEEN
DETECTED. INFORM SERVICE
OF FOLLOWING CODE:
02-603
PRESS EJECT KEY
TO EJECT TAPE.
Error code
Error message
Error code
Direction
Monitor screen Display section
An alarm message , for example, like the one shown
below may appear on the monitor screen during
operation of the unit.
REMOTE!
ALARM
REMOTE MODE IS SELECTED
SET REMOTE/LOCAL SWITCH
TO LOCAL
Cause of alarm
Direction
Monitor screen Display section
If an alarm message appears, follow the direction
indicated under the message on the monitor screen. To display alarm messages on the monitor screen, set
the CHARACTER switch on the subsidiary control
panel to ON, and setup menu item 016 (ALARM) to
ON or LIMIT.
For details of setup menu operations, see Chapter 6 “Setup
Menu” (page 107).
If an error message appears, follow the direction
indicated under the message on the monitor screen.
Alarm Messages
1-71
DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Chapter 8 Maintenance and Troubleshooting
140
Chapter 8 Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Alarm messages and associated directions
Alarm message on monitor screen Direction Alarm message in the
diaplay section
Cause
A cleaning tape has been inserted. The tape will automatically be ejected after cleaning
is completed. Cleaning Tp
A non-standard ref. signal is being used for
REF. VIDEO. Use a standard signal. REF NON-STD
Abnormal settings selected in setup menu. Correct the setup menu settings. Contact your
Sony dealer if this alarm message appears again
after making corrections.
ILL. SETUP
Audio not editable on this tape. Use a tape recorded in 2-channel (48 kHz) or
4-channel (32 kHz) mode. 2CH/32kHz!
Fs 44.1kHz!
Use a tape having audio signals recorded in locked
mode. UNLOCK mode
Audio REC mode selection different from
audio on tape. Select the same audio recording mode as that of
the tape. A mode err
Audio REC (recording) mode cannot be
changed during recording. —REC mode!
Counter mode is selected. Use the COUNTER SEL button to light the TC or U-
BIT indicator in the display section. CNT mode!
Input selection cannot be changed in REC
(recording) mode. —REC mode!
Input signal does not conform to DVCAM/DV
format. —Unknown Sig
Input signal is 625/50. (For DSR-2000) —625/50 sig! (For DSR-
2000)
Input signal is 525/60. (For DSR-2000P) —525/60 sig! (For DSR-
2000P)
Input video is not detected. Check the INPUT VIDEO indication in the input
selection/audio mode display section and supply an
appropriate video signal.
No INPUT!
Moisture has been detected. Keep the power on and wait until this alarm
message disappears. HUMID!
No cassette in VTR. Load a cassette. No Cass.!
Troubleshooting
A non-standard signal is being used for
input video. Use a standard signal. VIN NON-STD
Audio mixing mode cannot be changed
during recording. —REC mode!
Cassette adaptor not usable. Use a tape without cassette adaptor. Adaptor!
Input video signal does not synchronize with
REF. VIDEO signal. Use a common reference signal or connect the
recorder REF. VIDEO OUT connector to the player
REF. VIDEO IN connector.
Note
When connecting the recorder REF. VIDEO OUT
connector to the player REF. VIDEO IN connector,
set extended menu item 308 to N-STD.
ILL. REF!
Key inhibit mode is selected. Set the KEY INHIBIT switch on the subsidiary
control panel to OFF. KEY INHI.
Record inhibit plug on the cassette is set to
inhibit. Set the REC/SAVE switch on the cassette to REC. REC INHI.!
Rec inhibit mode is selected. Set the REC INHIBIT switch on the subsidiary
control panel to OFF. REC INHI.!
(Continued)
Chapter 8 Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Chapter 8 Maintenance and Troubleshooting
141
Alarm messages and associated directions (Continued)
Alarm message on monitor screen Direction Alarm message in the
display section
Cause
Tape cannot be replayed. Use a tape recorded in 525/60 format. (For DSR-
2000) 625/50 Tape (For DSR-
2000)
Use a tape recorded in 625/50 format. (For DSR-
2000P) 525/60 Tape (For DSR-
2000P)
Use a new cleaning tape. Tape end!Tape end has been detected.
Tape not editable. Use a tape recorded in DVCAM format. Not DVCAM!
Use a tape recorded in 525/60 format. (For DSR-
2000) 625/50 Tape (For DSR-
2000)
Use a tape recorded in 625/50 format. (For DSR-
2000P) 525/60 Tape (For DSR-
2000P)
Tape not usable. Use DVCAM/DV/DVCPRO (25) tape.
TC EXTERNAL is selected.
ILL. Tape!
Set the INT/EXT switch on the subsidiary contol
panel to INT. TC EXT!
TCG REGEN mode is selected. Set the PRESET/REGEN switch on the subsidiary
control panel to PRESET. REGEN mode!
TCG RUN mode is set to REC RUN. Set the FREE RUN/REC RUN switch on the
subsidiary control panel to FREE RUN. REC RUN!
Remote mode is selected. Turn off the REMOTE button. REMOTE!
Tape not recordable. Use a DVCAM/DV ME tape. REC INHI.!
1-72 DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Appendixes
Appendixes
143
Appendixes
Operation and storage locations
Avoid operation or storage in any of the following
places.
•Location subject to extremes of temperature
(operating temperature range 5°C to 40°C (41°F to
104°F))
•Location subject to direct sunlight for long periods, or
close to heating appliances (Note that the interior of a
car left in summer with the windows closed can
exceed 50°C (122°F).)
•Damp or dusty places
•Location subject to severe vibrations
•Location near equipment generating strong
electromagnetic emissions
•Location near transmitting stations generating strong
radio waves
Operate the unit in a horizontal position
This unit is designed to be operated in a horizontal
position. Do not operate it on its side, or tilted through
an excessive angle (exceeding 20°).
Avoid violent impacts
Dropping the unit, or otherwise imparting a violent
shock to it, is likely to cause it to malfunction.
Do not obstruct ventilation openings
To prevent the unit from overheating, do not obstruct
ventilation openings, by for example wrapping the unit
in a cloth while it is in operation.
Care
If the casing or panel is dirty, wipe it gently with a soft
dry cloth. In the event of extreme dirt, use a cloth
steeped in a natural detergent to remove the dirt, then
wipe with a dry cloth. Applying alcohol, thinners,
insecticides, or other volatile solvents may result in
deforming the casing or damaging the finish.
Shipping
Pack the unit in its original carton or equivalent
packing, and take care not to impart violent shocks in
transit.
When transporting the unit, set the reel position to that
for mini size cassettes.
Notes on Use
1-73
DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Appendixes
144
Appendixes
Specifications
General
Power requirements
100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Power consumption
120 W
Peak inrush current
(1) Power ON, current probe method: 65A (240V)
(2) Hot switching inrush current, measured in
accordance with European standard
EN55103-1: 15A (230V)
Operating temperature
5˚C to 40˚C (41˚F to 104˚F)
Storage temperature
–20˚C to +60˚C (–4˚F to +140˚F)
Humidity Maximum 80% (Operating)
Maximum 90% (Storage)
Mass About 18 kg (39 lb 10 oz)
Dimensions (w/h/d)
427 × 174.5 × 495.5 mm
(16
7
/
8
× 6
7
/
8
× 19
5
/
8
inches)
424 (16 3/4)
427 (16 7/8)
495.5 (19 5/8) 4.8 (7/32)
400 (15 3/4)
19.7 (2 5/32)
52.5 (2 1/8)
372 (14 3/4) 27.5 (1 1/8)
16.5 (21/32)
174.5
(6 7/8)
Tape transport control system
Tape speed 28.193 mm/s (DSR-2000)
28.221 mm/s (DSR-2000P)
Recording/playback time
Using PDV-184ME standard-size
cassette: 184 minutes or less
Using PDVM-40ME mini-size
cassette: 40 minutes or less
Fast forward/rewind time
Using PDV-184ME standard-size
cassette: 3 minutes or less
Using PDVM-40ME mini-size
cassette: 1 minute or less
Search speed Up to 60 times normal in both
directions
Video performance
Band width Composite (DSR-2000):
30 Hz to 4.2 MHz ±1.0 dB (Y)
Composite (DSR-2000P):
25 Hz to 4.8 MHz ±1.0 dB (Y)
S-Video (DSR-2000):
30 Hz to 5.0 MHz ±1.0dB (Y),
5.75 MHz +0/–3.0 dB (Y) (TM)
S-Video (DSR-2000P):
25 Hz to 5.0 MHz ±1.0dB (Y),
5.5 MHz +1.0/–2.0 dB (Y),
5.75 MHz +0/–3.0 dB (Y) (TM)
Component (DSR-2000):
30 Hz to 5.0 MHz ±1.0 dB (Y),
5.75 MHz +0/–3.0 dB (Y) (TM),
30 Hz to 1.3 MHz ±1.0 dB (C),
1.5 MHz +0/–5.0 dB (C)
Component (DSR-2000P):
25 Hz to 5.0 MHz ±1.0 dB (Y),
5.5 MHz +1.0/–2.0 dB (Y),
5.75 MHz +1.0/–3.0 dB (Y) (TM),
25 Hz to 1.5 MHz ±1.0 dB (C),
2.0 MHz +1.0/–2.0 dB (C)
S/N Composite I/O (Y):
53 dB or more
S-Video I/O (Y): 55 dB or more
Component I/O (Y):
55 dB or more
Y/C delay 30 ns or less
K-factor 2.0% or less (K2T, KPB)
Unit: mm (inches)
Appendixes
Appendixes
145
Processor adjustment range
Video level ±3 dB/–∞ to 3 dB selectable
Chroma level ±3 dB/–∞ to 3 dB selectable
Setup/Black level ±30 IRE (±210 mV)
Chroma phase ±30˚
Y/C delay ±100 ns
System phase Sync: ±3µs
SC: ±180°
Audio performance
Frequency response
2 ch (48 kHz/16 bit):
20 Hz to 20 kHz +0.5/–1.0 dB
4 ch (32 kHz/12 bit):
20 Hz to 14.5 kHz +0.5/–1.0 dB
Dynamic range 90 dB or more (2CH, 48 kHz)
Distortion 0.05% or less (2CH, 48 kHz)
Input connectors
Digital input
i.LINk (When using DSBK-190 i.LINK/DV Input/
Output Board) 6-pin IEEE1394 connector ×1
SDTI (QSDI) INPUT
BNC type ×1, SDTI (QSDI) format
(270Mbps), SMPTE 305M/322M
SDI INPUT BNC type ×2 (active-through),
SMPTE 259M (DSR-2000)/ITU-R
BT.656 (DSR-2000P), SDI format
(270Mbps)
Analog video input
VIDEO IN BNC type ×2 (loop-through),
composite, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω, sync
negative
REF. VIDEO IN BNC type ×2 (loop-through), black
burst, 0.286 Vp-p (DSR-2000) or
0.3 Vp-p (DSR-2000P), 75 Ω, sync
negative
S VIDEO IN DIN 4-pin ×1
Y: 1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω, sync negative
C: 0.286 Vp-p (DSR-2000) or
0.3 Vp-p (DSR-2000P), 75 Ω
(burst level)
COMPONENT VIDEO IN Y/R–Y/B–Y
BNC type ×3, component video
Y: 1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω, sync negative
R–Y: 0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω (75% for
DSR -2000 or 100% for DSR-
2000P)
B–Y: 0.7Vp-p, 75 Ω (75% for
DSR -2000 or 100% for DSR-
2000P)
Analog audio input
AUDIO IN XLR 3-pin (female) ×4,
–6/0/+4 dBu, 600 Ω ON/OFF/–60
dBu, high impedance, balanced
Digital audio input
DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU) IN CH-1/2, CH-3/4
BNC×2, complying with AES-3id-
1995
Timecode input
TIME CODE IN BNC type ×1, SMPTE (DSR-
2000)/EBU (DSR-2000P)
0.5 to 18 Vp-p, 3.3 kΩ, unbalanced
Output connectors
Digital output
i.LINK (When using DSBK-190 i.LINK/DV Input/
Output Board) 6-pin IEEE1394 connector ×1
SDTI (QSDI) OUTPUT
BNC type ×1, SDTI (QSDI) format
(270Mbps), SMPTE 305M/322M
SDI OUTPUT 1, 2, 3 (SUPER)
BNC type ×3, SMPTE 259M
(DSR-2000)/ITU-R BT.656 (DSR-
2000P), SDI format (270Mbps)
SDTI-CP OUTPUT (When using DSBK-210)
BNC type ×3
SMPTE 305M, 326M
Analog video output
VIDEO OUT 1, 2, 3 (SUPER)
BNC type ×3, composite, 1.0 Vp-p,
75 Ω, sync negative
REF. VIDEO OUTBNC type ×1, composite sync,
0.286 Vp-p (DSR-2000) or 0.3 Vp-
p (DSR-2000P), 75 Ω, sync
negative (with burst)
1-74 DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Appendixes
146
Appendixes
S VIDEO OUT DIN 4-pin ×1
Y: 1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω, sync negative
C: 0.286 Vp-p (DSR-2000) or
0.3 Vp-p (DSR-2000P), 75 Ω
(burst level)
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT Y/R–Y/B–Y
BNC type ×3, component video
Y: 1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω, sync negative
R–Y: 0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω (75% for
DSR-2000 or 100% for DSR-
2000P)
B–Y: 0.7Vp-p, 75 Ω (75% for
DSR-2000 or 100% for DSR-
2000P)
Analog audio output
AUDIO OUT XLR 3-pin (male) ×4, +4/0/–6 dBu
(selectable by menu setting),
600 Ω loaded, low impedance,
balanced
MONITOR AUDIO
Phono jack ×1, –11 dBu, 47 kΩ
load, unbalanced
Digital audio output
DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU) OUT CH-1/2, CH-3/4
BNC×2, complying with AES-3id-
1995
Headphone output
HEADPHONES Stereo phone jack ×1, –∞ to
–13 dBu, 8 Ω, unbalanced
Timecode output
TIME CODE OUTBNC type ×1, SMPTE (DSR-
2000)/EBU (DSR-2000P)
2.2 Vp-p±3.0 dB, 600 Ω,
unbalanced, (when 75 Ω
terminated)
Control connectors
VIDEO CONTROL
D-sub 15-pin, male, for connection
of optional UVR-60/60P or BVR-
50/50P
CONTROL PANEL
D-sub 15-pin, female, for
connection of optional DSBK-200
REMOTE-IN D-sub 9-pin, female, for connection
of another DSR-2000/2000P unit or
other editing controller, complying
with RS-422A
REMOTE-OUT D-sub 9-pin, female, for loop-
through output of signals from the
REMOTE-IN connector
Accessories supplied
AC power cord (1)
Operating Instructions (1)
RCC-5G 9-pin remote control cable (1)
Accessories not supplied
DSBK-210 SDTI-CP Output Board
DSBK-190 i. LINK/DV Input/Output Board
RCC-5G 9-pin Remote Control Cable, 5 m (16 ft) long
DSBK-200 Control Panel
RMM-130 Rack Mount Kit
PDV-64ME/94ME/124ME/184ME Digital Video
Cassette (standard size)
PDVM-12ME/22ME/32ME/40ME Digital Video
Cassette (mini-size)
DV12CL Cleaning Cassette (standard size)
DVM12CL Cleaning Cassette (mini-size)
Design and specifications are subject to change
without notice.
Specifications
Appendixes
Appendixes
147
ClipLink
TM Guide
What Is ClipLink?
The ClipLink
TM
function greatly improves the
efficiency of the video production process as a whole
by recording various editing-related data on tape when
shooting. As such, ClipLink is a revolutionary
function that transcends the conventional separation of
shooting and editing.
How ClipLink Changes Video Production
Techniques
The following describes various ways in which
ClipLink
1)
video production differs from conventional
video production.
Recording of ClipLink log data lightens the
shooting workload
When you start shooting a scene, ClipLink log data
such as the scene number and time code data are
automatically recorded into the cassette memory. This
eliminates the need for a conventional “shot list”
compiled by someone using a stopwatch, clipboard
and pencil. You can also designate unwanted scenes
as “NG” (no good) and automatically skip all “NG”
scenes when editing.
Recorded Index Pictures drastically cut
editing time
The ClipLink function also features Index
Pictures a time-saving tool for rough editing. Each
Index Picture is a compressed image taken from the
start of each scene, which is recorded onto the tape as
a still picture. When editing, begin by transferring
only the Index Pictures and the ClipLink log data to
the EditStation’s hard disk. You can also transfer OK
scenes only (“NG” scenes are skipped).
Next, begin rough editing by viewing the Index
Pictures on the EditStation’s GUI display and
rearranging them as you wish. This eliminates the
difficult work of matching up a handwritten shot list
with recorded scenes. After you have completed this
rough editing, you can then transfer only the
recordings needed for your video program.
High-speed transfer of recordings
It is also possible to transfer the editing material itself
between the DSR-85/85P and ES-7 at four times
normal speed. In other words, the transfer can be
carried out in one fourth of the real time duration. It is
of course possible to carry out a transfer at four times
normal speed when backing up video and audio data
recorded on the disk drive to the DSR-85/85P, or in the
opposite direction when loading data backed up on the
DSR-85/85P to the disk drive. Thus the time required
is much shorter than with conventional equipment (for
which, for example, transferring a 40-minute segment
of video takes 40 minutes).
Note
To transfer digital signals (video, audio and time code)
recorded on a tape on this unit from the DSR-85/85P
to the ES-7 at four times normal speed requires a
continuous recorded section of about 40 seconds
before the IN point on the recorded tape.
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................
1) The ClipLink system is a video production system which
uses the cassette memory function.
1-75
DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Appendixes
148
Appendixes
Example System Configuration and Operation Flow
The following illustration shows an example system
configuration for using the ClipLink function and a
typical ClipLink operation flow.
Shooting
DVCAM
camcorder (DSR-
130/130P/300/
300P/500WS/
500WSP)
DVCAM standard cassette or DVCAM mini cassette
Index Pictures: recorded on
tape
ClipLink log data: recorded in
cassette memory
ClipLink log data tranfer
ES-7 EditStation™
non-linear editing
system
DSR-2000/85/1800/1600
a)
(or DSR-2000P/85P/1800P/
1600P
a)
) Digital
Videocassette Recorder
Video output (QSDI)
Index Pictures
ClipLink log data
RS-422A interface
Editing
Actual AV data
QSDI input/output
ES-7 EditStation™
non-linear editing
system
DSR-2000/85
b)
/1800/1600
a)
(or DSR-2000P/85P
b)
/1800P/
1600P
a)
) Digital
Videocassette Recorder
a) The DSR-1600/1600P is a videocassette player.
b) Between the DSR-85/85P and ES-7, quadruple transfer is possible through the QSDI.
ClipLink log data recorded onto DVCAM
cassettes links shooting and editing operations.
ClipLink
Guide
Appendixes
Appendixes
149
Data Generated When Shooting
The following describes the kinds of data that is
generated when using the ClipLink function.
Index Pictures
When shooting, a single-frame image from the Mark
IN point at the start of each scene is recorded as a still
picture into the DSR-1/1P’s internal memory. These
images are called “Index Pictures”. When you finish
shooting, the Index Pictures from all scenes are
recorded onto the tape after the last scene.
Up to 32 Index Pictures can be recorded onto the tape
space normally occupied by one frame, as shown
below.
Seven frame spaces are reserved at the end of the last
scene as a recording area for Index Pictures. (A
cassette with 16 Kbits of cassette memory can record
up to 198 Index Pictures, and a cassette with 4 Kbits of
cassette memory can record up to 45 Index Pictures.)
Tape
After shooting, the Index
Pictures in the internal
memory are recorded onto the
video tape.
DVCAM camcorder’s
internal memory
Scene 1 Scene 2 Scene 3 Scene n
1
5
9
13
17
21
25
29
2
6
10
14
18
22
26
30
3
7
11
15
19
23
27
31
4
8
12
16
20
24
28
32
0 90 180 270 360 450 540 630
60
120
180
240
300
360
420
NTSC
(72)
(144)
(216)
(288)
(360)
(432)
(504)
(PAL)
Index Picture
720 dots
480 lines (NTSC) or 576 lines (PAL)
ClipLink log data
ClipLink log data can be recorded automatically or
manually into the cassette memory for use as a convenient alternative to the conventional “shot list”.
ClipLink log data includes the following items.
This cannot be changed (set to “1” at shipping).
ClipLink log data
Reel number (cassette number)
Description
Data (maximum length: 8 digits) consisting of alphanumeric characters and/or
symbols (This is left blank at shipping.)
OK/NG Indicates the OK/NG status of a particular scene. (In the OK case, nothing is
recorded.)
Mark IN/OUT point time codes These are the time codes that indicate the Mark IN and Mark OUT points for each
scene (HH:MM:SS). These time codes are recorded when the camera has been set to
MARK mode.
The frame digit is incremented at each Mark IN point and is decremented at each Mark
OUT point. (For details, see “Time codes recorded for Mark IN/OUT points” on page
151.)
This is the time code that indicates the cue points (valid up to the frame digit). This
time code is recorded when the camera has been set to CUE mode. When in this
mode, the time codes at the start and end of a recording (the Rec IN and Rec OUT
time codes) are automatically recorded as Mark IN/OUT points.
Take number
Scene number A three-digit number from 001 to 198 (starts at 001 and is automatically incremented
with each scene).
Cue point time code
1-76 DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Appendixes
150
Appendixes
How to record ClipLink log data
Cue point time codes
This type of data is especially useful when shooting
scenes that may contain unexpected events, such as
when shooting for sports coverage or documentaries.
Set the camera to CUE mode before you start to
record. While recording, each time you press the
camera’s TAKE button, the current time code is
recorded as a cue point time code.
End
recording
Start
recording
Index Picture 1 Index Picture 2
Scene 1
Take 1 Scene 2
Take 1
Mark IN
(manual
recording)
Mark OUT
(manual
recording)
Mark IN
(manual
recording)
Mark OUT
(manual
recording)
Start
recording End
recording
Index Picture 1
Scene 1
Take 1
Rec IN
(automatic
recording)
Rec OUT
(automatic
recording)
Cue point
time code
(manual
recording)
Cue point
time code
(manual
recording)
Cue point
time code
(manual
recording)
ClipLink
Guide
The following describes how to record the various
ClipLink log data items.
OK/NG status
To designate a scene as “NG”, press the NG button on
the camera while shooting the scene or at any time
before you begin shooting the next scene.
All scenes that do not receive an “NG” designation are
recorded as “OK” scenes.
(When you exit the VTR recording mode, changing the
OK/NG status is no longer possible.)
Mark IN/OUT points time codes
This data is especially useful when shooting a video
program for which a scenario has been created.
Set the camera to MARK mode before you start
shooting. While shooting, each time you press the
camera’s TAKE button, Mark IN and Mark OUT time
codes are recorded alternately.
Appendixes
Appendixes
151
Time codes recorded for Mark IN/OUT points
There is a gap between actual time codes and Mark IN/
OUT time codes recorded in the cassette memory, as
shown in the figure below. The frame digit is
incremented at each Mark IN point and is decremented
at each Mark OUT point.
12:23:15:10 12:34:20:20 12:39:24:23
12:23:16 12:34:20:20 12:39:24
Actual time code
(The Index
Picture is the
image around
12:23:15:10.)
Mark IN
(or Rec IN) Mark OUT
(or Rec OUT)
Frame digit
incremented Frame digit
decremented
Cue
Time code
recorded in the
cassette memory
Recording capacity for Mark IN/OUT time
codes and Cue point time codes
When in MARK mode, up to 198 pairs of Mark IN and
Mark OUT points can be recorded (if using a cassette
with 16 Kbits of cassette memory).
When in CUE mode, up to 396 time codes points
(including all cue point time codes and all Mark (Rec)
IN and Mark (Rec) OUT time codes) can be recorded
(if using a cassette with 16 Kbits of cassette memory).
1-77
DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Glossary
Appendixes
152
Appendixes
AES/EBU format
A unified format for digital audio signals.
It allows a single XLR connector to carry
the signals for two channels.
Assemble editing
Editing in which new video/audio is added
in sequence to the end of existing recorded
video/audio. See also “Insert editing”.
Bridge connection
A connection which allows a signal input
to an input terminal to pass through the
unit and exit from an output terminal as
input to external equipment.
B–Y signal
One of the color difference signals, the B
(blue) signal minus Y (luminance) signal.
C signal
See “Chrominance signal”.
Capstan
A drive mechanism that moves the tape at
a specified speed regardless of the
direction (forward or reverse).
Chrominance signal
A signal which carries information about
hue and saturation. Also called “C signal”.
Condensation
Moisture which condensed on tape
transport mechanisms. If there is
condensation on the head drum, tape sticks
to drum and the VCR may malfunction.
Component video signal
A signal that consists of a luminance
signal (Y) and two chrominance signals
(R–Y, B–Y).
Composite video signal
A signal that consists of video, sync and
color burst signals.
Digital VCR
On a digital VCR, video and audio signals
are recorded on magnetic tape and, unlike
on an analog VCR, can be played back
without any quality deterioration.
Drop frame mode
Time code runs at 30 frames/sec. The
NTSC system, however, runs at about
29.97 frames/sec. Drop frame mode
adjusts this difference. The timecode and
video are synchronized by dropping the
first two frames of the timecode every
minute, except at the ten-minute marks.
Drum
See “Head drum”.
E-E mode
Abbreviation of “Electric to Electric”
mode. In this mode, video and audio
signals input to the VCR are output after
passing through internal electric circuits,
but not through magnetic conversion
circuits such as heads and tapes. This can
be used to check input signals and for
adjusting input signal levels.
Emphasis
The signal is emphasized at high
frequencies. During playback, it is de-
emphasized. This suppresses noise
without affecting the original signal.
External lock/Gen-lock
Synchronizing one equipment (controlled
or slave unit) to another (controlling or
master unit). The signal and tape run of
the VCRs used for editing, player and
recorder, are usually synchronized.
Gen-lock (generator lock)
See “External lock”.
Head drum
A metal cylinder to which a video head is
attached. This drum is rotated at high
speeds in synchronization with the sync
signal during recording and playback.
Insert editing
Editing in which new video/audio is added
into the middle of existing recorded video/
audio. You can freely select both video
and audio, video only, or audio only, for
an insert editing. You cannot use a blank
tape for an insert editing: it is necessary to
record time code and for example color bar
signals on your tape in advance. See also
“Assemble editing”.
IRE
A unit for representing a video level laid
down by the IRE (Institute of Radio
Engineers). The IRE is now the IEEE
(Institute of Electric and Electronic
Engineers).
Linear editing
Editing while playing back video and
audio signals recorded on video tape.
See also “Non-linear editing”.
Loading
Also called “threading”. To pull the tape
out of the cassette case, thread it along the
specified tape path, and wrap it on the
drum in order to prepare it for recording or
playback. The VCR automatically loads
the cassette tape when you insert the
cassette into the cassette compartment.
There are two loading modes: standby-on
mode and standby-off mode.
Loop-through connection
See “Bridge connection”.
LTC
Abbreviation of “Longitudinal Time
Code”. This timecode is recorded on a
longitudinal track on the tape. Reading is
unreliable at low speeds, and not possible
at all during still playback. See also
“VITC”.
Luminance signal
A signal that determined the brightness of
the picture. Also called “Y signal”.
Non-drop frame mode
The number of frames of the timecode and
video run is not adjusted. When you use
the timecode in non-drop frame mode, the
real playback time will be about 86
seconds shorter per day than the timecode.
If you edit frame by frame or if you
determine the length of a shot by counting
the timecode, use drop frame mode.
Non-linear editing
Editing while playing back video and
audio signals recorded on hard disks.
Video scenes stored on disk can be cued
up quickly, for increased editing
efficiency. See also “Linear editing”.
PCM audio
This is an audio signal represented by
pulse code modulation. The analog audio
signal is first broken down into a sequence
of pulses, and these are then represented
digitally.
Preroll
Running of a video tape to a prior to an
edit-start point to enable the tape to reach a
steady speed and to be synchronized with
other video tapes.
Reference video signal
A video signal which contains a sync
signal or sync and burst signals, used as a
reference for synchronization of video
equipment.
Glossary
Appendixes
Appendixes
153
R–Y signal
One of the color difference signals, the R
(red) signal minus Y (luminance) signal.
Sampling frequency
The unit of time used when converting an
analog signal with a continuously varying
level to digital form by sampling the level
at a fixed interval. In general, a higher
sampling frequency makes it possible to
digitize analog signals of a higher
frequency.
SCH
Abbreviation of Sub Carrier to Horizontal.
The phase of the subcarrier with respect to
the phase of the horizontal synchronization
signal. In editing of monochrome video,
phase continuity is maintained by editing
in units of frames (two fields), so that the
continuity of the horizontal
synchronization signal phase is
maintained. Editing of color video must be
done in units of two frames (four fields) to
maintain subcarrier continuity. The SCH
of a field can be checked to find out which
of the four fields it represents. This allows
edited video signals to be joined while
maintaining subcarrier continuity.
Search
Viewing the picture or timecode by
running the tape in fast forward or rewind
mode, in order to search for a particular
scene.
Servo
A mechanism that controls the number and
phase of rotations of the head drum or
capstan. Servo mechanism allows
playback of the video signal without guard
band noise. The reference signal of the
servo control is normally a vertical sync
signal.
Servo lock
This refers to the synchronization of the
phase of the drum rotation and the
reference signal for the tape transport
position, so that the video heads can trace
the same pattern on the tape for playback
and recording.
Setup (for DSR-2000)
The difference between the reference black
level and the blanking level of a composite
signal.
SMPTE
Abbreviation of Society of Motion Picture
and Television Engineers, a professional
association established in the USA.
S/N
Signal-to-Noise ratio. The relation of the
strength of the desired signal to the
accompanying electronic interference, the
noise. If S/N is high, sounds are
reproduced with less noise and pictures are
reproduced clearly without snow.
Standby-off mode
One of the stop modes. In this mode, head
drum rotation is stopped and the tape
tension is slackened. It is not possible to
switch instantaneously from this mode to
recording or playback mode. This mode is
not harmful to the tape or heads.
Standby-on mode
One of the stop modes. In this mode, the
head drum continues rotating and the tape
remains wound onto the drum. This mode
enables instantaneous switching to
recording or playback mode. To prevent
damage to the tape or heads, the device
automatically switches from standby-on
mode to standby-off mode after a certain
period of time.
Subcarrier
Color information contained in a
composite video signal. Its amplitude is
for color saturation and its phase to color
burst is for hue.
Superimpose
To put one picture (or characters) onto
another so that both can be seen at the
same time.
S-video
A singal format in which Y (luminance)
and C (chrominance) signals are separated
to reduce interference between them so
that noiseless images are reproduced.
Sync
A reference signal consisting of vertical
and horizontal sync signals used for
synchronizing the scanning patterns of the
video camera and the monitor.
Synchronization
In video editing, alignment of the position
and speed of player and recorder VCRs
tapes. Carried out during preroll in order to
increase editing precision.
Tape tension
The tension applied to a tape. For the tape
to run properly while being wound on the
drum, it must be pulled lightly in the
opposite direction to the direction of
transport. Improper adjustment of tape
tension can cause deviations along the
temporal signal axis. In analog VCRs,
these deviations are evident as skew and
distortion in the upper part of the screen.
TBC
Abbreviation of Time Base Corrector.
Electronic circuits to electrically stabilize
the playback signals by removing color
variation and roll in the playback picture
caused by irregularity in drum rotation and
tape movement. Time base correction
reduces deterioration of picture quality
when transmitting or copying playback
signals.
Threading
See “Loading”.
Time code
The timecode is a tape position
information signal that includes time and
frame data that are recorded onto the tape
so as to facilitate searching of editing
points and recorded scenes when viewing
or editing.
SMPTE timecode is applied to NTSC
system, and EBU timecode is applied to
PAL/SECAM systems. There are two
kinds of signal recorded on tape. One is
longitudinal timecode (LTC) recorded
along the tape (the same way as audio and
CTL signals). The other is vertical
interval timecode (VITC). This code is
inserted in the vertical blanking period and
it is recorded on the tape with video
signals.
Time data
This refers either to time data that is
generated by a timecode generator or time
data that is played back from a tape and
read by a timecode reader.
Unloading
When the EJECT button is pressed, the
VCR automatically winds the tape back
into the cassette case. Also called
“Unthreading”.
Unthreading
See “Unloading”.
1-78 DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Glossary
Appendixes
154
Appendixes
User bits
These are also referred to as “user’s bits”.
The user bits are a 32-bit segment of the
timecode recording area. The user can
select what to record in this segment and
how to use the recorded data. For
example, it can be used to record date
information in addition to the timecode
data or ID numbers for tape reels or
programs.
V (vertical)-blanking
The portion of the video signal that occurs
between the end of one field and the
beginning of the next. During this time,
the electron beams in monitors are turned
off so that they can return from the bottom
of the screen to the top without showing
tracks of movement on the screen. When
the position of v-blanking is not adjusted
correctly, a horizontal black bar appears on
the screen.
Video gain
Amount of amplification for video signals,
expressed in decibels (dB).
VITC
Abbreviation of “Vertical Interval Time
Code”. This timecode is inserted in the
vertical blanking interval and recorded on
the video tracks. It can be read at low
speeds and during still playback, but not
during high-speed playback.
See also “LTC”.
Y signal
See “Luminance signal”.
Index
Index
155
Index
A
AC IN connector 28
Adding a narration 95
Alarm messages 139
Analog
audio input/output section 31
interfaces 8
video input/output section 29
ASSEMBLE button 20
Assemble edit mode 67
Audio
level meters 13
recording level 46
AUDIO CH1, CH1/2 (CH2, CH3/4)
display 14
AUDIO IN
button 21
CH-1 to CH-4 connectors 32
LEVEL switches 32
switches 31
AUDIO OUT
button 21
CH-1 to CH-4 connectors 32
AUTO EDIT button 21
Automatic editing 67
execution 82
B
Basic menu 107
items in the menu 107
menu operations 110
BLACK LEVEL knob 27
C
Capstan override 23
Cassettes 33
compartment 13
inserting/ejecting 34
Cassette memory indicator 19
CH1, 1/2 button 15
CH2, 3/4 button 15
CHANNEL CONDITION indicator 19
CHARACTER switch 25
CHROMA knob 27
CHROMA PHASE (HUE) knob 27
CHROMA PHASE knob 27
ClipLink Guide 147
ClipLink indicator 19
Digitally dubbing DVCAM signals 61
connections 133
Display section 18
DMC
editing 84
playback 55
DMC EDIT button 21
Drop-frame mark 37
Duration display 76
DVCAM
cassettes 33
connections for digital dubbing 133
digital dubbing 61
Dynamic motion control playback 55
E
EDIT button 23
Edit mode 71
assemble edit 67
insert edit 68
setting section 20
Edit points
checking 75
cuing up 22, 78
duration display 76
modifying 76
setting 72
split edit points 73
time value display 75
Edit result checking 80
Editing
adding a narration 95
automatic editing 67
button/switch settings 70
continuous editing 91
DMC editing 84
manual editing 94
preread editing 87
quick editing 90
sequence of operations 69
standalone editing 93
Editing control section 21
E-E mode 13, 22, 23
EJECT button 23
ENTRY/SHIFT button 22
Error messages 139
Extended menu 113
items in the menu 113
menu operations 123
External device connectors 31
External editor settings 130
External lock 42
ClipLink log data
adding to/deleting from 103
creating 105
display 98
rewriting 100
ClipLink operation 97
Component analog recording
connections 131
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN connectors 30
OUT connectors 30
Condensation 135
Connections and settings 125
component analog recording 131
cut editing using i.LINK 125
cut editing using SDI 128
digital nonlinear editing using SDTI
(QSDI) 127
digitally dubbing signals in DVCAM
format 133
preread editing 129
settings on external editor 130
time code settings 130
two-unit synchronous playback 132
Connector panel 28
Continuous editing 91
Control panel
lower control panel 16
subsidiary control panel 25
upper control panel 13
CONTROL PANEL
connector 31
switch 25
COUNTER SEL button 18
Cuing up to
adjacent Mark IN/cue points 99
any desired position 99
cue points 99
edit points 22, 78
Mark IN/OUT points 99
Cut editing
using i.LINK 125
using SDI 128
D
DELETE button 21
DF/NDF switch 26
Digital
input/output section 30
interfaces 8
jog sound 9
nonlinear editing using SDTI (QSDI)
127
DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU)
IN connectors 30
OUT connectors 31
1-79
DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Index
Index
156
Index
F
F FWD button 23
Fault display function 23
Features 7
FREE RUN/REC RUN switch 26
G
Ground terminal 28
H
Head cleaning 135
HEADPHONES jack 17
HOLD button 18
I
i.LINK
button 15
connector 30
cut editing 125
digital dubbing 61
IN button 22
Initial time code value 39
INPUT display 14
Input selection section 14
Input selection/audio mode display section
13
INPUT VIDEO display 14
INSERT buttons 20
Insert edit mode 68
INT/EXT–PRESET/REGEN switch 26
Interfaces 8
J
JOG indicator 20
Jog mode 24
K
KEY INHIBIT
indicator 19
switch 26
L
Lower control panel 16
position adjustment 12
M
Maintenance 135
Manual editing 94
Mark IN/OUT points
changing 100
cuing up to 99
deleting 103
MEMORY indicator 21
Menu See Setup menu
Menu bank operations 112
MENU button 17
METER FULL/FINE button 16
MIXING button 15
MONITOR AUDIO connector 32
Monitor output 81
MONITOR SELECT buttons 17
Monitor/menu/display setting section 17
Monitoring in E-E mode 22, 23
N
Narration 95
9PIN button 15
NOT EDITABLE indicator 20
Notes on use 143
O
OK/NG status 101
Operating status display 35
Operation mode 37
OUT button 22
P
PB
button 18
controls 17
PB FS display 14
PB/EE button 18
PCM digital audio 7
PHONE LEVEL control 17
PLAY button 23
Playback 49
button/switch settings 49
capstan override 54
DMC playback 55
jog mode playback 51
normal playback 50
shuttle mode playback 52
synchronous playback 59
variable mode playback 53
PLAYER button 17
POWER switch 13
Preread
connections 129
editing 87
PREREAD button 17
Preroll 79
PREROLL button 22
Preview 80
PREVIEW button 21
PROCESS CONTROL switch 26
Q
Quick editing 90
R
Rack mount 10
REC
button 22
controls 16
REC INHIBIT
indicator 19
switch 26
REC MODE display 14
RECORDER button 17
Recording 45
button/switch settings
operation 48
time code/user bit values 47
Recording/playback format indicators 19
Reel number 100
REF. VIDEO
IN connectors 29
OUT connector 29
Reference level 46
Reference video signals for analog signal
editing 125
REMOTE button 15
Remote control setting section 15
REMOTE-IN connector 31
REMOTE-OUT connector 31
RESET button 18
REVIEW button 22
REW button 23
S
S VIDEO
IN connector 29
OUT connector 29
Index
Index
157
SC knob 27
SDI
cut editing 128
INPUT connectors 31
OUTPUT 1, 2, and 3 (SUPER)
connectors 31
SDTI (QSDI)
digital nonlinear editing 127
INPUT connector 30
OUTPUT connector 30
SDTI/i.LINK button 14
Search
control section 23
dial 23
SEARCH button 23
SERVO indicator 19
SET button 17
SET UP knob 27
Setup menu 107
basic menu 107
extended menu 113
menu system configuration 107
75-ohm termination switch 29
SHUTTLE indicator 20
Shuttle mode 24
Sound-on-sound 95
Special editing methods 89
adding a narration 95
continuous editing 91
manual editing 94
quick editing 90
standalone editing 93
Specifications 144
Standalone editing 93
STANDBY button 22
STOP button 23
fault display function 23
Subsidiary control panel 25
Superimposing text information 35
SYNC knob 27
Synchronizing time code generator 42
Synchronous playback 59, 132
System configuration 11
T
Tape end alarm indicator 20
Tape transport control section 22
TC SELECT switch 26
Text information 35
Time code
generator/reader 9, 42
recording 47
setting 39
TIME CODE
IN connector 29
OUT connector 29
Time counter display 19
Time data
display 35
selection 49
Time data type 36
indicators 19
TRIM buttons 21
Troubleshooting 137
Two-unit synchronous playback
connections 132
U
Upper control panel 13
User bit
recording 47
setting 41
V
VARIABLE button 23
Variable speed mode 24
VIDEO CONTROL connector 31
VIDEO IN
button 14
connectors 29
VIDEO knob 27
VIDEO OUT 1, 2, and 3 (SUPER)
connectors 30
VITC
field 37
indicator 19
switch 26
W, X
Wide screen 10
Y, Z
Y/C DELAY knob 27
1-80 DSR-2000/2000P
1-1. DSR-2000
Sony Corporation
Printed in Japan
1-81
DSR-2000/2000P
3-203-674-01(1)
1999 by Sony Corporation
Installation Instructions
DSBK-190
i.LINK/DV Input/
Output Board
11
English
For the customers in the USA
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the
limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference when the equipment is
operated in a commercial environment. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instruction
manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential
area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the
user will be required to correct the interference at his own
expense.
You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not
expressly approved in this manual could void your authority to
operate this equipment.
The shielded interface cable recommended in this manual must
be used with this equipment in order to comply with the limits for
a digital device pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may
not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
For the customers in Canada
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-
003.
For the customers in Europe
This product with the CE marking complies with the EMC
Directive (89/336/EEC) issued by the Commission of the
European Community.
Compliance with this directive implies conformity to the
following European standards:
• EN55103-1: Electromagnetic Interference (Emission)
• EN55103-2: Electromagnetic Susceptibility (Immunity)
This product is intended for use in the following Electromagnetic
Environment(s):
E1 (residential), E2 (commercial and light industrial), E3 (urban
outdoors) and E4 (controlled EMC environment, ex. TV studio).
GB
English
1-2. DSBK-190
1-2. DSBK-190
1-82 DSR-2000/2000P
Table of Contens
12
Table of Contents
Overview......................................................................... 12
Components of the DSBK-190 .....................................13
Installation...................................................................... 14
The DSBK-190 i.LINK/DV Input/Output Board is an optional
board for the DSR-2000/2000P Sony Digital Videocassette
Recorder. Installing this board in a DSR-2000/2000P allows
two DSR-2000/2000P units to be connected with an i.LINK/
DV
1)
cable to form a cut editing system. The board also allows
the connection of a Sony consumer DV camera for direct
recording and editing.
Refer to the DSR-2000/2000P Operating Instructions for
information on connecting and operating the DSR-2000/2000P
with the DSBK-190 installed.
Overview
1) is a trademark of Sony Corporation, and indicates technology
complying with the IEEE1394-1995 specification and extensions
thereof.
..........................................................................................................................
13
Components of the DSBK-190
The DSBK-190 consists of the following items.
Connector panel
IF-763 board
Harness
6-pin cable (3.5 m (11 feet))
Screw (M3 × 6,
silver-colored)
Washer
6-pin/4-pin cable
(1 m (3 feet))
1-2. DSBK-190
1-83
DSR-2000/2000P
1-2. DSBK-190
14
Caution
If this option is installed incorrectly, personal injury or damage
to peripheral items may occur due to fire, shock, or other
accidental circumstances. To avoid such risks, installation
should be performed by qualified service personnel.
To install the DSBK-190 in the DSR-2000/2000P, proceed as
follows.
1
Remove the top cover of the DSR-2000/2000P.
Loosen the three screws, and slide the top cover away from
the top retainer and blank panel.
2
Remove the board retainer.
Loosen the screw, then raise the board retainer and pull it
out from the board retainer guide.
Top retainer
Screw
Blank panel
Board retainer
Screw
Screw
Screw
Board retainer guide
Installation
15
3
Remove the blank panel.
Notes
Keep the blank panel and screw in a safe place for future
use.
4
Pass the harness through the opening in which the
connector panel fits and connect it to the connector panel;
then fasten the connector panel to the DSR-2000/2000P
with the screw.
Screw
Blank panel
Harness
Connector panel
(Continued)
Supplied screw (silver-colored)
and washer
1-84 DSR-2000/2000P
16
5
Pass the harness through the cable holder on the IF-763
board, and connect to connector CN401.
6
Insert the IF-763 board in the board slot (fourth from the
outside).
Align the three connectors on the bottom of the board with
the three connectors inside the unit, and push the board
firmly into place.
Connector CN401
IF-763 board
Cable holder
IF-763 board
Installation
17
7
Fix the harness in the cable holder by the board slot.
Cable holder
(Continued)
1-2. DSBK-190
1-85
DSR-2000/2000P
18
8
Replace the board retainer which you removed in step 2, in
its original position.
Push the board retainer into the board retainer guide, and
fasten the screw in the screw hole.
Check that the six claws on the underside of the board
retainer engage with the boards in the slots to hold them in
position.
9
Replace the DSR-2000/2000P top cover.
Board retainer guide
Screw
Board retainer claw
Installation
1-2. DSBK-190
1-86 DSR-2000/2000P
3-203-675-01(1)
1999 by Sony Corporation
Installation Instructions
DSBK-200
Remote Control
Panel
9
English
For the customers in the USA
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the
limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference when the equipment is
operated in a commercial environment. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instruction
manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential
area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the
user will be required to correct the interference at his own
expense.
You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not
expressly approved in this manual could void your authority to
operate this equipment.
The shielded interface cable recommended in this manual must
be used with this equipment in order to comply with the limits for
a digital device pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may
not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
For the customers in Canada
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-
003.
For the customers in Europe
This product with the CE marking complies with the EMC
Directive (89/336/EEC) issued by the Commission of the
European Community.
Compliance with this directive implies conformity to the
following European standards:
• EN55103-1: Electromagnetic Interference (Emission)
• EN55103-2: Electromagnetic Susceptibility (Immunity)
This product is intended for use in the following Electromagnetic
Environment(s):
E1 (residential), E2 (commercial and light industrial), E3 (urban
outdoors) and E4 (controlled EMC environment, ex. TV studio).
GB
English
1-3. DSBK-200
1-3. DSBK-200
1-87
DSR-2000/2000P
10
Installation
Table of Contents
Overview......................................................................... 10
Components of the DSBK-200 .....................................11
Installation...................................................................... 12
The DSBK-200 Remote Control Panel is an optional remote
control panel for the DSR-2000/2000P Sony Digital
Videocassette Recorder. Connecting this remote control panel
to the DSR-2000/2000P allows the DSR-2000/2000P to be
remotely controlled.
Normally, use this remote control panel installed in the
optional BKNW-121 Control Panel Case.
For details of the functions of the buttons on this remote
control panel, refer to the Operating Instructions for the DSR-
2000/2000P.
Overview
11
Remote control panel
Components of the DSBK-200
The DSBK-200 comprises the following items.
Interface cable (10 m (32 ft.))
Double-sided adhesive tape
(two pieces)
1-3. DSBK-200
1-88 DSR-2000/2000P
12
Installation
Installation
Use the following procedure to install the DSBK-200 Remote
Control Panel in the optional BKNW-121 Control Panel Case.
1
Pass the flat cable connector and ground wire of the
interface cable through the hole at the rear of the bottom of
the control panel case, to the interior of the control panel
case.
Ground wire
Flat cable connector
Control panel case
Interface cable
13
2
Connect the flat cable connector to the connector on the
bottom of the remote control panel, then remove the screw
for grounding and tighten it together with the ground wire.
Fix the flat cable connector in place by fastening the
retaining clips at each end of the connector on the remote
control panel.
Note
Make sure that the projection on the underside of the
connector matches the cutout on the control panel
connector. The connector cannot be inserted upside down.
Flat cable connector
Retaining clips
Connector on the bottom of
the remote control panel
Screw for grounding
Ground wire
(Continued)
1-3. DSBK-200
1-89
DSR-2000/2000P
14
Installation
3
Use the cable straps on the base of the control panel case to
hold the cable tidy, as required.
4
Slacken the two screw fasteners in the base of the control
panel case.
Cable strap
Interface
cable
Screw fasteners
15
5
Attach the double-sided adhesive tape to the edge of the
remote control panel as shown in the figure, then pull
forward the cushion part of the control panel case, and
insert the remote control panel.
6
Slide the cushion part of the control panel case back, to
hold the remote control panel in place, then turn the screw
fasteners in the base of the control panel case to hold the
cushion part in position.
7
Connect the D-sub 15-pin connector of the interface cable
to the CONTROL PANEL connector of the DSR-2000/
2000P, and fasten the connector with the retaining screws.
Remote control panel
DSR-2000/2000P
Interface cable
Retaining screws
D-sub 15-pin
connector
Double-sided adhesive tape
Cushion
1-3. DSBK-200
1-90 DSR-2000/2000P
16
Installation
Using the remote control panel
Power on the DSR-2000/2000P, and in the subsidiary control
panel, set the CONTROL PANEL switch to EXT. This lights
the ON LINE indicator of the remote control panel, indicating
that it is ready for use.
If you set extension menu item 117 on the DSR-2000/2000P to
PARA, you can use both this remote control panel and the
DSR-2000/2000P control panel.
For more information about this, refer to the Operating
Instructions for the DSR-2000/2000P.
1-3. DSBK-200
2-1
DSR-2000/2000P
Start
Determination of
installation place
Unpacking
Rack mounting
Connectors
Initial setup
Operation check
END
· · · If an error message is shown on the time counter, refer to
“Section 4. Error Message” in service manual.
· · · 2-2. Operational Environment
· · · 2-3. Operating Voltage
· · · 2-4. Installation Space
· · · 2-5. Supplied Accessories
· · · 2-7. Mounting
· · · 2-8-1. Connectors/Cables
· · · 2-8-2. Input/Output Signals of the Connectors
· · · 2-9. Installation Setup and Adjustment
Be sure to install the DSR-2000/2000P in location satisfying the required operational environment described below to
assure the DSR-2000/2000P superior performance and to maintain the excellent serviceability and accessibility.
2-1. Installation Procedure
2-2. Operational Environment
.Operating temperature : +5 dC to +40 dC
.Humidity : 80 % or less
.Storage temperature : _20 dC to +60 dC
.Locations to avoid : .Areas where the unit will be exposed to direct sunlight or any other strong lights.
.Dusty areas or areas where it is subject to vibration.
.Areas with strong electric or magnetic fields.
.High-temperature environment.
(Good air circulation is essential to prevent internal heat build-up. Place the unit in location
with sufficient air circulation. Do not block the ventilation holes on the sides of the cabinet
and the rear panel.)
.Horizontal condition : within ±30 d
2-3. Operating Voltage
.Power voltage : AC 100 V to 240 V
.Power frequency : 50/60 Hz
.Power consumption : 110 W
Section 2
Installation
2-2 DSR-2000/2000P
DIGITAL
VIDEOCASSETTE
RECORDER DSR-2000
VIDEO IN
REMOTE
9PIN
I.LINK
CH-1,1/2
CH-2,3/4
POWER
MIXING
SDTI/I.LINK
INPUT SELECT
30 (handle hight)
115
98.5
16.5
87.5
191
174.5
372 27.5
19.7 495.5
602.3
4.8
52.5 400
ø20
424
427
577 (maximum traveling distance)
With the unit mounted in the rack
Set’s height at
rack mounting.
174.5
()
(height as slide rail center) Unit : mm
2-4. Installation Space
.The rear side must be at least 40 cm away from the walls for ventilation and maintenance.
.When the unit is operated on a desk or similar condition, assure that the clearance above the unit is at least 40 cm to
provide accessibility to the printed circuit boards and other mechanical parts. Note that it is not necessary to provide the
space when the unit is mounted in a rack since the printed circuit boards can be repaired after it is pulled out.
2-5. Supplied Accessories
.AC power cord : 1
.RCC-5G 9-pin remote cable : 1
.Operating instructions : 1
2-6. Optional Accessories
.i.LINK/DV input/output board : DSBK-190
.Extension control panel : DSBK-200
.TBC remote control unit : UVR-60/60P
.Rack mount Kit : RMM-130
(The unit can be mounted in a 19-inch standard rack)
.Remote control cable : RCC-5G/10G/30G
.Cleaning cassette tape : DV12CL (Standard size), DVM12CL (Mini size)
.Digital video cassette (Mini size) : PDVM-12ME/22ME/32ME/40ME
.Digital video cassette (Standard size) : PDV-64ME/94ME/124ME/184ME
2-4. Installation Space
2-5. Supplied Accessories
2-6. Optional Accessories
2-3
DSR-2000/2000P
Inner member
Inner member
Screws (B4 x 6)
Screws (B4 x 6)
2-7. Rack Mounting
The unit can be mounted in a 19-inch standard rack.
It is recommended to use the following kit.
Rack Mount Kit : RMM-130
(optional accessory)
or
RACK-MOUNT SLIDES : MODEL 305 slide length 22
inch (ACCURIDE)
Note for rack mounting :
.When several VTRs are mounted in a rack, it is recom-
mended to install a fan for ventilation. Good air circula-
tion is essential to prevent internal heat build-up in a
rack.
.The unit must be kept in an operating temperature range
from +5 d to +40 dC.
.Never remove an upper panel and lower panel during
rack mounting.
.Be sure to secure the rack to the floor to avoid accidents
when a unit is pulled out.
.Connect long enough cables on the connector panel,
considering that the unit is pulled out.
.Maximum two units can be mounted in a stack. For three
units of more, keep a space for one unit between the
mounted units, using a rack. The space should be 44 mm
or more in height.
L-angle Rack
L-angle Outer member
Bracket
50 mm
+5
_0
1. Remove the four screws on right and left side panels.
And install the Inner Members of the rails to the right
and left side panels with the screws removed.
2. Install the Outer Member Brackets of the slide rails to
the rack. Adjust the distance from the edge of the slide
rail to the outside of the rack so that it meets the
required specification.
2-7. Rack Mounting
2-4 DSR-2000/2000P
3. Remove the two screws (B4 x 8) on the right and left
side panels. (Be careful not to lose these four screws.)
4. Install the L-angles to the holes described in step 3
with the supplied screws (PSW4 x 16) in RMM-130
for these L-angles.
n
Never use screws PSW4 x 16 to install the right and left
side panels without L-angles. Be sure to use the screws
B4 x 8 removed in step 3. Screws for L-angles are longer
than ones for the side panels. Therefore, using the screws
PSW4 x 16 may cause trouble in the unit.
Screws (B4 x 8)
Screws (B4 x 8)
L-angle
L-angle
Screws
(PSW4 x 16)
Screws
(PSW4 x 16)
2-7. Rack Mounting
2-5
DSR-2000/2000P
2-8. Connectors
2-8-1. Connectors/Cables
When external cables are connected to the connector on a connector panel during maintenance, the following (or equiva-
lents) must be used.
Connectors on DSR-2000/2000P Side Connector/Cable
Panel indication Designation Sony Part No.
ANALOG IN BNC, MALE 1-560-069-11
REF. VIDEO IN
TIME CODE IN
VIDEO IN
COMPONENT VIDEO IN
S VIDEO IN YC-15 V (1.5 m) optional accessory
AUDIO IN CH-1/2/3/4 XLR 3P, MALE 1-508-084-11
ANALOG OUT BNC, MALE 1-560-069-11
REF. VIDEO OUT
TIME CODE OUT
VIDEO OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
MONITOR AUDIO PIN PLUG Standard Product
S VIDEO OUT YC-15 V (1.5 m) optional accessory
AUDIO OUT CH-1/2/3/4 XLR 3P, FEMALE 1-508-083-11
i.LINK IEEE1394 6P (1 m) 1-782-408-21
IEEE1394 6P (3.5 m) 1-791-184-11
SDI INPUT BNC, MALE 1-560-069-11
SDI OUTPUT BNC, MALE 1-560-069-11
SDTI (QSDTI) INPUT BNC, MALE 1-560-069-11
SDTI (QSDTI) OUTPUT BNC, MALE 1-560-069-11
DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU) BNC, MALE 1-560-069-11
INPUT CH-1/2, CH-3/4
OUTPUT CH-1/2, CH-3/4 BNC, MALE 1-560-069-11
VIDEO CONTROL D-SUB 15P, FEMALE 1-561-610-21
CONTROL PANEL D-SUB 15P, MALE 1-561-651-11
REMOTE-IN D-SUB 9P, MALE 1-560-651-11
REMOTE-OUT D-SUB 9P, MALE 1-560-651-11
2-8. Connectors
2-6 DSR-2000/2000P
2-8-2. Input/Output Signals of the Connectors
INPUT
REF.VIDEO : BNC x2 (loop-through)
NTSC black burst, 0.286 V p-p, 75 Z, sync negative
PAL black burst, 0.3 Vp-p , 75 Z sync negative
VIDEO IN : BNC x2 (loop-through)
Composite, 1.0 V p-p, 75 Z, sync negative
COMPONENT VIDEO : BNC x3
Y : 1.0 V p-p, 75 Z, sync negative
R-Y/B-Y : 0.7 V p-p, 75 Z (NTSC : 75 % PAL : 100 %)
S VIDEO : DIN 4P x1
Y : 1.0 V p-p, 75 Z, sync negative
C : NTSC 0.286 V p-p (burst level), 75 Z
PAL 0.3 V p-p (burst level), 75 Z
SDI INPUT : BNC x2 (active-through)
Serial digital interface format (270 Mbps),
SMPTE 259M (NTSC)/ITU-R BT.656 (PAL)
SDTI (QSDI) : BNC x1
Serial data transport interface
(DVCAM compression signal : Video + Audio + TC signal)
SMPTE 305M/322M
AUDIO IN : XLR 3P x4
Reference level switchable (_6/0/+4 dBu), 600 Z/10 kZ switchable, balanced
DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU) : BNC x2 (conformed with AES-3id-1995)
TIME CODE : BNC x1
SMPTE (NTSC)/EBU (PAL)
0.5 to 18 V p-p, 3 kZ, unbalanced
i.LINK : IEEE1394 connector 6P x1
2-8. Connectors
2-7
DSR-2000/2000P
OUTPUT
REF.VIDEO : BNC x1
NTSC composite sync, 0.286 V p-p, 75 Z, sync negative (with burst signal)
PAL composite sync, 0.3 V p-p, 75 Z, sync negative (with burst signal)
VIDEO OUT1, 2, 3(SUPER) : BNC x3
Composite, 1.0 V p-p, 75 Z, sync negative
COMPONENT VIDEO : BNC x3
Y : 1.0 V p-p, 75 Z, sync negative
R-Y/B-Y : 0.7 V p-p, 75 Z (NTSC : 75 % PAL : 100 %)
S VIDEO : DIN 4P x1
Y : 1.0 Vp-p, 75 Z, sync negative
C : NTSC 0.286 V p-p (burst level), 75 Z
PAL 0.3 V p-p (burst level), 75 Z
SDI OUTPUT1, 2, 3(SUPER) : BNC x3
Serial digital interface format (270 Mbps),
SMPTE 259M (NTSC)/ITU-R BT.656 (PAL)
SDTI (QSDI) : BNC x1
Serial data transport interface
(DVCAM compression signal : Video + Audio + TC signal)
SMPTE 305M/322M
AUDIO OUT : XLR 3P x4, MALE
+4 dBu, 600 Z load, balanced (low impedance)
MONITOR AUDIO : PHONO JACK x1
_6 dBu, 47 kZ load, unbalanced
DIGITAL AUDIO : BNC x2 (conformed with AES-3id-1995)
TIME CODE : BNC x1
SMPTE (NTSC)/EBU (PAL)
2.2 V p-p ±3.0 dB, 600 Z, unbalanced
i.LINK : IEEE1394 connector 6P x1
2-8. Maching Connectors
2-8 DSR-2000/2000P
VIDEO CONTROL (D-sub 15 pin : MALE)
Pin No. Signal Operating Voltage IN/OUT
1 SYNC CONTROL _5 V to +5 V IN
2 HUE CONTROL _5 V to +5 V IN
3 SC CONTROL _5 V to +5 V IN
4 VIDEO LEVEL CONTROL _5 V to +5 V IN
5 SET UP CONTROL _5 V to +5 V IN
6 CHROMA LEVEL CONTROL _5 V to +5 V IN
7_9 V SUPPLY _9 V OUT
8 GND
9 FRAME GND
10 ___
11 ___
12 ___
13 Y/C DELAY CONTROL _5 V to +5 V IN
14 __
15 +9 V SUPPLY +9 V OUT
CONTROL PANEL (D-sub 15 pin : FEMALE)
Pin No. Signal Operating Voltage
1SI
2 SCK
3CS
4SO
5 UNREG +12 V
6 UNREG +12 V
7 UNREG +12 V
8 KY EXT
9 GND
10 GND
11 GND
12 GND
13 UNREG GND
14 UNREG GND
15 UNREG GND
34521
11 12109
786
151413
65478
13 121415
213
9
1011
<external view>
<external view>
2-8. Connectors
2-9
DSR-2000/2000P
REMOTE (D-sub 9 pin : MALE)
<external view>
Pin No. Controlling Device Controlled Device
1 FRAME GROUND FRAME GROUND
2 RECEIVE A TRANSMIT A
3 TRANSMIT B RECEIVE B
4 TRANSMIT COMMON RECEIVE COMMON
5 PRIORITY IN PRIORITY OUT
6 RECEIVE COMMON TRANSMIT COMMON
7 RECEIVE B TRANSMIT B
8 TRANSMIT A RECEIVE A
9 FRAME GROUND FRAME GROUND
32145
7689
4
21
3
S VIDEO (Circular 4 pin)
<external view>
Pin No. Output Signal
1 Y (G)
2 C (G)
3 Y (X)
4 C (X)
2-8. Connectors
2-10 DSR-2000/2000P
2-9. Installation Setup and Adjustment
2-9. Installation Setup and Adjustment
2-9-1. Switch Settings on the Connector Panel
When the unit is installed, be sure to perform the following setup and adjustment. If the adjustment is not
performed, the unit may not operate properly.
Refer to the operating instruction “Chapter 1 Overview” for setup and adjustment.
[Connector Panel]
(1) The setting of 75 Z termination switch :
REF VIDEO 75 Z ON/OFF
ON : When the line is terminated in this unit.
OFF : When another unit is connected with this unit.
(2) The setting of video input termination switch :
VIDEO INPUT 75 Z ON/OFF
ON : When the line is terminated in this unit.
OFF : When another unit is connected with this unit.
(3) The setting of audio input level select switch :
+4 dBm : +4 dBu reference level on output side
0 dBm : 0 dBu reference level on output side
_6 dBm : _6 dBu reference level on output side
2-11
DSR-2000/2000P
2-9-2. Front Panel Setting
[Control Panel]
(1) VIDEO INPUT select switch setting : COMPOSITE ; Ordinary video signal
S VIDEO ; Y/C separation type S Video signal
Y-R, B ; Component signal (Betacam)
SDI ; Component digital signal
SDTI/i.LINK ; DV compressed digital signal
(2) AUDIO INPUT SELECT : Analog/Digital (AES/EBU)/SDI
[SUB sidiary Control Panel]
(1) CHARACTER : Selects either the character information is superimposed in the
video signal or not.
(2) CONTROL PANEL : Selects the status of the control panel when operating this unit.
(3) REC INHIBIT : Inhibits recording on a tape.
(4) KEY INHIBIT : Disables operation of the buttons specified on the upper/lower
control panels.
(5) PROCESS CONTROL : Selects the control method and setting of the built-in digital
video processor.
(6) INT/EXT-PRESET/REGEN : Selects internal time code/external time code, and preset the
built-in time code generator.
(7) FREE RUN/REC RUN : Selects synchronous operation of the built-in time code
generator.
(8) DF/NDF : Selects the synchronous operation of the time code generator
and the counter.
(9) VITC : Sets ON to record the VITC generates in the built-in time code
generator.
(10)TC SELECT : Selects the time code displayed on the time counter display
block.
(11)VIDEO : Adjusts the output level of the video signal.
(12)SET UP : Adjusts the setup level.
(13)CHROMA : Adjusts the output level of the chroma signal.
(14)Y/C DELAY : Adjusts the amount of the Y/C delay.
(15)CHROMA PHASE : Adjusts the chroma phase (the relative phase with the burst
signal).
(16)SYNC : Adjusts the sync phase of the output signal.
(17)SC : Adjusts the phase of the subcarrier.
2-9. Installation Setup and Adjustment
2-12 DSR-2000/2000P
2-9-3. On-board Switch Setting
SV-212 board
n
Do not change the setting of switches when the “factory use” is shown in the description.
Ref No. Description Factory Setting
S101-1 HOURS METER can enter reset mode. OFF
S101-2 factory use OFF
S101-3 Use this switch when operating the machine with cassette compartment removed. OFF
S101-4 This defeats an error detection of mechanism and setvo system alignment. OFF
S101-5 factory use OFF
S101-6 factory use OFF
S101-7 factory use OFF
S101-8 factory use OFF
S101
AB C DE F G H J K L MNP
1
2
3
4
5
6
SV-212 BOARD (A SIDE)
2-9. Installation Setup and Adjustment
2-13
DSR-2000/2000P
S201
S101
AB C DE F G H J K L MNP
1
2
3
4
5
6
SY-278 BOARD (A SIDE)
SY-278 board
n
Do not change the setting of switches when the “factory use” is shown in the description.
Ref No. Description Factory Setting
S101 Push this switch when resetting the system control. —
S201-1 factory use OFF
S201-2 factory use OFF
S201-3 factory use OFF
S201-4 factory use OFF
S201-5 factory use OFF
S201-6 factory use OFF
S201-7, 8 Destination setting Destination bit-7 bit-8 —
UC OFF OFF
J ON OFF
CE OFF ON
2-9. Installation Setup and Adjustment
2-14 DSR-2000/2000P
S200
AB C DE F G H J K L MNP
1
2
3
4
5
6
VPR-62 BOARD (A SIDE)
VPR-62 board
Ref No. Name Description Factory Setting
S200 A/D LEVEL REF .Use this switch when performing the A/D level adjustment. OFF
.When this switch is set to ON, the standard-level signal
generated based on the internal data is output for adjusting
the A/D level.
Return the setting of the switch (S200) to OFF position.
n
The switch (S200) on the VPR-62 board functions only when
the switch (S101-1) on the SV-212 board is set to ON position
2-9-4. System Adjustment After Installation
Observe the following precautions when this equipment is used for editing system.
.The REF. VIDEO INPUT requires video signal which is in comfomity with the RS-170A.
.Adjust the sync phase of this equipment to the system sync with [SYNC PHASE] control on the sub
control panel.
.Adjust the SCH phase of this equipment to the system SCH with [SC PHASE] control on the sub
control panel.
.When this unit is connected to a switcher that does not have the sync switching function, the SYNC/
BURST level adjustment is required.
2-9. Installation Setup and Adjustment
3-1
DSR-2000/2000P
3-1. Location of Main Parts
3-1-1. Location of Printed Circuit Boards
Section 3
Service Overview
1
2
3
5
!=
!-
!/
![ !,
!'
!;
!.
@/
@-
@=
!]
!\
@]
@[
@\
@;
7
9
4
3
8
6
3-2 DSR-2000/2000P
No. Board Name Circuit Configuration
1APR-45 Audio process
2VPR-62/62P Analog video input . output process/reference
3DPR-136 Digital process
4DU-83 Serial No. 100001-100910: UC Digital process
400001-401550: CE
5DU-95 Serial No. 100001-100290: UC SDI character generator
400001-400300: CE
6DU-84 Serial No. 100001-101240: UC Digital process
400001-401550: CE
7IF-763 i.LINK interface board (Option: DSBK-190)
8DU-89 Serial No. 100001-101240: UC Digital process
400001-401550: CE
9DY-15 Fluorescent display board/audio meter/input . output selection
!/ VR-260 Audio REC volume control
!- HP-99 Headphone interface
!= VR-259 Audio PB volume control
![ KY-452 Operation panel
!] PTC-100 Search dial sensor
!\ SW-11/11P Switch
!; SW-17 Remote switch
!' MB-859 Mother board
!, RP-111 RF REC/PB, ATF detection
!. EX-752 Intermediate board
@/ CP-341 Video/remote interface
@- SV-212 Servo/mechanism control
@= SY-278 System control
@[ CN-1968 i.LINK connector board (Option: DSBK-190)
@] CP-342 Audio interface
@\ FU-78P Serial No. 101241-: UC Digital process (PB)
401551-: CE
@; FU-78R Serial No. 101241-: UC Digital process (REC)
401551-: CE
3-1. Location of Main Parts
3-3
DSR-2000/2000P
3
4
1
2
6
5
Locations of Mechanism Deck
No. Board Name Circuit Configuration
1SE-521 Mode sensor/tape end sensor/loading motor FG sensor
2SE-538 Tension sensor
3CN-1863 Sensor input/output board
4SE-525 LED signal board
5SE-522 Tape top sensor/reel position sensor (Mini/M/Standard)
6MS-64 Servo/mechanism control
3-1. Location of Main Parts
3-4 DSR-2000/2000P
Locations of Cassette Compartment
No. Board Name Circuit Configuration
1CN-2021 Intermediate board between CC-84 and CC-83
2CC-83 Cassette compartment mode detection/intermediate board
3CC-85 Cassette compartment cassette in detection
4CC-84 Cassette compartment cassette type detection
5CN-2022 Intermediate board between CC-85 and CC-84
2
1
3
4
5
3-1. Location of Main Parts
3-5
DSR-2000/2000P
1
2
3
Locations of DSBK-2000 (Option)
No. Board Name Circuit Configuration
1IF-778 Operation panel intermediate board (Option: DSBK-200)
2KY-452A Operation panel board (Option: DSBK-200)
3PTC-100 Search dial sensor
3-1. Location of Main Parts
3-6 DSR-2000/2000P
1
2
![
!.
@=
0
@]
!'
@\
8
@/
!;
9
3
4
5
6
7
!=!-
!]
!\
!,
@-
@[
3-1-2. Location of Main Mechanical Parts
1Head cleaning solenoid
2Loading motor
3TG1 arm assembly
4Shuttle (left) assembly
5S tension regulator assembly
6S reel motor
7S brake assembly
8Brake solenoid
9M stop solenoid assembly
!/ T brake assembly
!- MIC assembly
!= MIC holder assembly
![ T reel motor
!] Shuttle (right) assembly
!\ T drawer arm assembly
!; TG8 arm assembly
!' Capstan motor
!, Elevator cam
!. Pinch solenoid assembly
@/ Reel shift motor
@- Pinch roller
@= HC roller assembly
@[ Drum assembly
@] Rail assembly
@\ Cassette compartment motor assembly
3-1. Location of Main Parts
3-7
DSR-2000/2000P
!=
!-
7
6
5
8
9
!/
![ 1
2
4
3
3-1-3. Location of Sensors
Sensor Location Diagram (1) ..... Mechanism Deck
9Cassette memory terminal
Determines whether cassette memory is used, and
reads and writes data to and from the cassette memory.
!/ Tension sensor
The tension arm keeps the tension of a running tape
constant during recording and playing. The tension
sensor detects the mechanical position of the tension
arm.
!- Reel FG sensor (Supply side)
Detects the rotation of the supply reel table. The PG
output of the sensor is input to the servo circuit and
controls the rotating speed and torque of the reel
motor.
!= Tape end sensor
Detects the end of a tape that runs in the FWD direc-
tion.
![ Threading motor FG sensor
Detects the rotation speed of the gearbox motor. The
FG output of the sensor is input to the servo circuit and
controls the threading speed so that excessive force is
not applied to the tape during threading.
1, 2Mode sensor
Detects the mechanism position during threading.
3Tape top/end detect LED
Detects the top and end of a tape.
4Condensation sensor
Detects condensation occurred in DSR-2000/2000P.
5Tape top sensor
Detects the beginning of a tape that runs in the REV
direction.
6Reel position sensors (4 pieces) (Mini, M, Standard
reel position)
Detects the reel table position at the each specified reel
position according to the cassette type.
7Reel FG sensor (Take-up side)
Detects rotation of the take-up reel table. The FG
output of the sensor is sent to the servo circuit and
used to control the rotating speed and torque of the reel
motor.
8Record proof sensor (common to standard, M and mini
size cassettes)
Protects a tape from mis-recording.
3-1. Location of Main Parts
3-8 DSR-2000/2000P
2 PH3
2 PH1
3 PH4
1 S1
1 S3
1 S2
3 PH5
3 PH7
3 PH6
2 PH2
Sensor Location Diagram (2) ..... Cassette compartment
1The sensors S1, S2 and S3 discriminate the inserted cassette type among the mini, M, standard
cassettes and the cassette adaptor for DVCPRO by on/off of the sensors.
2The sensors PH1, PH2 and PH3 detect the movement of a cassette compartment by their combina-
tion.
3The sensors PH4 and PH5 detect that a mini cassette got inserted.
The sensors PH4 and PH6 detect that a M cassette got inserted.
The sensors PH4 and PH7 detect that a standard cassette got inserted.
3-1. Location of Main Parts
3-9
DSR-2000/2000P
3-2. Functions of Record Proof Hole and Record Proof Plug of Cassette
Standard cassette, M cassette
Hole and plug for record proof
Mini cassette
Pin No. Function
Equipped with built-in memory Not equipped with built-in memory
1+DC Detecting tape thickness
2 DATA Detecting tape type (Example: ME/MP)
3 CLOCK Detecting tape application (Example: consumer/professional)
4 GND _
Record proof
hole
4321
Record proof plug
Cassette cover release claw
Reel rotation stopper
Record enable Record protect
REC
SAVE
REC
SAVE
. This plug controls the record proof
switch according to open or close
position.
4321
Record proof
hole
Record proof plug
Reel rotation stopper
Cassette cover release claw
3-2. Functions of Record Proof Hole and Record Proof Plug of Cassette
3-10 DSR-2000/2000P
B4 x 8
B4 x 8
B4 x 8
B4 x 8
PWH3 x 6
PWH3 x 6
B4 x 6
Fixing screw
(with stopper)
Claw
Claw
Section A
Section A
Foot
Hole
Claw
Claw
Claw
Claws
Top panel
Left side panel
Right side panel
BVTT3 x 6
BVTT3 x 6
Bottom panel
Front panel
3-3. Removal/Installation of Cabinet
n
Turn off the power of the unit before starting removal/installation.
3-3. Removal/Installation of Cabinet
3-11
DSR-2000/2000P
Removal/Reattachment of the Top Panel
(1) Loose the three screws and remove the top panel in the
arrow direction.
n
The screws do not come off the top panel, because of a
stopper attached to the screw.
Do not forcibly remove the screws from the top panel.
(2) Insert the two claws of the top panel in the section A
shown in the figure, and tighten the three screws to
reattach the top panel.
Removal/Reattachment of the Bottom Panel
(1) Place the unit with the right side panel facing down.
(2) Remove the six screws and remove the bottom panel.
(3) With the claw of the bottom panel positioning as
shown in the figure, fit the four holes in the bottom
panel on the feet.
(4) Tighten the six screws to reattach the bottom panel.
Removal/Reattachment of the right and left side
panels
[Reference][Reference]
[Reference][Reference]
[Reference]
A same procedure is performed when removing/reattach-
ing the right and left side panels.
(1) Remove the four screws shown in the figure and
remove the side panel.
(2) Hook the side panel at the three claws in the chassis,
and while pulling the side panel in the arrow direction,
tighten the four screws (B4 x 8).
Removal/Reattachment of the front panel
(1) Remove the top panel.
(2) Remove the two screws securing the front panel.
(3) Insert hands in the space between the front panel and
the chassis and pick up the upper rim of the front
panel, and then release the four claws of the front
panel.
(4) Pull out the front panel to your side and detach it.
(5) While hooking the four claws of the front panel at the
three crooks of the chassis and the crook of the
cassette compartment holding assembly, insert the two
protrusions to the notch and hole of the chassis.
(6) While pressing the front panel against the unit, fix the
front panel with the two screws.
3-3. Removal/Installation of Cabinet
3-12 DSR-2000/2000P
Removal/Reattachment of the control panel
(1) Remove the nine knobs.
(2) Hold the handles of the control panel and open the
control panel. Lift up the control panel with the
handles until it comes horizontally.
(3) Remove the three screws.
(4) While pressing the release lever, bring back the control
panel to the original position until the angle between
the control panel and the unit comes to about 45
degrees.
(5) Move the control panel in the arrow direction, and
release the three claws to remove the control panel.
[Reference][Reference]
[Reference][Reference]
[Reference]
Applying the pulling downward force will make it
easy to remove the control panel.
(6) Fit the three claws of the control panel into the three
square holes of the control frame assembly.
(7) Bring the control panel to the position of Step (2), and
while pressing it from the top, reattach it with the three
screws.
(8) Turn the nine volume shafts fully counterclockwise.
(9) Align the nine knobs with the position holes of the
control panel and thrust into as far as they will go.
[Reference][Reference]
[Reference][Reference]
[Reference]
If the knob easily comes off, widen the slot on the
volume shaft using a flat tip screwdriver.
(10)Check that the knob’s turning range is within the
double-headed arrow shown in the figure by turning
the nine knobs clockwise and counterclockwise.
Knobs
PWH3 x 6
PWH3 x 6
PWH3 x 6
Handle
Handle
Control panel Lift up in the
horizontal
position
Knob‘s turning range
Square
holes
Claws
Control panel
Control frame assembly
At angle up to 45d
Square hole
3-3. Removal/Installation of Cabinet
3-13
DSR-2000/2000P
Reattaching
(1) Insert the cassette compartment in the reverse direction
of arrow B and align the three holes and the notch of
the cassette compartment with the four positioning
pins of the chassis.
n
Use care not to involve a lead wire of the reel shift
motor when reattaching the cassette compartment.
(2) Insert the cassette compartment holding assembly in
the reverse direction of arrow A.
Fit the hole and notch of the assembly on the shafts a
and b of the cassette compartment respectively and fix
it using the three screws while drawing the cassette
compartment holding assembly in the C direction.
(3) Reconnect the flexible card wire to the connector
(CN1) of the CC-83 board.
(4) Reattach the top panel. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
3-4. Removal/Reattachment of the
Cassette Compartment
Removing
(1) Remove the top panel. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
(2) Disconnect the flexible card wire from the connector
(CN1) of the CC-83 board.
[Reference][Reference]
[Reference][Reference]
[Reference]
Hanging the flexible card wire disconnected at the
hook on the top of the PC guide B provides an easy
performance to the succeeding steps.
(3)
Unscrew the three screws and lift off the cassette
compartment holding assembly in the arrow A direction.
n
The screws do not come off the cassette compartment
holding assembly, because of a stopper attached to the
screw.
Do not forcibly remove the screws from the top panel
(4) Remove the cassette compartment in the arrow B
direction.
Cassette compartment retainer assembly
Cassette compartment
Fixing screws (with stopper)
Fixing screw
(with stopper)
CC-83 board
Connector
(CN1)
Flexible card wire
Hook
B
C
A
ba
Positioning pins
Positioning pin
Positioning
pin
3-4. Removal/Reattachment of the Cassette Compartment
3-14 DSR-2000/2000P
Board lever
Card board
Board lever
Board retainer assembly
Square hole Hook
B3 x 6
3-5. Removal/Reattachment of the
Boards
n
Be sure to remove the board after turning off the power.
3-5-1. Removal/Reattachment of the Card
Boards
(1) Remove the top panel. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
(2) Loosen the screw shown in the figure and remove the
board retainer assembly.
.The screw has a drop-protector so that it cannot fall
out of the board retainer assembly.
(3) Push up the board lever in the arrow direction and
raise it upwards.
(4) Reattach the board in the reverse order of the remov-
ing steps (1) to (3).
m
.Insert the board along the board guide rails until it
connects firmly with the connector of the mother-
board.
.Set the board to claws of board retainer firmly.
3-5-2. Extension Board
An optional extension board is supplied to check and
adjust the card boards. Attach the extension board to this
unit and attach the board to be checked and adjusted to the
top of the extension board.
Extension board Card boards which can be
connected
DJ-493 APR-45, DPR-136, IF-763 (DSBK-190),
(Part No.: J-6444-930-A) SV-212, SY-278, VPR-62/62P
3-5. Removal/Reattachment of the Boards
3-15
DSR-2000/2000P
CP-342 board
Screws
BVTP3 x 8
Screw
BVTP3 x 8
Screws
BVTP3 x 8
CN601
CN602
CN603
CN604
CN605
Screws for
connector
CP-341 board
CN608
CN606
CN607
Screws
BVTT3 x 6 Connectors
(MB-859 board)
Connctor panel
Screws
BVTT3 x 6
White
Red Black
Green
Orange
Yellow
Blue
3-5-3. Removal/Reattachment of the Boards
n
Turn off the power of the unit before removing.
Tools
.Torque screwdriver’s bit (for M3) : J-6325-110-A
.Torque screwdriver (3kg) : J-6325-400-A
.Locking compound : 7-432-114-11
.Tweezers
Removal/Reattachment of the CP-341 board
(1) Remove the top panel. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
(2) Remove the seven connectors (blue, yellow, orange,
green, red, black, and white) on the rear panel with
tweezers.
(3) Remove the five screws (BVTT3 x 6) and remove the
rear panel in the arrow direction.
(4) Remove the fifteen screws (BVTP3 x 8) and eight
screws for connector and detach the CP-341 board by
opening the board in the arrow direction.
n
Use care not to break the terminals of capacitors, etc.
when removing the CP-341 board.
(5) Set the CP-341 board in the reverse direction of the
arrow and fix temporally it to the rear panel with the
fifteen screws.
(6) Apply a half-drop size of screw-locking compound to
each screw for connector, and tighten securely the
eight screws for connector together with the fifteen
screws.
(7) Reconnect the seven connectors disconnected in Step 2
with tweezers, using care to set the right color in the
right place.
(8) Reattach the rear panel to the unit by connecting
securely the five connectors of the CP-341 board
(CN601, CN602, CN603, CN604, and CN605) and the
three connectors of the CP-342 board (CN606, CN607,
and CN608) to the eight connectors of the MB-859
board.
(9) Fix the rear panel with the unit with the five screws.
3-5. Removal/Reattachment of the Boards
3-16 DSR-2000/2000P
Screws
B3 x 6
CP-342 board
CP-341 board CN608
CN607
CN606
Rear panel
CN601
CN602
CN603
CN604
CN605
Screws
BVTT3 x 6
Connectors
(MB-859 board)
Connector
panel
Screws
BVTT3 x 6
White
Red Black
Green
Orange
Yellow
Blue
(4) Remove the eight screws while supporting the CP-342
board from the rear side, and remove the
CP-342 board.
(5) Fix temporally the CP-342 board to the rear panel with
the eight screws (B3 x 6).
(6) Tighten the eight screws (B3 x 6) securely and
reconnect the seven connectors disconnected in Step 2
with tweezers, using care to set the right color in the
right place.
(7) Reattach the rear panel to the unit by connecting
securely the five connectors of the CP-341 board
(CN601, CN602, CN603, CN604, and CN605) and the
three connectors of the CP-342 board (CN606, CN607,
and CN608) to the eight connectors of the MB-859
board.
(8) Fix the rear panel with the unit using the five screws.
Removal/Reattachment of the CP-342 board
(1) Remove the top panel. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
(2) Remove the seven connectors (blue, yellow, orange,
green, red, black, and white) on the rear panel with
tweezers.
(3) Remove the five screws (BVTT3 x 6) and remove the
rear panel in the arrow direction
3-5. Removal/Reattachment of the Boards
3-17
DSR-2000/2000P
Removal/Reattachment of the DU-83 board
Serial No. 100001-100910: UC
400001-401550: CE
(1) Remove the DPR-136 board from the unit.
(Refer to Section 3-5-1.)
(2) Remove the DU-83 board by removing the three
screws (PWH3 x 6).
(3) Reconnect the connector (CN201) of the DU-83 board
to the connector (CN100) of the DPR-136 board and
fix the board with the three screws.
(4) Reattach the DPR-136 board to the unit. (Refer to
Section 3-5-1.)
Screws
PWH3 x 8
DU-83 board
DPR-136 board
CN100
CN201
Screws
PWH3 x 8
DU-84 board
DPR-136 board
CN150
CN1
3-5. Removal/Reattachment of the Boards
Removal/Reattachment of the DU-84 board
Serial No. 100001-101240: UC
400001-401550: CE
(1) Remove the DPR-136 board from the unit.
(Refer to Section 3-5-1.)
(2) Remove the DU-84 board by removing the three
screws (PWH3 x 6).
(3) Reconnect the connector (CN1) of the DU-84 board to
the connector (CN150) of the DPR-136 board and fix
the board with the three screws.
(4) Reattach the DPR-136 board to the unit.
(Refer to Section 3-5-1.)
3-18 DSR-2000/2000P
Screws
PWH3 x 8
DU-89
board
DPR-136 board
CN151
CN1
Removal/Reattachment of the DU-89 board
Serial No. 100001-101240: UC
400001-401550: CE
(1) Remove the DPR-136 board from the unit.
(Refer to Section 3-5-1.)
(2) Remove the DU-89 board by removing the three
screws (PWH3 x 6).
(3) Reconnect the connector (CN1) of the DU-89 board to
the connector (CN151) of the DPR-136 board and fix
them with the three screws.
(4) Reattach the DPR-136 board to the unit.
(Refer to Section 3-5-1.)
DU-95 board
APR-45 board
Screw
B3 x 4
CN61
CN1
3-5. Removal/Reattachment of the Boards
Removal/Reattachment of the DU-95 board
Serial No. 100001-100290: UC
400001-400300: CE
(1) Remove the APR-45 board form the unit.
(Refer to Section 3-5-1.)
(2) Remove the DU-95 board by removing the screw (B3
x 4).
(3) Reconnect the connector (CN1) of the DU-95 board to
the connector (CN61) of the APR-45 board and fix
them with the screw (B3 x 4).
(4) Reattach the APR-45 board to the unit.
(Refer to Section 3-5-1.)
3-19
DSR-2000/2000P
EX-752 board
Screws
BVTT3 x 6
Screws
BVTT3 x 6 RP shield
Slot
Positioning
holes
CN300
CN300 (MB-85 board)
Protrusions
Removal/Reattachment of the DY-15 board
(1) Remove the front panel. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
(2) Disconnect the flexible card wire from the connector
(CN720) of the DY-15 board,.
(3) Remove the two screws (PWH3 x 6) and remove the
DY-15 board upward.
(4) Insert the two protrusions of the DY-15 board in the
two square holes in the chassis and fix them with the
two screws.
(5) Reconnect the flexible card wire disconnected in Step
(2).
(6) Reattach the front panel.
Removal/Reattachment of the EX-752 board
(1) Remove the RP-111 board from the unit. (Refer to this
section Removal/Reattachment of RP-111.)
(2) Remove the RP shield by removing the four screws
(BVTT3 x 6).
(3) Remove the EX-752 board upward.
(4) Fit the notch of the EX-752 board in the slot in the
chassis and reconnect the connector (CN300) of the
EX-752 board to the connector (CN300) of the MB-
859 board.
(5) Fit the two positioning holes of RP shield onto the two
protrusions on the chassis and fix the board with four
screws (BVTT3 x 6).
(6) Reattach the RP-111 board. (Refer to this section
Removal/Reattachment of the RP-111 board.)
Screw
PWH
3 x 6
DY-15 board
Protrusions
Squre holes Flexible card wire
Screw
PWH3 x 6
CN720
3-5. Removal/Reattachment of the Boards
3-20 DSR-2000/2000P
Screw
PWH3 x 5
Screw
PWH3 x 5
FU-78P board
CN12
CN11
CN151
CN150
DPR-136 board
DPR-136 board
FU-78R board
CN22
CN21
CN450
CN451
Screw
PWH3 x 5
Screw
PWH3 x 5
3-5. Removal/Reattachment of the Boards
Removal/Reattachment of the FU-78R board
Serial No. 101241-: UC
401551-: CE
(1) Remove the DPR-136 board from the unit.
(Refer to section 3-5-1.)
(2) Remove the FU-78R board by removing the two
screws (PWH3 x 5).
(3) Reconnect the connector (CN21, CN22) of the FU-78P
board to the connector (CN450, CN451) of the DPR-
136 board and fix the board with the two screws.
Removal/Reattachment of the FU-78P board
Serial No. 101241-: UC
401551-: CE
(1) Remove the DPR-136 board from the unit.
(Refer to section 3-5-1.)
(2) Remove the FU-78P board by removing the two
screws (PWH3 x 5).
(3) Reconnect the connector (CN11, CN12) of the FU-78P
board to the connector (CN150, CN151) of the DPR-
136 board and fix the board with the two screws.
3-21
DSR-2000/2000P
(4) Slide the control frame assembly in the arrow direction
to remove it.
(5) Remove the screw and release the two claws form the
rear side of the assembly and remove the KY cover.
(6) Disconnect the harness from the connector (CN2) of
the HP-99 board.
(7) Remove the two nuts to remove the HP-99 board.
n
Support the HP-99 board from the rear side when
removing the nuts.
(8) Reattach the HP-99 board in the reverse order of the
removing steps (1) to (7).
Removal/Reattachment of the HP-99 board
(1) Remove the control panel. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
(2) Lift up the right/left hinge levers in the arrow direction
and bring the control frame assembly to the lateral
position, then loosen the two screws (PWH3 x 6).
(3) Disconnect the flexible card wire form the connector
(CN710) of the KY-452 board.
Control frame assembly
Flexible card wire
Screw
PWH3 x 6
Screw
PWH3 x 6
CN710
Hinge lever
Control frame assembly
Screw
PWH3 x 6
Claw
KY cover
Harness
Claw
Control frame assembly
HP-99 board
CN2
3-5. Removal/Reattachment of the Boards
3-22 DSR-2000/2000P
Removal/Reattachment of the IF-778 board
(DSBK-200)
(1) Remove the three screws (PWH3 x 6) of the control
frame assembly and remove the control panel assem-
bly in the arrow direction.
Control frame assembly
Screw
PWH3 x 6
Control panel assembly
Screw
PWH3 x 6
Screw
PWH3 x 6
Screw
PWH3 x 6
Screws
PWH3 x 6
Claw
KY cover
Harness
Claw
Control frame assembly
IF-778 board
Screw
PWH3 x 6
CN2
(2) Remove the screw (PWH3 x 6) and release the two
claws from the rear side and remove the KY cover.
(3) Disconnect the harness from the connector (CN2) of
the IF-778 board.
(4) Remove the three screws (PWH3 x 6) to remove the
IF-778 board.
(5) Reattach the IF-778 board in the reverse order of the
removing steps (1) to (4).
3-5. Removal/Reattachment of the Boards
3-23
DSR-2000/2000P
Removal/Reattachment of the KY-452 board
(1) Remove the control frame assembly. Refer to this
section Removal/Reattachment of the HP-99 board,
steps (1) to (4).
(2) Remove the screw (PWH3 x 6) from the rear side and
remove the KY cover.
(3) Disconnect the two flexible card wires from the
connectors (CN714 and CN713) of the KY-452 board
and also the two flexible card wires from the connec-
tors (CN710 and CN711) of the KY-452 board with
tweezers.
(5) Remove the four screws securing the KY-452 board.
(6) Disconnect the harness from the connector (CN712)
while lifting the KY-452 board.
(7) Reattach the KY-452 board in the reverse order of the
removing steps (1) to (6).
Removal/Reattachment of the KY-452A board
(DSBK-200)
(1) Remove the three screws of the control frame assem-
bly (PWH3 x 6) to remove the control panel assembly.
CN710
Screw
PWH3 x 6
Screws
PWH3 x 6
Screw
PWH3 x 6
Claw
CN711
KY cover
Flexible
card wires
KY-452 board
Harnesses
Claw
Control frame
CN714
CN713
CN712
Control frame assembly
Screw
PWH3 x 6
Control panel assembly
Screw
PWH3 x 6
Screw
PWH3 x 6
3-5. Removal/Reattachment of the Boards
3-24 DSR-2000/2000P
CN710
CN711
Screw
PWH3 x 6
Screws
PWH3 x 6
Screw
PWH
3 x 6
ClawClaws
KY cover
KY-452A
board
Harnesses
Claws
Claws
Control frame
(2) Remove the screw (PWH3 x 6) and release the seven
claws from the rear side and remove the KY cover.
(3) Disconnect the harnesses from the connectors (CN710
and CN711) of the KY-452A board with tweezers.
(4) Remove the four screws (PWH3 x 6) securing the
KY-452A board.
(5) Remove the KY-452A board in the arrow direction.
(6) Reattach the KY-452A board in the reverse order of
the removing steps (1) to (5).
3-5. Removal/Reattachment of the Boards
3-25
DSR-2000/2000P
CN901
CN902
CN505
CN501
CN504
CN503
CN502
CN500
CN605
CN604
CN603
CN602
CN601
CN608
CN607
CN606
CN703
CN704
CN702
CN701
Screws
PWH3 x 6 Screws
PWH3 x 6
Screws
PWH3 x 6
MB-859 board
Flexible
card wires
Harness
connectors
Screws
PWH3 x 6
Screws
PWH3 x 6
Bottom
panel
Removal/Reattachment of the MB-859
(1) Remove the APR-45 board, VPR-62/62P board, DPR-
136 board, SY-278 board and SV-212 board.
(Refer to Section 3-5-1.)
(2) Remove the EX-752 board. (Refer to this section
Removal/ Reattachment of the EX-752 board.)
(3) Disconnect the harnesses from the two connectors
(CN901 and CN902) of the MB-859 board and also
disconnect the flexible card wire from the connector
(CN505).
(4) Remove the bottom panel. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
(5) Disconnect the three flexible card wires from the
connectors (CN500, CN501, CN502, CN503 and
CN504) of the MB-859 board.
(6) Remove the 10 screws to remove the MB-859 board.
(7) Reset the MB-859 board to the unit aligning properly
the connectors of the MB-859 board (CN601, CN602,
CN603, CN604, CN605, CN606, CN608, CN701,
CN702, CN703 and CN704) to the correspondent
connectors on the unit.
n
Use care not to bend the connector pins.
(8) Reattach the MB-859 board in the reverse order of the
removing steps (1) to (6).
3-5. Removal/Reattachment of the Boards
3-26 DSR-2000/2000P
Mechanism deck assembly
Positioning hole
Positioning hole
Positioning pin Positioning pin
Screws
B2 x 4
Removal/Reattachment of the MS-64 board
(1) Remove the top panel. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
(2) Remove the cassette compartment.
(Refer to Section 3-4.)
(3) Remove the bottom plate. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
(4) Remove the MD cover. (Refer to Section 7-2)
(5) Disconnect the four flexible card wires from the
connectors (CN1, CN2, CN3 and CN4) of the RP-111
board.
(6) Disconnect the five flexible card wires from the
connectors (CN500, CN501, CN502, CN503 and
CN504) of the MS-64 board.
(7) Remove the three screws (B2 x 4) to remove the
mechanism deck from the unit
CN1
CN2
CN3
CN4
CN503
CN504 CN502 RP-111 board
CN500CN501
MS-64 board
3-5. Removal/Reattachment of the Boards
3-27
DSR-2000/2000P
CN2
CN5
CN3
CN4
CN19
CN12
CN13
MS-64 board
CN1
CN8
CN7
CN6
CN9
CN11
CN10
MS-64 board
Positionin
hole
Positioning pin
Positioning
pin
Positioning hole
Screws
B2 x 4
Screws
B2 x 4
Screw
B2 x 4
RP-111 board
Screws
PWH3 x 6
CN4 CN3
CN2
CN1
Screws
PWH3 x 6
Flexible card wires
CN301 CN302
(8) Release the connection of connectors on the MS-64
board (CN1, CN2, CN3, CN4, CN5, CN6, CN7, CN8,
CN9, CN10, CN11, CN12, CN13 and CN19).
(9) Remove the seven screws (B2 x 4) to remove the MS-
64 board.
(10)Fit the two positioning holes of the MS-64 board on
the positioning pins on the MD chassis respectively
and fix the board with the seven screws.
(11)Reattach the MS-64 board in the reverse of the
removing steps (1) to (9).
Removal/Reattachment of the RP-111 board
(1) Remove the top and bottom panels.
(Refer to Section 3-3.)
(2) Disconnect the four flexible card wires from the
connectors of the RP-111 board (CN1, CN2, CN3, and
CN4).
(3) Remove the four screws (PWH3 x 6).
(4) Release the connection of the two connectors (CN301,
CN302) on RP-111 board to remove the RP-111
board.
(5) Reattach the RP-111 board in the reverse order of
removing steps (1) to (4).
3-5. Removal/Reattachment of the Boards
3-28 DSR-2000/2000P
SE-522 board
Sensors
Positioning hole
T drawer arm
Positionin pin
Square
holes
Square holes
Positionin pin
Positioning
hole Screws
P1.4 x 3.5
Flexible card wire
CN2
CN3
Sensor
Connector
(CN3)
SE-521 board
Connector
(CN4)
P1.4 x 3.5
Flexible
card wire
Flexible
card wire
Claw of
worm holder
Removal/Reattachment of the SE-521 board
(1) Remove the top panel. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
(2) Remove the cassette compartment.
(Refer to Section 3-4.)
(3) Remove the TG1 arm assembly. (Ref to Section 7-13.)
(4) Remove the loading motor assembly.
(Refer to Section 7-18.)
(5) Disconnect the flexible card wire from the connector
(CN3) of the SE-521 board.
(6) Disconnect the flexible card wire from the connector
(CN4) of the SE-521 board.
(7) Remove the screw to remove the SE-521 board.
(8) Fit the hole and the slotted hole of the SE-521 board
on the two shafts of the MD chassis and fix it with the
screw.
Tightening Torque : 0.1 N.m {1 kgf.cm}
n
Use care not to pinch the tip of the flexible card wire
of the S tension regulator assembly between the
SE-521 board and the chassis.
Place the SE-521 board under the claw of the worm
holder.
(9) Reconnect the flexible card wire to the connector
(CN4) of the SE-521 board.
(10)Reconnect the flexible card wire of the S tension
regulator assembly to the connector (CN3) of the
SE-521 board.
(11)Reinstall the loading motor assembly.
(Refer to Section 7-18.)
(12)Reattach the TG1 arm assembly.
(Refer to Section 7-13.)
Removal/Reattachment of the SE-522 board
(1) Remove the top panel. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
(2) Remove the cassette compartment.
(Refer to Section 3-4.)
(3) Disconnect the two flexible cable wires from the
connectors (CN2, CN3) of the SE-522 board.
(4) Remove the two screws (P1.4 x 3.5) and remove the
SE-522 board avoiding any contacts to the T drawer
arm assembly.
(5) Fit the two positioning holes of the SE-522 board on
the positioning pins of the MD chassis, and insert the
sensors (PH1, PH2, and PH3) of the SE-522 board in
the square holes in the MD chassis.
(6) Reattach the SE-522 board in the reverse order of the
removing steps (1) to (5).
Tightening Torque : 0.1 N.m {1 kgf.cm}
3-5. Removal/Reattachment of the Boards
3-29
DSR-2000/2000P
Claw
Claw
LED holder assembly
Rail assembly
SE-525 board
SE-525 board
SE-521 board
SE-538 board
Protrusion
Positioning hole P1.4 x 2
Removal/Reattachment of the SE-525 board (LED
holder assembly)
(1) Remove the top panel. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
(2) Remove the cassette compartment.
(Refer to Section 3-4.)
(3) Remove the RMP (T1) holding assembly.
(Refer to Section 7-8.)
(4) Remove the rail assembly. (Refer to Section 7-15.)
(5) Remove the LED holder assembly from the rail
assembly.
(6) Reattach the LED holder assembly to the rail assem-
bly.
(7) Reattach the SE-525 board in the reverse order of the
removing steps (1) to (4).
Tightening Torque : 0.1 N.m {1 kgf.cm}
Removal/Reattachment of the SE-538 board
(1) Remove the SE-521 board. (Refer to this section
Removal/Reattachment of the SE-521board.)
(2) Remove the screw to remove the SE-538 board.
(3) Reattach the SE-538 board in the reverse order of the
removing steps (1) and (2).
Tightening Torque : 0.1 N.m {1 kgf.cm}
3-5. Removal/Reattachment of the Boards
3-30 DSR-2000/2000P
Control frame assebly
SW-11/11P board
Sub panel cover
Screw
PWH3 x 6
CN720
Screw
PWH3 x 6
Flexible card wires
CN730
Control frame assembly
Indentation
SW-11/11P board
CN702
Screw
PWH3 x 6
Screw
PWH3 x 6
Notch of
chassis
Notch of
chassis
CN701
(mother board)
CN703
CN703
CN702
CN701 CN704
CN704
Removal/Reattachment of the SW-11/11P board
(1) Disconnect the two flexible card wires from the
connectors (CN720, CN730) of the SW-11/11P board
with the control panel brought to the lateral position.
(2) Remove the two screws (PWH 3 x 6) to remove the
sub panel cover.
(3) Remove the two screws (PWH 3 x 6) and remove the
SW-11/11P board upward.
(4) Fit the indentation of the SW-11/11P board with the
notch of the chassis so as to connect the connectors of
SW-11/11P board (CN701, CN702, CN703 and
CN704) to the connectors of the motherboard (CN701,
CN702, CN703 and CN704).
(5) Reattach the SW-11/11P board in the reverse order of
the removing steps (1) to (3).
Removal/Reattachment of the SW-17 board
(1) Remove the front panel. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
(2) Disconnect the flexible card wire from the connector
(CN730) of the SW-17 board.
(3) Remove the screw to remove the SW-17 board.
(4) Reattach the SW-17 board in the reverse order of the
removing steps (1) to (3).
CN730
SW-17 board
Flexible card wire
Screw
PWH3 x 6
3-5. Removal/Reattachment of the Boards
3-31
DSR-2000/2000P
Removal/Reattachment of the VR-259 board
(1) Remove the control frame assembly. Refer to this
section Removal/Reattachment of the HP-99 board,
steps (1) to (4).
(2) Remove the screw (PWH3 x 6) and release the two
claws from the rear side, and remove the KY cover.
(3) Disconnect the flexible card wire from the connector
(CN1) of the VR-259 board.
(4) Remove the four nuts to remove the VR-259 board.
n
Support the VR-259 board from the rear side when
removing the nuts.
(5) Reattach the VR-259 board in the reverse order of the
removing steps (1) to (4).
Removal/Reattachment of the VR-260
(1) Remove the control frame assembly. Refer to this
section Removal/Reattachment of the HP-99 board,
steps (1) to (4).
(2) Remove the screw (PWH3 x 6) and release the claws
from the rear side and remove the KY cover.
(3) Disconnect the flexible card wire from the connector
(CN1) of the VR-260 board.
(4) Remove the four nuts to remove the VR-260 board.
n
Support the VR-260 board form the rear side when
removing the nuts.
(5) Reattach the VR-260 in the reverse order of the
removing steps (1) to (4).
Screw
PWH3 x 6
Claw
KY cover
Flexible card wire
Attached nuts
Claw
Control frame assembly
VR-259 board
CN1
Screw
PWH3 x 6
Claw
KY cover
Flexible card wire
Attached nuts
Claw
Control frame assembly
VR-260 board
CN1
3-5. Removal/Reattachment of the Boards
3-32 DSR-2000/2000P
Flexible card wire
Insulation side
Connector
A
Unlocked status
Locked status
Flexible card wire
A
Connector
Flexible card wire
Connector
Connector
Flexible card wire
A
A
< Type B >
Removing method
Raise the portion marked “A” of the connector and release
the lock. Pull out the flexible card wire.
Insertion method
Insert the flexible card wire fully up to the marked line and
push up the portion marked “A” of the connector.
n
The flexible card wire has the conduction side and the
insulation side. Connect the flexible card wire after
checking for the correct side as shown.
If the condition side and the insulation side are connected
in the wrong direction, the circuit will not operate.
3-6. Notes on Repair Parts
3-6-1. Flexible Card Wire Replacement
The following six types of flexible card wire are used in
the DSR-2000/2000P.
n
Take utmost care when handling the flexible card wires
because their life is extremely shortened by folding.
< Type A >
Removing method
Raise the portion marked “A” of the connector and release
the lock. Pull out the flexible card wire.
Insertion method
Insert the flexible card wire fully up to the marked line and
push up the portion marked “A” of the connector.
n
The flexible card wire has the conduction side and the
insulation side. Connect the flexible card wire after
checking for the correct side as shown.
If the condition side and the insulation side are connected
in the wrong direction, the circuit will not operate.
3-6. Notes on Repair Parts
3-33
DSR-2000/2000P
A
A
A
A
Flexible card wire
Connector
Unlocked status
Locked status
Flexible card wire
A
A
A
A
Flexible card wire
Insulation side
Connector
Unlocked status
Locked status
Flexible card wire
Connector
< Type D >
Removing method
n
Do not pull the flexible card wire before releasing the lock.
1. Move the portion “A” of the connector in the direction
of the arrow A to release the lock. Remove the
flexible card wire.
Insertion method
m
.Confirm that the contacting surface of the flexible card
wire is free from stain and dust.
.Confirm that the lock of the connector is already re-
leased.
.The flexible card wire has the conduction side and the
insulation side. Check the conduction side and the
insulation side before connection.
1. Insert the flexible card wire securely to the deep end.
2. Push in the portion marked “A” of the connector in the
direction of the arrow to lock the connector. Be
careful that the flexible card wire is not slanted with
respect to the connector.
< Type C >
Removing method
Raise the portion marked “A” of the connector and release
the lock. Pull out the flexible card wire.
Insertion method
Insert the flexible card wire fully up to the marked line and
push up the portion marked “A” of the connector.
n
The flexible card wire has the conduction side and the
insulation side. Connect the flexible card wire after
checking for the correct side as shown.
If the condition side and the insulation side are connected
in the wrong direction, the circuit will not operate.
3-6. Notes on Repair Parts
3-34 DSR-2000/2000P
< Type F >
Removing method
n
Do not pull the flexible card wire before releasing the lock.
1. Move the portion “A” of the connector in the direction
of the arrow A to release the lock. Remove the
flexible card wire.
Insertion method
m
.Confirm that the contacting surface of the flexible card
wire is free from stain and dust.
.Confirm that the lock of the connector is already re-
leased.
.The flexible card wire has the conduction side and the
insulation side. Check the conduction side and the
insulation side before connection.
1. Insert the flexible card wire securely to the deep end.
2. Push in the portion marked “A” of the connector in the
direction of the arrow to lock the connector. Be
careful that the flexible card wire is not slanted with
respect to the connector.
A
A
Locked status
Flexible card wire
Connector
A
A
Flexible card wire
Connector
Unlocked status
A
A
A
A
Flexible card wire
Connector
Unlocked status
Locked status
Flexible card wire
Connector
< Type E >
Removing method
n
Do not pull the flexible card wire before releasing the lock.
1. Move the portion “A” of the connector in the direction
of the arrow A to release the lock. Remove the
flexible card wire.
Insertion method
m
.Confirm that the contacting surface of the flexible card
wire is free from stain and dust.
.Confirm that the lock of the connector is already re-
leased.
.The flexible card wire has the conduction side and the
insulation side. Check the conduction side and the
insulation side before connection.
1. Insert the flexible card wire securely to the deep end.
2. Push in the portion marked “A” of the connector in the
direction of the arrow to lock the connector. Be
careful that the flexible card wire is not slanted with
respect to the connector.
3-6. Notes on Repair Parts
3-35
DSR-2000/2000P
3-7. Replacement of Lithium Battery
The SY-278 board has the built-in lithium battery as the
countermeasure for power failure. The lithium battery is
attached on top of IC212 (E-5). Life of the lithium battery
is about six years.
Time to exchange the battery is displayed in the time
counter display block and on the monitor display. Replace
the battery when the following message appears.
Time counter display block
Sony part number : ! 1-528-749-11
Type : M4Z28BR00SH1
Backup battery replacement procedure
n
When replacing the battery, insert the replacement battery
with the “+” and “_” ends correctly oriented. If the
battery’s positive (+) and negative (_) terminals are
backward, physical injury or damage to peripheral equip-
ment can be result due to explosion and or leakage of
internal materials.
1. Remove the SY-278 board. (Refer to section 3-5-1.)
2. Insert tip of a flat head (_) screwdriver in between the
battery and IC212, and remove the battery.
3. Attach the replacement lithium battery so that the
protrusion of the lithium battery is directed in the
arrow direction as shown, and the battery is firmly
secured by the four claws.
Claw
Claw
Claws
SY-278 board
IC212
Protrusion
Lithium battery
3-7. Replacement of Lithium Battery
3-36 DSR-2000/2000P
3-8. Fixtures and Tools list
Fig. Part No. Description Uses
1J-6080-029-A Small adjustment mirror Video tracking adjustment
2J-6082-231-A Washer mounting fixture (ø1.5) Parts replacement
3J-6082-232-A Washer mounting fixture (ø1.2) Parts replacement
4J-6082-233-A Washer mounting fixture (ø0.8) Parts replacement
5J-6082-234-A Washer extracting fixture A Parts replacement
6J-6082-236-A Washer fixture kit Parts replacement (Set of No.2 to No.5)
7J-6082-362-A Tape guide adjustment driver Tape guide height adjustment
8J-6082-373-A Torque cassette FWD/REV winding torque adjustment
9J-6325-110-A Torque screwdriver‘s bit (M1.4) Parts replacement
!/ J-6325-380-A Torque screwdriver’s bit (M2) Parts replacement
!- J-6325-400-A Torque screwdriver (3 kg) Tightening screws
!= J-6443-710-A (CCW) Brake torque gauge (CCW) (DJ-371) Brake torque adjustment
![ J-6443-720-A (CW) Brake torque gauge (CW) (DJ-372) Brake torque adjustment
!] J-6444-930-A Extension board (DJ-493) Extension board for DSR-2000
!\ J-6444-610-B Path Adjustment Board (DJ-461) For tape path adjustment RF envelope
detector fixture
!; J-6443-760-A System control/Servo Software version-up
download tool board (DJ-376)
!' 3-184-527-01 Cleaning cloth Cleaning
!, 7-432-114-11 Locking compound Locking compound
!. 7-662-001-39 Grease SG-941(20g) Parts replacement
@/ 8-967-999-02 Alignment tape XH2-1AST Tape path alignment (NTSC & PAL)
@- 8-967-999-22 Alignment tape XH5-1A2 (NTSC) Audio/video alignment (DVCAM)
8-967-999-26 Alignment tape XH5-1AP2 (PAL) Audio/video alignment (DVCAM for PAL)
@= 8-967-999-31 Alignment tape XH4-1A (NTSC) Audio/video alignment (DV)
@[ 9-919-573-01 Cleaning fluid Cleaning
3-8. Fixtures and Tools list
3-37
DSR-2000/2000P
3-8. Fixtures and Tools list
1 234 5 6
7 8 9 !/ !-
!= ![ !] !\
!; !'
@/ @- @= @[
!, !.
DJ-371
DJ-372
3-38 DSR-2000/2000P
3-9. Upgrading the System/Servo CPU Program Version
The DSR-2000/2000P mounts the CPU for SY and SP on the SY-278 board, CPU for SV on the SV-212
board and uses flash ROMs for stored this program.
For re-writing flash ROMs, two methods are provided.
(1) Use the fixture (DJ-376 : J-6443-760-A).
(2) Download softwares from a PC through RS-422.
3-9-1. Version Upgrade using the DJ-376
Setting of DJ-376
Write softwares into PROMs below.
Use the fixture : J-6443-760-A (DJ-376)
ROMs to be used on the fixture DJ-376:
SY/SV CPU MX27C2000DC-12 (8-759-477-94) or equivalent
SP CPU M27C1001-70F1 (F8) (8-759-583-91) or equivalent
As these CPUs employ 16 bits data bus, 2 pieces of PROMs are required for one CPU.
Write softwares into PROMs in the 8 bit split mode. A PROM at even address side is for CN102.
A PROM at odd address side is for CN101.
(1) Insert the PROMs, in which softwares are written, into the socket on the fixture DJ-376.
(2) Set bit 1 of S101 on the fixture DJ-376 to OPEN (upper side) and the rest of bits to the board side
(lower side).
How to upgrade
(1) Remove the top panel. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
(2) Connect the fixture DJ-376, on which PROMs are installed, as follows.
CPU Connect to DJ-376
SY CPU (IC102/SY-278) CN1/SY-278
SP CPU (IC302/SY-278) CN2/SY-278
SV CPU (IC119/SV-212) CN2/SV-212
(3) Turn on the power to the set, Then, writing starts.
While writing is being executed, the LEDs of the fixture DJ-376 show the status shown below.
D102 lights: ERASE is being executed.
D102 and D104 light: BLANK CHECK is being executed
D103 lights: COPY is being executed.
D104 lights: VERIFY is being executed.
(4) Only D105 (a green LED next to three red LEDs) lights, Then, writing is finished.
D105 lights: Normal
D101 lights: Abnormal
In an event of abnormally, suspect the cause judging from status of LEDs.
(5) Power down the set. And remove the fixture DJ-376.
(6) Turn on the power to the set, and confirm the version of upgraded CPU in the MAINTENANCE
MENU.
3-9. Upgrading the System/Servo CPU Program Version
3-39
DSR-2000/2000P
COM Setting
Port COM1
38400
Odd
8
1
Baudrate
Data Bit
Parity Bit
Stop Bit
OK Cancel
Flash ROM Update
Flash ROM Update - COM Setting
Browse
QuitCancelStart
File
SY SV SP
VTR Status
CPU
PC Status
3-9-2. Version Upgrade from a PC through RS-422
Preparation
To convert the RS-232C of a PC to RS-422 (9 pin), use a conversion box or conversion board available
on the market.
Install the version upgrade application software (fup.exe) on the PC on which Windows95 or 98 is
installed.
Download the version upgrade software of CPUs to be upgrade.
How to use Fup.exe
Start up the fup.exe and then the main dialogue menu shown below appears.
Main Dialogue Communication Setting Dialogue
CPU : Select one of SY and SV.
(Designate a target CPU to be transferred.)
COM Setting : The communication setting dialogue appears.
(DO NOT assign items other than Port.)
File : Enter a hex filename to be transferred in this field.
When a filename is selected using Browse, the selected filename appears.
Drag & Drop is supported.
Browse : The file selection menu appears.
VTR Status : The message from a VTR appears in this field.
PC Status : This field shows a status such as “FINISH”,
Start : The file transfer to a VTR is started. (Unless a filename is designated, it is invalid. )
Cancel : The file transfer to a VTR is stopped.
Quit : The application is terminated.
Operation
Operate in the order of “Select CPU.” → “ Designate hex.filename to be transferred.” → “Press Start
button.”.
During transferring, the status is displayed in between “PC Status” and “ Start, Cancel and Quit buttons”.
The progress bar and the remaining time are displayed.
3-9. Upgrading the System/Servo CPU Program Version
3-40 DSR-2000/2000P
Message
VTR Status
Erasing flash memory.
Writing flash memory.
Completed download.
Unable to access to flash memory. Flash ROM device error, Writing error
Unable to erase of flash memory. Flash ROM erasure error
Verify Error occurs. Verify-error in writing into flash memory
Checksum error occurs. Checksum error in data received from a PC
Communication error occurs in Overrun, flaming, parity error
VTR and PC
PC Status
Trying communication with a PC. Starts at the pressing the Start button and ends until VTR
starts to erase flash memory.
Communication with a VTR is stopped. A user pressed Cancel button.
Message Box
No response from a VTR
Can’t set a VTR to remote mode.
Can’t set a VTR to adjustment mode.
Can’t set a VTR to download mode.
File not found. When Start button is pressed, if a file is not found.
Can’t open a port.
When Start button is pressed, RS-232C COM does not open.
A VTR interrupts communication. Before transfer finishes, a VTR finishes.
VFD Display
loading XX (XX : SY, SV, SP) Now loading
complete! Download is completed without fail.
incomplete! Download is abnormally terminated
Error91-130 SY flash ROM is abnormal.
(Valid only in download mode.)
Error91-430 SP flash ROM is abnormal.
(Valid only in download mode.)
Error91-215 Waiting for data sent from a PC
(Communication error between SY and KY)
Power down a VTR once.
Monitor
ALARM
Now upgrading
After version upgrade
power down once.
After the version upgrade is completed, turn off and on the power of the VTR.
(In case of upgrading the same CPU or other CPU, it is not necessary to power down.)
If properly finished, confirm that CPU versions written in the MAINTENANCE MENU are correct.
3-9. Upgrading the System/Servo CPU Program Version
4-1
DSR-2000/2000P
Section 4
Error Messages
4-1. Alarm Display
This unit has an alarm display function.
When a problem is detected, an alarm is displayed immediately in the timer counter block. The alarm and a message
describing the countermeasure are displayed on a video monitor connected to the VIDEO OUT 3 (SUPER) or the SDI
OUTPUT 3 (SUPER) connector.
This unit has two types of alarms : one is for operators while the other is for service persons. This manual describes only
the alarms for service persons. For details of alarms for operators, refer to the operating instruction or overview in this
manual. Activating the alarm display may influence the system, such as when the reference video signal is not used.
Therefore, you can select whether or not to display the alarm from the Setup menu selection. As for Setup menu, refer to
Section 1 of this manual or to the operating instruction. However, the alarms for service persons are displayed regardless
of the Setup menu setting.
4-1-1. Alarm Display when the Main Power is
Turned On
Detection : Checks the settings of switch
S201 on the SY-278 board and
the contents of non-volatile
memory (EEPROM).
Operation after detection : None
Display : The alarm is displayed until
any key is pressed.
Detection : Checks the version of the
Setup menu.
Operation after detection : The Setup menu operates
using the factory settings. The
contents of the non-volatile
memory (EEPROM) remain
unchanged. Therefore, if the
setting of the Setup menu is
not changed, the same alarm
will appear when the main
power is turned on.
Display : The alarm is displayed until
any key is pressed.
ALARM
SETT
I NG HAS BEEN
CHANGED TO
X1 ED I TOR NTSC (J)
CHECK THE S201 SW I TCH
ON THE SY BOARD.
ALARM
THE SETUP MENU SOFTWARE
HAS BEEN UPGRADED.
SET THE SETUP MENU I TEMS
TO THE DES I RED SETT I NGS
OR ACT I VATE THE ’ LOAD
MENU DATA ’ (MA I NTENANCE
MENU) FUNCT I ON.
4-2 DSR-2000/2000P
Detection : Checks that switch S101 on
the SV-212 board is set to ON.
Operation after detection : None
Display : The alarm is displayed until
any key is pressed.
Detection : Checks that the FACTORY
USE item of the Setup menu is
changed.
Operation after detection : None
Display : The alarm is displayed until
any key is pressed.
ALARM
THE UN I T I S I N
ADJUSTMENT MODE.
SET THE SW I TCHES OF S101
ON THE SV BOARD TO OFF.
ALARM
SELECT I ONS OF THE SETUP
MENU’S FACTORY USE
I TEMS HAVE BEEN CHANGED.
SET THESE I TEMS TO
FACTORY PRESET VALUES.
4-1. Alarm Display
4-3
DSR-2000/2000P
4-2. Error Codes
This unit has a self diagnostics function which detects
internal abnormalities. When a problem is detected, an
error code is displayed immediately in the time counter
block, and details of the error appear on the video monitor
connected to the VIDEO OUT 3 (SUPER) or the SDI
OUTPUT (SUPER) connector.
n
An error code appears in the column shown by XX-XXX
on the display.
When detected, some errors turn the unit to AUTO OFF.
(Refer to Section “4-2-3. Error Codes,” excluding error
code 08-032.)
This error is kept in memory even after the main power of
this unit is turned off. In other words, the error code or the
contents of the detected error appear even when the main
power of this unit is turned off and then back on again, so
this unit enters AUTO OFF mode again.
This unit enters the emergency EJECT mode when the
[EJECT] key is pressed at this moment.
[Reference]
In the emergency EJECT mode, the tape is ejected gently
by usable motor assuming that the tape is slack or a device
may be faulty.
The following message appears on the video monitor
connected to the VIDEO OUT 3 (SUPER) or the SDI
OUTPUT (SUPER) connector when this unit enters the
emergency EJECT mode.
The error code is displayed on the time counter.
4-2. Error Codes
ERROR
AN ERROR HAS BEEN
DETECTED. I NFORM SERV I CE
OF FOLLOWING CODE :
XX-XXX
PRESS EJECT KEY
TO EJECT TAPE.
ERROR
TAPE I S BE I NG EJECTED.
WA I T UNT I L TH I S
I ND I CAT I ON GOES OFF.
4-4 DSR-2000/2000P
The message shown to the right appears on the video
monitor connected to the VIDEO OUT 3 (SUPER) or the
SDI OUTPUT (SUPER) connector when a cassette tape is
ejected in the emergency EJECT mode.
The error code is displayed on the time counter.
The message shown to the right appears on the video
monitor connected to the VIDEO OUT 3 (SUPER) or the
SDI OUTPUT (SUPER) connector when a cassette tape
cannot be ejected with the emergency EJECT mode.
The error code is displayed on the time counter.
Perform Section “4-3-1. How to Take Out the Cassette
Whose Tape is Slacked (MANUAL EJECT) ” when a
cassette tape cannot be ejected with the emergency EJECT
mode.
ERROR
AN ERROR HAS BEEN
DETECTED. I NFORM SERV I CE
OF FOLLOW I NG CODE :
XX-XXX
ERROR
TAPE CANNOT BE EJECTED.
I NFORM SERV I CE
OF FOLLOW I NG CODE :
XX-XXX
4-2. Error Codes
4-5
DSR-2000/2000P
4-2-1. Display of Previously Detected Error Codes
When the DSR-2000/2000P detects an internal abnormality, the error code is memorized in EEPROM.
(Excluding error code 9X-XXX)
A maximum of 8 error codes detected previously, starting from the latest error code, can be displayed.
How to display the error code
1. While pressing the [DELETE], [+], and TRIM [+]
keys, press the [MENU] key.
2. Move the cursor to SERVICE SUPPORT so that the
letters are highlighted using the [AUDIO|IN],
[VIDEO|IN] keys, then press the [ENTRY] key.
3. Move the cursor to ERROR LOG so that the letters are
highlighted using the [AUDIO|IN], [VIDEO|IN]
keys, then press the [ENTERY] key.
The display changes as shown to the right, and the
error log appears.
MA I NTENANCE MENU
MENU DATA CONTROL
SERVO CHECK
SERVO ADJUST
TAPE PATH ADJUST
ELECTR I CAL ADJUST
SERV I CE SUPPORT
OTHERS
MA I NTENANCE MENU
SERV I CE SUPPORT
ERROR LOG
MANUAL EJECT
D I AGNOST I CS CONTROL
MA I NTENANCE MENU
SERV I CE SUPPORT
ERROR LOG
ERROR-08-03A
ERROR-02-674
ERROR-02-603
ERROR-08-03A
ERROR-02-674
ERROR-02-603
4-2. Error Codes
MA I NTENANCE MENU
MENU DATA CONTROL
SERVO CHECK
SERVO ADJUST
TAPE PATH ADJUST
ELECTR I CAL ADJUST
SERV I CE SUPPORT
OTHERS
4-6 DSR-2000/2000P
4-2-2. Main Codes and Sub Codes
Main codes
The main code is a two-digit number that indicates the system which sensed the error.
Main code 0X : Servo and tape path system error
Main code 2X : Mechanism control system error
Main code 3X : Sensor error
Main code 91 : Communication system and interface system error
Main code 92 to 94 : Sync. system error
Main code 95 : Digital signal process system error and communication error with ICs
Sub codes
The sub code is a three-digit number. Each digit has the following meaning.
When the main code is 0X or 2X :
XXX
Third digit : Abnormal symptom
Second digit : Device which senses abnormality
First digit : Mode which senses abnormality.
First digit : Mode which senses abnormality.
0 : Mode cannot be identified, or mode identification is
not necessary.
1 : Cassette down mode
2 : Threading mode
3 : STOP mode
4 : F. FWD or REW mode
5 : SEARCH mode
6 : PLAY or RECORD mode
7 : STANDBY-OFF mode
8 : Unthreading mode
9 : Cassette up mode
A : Cassette out mode
(State that a cassette is ejected.)
Second digit : Device which senses abnormality
0 : Device cannot be identified, or device identification is
not necessary.
1 : Cassette up/down motor/sensor
2 : Threading motor/FG/sensor
3 : Drum motor/FG
4 : Capstan motor/FG
5 : Supply reel motor/FG
6 : Supply reel brake solenoid
7 : Takeup reel motor/FG
8 : Takeup reel brake solenoid
9 : Supply and takeup reel motor/FG
A : Tension regulator
B : Pinch solenoid
C : Reel position motor/sensor
D : Head cleaning solenoid
E : M stop solenoid
Third digit : Abnormal symptom
0 : Abnormal symptom identification is not necessary.
1 : Operation could not be completed within the specified
time.
2 : Abnormal speed detected.
3 : Tape slack detected.
4 : FG cannot be detected.
5 : FG detected.
6 : Rotating direction error detected.
7 : Excessive tension detected.
8 : Abnormal current detected.
9 : The full top or full end of a tape cannot be released.
A : Retry in progress
(Unthreading and re-threading)
4-2. Error Codes
4-7
DSR-2000/2000P
When the main code is from 92 to 94 :
XXX
Third digit : Abnormal signal
Second digit : IC to which the signal is input
First digit :CPU (microprocessor) which detects the
abnormality
. . . . . Same as the main code 91
Third digit : Abnormal signal
1 : Reference frame pulse of the output signal (NSG OE)
2 : Reference track pulse of the playback side (P-TRKT)
3 : Reference frame pulse of the playback side (P-FLTT)
4 : Reference track pulse of the record side (R-TRKT)
5 : Reference frame pulse of the record side (R-FLTT)
6 : Reference track pulse of the playback side (P-TRKD)
7: Reference frame pulse of the playback side (P-FLTD)
8: Reference track pulse of the record side (R-TRKD)
9: Reference frame pulse of the record side (R-FLTD)
When the main code is 95 :
XXX
Second and third digits :
IC of the communication counterpart.
(The second digit indicates the communica-
tion line number and the third digit indicates
the CS number.)
First digit :CPU (microprocessor) or IC which detects the
abnormality.
. . . . . Same as the main code 91
4-2. Error Codes
When the main code is 3X :
All sub codes are 000.
When the main code is 91 :
XXX
Third digit : Abnormal symptom
Second digit :CPU (microprocessor) or IC of the
communication counterpart.
First digit :CPU (microprocessor) or IC which detects the
abnormality.
First and second digits : CPU (microprocessor) code.
1 : System control main CPU (SY-278, IC101)
2 : Keyboard u-COM (KY-452, IC5)
3 : Memory
4 : Servo main CPU (SV-212, IC1)
5 : Servo sub u-COM (DR-364, IC1)
7 : SPCON main CPU (SY-278, IC301)
8 : TC IC (SY-278, IC508)
9 : Keyboard sub u-COM (SW-11, IC204)
A : External keyboard u-COM (KY-452A, IC5)
D : DV I/F u-COM (IF-763, IC2)
E : Digital I/F u-COM (APR-45, IC651)
Third digit :
Abnormal symptom (when the communi-
cation counterpart is other than memory)
1 : Abnormal checksum
2 : Abnormality of overrun
3 : Abnormal parity
4 : Abnormal framing
5 : Communication could not be completed in the speci-
fied time.
Third digit :
Abnormal symptom (when the communi-
cation counterpart is memory)
0 : Abnormality of ROM
1 : Abnormality in the external memory area
2 : Abnormality in the internal memory area
3 : Abnormality in the common memory-1 area
4 : Abnormality in the common memory-2 area
5 : Abnormality in the external serial memory-1 area
6 : Abnormality in the external serial memory-2 area
7 : Abnormality in the external serial memory-3 area
8 : Abnormality in the external serial memory-4 area
9 : Abnormality in the EEPROM area
A : Abnormality in the NVRAM area
B : Abnormality in the Hours Meter area
F : Abnormality of MIC
4-8 DSR-2000/2000P
4-2. Error Codes
4-2-3. Error Codes
Main code 0X : abnormality of servo and tape path system
11
11
1Main code 02
Sub Detected contents Operation after Operable mode Display period
code detecting an
abnormality
058 Detected an abnormal current in the S reel motor. AUTO OFF EJECT Displayed until the
068 Detected an abnormality of reel brake plunger solenoid. (Emergency EJECT) next cassette tape
078 Detected an abnormal current in the T reel motor. is inserted.
0B8 Detected an abnormality of pinch plunger solenoid. Cassette tape insertion and unthreading Displayed until the
are prohibited until the error is solved. error is solved.
154 Failed to detect the S reel FG by the FG check during Cassette tape _Displayed until the
cassette tape insertion. will be ejected. next cassette tape
174 Failed to detect the T reel FG by the FG check during is inserted.
cassette tape insertion.
194 Failed to detect both S and T reel FGs by the FG check
during cassette tape insertion.
254 Failed to detect the S reel FG during threading. AUTO OFF EJECT
255 Detected the S reel FG during threading. (Emergency EJECT)
275 Detected the T reel FG during threading.
291 Failed to complete winding a tape.
355 Detected the S reel FG during STOP and STILL.
375 Detected the T reel FG during STOP and STILL.
395 Detected both S and T reel FGs during STOP and STILL.
402 Detected an abnormal tape speed during F. FWD and REW. STOP
The machine operates
Displayed until
normally after the error
any key is
is solved.
pressed.
403 Detected slack tape during F. FWD and REW. AUTO OFF EJECT Displayed until the
454 Failed to detect the S reel FG during F. FWD and REW. (Emergency EJECT) next cassette tape
474 Failed to detect the T reel FG during F. FWD and REW.
is inserted.
494 Failed to detect both S and T reel FGs during F. FWD and REW.
496 Detected the abnormal direction of S and T reel rotation
during F. FWD and REW.
503 Detected slack tape during search.
554 Failed to detect the S reel FG during search.
574 Failed to detect the T reel FG during search.
594 Failed to detect the S and T reel FGs during search.
596 Detected the abnormal direction of S and T reel rotation
during search.
603 Detected slack tape during PLAY and REC.
4-9
DSR-2000/2000P
Sub Detected contents Operation after Operable mode Display period
code detecting an
abnormality
654 Failed to detect the S reel FG during PLAY and REC. AUTO OFF EJECT Displayed until the
674 Failed to detect the T reel FG during PLAY and REC. (Emergency EJECT) next cassette tape
694 Failed to detect both S and T reel FGs during PLAY and REC. is inserted.
696 Detected the abnormal direction of S and T reel rotation
during PLAY and REC.
803 Detected slack tape during unthreading.
854 Failed to detect the S reel FG during unthreading.
855 Detected the S reel FG during unthreading.
875 Detected the T reel FG during unthreading.
A55 Detected the S reel FG during cassette eject. Insertion of a cassette is inhibited until the error is solved.
A75 Detected the T reel FG during cassette eject.
A95 Detected both S and T reel FGs during cassette eject.
22
22
2Main code 06
Sub Detected contents Operation after Operable mode Display period
code detecting an
abnormality
3A7 Detected abnomal tape tension during STOP. AUTO OFF EJECT Displayed until the
4A7 Detected abnomal tape tension during F.FWD/REW. (Emergency EJECT) next cassette tape
5A7 Detected abnomal tape tension during SEARCH. is inserted.
6A7 Detected the abnormal tape tension during PLAY and RECORD. The mode at the The machine Displayed until the
time of detection operates normally error is solved and
is kept continued. after the error is any key is
(If the mode is solved. The PLAY pressed.
PLAY, PLAY and RECORD
continues.) modes continue
If mode is but other modes
changed to other are changed to
than PLAY and STOP then EJECT
RECORD, (Emergency EJECT).
machine enters
AUTO OFF.
33
33
3Main code 07
Sub Detected contents Operation after Operable mode Display period
code detecting an
abnormality
042 Detected the abnormal capstan speed. STOP The machine Displayed until
operates normally any key is
after the error is pressed.
solved.
144 Failed to detect the capstan FG by the FG check during Cassette tape _Displayed until the
cassette tape insertion. will be ejected. next cassette is
inserted.
4-2. Error Codes
4-10 DSR-2000/2000P
44
44
4Main code 08
Sub Detected contents Operation after Operable mode Display period
code detecting an
abnormality
03A Detected the abnormal drum speed. Retry (The EJECT Displayed until the
mechanism error is solved.
Video monitor display unthreads once
then threads
again.)
032 The abnormal drum speed error is not solved. AUTO OFF EJECT Displayed until the
next cassette is
inserted.
55
55
5Main code 09
Sub Detected contents Operation after Operable mode Display period
code detecting an
abnormality
010 Detected abnomal position of cassette compartment. Cassette tape insertion and unthreading Displayed until the
020 Detected an abnormality of threading position sensor. are prohibited until the error is solved. error is solved.
028 Detected an abnormal current of threading motor.
221 Failed to complete threading within the specified time AUTO OFF EJECT Displayed until the
224 Failed to detect the threading FG during threading. (Emergency EJECT) next cassette is
821 Failed to complete unthreading within the specified time inserted.
824 Failed to detect the threading FG during unthreading.
..
..
.Main code 2X : Abnormality related to the mechanism control
11
11
1Main code 20
Sub Detected contents Operation after Operable mode Display period
code detecting an
abnormality
018 Detected the abnormal current in the cassette up/down motor. AUTO OFF EJECT Displayed until the
111 Failed to complete the cassette down motion within the (Emergency EJECT) next cassette is
specified time. inserted.
911 Failed to complete the cassette up motion within the
specified time.
ERROR
DRUM SPEED ERROR
HAS BEEN DETECTED
WA I T UNT I L TH I S
I ND I CAT I ON GOES OFF.
4-2. Error Codes
4-11
DSR-2000/2000P
22
22
2Main code 21
Sub Detected contents Operation after Operable mode Display period
code detecting an
abnormality
0C8 Detected the abnormal current in the reel position motor. AUTO OFF EJECT Displayed until the
(Emergency EJECT) next cassette is
OE8 Detected the abnormal current of M stop plunger solenoid. inserted.
1C1 Failed to complete the reel position movement within the Cassette tape
specified time. will be ejected.
33
33
3Main code 22
Sub Detected contents Operation after Operable mode Display period
code detecting an
abnormality
0D8 Detected an abnormal current of cleaning plunger solenoid. AUTO OFF EJECT Displayed until the
(Emergency EJECT) next cassette is
inserted.
..
..
.Main code 3X : Sensor trouble
Sub codes are all 000.
Sub Detected contents Operation after Operable mode Display period
code detecting an
abnormality
31 Failed to release the tape top. STOP PLAY, FF, EJECT Displayed until the
32 Failed to release the tape end. STOP PLAY, REW, EJECT error is solved and
33 Detected an abnormal current of reel shift sensor LED. Insertion of _any key is
cassette tape is pressed.
inhibited.
34 Detected an abnormality of threading sensor. Cassette tape insertion and unthreading
35 Detected an abnormality of cassette compartment position are prohibited until the error is solved.
sensor.
36 Detected an abnormality of fan motor. Only error is _
displayed.
39 Detected an abnormality of cassette top/end sensor LED. STOP PLAY, EJECT
3A Detected an abnormality of tension sensor. AUTO OFF EJECT
(Emergency EJECT)
4-2. Error Codes
4-12 DSR-2000/2000P
Main code 91 : Abnormality of communication system or interface system
Main Sub Detected contents
code code
91 125 Communication error between system control and keyboard (detected by SY).
130 System control detected abnormality of ROM.
131 System control detected abnormality of external memory.
132 System control detected abnormality of internal memory.
133 System control detected abnormality of common memory for SERVO.
134 System control detected abnormality of common memory for SPCON.
139 System control detected abnormality of EEPROM (IC1 on the SE-463 board).
13A Detected abnormality in NVRAM.
13B Detected abnormality in Resetable Hour Meter.
13C Detected abnormality in Volume adjustment data area.
13F Communication error to MIC.
145 Communication error between system control and servo.
175 Communication error between system control and SPCON.
195 Communication error between system control and the SW microprocessor.
1A5 Communication error between system control and external keyboard.
1D5 Communication error between system control and the DV microprocessor.
1E5 Communication error between system control and the DIF microprocessor.
215 Communication error between system control and keyboard (detected by KY).
430 Servo main detect abnormality of ROM.
431 Servo detected abnormality of external memory.
439 Detected abnormality in the servo adjustment data area.
43B Detected abnormality in Unresetable Hours Meter.
455 Communication error between servo main and servo sub microprocessors.
539 Detected abnormality in the EQ data area.
730 SPCON detected abnormality of ROM.
731 SPCON detected abnormality of external RAM (IC313 and IC314 on the SY-278 board).
732 SPCON detected abnormality of internal RAM.
733 SPCON detected abnormality of the communication IC (IC208 on the SY-278 board) with SY.
734 SPCON detected communication error (SV-212, IC303) with SV.
Main code 92 to 94 : Abnormality of sync system
Main Sub Detected contents
code code
92 101 System control detected abnormality in NSG OE.
702 SPCON detected abnormality in P-TRKT.
703 SPCON detected abnormality in P-FLTT.
704 SPCON detected abnormality in R-TRKT.
705 SPCON detected abnormality in R-FLTT.
93 407 The servo main microprocessor detected abnormality of P-FLTD.
506 The servo sub microprocessor detected abnormality of P-TRKD.
94 409 The servo main microprocessor detected abnormality of R-FLTD.
508 The servo sub microprocessor detected abnormality of R-TRKD.
4-2. Error Codes
4-13
DSR-2000/2000P
Main code 95 : Communication error with digital process system IC
Main Sub Detected contents
code code
95 120 Communication error between system control and C1R MOD.
122 Communication error between system control and C1P MOD.
12A Communication error between system control and NSG.
12C Communication error between system control and VPRAD.
415 Communication error between servo and D1R.
416 Communication error between servo and HIF.
423 Communication error between servo and D1M.
424 Communication error between servo and D1S.
511 Communication error between drum and M1.
710 Frame communication error between SPCON and D1M.
711 Track pair communication error between SPCON and D1M.
712 Communication error between SPCON and V2P.
713 Communication error between SPCON and F1P.
714 Communication error between SPCON and SIFR (P).
715 Communication error between SPCON and SIFP.
720 Communication error between SPCON and AIFP.
730 Frame communication error between SPCON and D1R.
731 Track pair communication error between SPCON and D1R.
732 Communication error between SPCON and V2R.
733 Communication error between SPCON and F1R.
734 Communication error between SPCON and SIFR (R).
740 Frame communication error between SPCON and A1R Front.
741 Track pair communication error between SPCON and A1R Front.
742 Frame communication error between SPCON and A1R Rear.
743 Track pair communication error between SPCON and A1R Rear.
744 Communication error between SPCON and AIF-INDI.
745 Communication error between SPCON and ACTL.
750 Communication error between SPCON and IN-DSP.
751 Communication error between SPCON and REC-DSP.
752 Communication error between SPCON and PB-DSP.
753 Communication error between SPCON and OUT-DSP.
4-2. Error Codes
4-14 DSR-2000/2000P
4-2-4. Possible Causes of Errors
Possible causes of errors
Main code 02 06
403 574 554 402 355 058 154 254 594 494 395 496 3A7
503 674 654 454 375 078 174 854 694 596 4A7
Sub code 603 803 474 194 696 5A7
255 6A7
275
875
Possible causes A55
A75
A95
1. Tape is stuck to the tape running mechanism. O O O O O O O
2. Tape is loosely wound in the cassette. O O O O O O O
3. Cassette tape is not confined properly. O O O O O O O O O
(Cassette compartment is unlocked.)
4. Reel motor does not generate the correct torque. O O O O O O O O O O O O O
5. Abnormality of reel FG O O O O O O O O O O O O
6. Tension regulator is defective. O
7. Cut-and-spliced tape is used. O O O O O O
8. Top detector and end detector are defective. O O O O O
9. Pinch roller has insufficient pressure against O O
capstan.
Check procedure for the possible causes, and the related circuit boards and devices
Possible causes Check items and check procedure Related circuit boards and devices
1. Tape is stuck to the tape running .Check if tape is stuck to tape guides or drum.
mechanism. .Check if foreign material is adhered to tape.
.Tape is dirty. .Check if tape is damaged.
.Tape run mechanism is dirty. .Check if foreign material is adhered to tape run
.Humidity or condensation mechanism and drum.
2. Tape is loosely wound in the cassette. .Check if tape has severe non-uniform winding.
.A tape which has been used for
many times, is used.
.A damaged tape is used.
3. Cassette tape is not confined properly. Check that the four pins of the cassette
(Cassette compartment is unlocked.) compartment are inserted into the holes of the
slant table.
Check that the cassette compartment retainer is
securely fastened.
↓
If a cassette compartment is unlocked when a
cassette compartment is inserted, exchange the
cassette compartment.
↓
When a cassette compartment is lock after it is
exchanged, the trouble is caused by the cassette
compartment. Otherwise the trouble is caused by cassette compartment
the defective drive circuit. SV-212 board
4-2. Error Codes
4-15
DSR-2000/2000P
Possible causes Check items and check procedure Related circuit boards and devices
4. Reel motor does not generate the .When the S and T reel brakes are considered When the reel brake is considered to
correct torque. to be the cause of trouble : be the cause of trouble :
.Reel brake has mechanical defect. Check the S and T reel brakes. SV-212 board, reel brake solenoid
.Reel brake solenoid is open. Check that the S and T reel brakes are released.
.Reel brake solenoid drive IC is .When the S and T reel motors are When the S and T reel motor or the
defective. considered to be the cause of trouble : S and T reel FG is considered to be
.Reel motor is defective. Perform the servo adjustment. the cause of trouble :
.Reel motor drive circuit is defective. Confirm that the servo adjustment is completed SV-212 board, S and Treel motor
.Harness is defective. as intended.
5. Abnormality of reel FG Perform the S and T reel adjustment.
.S and T reel motor is defective. Confirm that the reel FG adjustment is completed
.S and T reel FG amp is defective. as intended.
6. Tension regulator is defective. Replace the tension regulator assembly. SV-212 board, MS-64 board,
Confirm that OK appears on display. SE-538 board
7. Cut-and-spliced tape is used.
8. Top detector and end detector are Check the tape top and tape end. When the tape top sensor is
defective. The top and end sensor must turn on and off considered to be the cause of trouble :
correctly. SE-522 board, SV-212 board,
tape top sensor LED
When the tape end sensor is consid
ered to be the cause of trouble :
SE-521 board, SV-212 board,
tape end sensor LED
9. Pinch roller has insufficient pressure Check the pinch roller. SV-212 board, pinch solenoid
against capstan. Pinch roller must be pressed against the capstan
.Pinch roller has mechanical defect. shaft correctly.
.Pinch solenoid is open.
.Pinch solenoid drive IC is defective.
4-2. Error Codes
4-16 DSR-2000/2000P
4-3. Countermeasure in an Emergency
4-3-1. How to Take Out the Cassette Whose
Tape is Slacked (MANUAL EJECT)
(1) Turn the power off.
(2) Remove the top panel. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
(3) Remove the front panel. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
(4) Turn the manual eject gear A (red) in the arrow
direction with a phillips screwdriver while pressing the
gear. When the tape comes to slack, turn the reel table
from the front side utilizing a skewer and wind the
tape.
m
.In a case of standard cassette and M cassette :
Turn the reel table (T)
.In a case of mini cassette :
Turn the reel table (S)
(5) Repeat step (4) until each guide comes to the unthread-
ing end position and furthermore the tape completely
returns into the cassette.
(6) Turn the manual eject gear B (red) in the arrow
direction until the cassette compartment completely
comes into cassette out state.
Manual eject gear A (red)
4-3. Counterneasure in an Emergency
Skewer Reel table (T)
Manual eject gear B (red)
4-17
DSR-2000/2000P
4-3. Countermeasure in an Emergency
4-3-3. Operating the VTR without A Cassette
Tape
The VTR can be operated without a cassette tape by the
following switch setting.
Switch setting
1. Remove the cassette compartment from this unit.
2. Turn on switches S101-3 and 4 of the SV-212 board.
3. Then turn on the main power.
Operating method
Threading
While pressing the S/T reel motors, press the [STOP] key.
The upper drum rotates, threading ring rotates. The unit
enters the threading mode.
The tension arm and the threading ring move to the
specified position, then the threading is completed.
This condition in which the threading is completed is
referred to as the STOP status.
PLAY
Press the [PLAY] key.
The pinch roller is pressed against the capstan shaft to
enter the PLAY status.
When the [PLAY] key is pressed during threading, the
pinch roller is pressed against the capstan shaft to enter the
PLAY status after the threading has completed.
FF
Press the [F|FWD] key.
The pinch roller is pressed against the capstan shaft to set
the FWD.SEARCH to five-times speed.
REW
Press the [REW] key.
The pinch roller is pressed against the capstan shaft to set
REV.SEARCH to five-times speed.
4-3-2. Head Cleaning when Head Clogging
Occurs
Clean the video head as follows when the video head gets
dirty.
Procedure to use the cleaning cassette
n
Use only the cleaning cassette tape as follows.
If another cleaning cassette tape is used, abnormal abrasion
or breakage of the video head could occur.
Cleaning cassette tapes :
DV12CL (Standard)
DVM12CL (Mini)
1. Insert the specific cleaning cassette tape in this unit.
The unit is automatically set in the PLAY mode and
the cleaning tape starts running.
Confirm that the [PLAY] key lights and the display
appears.
2. The cleaning cassette tape is automatically ejected
after running for 10 seconds.
n
Do not rewind the cleaning cassette tape to use it
again.
3. Make sure that the head is no longer dirty.
If the video head is still dirty after step 2 above, clean
the video head as follows.
Procedure to use the cleaning cloth
1. Soak the cleaning cloth with cleaning liquid and bring
it into contact lightly with the video head.
2. Turn the upper drum slowly by hand in the rotating
direction of the head (counterclockwise when viewed
from the top) to clean the video head.
m
.Never move the cleaning cloth in the vertical direction
against the video head because it may break the head.
.Turn the power switch off when cleaning the video head.
4-18 DSR-2000/2000P
REC
While pressing the record proof sensor on the right side of
the T side reel table, press both the [PLAY] key and the
[REC] key.
The pinch roller is pressed against the capstan shaft to
enter REC status.
When the record proof sensor is released, the REC status is
released and the recorder returns to PLAY status.
Unthreading
Press the [EJECT] key.
Each guide moves to the specified position to complete the
unthreading.
Reel position selection
Press the [STANDBY] key on the control panel.
Reel position will be changed as shown below in accor-
dance with the number of pressing the [STANDBY]
switch.
n
Make sure to turn off switches S101-3 and 4 on the
SV-212 board after the adjustment.
Mini M STD
4-3. Countermeasure in an Emergency
5-1
DSR-2000/2000P
Section 5
Maintenance Menu
5-1. Menu Structure
This unit has a maintenance menu which is used for maintenance.
The maintenance menu has a layered structure through which you move to perform the various checks, settings and
adjustments using the specified menu items. Contents of the maintenance menu are displayed on the video monitor
connected to the VIDEO OUT 3 (SUPER) connector or the SDI OUTPUT 3 (SUPER) connector and the time counter of
DSR-2000/2000P.
Values in parenthesis ( ) are time counter display.
MENU, First layer MENU, Second layer MENU, Third layer
MENU DATA CONTROL MENU STATUS DISPLAY (>MENU STA)
(MENU CNT) SAVE MENU DATA (>Save MENU)
LOAD MENU DATA (>Load MENU)
SERVO CHECK (SV Check) SENSOR CHECK (>Sensor) CASS-COMPARTMENT (>>Cass-COM)
TAPE TOP/END (>>Top/End)
HUMID [MOISTURE] (>>HUMID)
REC INHIBIT (>>REC INHI.)
MOTOR CHECK (>Motor) S-REEL (>>S-Reel)
T-REEL (>>T-Reel)
THREADING (>>Threading)
CASS-COMPARTMENT (>>Cass-COM)
CAPSTAN (>> Capstan)
DRUM (>>Drum)
REEL POSITION (>>Reel POS.)
PLUNGER CHECK (>Plunger) PINCH (>>Pinch)
REEL BRAKE (>>R-Brake)
M PLUNGER (>>M Plunger)
HEAD CLEANER (>>H. Cleaner)
SERVO ADJUST (SV Adjust) S/T-REEL & CAPSTAN (>Reel & Cap.)
S-REEL ONLY (>S-Reel)
T-REEL ONLY (>T-Reel)
CAPSTAN ONLY (>Capstan)
TENSION (>Tension)
TAPE PATH ADJUST (TP Adjust) TRACKING ADJUST (>Tracking)
RF SWITCHING POSITION (>Switching)
5-2 DSR-2000/2000P
Values in parenthesis ( ) are time counter display.
MENU, First layer MENU, Second layer MENU, Third layer
ELECTRICAL ADJUST (EL Adjust) PLL F0 (>PLL f0)
EQ AUTO (>EQ auto) DVCAM (>>DVCAM)
DV (>>DV)
EQ MANUAL ADJ (>EQ manual) DVCAM (>>DVCAM)
DV (>>DV)
DV LP (>>DV LP)
DVCPRO (>>DVCPRO)
REC CURRENT (>REC cur)
FE CHECK (>FE check)
VOLUME ADJUST (>Vol adj)
PROCESS CHECK : OFF (>Proc check) OFF (>>off)
DPR (>>dpr)
MAIN (>>main)
SUB (>>sub)
PRE (>>pre)
REF CHECK : OFF (>REF check) OFF (>>off)
NON-STD (>>Non-STD)
STD (>>STD)
RP DATA INITIALIZE
SERVICE SUPPORT (Support) ERROR LOG (>Error LOG)
MANUAL EJECT (>Manu. Eject)
DIAGNOSTICS CONTROL (>DIAG CNT) CLEAR ERROR LOG (>>Clear LOG)
OTHERS (Others) SOFTWARE VERSION (>Version)
KEYBOARD CHECK (>KY Check)
MEMORY DISPLAY (>MEM Check) SY MEMORY DISPLAY (>> SY MEM.)
SV MEMORY DISPLAY (>> SV MEM.)
SP MEMORY DISPLAY (>> SP MEM.)
KY MEMORY DISPLAY (>> KY MEM.)
CM DISPLAY (>> CM DISP.)
DATA DISPLAY (>Data Check) SP DATA DISPLAY (>>SP DATA)
5-1. Menu Structure
5-3
DSR-2000/2000P
5-2. How to Operate Maintenance Menu
5-2-1. Location and Function of Switches
Use MENU, SET, ENTRY, AUTO EDIT, IN and OUT switches on the control panel shown below to perform the mainte-
nance menu.
The maintenance menu has a layered structure through which you move to select the desired item.
[AUDIO|IN] KEY : Use this key to move in the direction of ↑ within the same layer.
[IN] KEY : Use this key to move in the direction of ↓ within the same layer.
[DELETE] KEY : Use this key to move in the direction of ← to higher layers.
[ENTRY] KEY : Use this key to move in the direction of → to lower layers. (It is inoperative if there is no lower layer.)
To indicate depth of layer, the displayed menu items are indented on the video monitor and “>” is added to the top on the
time counter.
5-2-2. How to Enter the Maintenance Menu
1. While pressing the [DELETE] (←) key and [TRIM+] key , press the [MENU] key. The DSR-2000/2000P enters the
maintenance menu. The maintenance menu appears on the video monitor.
2. Select the desired item using the [AUDIO|IN] (↑) key and the [IN] (↓) key. The cursor shown with a white back-
ground moves to the selected item.
3. After the desired item is selected, press the [ENTRY] (→) key to designate the selected item.
5-2-3. How to Exit the Maintenance Menu
Press the [MENU] key to exit the maintenance menu.
FULL/FINE
PHONE LEVEL
CH-1
REC
PB
ASSEMBLE
HEADPHONES
PREVIEW REVIEW
AUTO
DMC EDIT DELETE
MEMORY
VIDEO INSERT
CH-1 CH-2 CH-3 CH-4 TC
CH-2 CH-3 CH-4
CH-4CH-3CH-2CH-1
L
R
TRIM
PULL FOR VARIABLE
IN OUT
IN OUT
AUDIO
REC
STANDBY
EJECT REW PLAY F FWD STOP
SEARCH
VARIABLE
PREROLL EDIT
PLAYER RECORDER
ENTRY SHIFT
LIST MARK PREREAD PB/EE PB MENU SET HOLD COUNTER SEL RESET
CHANNEL
CONDITION
-+
MONITOR SELECT
METER
EDIT
SETMENU
ENTRYDELETEAUTO EDIT IN
AUDIO IN TRIM+
5-2. How to Operate Maintenance Menu
5-2-1. Location and Function of Switches
5-2-2. How to Enter the Maintenance Menu
5-2-3. How to Exit the Maintenance Menu
5-4 DSR-2000/2000P
5-3. Contents of Maintenance Menu
5-3-1. Menu Data Control
The MENU DATA CONTROL item provides a SETUP MENU data display and saving and loading the
SET UP MENU data.
This item is used to return the settings to their original values after maintenance is complete or ROM
upgrading is complete.
Operating procedure
1. Enter the maintenance menu.
2. Move the cursor to “MENU DATA CONTROL” which is
displayed with a white background, using the [AUDIO|IN]
(↑), [IN] (↓) keys.
3. Press the [ENTRY] (→) key.
“MENU DATA CONTROL” is selected and its lower layer
submenu appears.
4. Move the cursor displayed with a white background to a
desired item using the [AUDIO|IN] (↑), [IN] (↓) keys.
5. When an item is selected, press the [ENTRY] (→) key. The
contents of the selected item appear.
6. Press the [DELETE] (←) key to exit MENU DATA CON-
TROL and return to the main menu.
7. Press the [MENU] key to exit the maintenance menu.
5-3. Contents of Maintenance Menu
5-3-1. Menu Data Control
5-5
DSR-2000/2000P
(1) MENU STATUS DISPLAY
Displays the current status of the SET UP MENU data.
MENU VERSION : Version number of the SET UP MENU
NUMBER OF ITEM : Numbers of the SET UP MENU items
CHANGED ITEM : Numbers of the items which were
changed from the factory default
settings
DATA CHECK SUM : Data check sum
Pressing [ENTRY] (→) key displays the status of the SET UP
MENU stored in the menu bank 1 to 4.
(2) SAVE MENU DATA
This is used to temporarily save the user’s setup menu data. A
temporary saved data can be reset later.
1. The version of the current setup menu is displayed, and it is
waiting to press the [SET] key.
* Pressing the [MENU] key returns to the main menu.
2. Press the [SET] key.
The SET UP MENU data is stored in EEPROM.
Confirm that [COMPLETE] appears and data saving is
complete.
m
.Data which has once been saved will not be deleted by turning
the main power on and off, or by upgrading the ROM version.
However, the saved data is deleted when the MS-64 board or the
EEPROM is replaced because the data is saved in the EEPROM
in the MS-64 board.
.When the SET UP MENU is upgraded by ROM’s version
upgrade, an alarm message appears after the ROM is replaced.
Either initialize the SET UP MENU or execute “LOAD MENU
DATA” when the alarm appears.
5-3. Contents of Maintenance Menu
5-3-1. Menu Data Control
5-6 DSR-2000/2000P
(3) LOAD MENU DATA
The saved data is stored as ordinary SET UP MENU data when it
is loaded.
1. The version number of the current SET UP MENU and that of
the SET UP MENU to be loaded are displayed, and it is
waiting to press the [SET] key.
* Pressing the [MENU] key returns to the main menu.
2. Press the [SET] key.
The SET UP MENU data is stored in EEPROM.
Confirm that [COMPLETE] appears and data saving is
complete.
In the case of trouble :
Loading of the data will not start if SET UP MENU data has not
been saved or the saved SET UP MENU data contains an error.
5-3. Contents of Maintenance Menu
5-3-1. Menu Data Control
5-7
DSR-2000/2000P
5-3-2. Servo Check
Checks the servo system automatically or semi-automatically.
Operating procedure
1. Enter the maintenance menu.
2. Move the cursor to “SERVO CHECK” which is displayed
with a white background using the [AUDIO|IN] (↑), [IN] (↓)
keys.
3. Press the [ENTRY] (→) key.
“SERVO CHECK” is selected and its lower layer submenu
appears.
4. Move the cursor displayed with a white background to a
desired item using the [AUDIO|IN] (↑), [IN] (↓) keys.
5. Press the [ENTRY] (→) key.
The lower layer submenu appears.
6. Move the cursor displayed with a white background to a
desired item using the [AUDIO|IN] (↑), [IN] (↓) keys.
7. Press the [ENTRY] (→) key to select the desired item.
8. Press the [SET] key to execute the selected item.
9. After completing the check, press the [MENU] key to return
to the main menu.
10. To check other menus and submenus, repeat steps 4 to 9.
11. Press the [MENU] key to exit the maintenance menu.
n
If the [MENU] key is pressed while the check is in progress, the
check operation is forcibly ended and the display returns to the
main menu.
5-3. Contents of Maintenance Menu
5-3-2. Servo Check
5-8 DSR-2000/2000P
1. SENSOR CHECK
The respective items of “SENSOR CHECK” are described below :
11
11
1CASS-COMPARTMENT
Checks the respective switches of the cassette compartment.
SW/Sensor Applicable board
PH1 CC-85
PH2
PH3
PH4
S1 CC-84
S2
S3
1. Execute the CASS-COMPARTMENT.
2. Confirm that the sensors are all OFF with no cassette inserted.
PH1
S1
S3
CC-84 board
CC-85 board
S2 PH2
PH4
PH3
5-3. Contents of Maintenance Menu
5-3-2. Servo Check
5-9
DSR-2000/2000P
3. Insert the mini-cassette and confirm that the status of the
sensor is the monitor display shown right.
4. Insert the M-cassette and confirm that the status of the sensor
is the monitor display shown right.
5. Insert the standard cassette and confirm that the status of the
sensor is the monitor display shown right.
6. Insert the M-ADPT (Cassette adaptor for DVCPRO) and
confirm that the status of the sensor is the monitor display
shown right.
* _ _ : not care
5-3. Contents of Maintenance Menu
5-3-2. Servo Check
5-10 DSR-2000/2000P
Tape top sensor
(photodetector)
Tape end sensor
(photodetector) LED for tape sensor
(light emitter)
22
22
2TAPE TOP/END
Checks the tape-top and tape-end sensors.
1. Execute the TAPE TOP/END.
2. Confirm that both TOP SENSOR and END SENSOR are
[ON!].
3. Interrupt between the LED for the tape sensor (light emitter)
and the tape-top sensor (photodetector) by inserting a finger or
the like.
Confirm that the TOP SENSOR display changes from [ON!]
to [OFF] on the monitor display.
4. Interrupt between the LED for the tape sensor (light emitter)
and the tape-end sensor (photodetector) by inserting a finger
or the like.
Confirm that the END SENSOR display changes from [ON!]
to [OFF] on the monitor display.
In the case of trouble :
If the display does not change check whether the tape-top sensor or
the tape-end sensor itself is defective.
Check also the tape-top/tape-end sensor circuit (MS-64, SE-521/
522 board).
5-3. Contents of Maintenance Menu
5-3-2. Servo Check
5-11
DSR-2000/2000P
HUMID (condensation) sensor
33
33
3HUMID (MOISTURE)
Checks the HUMID (condensation) sensor.
1. Execute the HUMID (MOISTURE).
2. Bring a cotton swab moistened with water in contact with the
HUMID sensor.
Confirm that [DRY] changes to [WET!] on the monitor
display.
3. Blow wind onto the HUMID sensor to evaporate any water.
Confirm that the display changes to [DRY] on the monitor 30
minutes later.
n
Once the HUMID sensor detects [WET!], even if make it dry
immediately, it takes 30 minutes to detect [DRY].
In the case of trouble :
If the display does not change from DRY to WET!, check whether
the HUMID sensor itself is defective.
Check also the HUMID sensor amplifier (MS-64 board).
5-3. Contents of Maintenance Menu
5-3-2. Servo Check
5-12 DSR-2000/2000P
REC INHIBIT switch
44
44
4REC INHIBIT
Checks the REC INHIBIT switch.
1. Execute the REC INHIBIT.
2. Confirm the monitor display is as shown right.
3. Press the REC INHIBIT switch.
Confirm that ON is displayed on the monitor display.
In the case of trouble :
If OFF is not displayed, check the sensor on the MIC arm.
5-3. Contents of Maintenance Menu
5-3-2. Servo Check
5-13
DSR-2000/2000P
2. MOTOR CHECK
The respective items of “MOTOR CHECK” are described below :
11
11
1S-REEL
Checks the S-reel motor.
1. Execute the S-REEL.
2. Press and hold the [AUDIO|IN] (↑), then [IN] (↓) keys for
one to two seconds, and release the reel brake by activating the
brake solenoid. Confirm that the S reel motor rotates clock-
wise and counterclockwise respectively during pressing the
[AUDIO|IN] (↑) key and [IN] (↓) key.
In the case of trouble :
If the brake solenoid does not emit the operating sound and the S
reel motor does not rotate in the specified direction even though
pressing the [AUDIO|IN] (↑) and [IN] (↓) keys, check the S reel
motor assembly and reel motor driver circuit (SV-212 and MS-64).
22
22
2T-REEL
Checks the T-reel motor.
1. Execute the T-REEL.
2. Press and hold the [AUDIO|IN] (↑), then [IN] (↓) keys for
one to two seconds, and release the reel brake by activating the
brake solenoid. Confirm that the T reel motor rotates clock-
wise and counterclockwise respectively during pressing the
[AUDIO|IN] (↑) key and [IN] (↓) key.
In the case of trouble :
If the brake solenoid does not emit the operating sound and the T
reel motor does not rotate in the specified direction even though
pressing the [AUDIO|IN] (↑) and [IN] (↓) keys, check the T reel
motor assembly and reel motor driver circuit (SV-212 and MS-64).
5-3. Contents of Maintenance Menu
5-3-2. Servo Check
5-14 DSR-2000/2000P
33
33
3THREADING
Checks the threading motor, the thread-end sensor, unthread-end
sensor and the cassette compartment.
1. Execute the THREADING.
2. Press and hold the [AUDIO|IN] (↑) key.
Confirm that the threading ring completes threading and the
message “THREAD END” appears on the monitor display.
3. Press and hold the [IN] (↓) key.
Confirm that the threading ring completes unthreading and
“UNTHREAD END” appears on the monitor display.
In the case of trouble :
If the threading motor does not rotate, or if the message
“THREAD END” does not appear even though threading is
complete, or if the message “UNTHREAD END” does not appear
on the monitor even though the unthreading is complete, check the
threading motor, the cassette compartment, the SV-212 board.
Check also the MS-64 board (the driver circuit and the threading
FG amplifier circuit) and the SE-512 board (the sensor).
5-3. Contents of Maintenance Menu
5-3-2. Servo Check
5-15
DSR-2000/2000P
44
44
4CASS-COMPARTMENT
Check the cassette compartment motor.
1. Execute the CASS-COMPARTMENT.
2. Press the [ENTRY] (→) key.
Confirm that the cassette compartment moves down.
3. Press the [ENTRY] (→) key again, and confirm that the
cassette compartment moves up.
(The monitor display changes in the reverse order of the
steps for moving down the cassette compartment.)
In the case of trouble :
If the monitor display does not change, check the cassette
compartment motor, the SV-212 board (the sensor input circuit)
and the CC-83 board (the sensor).
5-3. Contents of Maintenance Menu
5-3-2. Servo Check
5-16 DSR-2000/2000P
55
55
5CAPSTAN
Checks the capstan motor.
1. Execute the CAPSTAN.
2. Press the [ENTRY] (→) key.
Confirm that [FORWARD ... OK] appears on the monitor
display.
3. Press the [ENTRY] (→) key again.
Confirm that [REVERSE ... OK] appears on the monitor
display.
In the case of trouble :
If the monitor display does not change, check the capstan motor
and the capstan motor driver circuits (the SV-212 board, MS-64
board)
5-3. Contents of Maintenance Menu
5-3-2. Servo Check
5-17
DSR-2000/2000P
66
66
6DRUM
Checks the drum motor.
1. Execute the DRUM.
2. Confirm the monitor display is as follows.
SPEED : [OK]
PHASE : [LOCK]
PG : [EXIST]
In the case of trouble :
If the monitor display does not change, check the drum motor, the
SV-212 board (the drum motor driver circuit, the drum FG amp
circuit and the drum PG amp circuit).
5-3. Contents of Maintenance Menu
5-3-2. Servo Check
5-18 DSR-2000/2000P
77
77
7REEL POSITION
Checks the reel position motor and the reel MINI/M/STD position
sensor.
1. Execute the REEL POSITION.
2. Confirm that the reel table moves in the order of the MINI
position → the M position → the STD position then returning
to the MINI position each time pressing the [ENTRY] (→)
key and the monitor display changes in accordance with the
move.
In the case of trouble :
If the reel table does not move or the monitor display does not
change, check the reel position motor, the reel MINI/M/STD
position sensor (the SE-522 and MS-64 boards) and reel position
motor driver circuit (the SV-212 board).
5-3. Contents of Maintenance Menu
5-3-2. Servo Check
5-19
DSR-2000/2000P
3. PLUNGER CHECK
The respective items of “PLUNGER CHECK” are described
below.
11
11
1PINCH
Checks the pinch roller solenoid.
1. Execute the PINCH and confirm that the pinch solenoid
operates when the threading starts.
2. Press the [AUDIO|IN] (↑) and [IN] (↓) keys to confirm that
the PINCH comes to ON/OFF.
3. Press the [MENU] key to release the pinch solenoid and to
bring to the unthreading.
Doing so, the monitor display returns to the main menu.
In the case of trouble :
If the pinch solenoid does not operate, check the pinch solenoid
and the driver circuit (the SV-212 board).
5-3. Contents of Maintenance Menu
5-3-2. Servo Check
5-20 DSR-2000/2000P
22
22
2REEL BRAKE
Checks the reel brake solenoid.
1. Execute the REEL BRAKE and confirm that the reel brake
solenoid operates.
2. Press the [AUDIO|IN] (↑) and [IN] (↓) keys to confirm that
the REEL BRAKE comes to ON/OFF.
3. Press the [MENU] key to release the reel brake solenoid.
Doing so, the monitor display returns to the main menu.
In the case of trouble :
If the reel brake solenoid does not operate, check the reel brake
solenoid and its driver circuit (the SV-212 board).
33
33
3M PLUNGER
Checks the M plunger solenoid.
1. Execute the M PLUNGER.
2. Press the [AUDIO|IN] (↑) and [IN] (↓) keys to confirm that
the M PLUNGER comes to ON/OFF.
3. Press the [MENU] key to release the M plunger solenoid.
Doing so, the monitor display returns to the main menu.
In the case of trouble :
If the M plunger solenoid does not operate, check the M plunger
solenoid and its driver circuit (the SV-212 board).
5-3. Contents of Maintenance Menu
5-3-2. Servo Check
5-21
DSR-2000/2000P
5-3-3. Servo Adjust
Checks the servo system automatically or semi-automatically.
Operating procedure
1. Enter the maintenance menu.
2. Move the cursor to “SERVO ADJUST” which is displayed
with a white background using the [AUDIO|IN] (↑), [IN] (↓)
keys.
3. Press the [ENTRY] (→) key.
“SERVO ADJUST” is selected and its lower-layer submenu
appears.
4. Move the cursor displayed with a white background to a
desired item using the [AUDIO|IN] (↑), [IN] (↓) keys.
5. Press the [ENTRY] (→) key to select the desired item.
(Refer to the respective menu description for the adjustment
procedure.)
6. Press the [SET] key to execute the selected menu.
7. After completing the adjustment, press the [DELETE] (←)
key to return to the main menu.
8. To check other menus and submenus, repeat steps 4 to 7.
9. Press the [MENU] key to exit the maintenance menu.
n
If the [MENU] key is pressed while the adjustment is in progress,
the adjustment operation is forcibly ended and the display returns
to the main menu.
5-3. Contents of Maintenance Menu
5-3-3. Servo Adjust
5-22 DSR-2000/2000P
(1) S/T REEL & CAPSTAN
Executes the automatic adjustment of the S and T reels and,
capstan systems.
1. Execute the S/T REEL & CAPSTAN.
2. After completing adjustment, confirm that “COMPLETE”
appears.
Adjustment items
s reel fg adjust
s reel offset/friction
s reel torque
t reel fg adjust
t reel offset /friction
t reel torque
capstan fg adjust
In the case of trouble :
When “ADJUST INCOMPLETE” appears on the monitor display,
check the SV-212 and MS-64 boards (the reeel FG amplifier
circuit, reel motor driver circuit, capstan FG circuit and motor
driver cicuit) Check also the respective motors.
(2) S-REEL ONLY
Executes the automatic adjustment of the S reel only.
1. Execute the S-REEL ONLY.
2. After completing adjustment, confirm that “COMPLETE”
appears.
Adjustment items
s reel fg adjust
s reel offset/friction
s reel torque
In the case of trouble :
When “ADJUST INCOMPLETE” appears on the monitor display,
check the SV-212 and MS-64 boards (the reel FG amplifier circuit,
the reel motor driver circuit) and the S-reel motor.
5-3. Contents of Maintenance Menu
5-3-3. Servo Adjust
5-23
DSR-2000/2000P
(3) T-REEL ONLY
Executes the automatic adjustment of the T reel only.
1. Execute the T-REEL ONLY.
2. After completing adjustment, confirm that “COMPLETE”
appears.
Adjustment items
t reel fg adjust
t reel offset/friction
t reel torque
In the case of trouble :
When “ADJUST INCOMPLETE” appears on the monitor display,
check the SV-212 and MS-64 boards (the reel FG amplifier circuit,
the reel motor driver circuit) and the T-reel motor.
(4) CAPSTAN ONLY
Executes the automatic adjustment of the capstan FG only.
1. Execute the CAPSTAN ONLY.
2. After completing adjustment, confirm that “COMPLETE”
appears.
Adjustment item
capstan fg adjust
In the case of trouble :
When “ADJUST INCOMPLETE” appears on monitor display,
check the SV-212 and MS-64 boards (the capstan motor driver
circuit, the capstan FG amplifier circuit) and the capstan motor.
5-3. Contents of Maintenance Menu
5-3-3. Servo Adjust
5-24 DSR-2000/2000P
(5) TENSION
Executes the adjustment of the tape tension.
Mode
PLAY mode
Tools
DV torque cassette : J-6082-373-A
1. Remove the cassette compartment.
2. Turn on the main power and press the [EJECT] key.
n
Make sure that the cassette compartment connection cable is
not shorted to chassis when the main power is turned on.
3. Enter “MAINTENANCE MENU” and select “TENSION”
from “SERVO ADJUST” using the [AUDIO|IN] (↑), [IN] (↓)
keys.
4. Press the [ENTRY] (→) key to move to the next display.
5. When the display appears, press the [SET] key to start the
adjustment.
5-3. Contents of Maintenance Menu
5-3-3. Servo Adjust
5-25
DSR-2000/2000P
Specification is as indicated on the display.
6. Wait until display changes and the menu appears as shown in
the right.
7. Set the DV torque cassette and place a weight of about 300 g
on it. Press the [STOP] key.
8. Keep pressing the [AUDIO|IN] (↑), [IN] (↓) keys until the
DV torque cassette reading agrees with the specification value
on display.
9. When adjustment is completed, press the [ENTRY] (→) key.
5-3. Contents of Maintenance Menu
5-3-3. Servo Adjust
5-26 DSR-2000/2000P
Specification is as indicated on the display.
Specification is as indicated on the display.
10. The display changes as shown in the right, and the DSR-2000/
2000P enters the tension regulator magnet position check
mode.
11. If the check is completed unsatisfactorily, the display changes
as shown in the right.
12. Replace the tension regulator assembly in accordance with
message on the display.
13. If the check is completed satisfactorily, the display changes as
shown in the right.
14. Keep pressing the [AUDIO|IN] (↑), [IN] (↓) keys until the
DV torque cassette reading agrees with the specification value
on the display.
15. When adjustment is completed, press the [ENTRY] (→) key.
16. Repeat steps 14 and 15 to readjust the DV torque cassette
reading.
17. Confirm that the DV torque cassette reading agrees with the
specification value on the display.
18. After completing step 17, press the [ENTRY] (→) key and the
DSR-2000/2000P enters the REV mode automatically.
5-3. Contents of Maintenance Menu
5-3-3. Servo Adjust
5-27
DSR-2000/2000P
Specification is as indicated on the display.
18. Keep pressing the [AUDIO|IN] (↑), [IN] (↓) keys until the
DV torque cassette reading agrees with the specification value
on the display.
19. When adjustment is completed, press the [ENTRY] (→) key.
20. Press the [EJECT] key and remove the DV torque cassette.
21. Confirm that the message “COMPLETE” appears on the
display.
*Press the [EJECT] key to return to the ADJUST menu.
*When adjustment is complete, attach the cassette compartment.
5-3. Contents of Maintenance Menu
5-3-3. Servo Adjust
5-28 DSR-2000/2000P
5-3-4. Tape Path Adjust
Executes the adjustment of the tape path.
(1) TRACKING ADJUST
For adjustment of “TRACKING ADJUST”, refer to section 8-1,
8-2, 8-4, 8-5, 8-6, 8-7, and 8-8.
(2) RF SWITCHING POSITION
For adjustment of “RF SWITCHING POSITION”, refer to section
8-3.
5-3. Contents of Maintenance Menu
5-3-4. Tape Path Adjust
5-29
DSR-2000/2000P
5-3-5. Electrical Adjust
Executes the electrical adjustment.
Operating procedure
1. Enter the maintenance menu.
2. Move the cursor to “ELECTRICAL ADJUST” which is
displayed with a white background using the [AUDIO|IN]
(↑), [IN] (↓) keys.
3. Press the [ENTRY] (→) key.
“ELECTRICAL ADJUST” is selected and its lower-layer
submenu appears.
4. Move the cursor displayed with a white background to a
desired item using the [AUDIO|IN] (↑) and [IN] (↓) keys.
5. Press the [ENTRY] (→) key to select the desired item.
5-3. Contents of Maintenance Menu
5-3-5. Electrical Adjust
5-30 DSR-2000/2000P
1. PLL F0
The PLL adjustment is described below :
1. Select “PLL F0” and the PLL adjustment is performed auto-
matically.
2. After completing the adjustment, confirm that “COMPLETE”
appears.
3. Press the [DELETE] (←) key to return to the ADJUST menu.
4. Press the [MENU] key to exit the maintenance menu.
In the case of trouble :
If “INCOMPLETE” appears on the monitor display, check the
RP-111 board (the PLL circuit).
5-3. Contents of Maintenance Menu
5-3-5. Electrical Adjust
5-31
DSR-2000/2000P
2. EQ AUTO ADJ
The EQ AUTO adjustment is described below:
11
11
1 DVCAM
1. Select the EQ AUTO ADJ.
2. Move the cursor displayed with a white background to the
DVCAM using the [AUDIO|IN] (↑) and [IN] (↓) keys and
press the [ENTRY] (→) key.
3. After the monitor display comes out as shown right, insert the
XH5-1A2 (for NTSC) or XH5-1AP2 (for PAL) into the unit.
4. Press the [PLAY] key.
5. Confirm “COMPLETE” is displayed on the monitor.
To return to step 2, press the [DELETE] (←) key once.
To return to step 1, press the [DELETE] (←) key twice.
To return to the main menu, press the [DELETE] (←) key three
times.
In the case of trouble :
If “INCOMLETE” is displayed on the monitor;
1Send the small length of the tape forward and repeat step 2
again.
2If “INCOMLETE” is still displayed after performing 1,
check the RP-111 board (the EQ circuit).
5-3. Contents of Maintenance Menu
5-3-5. Electrical Adjust
5-32 DSR-2000/2000P
22
22
2DV
1. Select the EQ AUTO ADJ.
2. Move the cursor displayed with a white background to the DV
using the [AUDIO|IN] (↑) and [IN] (↓) keys and press the
[ENTRY] (→) key.
3. After the monitor display comes out as shown right, insert the
XH4-1A into the unit.
4. Press the [PLAY] key.
5. Confirm “COMPLETE” is displayed on the monitor.
To return to step 2, press the [DELETE] (←) key once.
To return to step 1, press the [DELETE] (←) key twice.
To return to the main menu, press the [DELETE] (←) key three
times.
In the case of trouble :
If “INCOMLETE” is displayed on the monitor;
1Send the small length of the tape forward and repeat step 2
again.
2If “INCOMLETE” is still displayed after performing 1,
check the RP-111 board (the EQ circuit).
5-3. Contents of Maintenance Menu
5-3-5. Electrical Adjust
5-33
DSR-2000/2000P
3. EQ MANUAL ADJ
The EQ MANUAL ADJUSTMENT is described below:
[Reference][Reference]
[Reference][Reference]
[Reference]
If any errors are found in the played back picture and audio, or if
“INCOMPLETE” is displayed after completing the EQ AUTO
ADJ in the previous section, this adjustment enables to check the
status of the RF of each HEAD.
1. Select the EQ MANUAL ADJ.
2. Select the mode desired to check using the [AUDIO|IN] (↑)
and [IN] (↓) keys, and press the [ENTRY] (→) key.
3. Insert the cassette of which mode you desire to check into the
unit.
DVCAM : 15 u ADJ cassette
DV : 10 u ADJ cassette
4. Press the [PLAY] key.
5. Press the [RESET] key to display asterisk mark “*” to the
right side of the DATA: 0000.
6. Select the HEAD for checking with the [ENTRY] (→) key.
[Reference][Reference]
[Reference][Reference]
[Reference]
The HEAD selected is displayed in the ( ) on the top of the
monitor display.
In the case of DVCAM :
Pre E → Pre O → Main E → Main O → Sub E → Sub O →
Rec E → Rec O
In the case of DV :
Main E → Main O → Sub E → Sub O
7. Confirm that the DATA on the screen is 0000* through
000F*.
n
If press the [SET] key during confirmation, perform the EQ
AUTO adjustment.
5-3. Contents of Maintenance Menu
5-3-5. Electrical Adjust
5-34 DSR-2000/2000P
or
4. REC CURRENT
1. Selected the REC CURRENT.
2. Press the [AUDIO|IN] (↑), [IN] (↓) keys and the [DELETE]
(←), [ENTRY] (→) keys to adjust the data to “C0”.
3. Press the [SET] key to save the data.
5-3. Contents of Maintenance Menu
5-3-5. Electrical Adjust
5-35
DSR-2000/2000P
5. FE CHECK
1. Insert a blank tape.
(Press the keys in this order : [HOLD], [RESET] and [SET]
keys, to set the time counter to 00, which facilitates the
operation.)
2. Connect an oscilloscope as follows :
Check : TP404 & TP504/RP-111 board
GND : E401 & E501
TRIG : TP403
3. Select the FE CHECK.
4. Select REC using the [AUDIO|IN] (↑) key. Press the
[PLAY] and [REC] keys.
After recording for 30 to 60 seconds (time counter reading),
press the [STOP] key.
5. Playback the recorded segment and note down the waveform
level.
6. Select FE ONLY using the [AUDIO|IN] (↑) key. Press the
[VIDEO] key to select VIDEO INS. Locate the tape segment
that is recorded in step “4”, and press the [PLAY] and [EDIT]
keys to record (i.e., erase) the recorded segment for about 30
seconds.
7. Playback the segment recorded (erased) in step 6. and confirm
that the waveform level is 30% or less.
A
B
B < A x 0.3
5-3. Contents of Maintenance Menu
5-3-5. Electrical Adjust
5-36 DSR-2000/2000P
6. VOLUME ADJUST
1. Select the VOLUME ADJUST.
2. Press down all 8 AUDIO REC/PB volumes on the control
panel of the unit.
3. Set the PROCESS CONTROL SW on the sub-panel to
REMOTE and disconnect the cable from the VIDEO RE-
MOTE on the rear panel.
4. Press the [SET] key to start the adjustment.
5. After completing the adjustment, the display returns automati-
cally to the maintenance menu.
7. PROCESS CHECK
* This menu is for the factory use only.
8. REF CHECK
* This menu is for the factory use only.
5-3. Contents of Maintenance Menu
5-3-5. Electrical Adjust
5-37
DSR-2000/2000P
9. RP DATA INITIALIZE
1. Select the RP DATA INITIALIZE.
2. As “RP DATA INITIALIZE” will be displayed on the screen,
press the [SET] key when initializing the adjusted data.
n
After initialization, be sure to perform the following three
adjustments in Section “5-3-5. Electrical Adjust.”
1. PLL F0
2. EQ AUTO ADJ
4. REC CURRENT
5-3. Contents of Maintenance Menu
5-3-5. Electrical Adjust
5-38 DSR-2000/2000P
5-3-6. Service Support
Displays the error codes and error contents which occurred in the
past and provides the diagnosis.
Operating procedure
1. Enter the maintenance menu.
2. Move the cursor to “SERVICE SUPPORT” which is displayed
with a white background using the [AUDIO|IN] (↑), [IN] (↓)
keys.
3. Press the [ENTRY] (→) key.
“SERVICE SUPPORT” is selected and its lower layer sub-
menu appears.
4. Move the cursor displayed with a white background to a
desired item using the [AUDIO|IN] (↑), [IN] (↓) keys.
5. Press the [ENTRY] (→) key to select the desired item.
(Refer to the respective menu description for the check
procedure.)
6. After completing the check, press the [MENU] key to return
to the main menu.
7. To check other menus and submenus, repeat steps 4 to 6.
8. Press the [MENU] key to exit the maintenance menu.
5-3. Contents of Maintenance Menu
5-3-6. Service Support
5-39
DSR-2000/2000P
1. ERROR LOG
The errors which occurred in the past are displayed.
(The latest eight maximum errors are displayed.)
* The latest error is displayed on the top.
n
The servo system errors only are stored here. The ERROR-91, 92,
93, 94 and 95 are not stored.
2. MANUAL EJECT
For the operating procedure of how to take out a tape when the
EJECT is inoperable, refer to section 4-3.
3. DIAGNOSTICS CONTROL
11
11
1CLEAR ERROR LOG
Clears the error history from the ERROR LOG.
5-3. Contents of Maintenance Menu
5-3-6. Service Support
5-40 DSR-2000/2000P
5-3-7. Others
Enables to check the software version, keyboard and others.
Operating procedure
1. Enter the maintenance menu.
2. Move the cursor to “OTHERS” which is displayed with a
white background using the [AUDIO|IN] (↑), [IN] (↓) keys.
3. Press the [ENTRY] (→) key.
“OTHERS” is selected and its lower layer submenu appears.
4. Move the cursor displayed with a white background to a
desired item using the [AUDIO|IN] (↑), [IN] (↓) keys.
5. Press the [ENTRY] (→) key to select the desired item.
(Refer to the respective menu description for the check
procedure after execution.)
6. After completing the check, press the [MENU] key to return
to the main menu.
7. To check other menus and submenus, repeat steps 4 to 6.
8. Press the [MENU] key to exit the maintenance menu.
5-3. Contents of Maintenance Menu
5-3-7. Others
5-41
DSR-2000/2000P
(1) SOFTWARE VERSION
Displays the model information and software version numbers.
SY : Version of IC102 on the SY-278 board.
SP : Version of IC302 on the SY-278 board.
SV : Version of IC119 on the SV-212 board.
DR : Version of IC301 on the SV-212 board.
KY : Version of IC5 on the KY-452 board.
SW : Version of IC204 on the SW-11 board.
EXT : Version of IC5 on the KY-452A board.
(When DSBK-200 is installed.)
DVIO : Version of IC2 on the IF-763 board.
(When DSBK-190 is installed.)
DIF : Version of IC651 on the APR-45 board.
MENU : Version of the setup menu.
Press the [ENTRY] key to display the version below.
V2 : Version of the DU-84 and DU-89 boards on the
DPR-136 board.
NSG : Version of IC1013 on the VR-62 board.
AIF : Version of the DU-83 board on the DPR-136 board.
SIFP : Version of IC70 and IC71 on the DPR-136 board.
SIFR : Version of IC655, IC700, IC701, IC750 and IC751 on
the DPR-136 board.
ACTL : Version of IC62 on the APR-45 board.
*The message NONE appears for the EXT and DVIO when the
optional board is not installed in the DSR-2000/2000P.
*Contents which are shown in the time counter display can be
changed using the [AUDIO|IN] (↑), [IN] (↓) keys.
*Press the [DELETE] (←) key or the [MENU] key to return to
the maintenance menu.
(2) MEMORY DISPLAY
*Factory use only.
(3) DATA DISPLAY
*Factory use only.
5-3. Contents of Maintenance Menu
5-3-7. Others
6-1
DSR-2000/2000P
6-1. Periodic Inspection List
The following table shows the reference parts replacement time which is not the warranty time of parts.
Refer to the following table to establish the periodic inspection schedule which realizes the full performance and
function of a unit and to extend life of a tape. The actual parts replacement period depend on the operating
environment and conditions of a unit.
: Part replace : Check (Adjustment) O : Cleaning
Inspection items Hours meter Inspection time (Hours)
Item Part No. Name Menu No. 2000 4000 6000 8000
Drum assembly A-8323-775-A DEH-16A-R H02
Tape drive system blocks
Pinch solenoid A-8279-203- Pinch Solenoid assembly H02 ___
Brake solenoid 1-454-930-21 Solenoid plunger H02 ___
Reel motor (T) 8-835-636-51 DC motor (SRD14A/J-RP) H02
Reel motor (S) 8-835-637-51 DC motor (SRD15A/J-RP) H02
Loading motor A-8279-202- LD Motor assembly H02 _ _
Reel sift motor A-8279-204- RS motor assembly H02 _ _
T reel brake shoe A-8324-480- Brake (T) assembly H02
S reel brake shoe A-8324-481- Brake (S) assembly H02
Head cleaner solenoid 1-454-942-31 Plunger solenoid H02 ___
M stop solenoid 1-454-932-11 Plunger solenoid H02 ___
Tape path system blocks
Capstan motor 8-835-619-51 DC motor (SCD16A/J-RP) H02 O O O O
Pinch roller A-8279-044- Pinch limiter assembly H02
Guide roller T2 A-8279-024- Shuttle (R) assembly H02 O O O O
Guide roller T3 A-8279-026- T drawer arm assembly H02 O O O O
Guide roller T4 A-8279-400- TG-8 arm assembly H02 O O O O
Guide roller S2 A-8279-023- Shuttle (L) assembly H02 O O O O
Guide roller S3 A-8323-655- Tension regulator assembly H02 O O O O
Guide roller S4 A-8279-399- TG-1 arm assembly H02 O O O O
Tape running surface —— —— —— O O O O
(including tape cleaner)
Head cleaner X-3605-655-1 HC roller assembly
Others
Cassette memory terminal A-8323-659- MIC holder assembly H02 O O O O
H01: OPERATION HOURS H02 : DRUM RUNNING HOURS H03 : TAPE RUNNING HOURS
Section 6
Periodic Inspection and Maintenance
6-2 DSR-2000/2000P
6-2. Hours Meter
The hours meter data is displayed on the video monitor and time counter display area. Periodic inspection and part replace-
ment are recommended to be performed using the hours meter reading.
1. Hours Meter Display Contents
Menu number Item Contents
H01 OPERATION HOURS Accumulated hours of power on
H02 DRUM RUNNING HOURS Accumulated hours of drum rotation
H03 TAPE RUNNING HOURS Accumulated hours of tape running
H04 THREADING COUNTER Number of times of threading
H12 DRUM RUNNING HOURS Accumulated hours of drum rotation (reset enabled)
H13 TAPE RUNNING HOURS Accumulated hours of power on (reset enabled)
H14 THREADING COUNTER Number of times of threading (reset enabled)
2. How to Display Hours Meter Information
(1) Press the [MENU] key on the control panel.
The menu list and contents as shown above appear.
(2) Press the [MENU] key again to exit the menu display.
6-2. Hours Meter
FULL/FINE
PHONE LEVEL
CH-1
REC
PB
ASSEMBLE
HEADPHONES
PREVIEW REVIEW
AUTO
DMC EDIT DELETE
MEMORY
VIDEO INSERT
CH-1 CH-2 CH-3 CH-4 TC
CH-2 CH-3 CH-4
CH-4CH-3CH-2CH-1
L
R
TRIM
PULL FOR VARIABLE
IN OUT
IN OUT
AUDIO
REC
STANDBY
EJECT REW PLAY F FWD STOP
SEARCH
SEARCH
VARIABLE
PREROLL EDIT
PLAYER RECORDER
ENTRY SHIFT
LIST MARK PREREAD PB/EE PB MENU SET HOLD COUNTER SEL RESET
CHANNEL
CONDITION
-+
MONITOR SELECT
MENU SET
METER
EDIT
6-3
DSR-2000/2000P
3. How to Reset Hours Meter
The menus H12, H13 and H14 can be reset by the following procedure.
(1) Set the switch S101-1 on the SV-212 board to ON (upper).
(2) Press the [MENU] key on the control panel. The menu list
appears.
(3) Turn the JOG dial to move the asterisk (*) mark and select
either H12 or H13 or H14. (Display example on right side
shows H12 selected.)
(4) While pressing the [SEARCH] key, turn the JOG dial to
set “0 HOURS”.
(5) Press the [SET] key on the control panel to save the reset
data.
(6) Set the switch S101-1 on the SV-212 board to OFF (lower).
6-2. Hours Meter
HOUR ME T E R
H
0
1 : OP E HOURS
H
0
2 : D R UM H OU R S
H
0
3 :
T
A P E H OU R S
H
0
4 :
T
HRED CO U N
T
*H
1
2 : DRUM H OURS R
H
1
3 :
T
A
P
E HOURS R
H
1
4 :
T
HRE D C OU N
T
R
00
00
1 : P
-
R O
L L
T
I ME
00
00
2 : C H A R A H
-
POS
00
00
3 : C H A R A V
-
POS
00
00
4 : S Y NCH R ON I ZE
-
74
8
-
1
3
0
-
26
1
-
386
-
13
0
-
261
-
0
-
5 S
-
00
00
-
01
01
-
ON
I
T
E
M
-
H
1 2
DRUM R
U
N N I N G HOURS
( RE
S
E
T T
A
B
L
E )
130
HOURS
I
T
E
M
-
H
1 2
DRUM R
U
N N I N G HOURS
( RE
S
E
T T
A
B
L
E )
0
HOURS
SETUP MENU
NO
W
SAV I NG . . .
6-4 DSR-2000/2000P
Tape cleaner
(Sharp edge)
: Cleaning area
Serial No. 100001 - 100910, 101391 - : UC
400001 - 401550, 401851 - : CE
: Cleaning area
Serial No. 100911 - 101390: UC
401551 - 401850: CE
Cleaning cloth
Drum
Video head
6-3. Maintenance upon Completion of
Repair
Perform the following maintenance work regardless of the
operating hours of the unit, after repairing it.
1. Video head cleaning
(Refer to section 6-3-1 for cleaning procedure.)
2. Tape running path cleaning
(Refer to section 6-3-2 for cleaning procedure.)
n
After a unit is cleaned, insert a cassette after cleaning fluid
is dried completely.
6-3-1. Video Head Cleaning Procedure
Bring a cleaning cloth moistened with cleaning fluid in
contact with the head tip gently, and rotate the drum slowly
with hand for cleaning.
m
.Never move the cleaning cloth in vertical direction with
respect to the drum rotation (up and down with respect to
the drum) during cleaning.
.After cleaning, wipe off moisture using a dry cleaning
cloth.
.Turn off the main power before cleaning a unit.
6-3. Maintenance upon Completion of Repair
6-3-2. Tape Running Path Cleaning
Clean the tape guide, drum, capstan, pinch roller, tape
cleaner and other parts which contact with video tape, with
cleaning cloth moistened with cleaning fluid.
m
.Be careful of the tape cleaner during cleaning because it
has sharp edge.
.After cleaning, wipe off moisture using a dry cleaning
cloth.
.The tape cleaner is not used for Serial No.
100911 - 101390 : UC
401551 - 401850 : CE
The set of above serial number, provided ARM
ASSY, TG1 (A-8279-399-C) for repair parts to
stabilize the tape path.
6-5
DSR-2000/2000P
Cassette guide area
(Cleaning)
Entire surface of stage
(Cleaning)
Cassette compartment
Rear block of the cassette
guide assembly
Front panel block
Shaft
Gear (red)
6-3-3. Cassette Compartment Entrance
Cleaning
Clean the area around the cassette guide of the front panel
and entire surface of the stage of the cassette compartment
as shown using cleaning cloth moistened with cleaning
fluid.
n
Remove the cassette compartment when cleaning a unit to
prevent foreign materials from dropping into a unit.
6-3. Maintenance upon Completion of Repair
6-3-4. Cassette Compartment Shaft Cleaning
Turn the gear (red) in the arrow direction until you can see
the shaft. Clean the shaft with a cleaning cloth moistened
with a cleaning fluid.
6-3-5. Cassette Guide Assembly Cleaning
Clean the rear block of the cassette guide assembly with a
cleaning cloth moistened with a cleaning fluid.
7-1
DSR-2000/2000P
Section 7
Replacement of Mechanical Parts
7-1. General Information on Parts Replacement and Adjustment
7-1-1. Preparation Before Starting Parts Replacement
.Remove the ornamental parts as needed.
.When replacing parts or performing mechanical adjustment, remove the cassette compartment from the
DSR-2000/2000P not so far as specified. (Refer to section 3-4.)
.When the connector of the cassette compartment is removed, the protection circuit starts functioning.
Refer to section “4-3-3. Operating the VTR without a Cassette Tape.” to operate the DSR-2000/2000P
without the cassette compartment.
7-1-2. Drum Assembly
.The drum assembly is a periodic replacement part. The drum should be replaced in accordance with the
periodic replacement list.
.The drum assembly must be replaced in the following cases :
(1) When the video heads are worn out so that the proper tape-to-head contact is lost and recording and
playback cannot be performed correctly;
(2) When the rabbet guide of the lower drum is worn out so that the correct RF envelope cannot be
obtained even after adjusting the tape path to optimize the tracking.
(3) When the rabbet guide or tape running surface of the lower drum is damaged;
(4) If the drum rotation is abnormal and the VTR does not work properly due to noise or jitter.
7-1-3. Grease
Be sure to use only the authorized grease.
If grease other than the authorized one is used, major malfunctions may result due to differences in grease
viscosity and its ingredients.
If grease containing dirt is used, the shafts and bearings may be damaged and major malfunctions may
result.
Use the following grease for the DSR-2000/2000P :
Grease (SG941 (20 g)) : 7-662-001-39
.Do not apply grease to any parts other than the specified parts.
.Apply just enough grease to cover a coating on the surface.
Wipe off any grease that oozes out into the surrounding parts with gauze or a soft cloth.
7-2 DSR-2000/2000P
Washer mounting ficture
Stop washer
Stop washer
7-1-4. Tightening Torque and Handling of Washers
1. Screwdrivers and Tightening Torque of Screws
Many M1.4 and M2 screws are used in the DSR-2000/2000P.
Be sure to use the authorized tools to loosen and tighten them.
In addition, use a torque screwdriver to tighten the screws with the specified tightening torque.
Torque screwdriver bit (for M 1.4) : J-6325-110-A
Torque screwdriver bit (for M 2) : J-6325-380-A
Hexagon bit (for torque screwdriver) : J-6326-120-A
Torque screwdriver (for 3 kgf.cm) : J-6325-400-A
Tightening torque
For M1.4 screw : 0.1 N.m (1.0 kgf.cm)
For M2 screw : 0.2 N.m (2.0 kgf.cm)
[Reference][Reference]
[Reference][Reference]
[Reference]
The DSR-2000/2000P uses many small screws that easily fall inside the machine when removing and re-
assembling parts. To avoid this risk, magnetize the screwdriver bit slightly enough to prevent small screws from
falling into the machine. However, when installing the drum assembly, never use a magnetized screwdriver.
2. Stop Washer and E ring
Do not use old stop washers and E rings that have been removed.
Always use new stop washers and E ring to attach the parts.
Stop washer (1.5) : 3-669-465-01
Stop washer (2.3) : 3-669-596-01
E ring (2.3) : 7-624-105-04
Cotter polyethylene washer : 3-321-813-01
Polyslider washer (Ø2.0) : 3-701-437-01
How to Remove the Stop Washers and E ring
(a) Use the following fixtures to remove stop washers and E ring.
Washer extracting fixture (A) : J-6082-234-A
n
.Be careful not to drop the stop washers and E ring inside the DSR-2000/2000P.
.Be careful not to let tools touch other parts, especially the drum.
How to Attach the Stop Washers
Use the following tools to attach stop washers :
Washer mounting fixture Ø1.5 : J-6082-231-A
Washer mounting fixture Ø1.2 : J-6082-232-A
Washer mounting fixture Ø0.8 : J-6082-233-A
(a) Insert a stop washer to the tip of the washer
mounting fixture.
(b) Set the thin tip of the mounting fixture
perpendicularly to the top of the shaft to
which the stop washer is to be installed.
(c) Press the thick portion of the fixture down-
ward to install the stop washer onto the shaft.
7-1. General Information on Parts Replacement and Adjustment
7-3
DSR-2000/2000P
7-2. Drum Replacement
Outline
Replacement
Removing the MD cover
Disconnecting the connectors
Removing the head cleaner assembly
Replacing the drum assembly
Reattaching the head cleaner assembly
Reconnecting the connectors
Reattaching the MD cover
Cleaning the heads and tape running surface
Adjustment after replacement
Tape path adjustment
RF switching position adjustment
EQ adjustment
Note
Take care not to damage the tape guides around the drum assembly, tape running
surface on the drum, video heads of the drum assembly and so on when replacing
the drum assembly.
Basic knowledge
Besides the periodic replacement, replace the drum assembly in the following cases.
.When no proper RF waveform can be obtained even if tracking adjustment is
performed.
.When the damaged tape running surface on the drum cannot be recovered.
Preparations
1. Set the unit into the unthreading end status.
2. Power off the unit.
3. Remove the top plate. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
4. Remove the bottom plate. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
5. Remove the right side plate. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
6. Remove the cassette compartment assembly. (Refer to Section 3-4.)
Tool
.Cleaning cloth : 3-184-527-01
.Cleaning fluid : 9-919-573-01
.Torque screwdriver bit (for M1.4) : J-6325-110-A
.Torque screwdriver (for 3 kgf.cm) : J-6325-400-A
7-2. Drum Replacement
7-4 DSR-2000/2000P
CN1
CN2
CN3
CN4
CN10
Flexible card wire
RP-111 board
MS-64 board
Square hole
Claw
MD cover
Claw
Claw
Claw
Replacement
1. Removing the MD cover
(1) Put the unit left side facing down.
(2) Push the two claws on the upper side of the
MD cover in the direction of the arrow as
shown in the figure to remove the lock.
(3) While removing the two claws on the lower
side of the MD cover from the square holes
on the chassis, remove the MD cover from
the square hole on the right side chassis.
2. Disconnecting the connectors
Disconnect the five flexible card wires from the
connector (CN10) on the MS-64 board and four
connectors (CN1, CN2, CN3 and CN4) on the
RP-111 board located on the rear side of the
chassis.
n
Be careful not to suffer injury at hand by chassis
during the disconnection.
7-2. Drum Replacement
7-5
DSR-2000/2000P
P1.4 x 3.5 c
P1.4 x 3.5 a
Positioning hole
Positioning hole
Cleaning
Drum assembly
Positioning pin
Hole
P1.4 x 3.5 b
Positioning pin
Cleaning
Head cleaner assembly
P1.4 x 3.5
P1.4 x 3.5
CN12
7-2. Drum Replacement
3. Removing the head cleaner assembly
(1) Disconnect the harness connector from the
connector (CN12) on the MS-64 board with
tweezers.
(2) Remove the two screws, and remove the head
cleaner assembly in the direction of the
arrow.
4. Replacing the drum assembly
(1) Remove the three screws, and remove the
drum assembly from the MD chassis.
n
Take care not to contact the drum assembly
to the peripheral tape guides.
(2) Clean the installation surfaces of a new drum
assembly and MD chassis with a cleaning
cloth moistened with cleaning fluid.
(3) Put the five flexible card wires into the hole
on the MD chassis, and align the two posi-
tioning pins on the MD chassis with the holes
of the drum assembly.
(4) While moving the drum assembly in the
direction of the arrow (counterclockwise
direction), tighten the three screws in the
order of a, b, c.
Tightening torque : 0.1 N.m {1 kgf.cm}
7-6 DSR-2000/2000P
CN12
P1.4 x 3.5
Head cleaner assembly
Iron core
Positioning hole
Positioning hole
Positioning pin
P1.4 x 3.5
HC roller assembly
Positioning pin
CN1
CN2
CN3
CN4
CN10
Flexible card wire
RP-111 board
MS-64 board
5. Reattaching the head cleaner
assembly
(1) Align the positioning hole of the head cleaner
assembly with the positioning pin on the MD
chassis, and reattach it with the two screws.
Tightening Torque : 0.1 N.m {1 kgf.cm}
(2) Reconnect the harness to the connector
(CN12) on the MS-64 board.
n
.Use care not to contact the head cleaner
assembly with the tape running surface on the
drum.
.Do avoid touching the HC roller assembly with
bave hands.
6. Reconnecting the connectors
Reconnect the flexible card wires to the connector
(CN10) on the MS-64 board, and four flexible
card wires to the connectors (CN1, CN2, CN3
and CN4) on the RP-111 board.
m
.Be careful not to insert the flexible card wire
obliquely.
.Do insert the flexible card wire straight and
securely as far as it will go.
.Take care not to fold the flexible card wire.
This shortens the life of the flexible card wire.
7-2. Drum Replacement
7-7
DSR-2000/2000P
Square hole
Claw
MD cover
Claw
Claw
Claw
7. Reattaching the MD cover
(1) Insert the MD cover into the unit through the
big square hole of the right side panel of the
chassis.
(2) Fit the two claws in the lower side of the MD
cover in the square holes and let the two
upper-side claws catch the side panel to fix
the MD cover in the unit.
8. Cleaning the heads and tape running
surface
Clean the tape running surfaces of the drum and
video heads with cleaning cloth moistened with
cleaning fluid.
Adjustment after replacement
9. Tape path adjustment
(Refer to Section 8-2.)
10. RF switching position adjustment
(Refer to Section 8-3.)
11. EQ adjustment
(Refer to Section 5-3-5.)
7-2. Drum Replacement
7-8 DSR-2000/2000P
7-3. S/T Brake Assembly Replacement
Outline
Replacement
Removing the MD cover.
Moving the S/T reel tables
Removing the L push plate (only when replacing the T-side brake assembly)
Removing the MIC assembly (only when replacing the T-side brake assembly)
Removing the reel cover
Replacing the brake assembly
Checking and adjusting the brake torque
Reattaching the reel cover
Reattaching the MIC assembly (only when replacing the T-side brake assembly)
Reattaching the L push plate (only when replacing the T-side brake assembly)
Reattaching the MD cover
Note
.Prepare a new cotter polyethylene washer when replacing the brake assembly.
Cotter polyethylene washer (1.5) : 3-321-813-01
.Be careful not to lose the polyslider washer between the base plate and the MIC
assembly.
.When replacing the T-side brake assembly, prepare a new stop washer for mount-
ing the MIC assembly.
Stop washer (1.5) : 3-669-465-01 x 1 (for mounting the MIC assembly)
Preparation
1. Set the unit to the unthreading end status.
2. Power off the unit.
3. Remove the top panel. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
4. Remove the bottom panel. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
5. Remove the right side panel. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
6. Remove the cassette compartment. (Refer to Section 3-4.)
Tools
.Brake torque gauge (CCW) : J-6443-710-A
.Brake torque gauge (CW) : J-6443-720-A
.Torque screwdriver’s bit (for M1.4) : J-6325-110-A
.Torque screwdriver’s bit (for M2) : J-6325-380-A
.Torque screwdriver (for 3 kgf.cm) : J-6325-400-A
.Washer extracting fixture (A) : J-6082-234-A
.Washer mounting fixture Ø1.5 : J-6082-231-A
.Cleaning cloth : 3-184-527-01
.Cleaning fluid : 9-919-573-01
.Tweezers
7-3. S/T Brake Assembly Replacement
7-9
DSR-2000/2000P
Claw
Claw Claw Claw
Reel cover S
Reel cover T
P1.4 x 3
P1.4 x 3
L push plate
P1.4 x 3.5
Replacement
1. Removing the MD cover
Remove the MD cover. (Refer to Section 7-2.)
2. Moving the S/T reel tables
Turn the reel shift motor gear by a finger to bring
the S/T reel tables to the standard cassette
position.
(Refer to Section 7-19.)
3. Removing the L push plate (only when
replacing the T-side brake assembly)
Remove the two screws to remove the L push
plate.
4. Removing the MIC assembly (only
when replacing the T-side brake
assembly)
Remove the MIC assembly.
(Refer to Section 7-19.)
5. Removing the reel cover
Remove the screw, and then release the two claws
to remove the reel cover S or T.
7-3. S/T Brake Assembly Replacement
7-10 DSR-2000/2000P
Cotter polyethylene
washer
Cotter polyethylene washer
Brake shoe
Brake assembly (T)
Brake shoe
Brake assembly (S)
Brake spring (T)
Brake spring
hook on portion b
Brake spring (S)
Polyslider
washer
Polyslider washer
Reel table (T)
Reel table (S)
Brake spring
hook on portion b
Cleaning
Cleaning
a
b
c
abc
6. Replacing the brake assembly
(1) Remove the cotter polyethylene washer and
remove the brake assembly and the brake
springs S/T.
n
Use care to prevent the brake spring from
flying off when removing.
The polyslider washer located under the
brake spring may come off together with the
brake spring, therefore be careful not to lose
it.
If it comes off, return it in place.
(2) Wipe the contact surface on the reel table
against the brake assembly with a cleaning
cloth moistened with cleaning fluid.
(3) Join the brake spring to a new brake assem-
bly as shown in the figure and fit it on the
reel motor shaft.
n
Avoid touching the brake shoe when replac-
ing.
(4) Attach a new cotter polyethylene washer
7-3. S/T Brake Assembly Replacement
7.
Checking and adjusting the brake torque
(1) S reel brake torque
Check the S reel brake torque meets the
specification below by turning the knob of
the brake torque gauge (CW) in the A
direction a turn in 1 to 3 seconds.
Tightening Torque : 7.5 ±0.5 m N.m
{75 ±5 gf.cm}
(2) T reel brake torque
Check the T reel brake torque meets the
specification below by turning the knob of
the brake torque gauge (CCW) in the B
direction a turn in 1 to 3 seconds.
Tightening Torque : 7.5 ±0.5 m N.m
{75 ±5 gf.cm}
(3) Failing satisfaction of the specification,
readjust by changing the positon that the
brake spring hooks on.
.If the torque is high, hook the brake spring
on the c portion.
.If the torque is low, hook the brake spring
on the a portion.
Reel table (S)
Brake torque gauge (CW)
A
B
Reel table (T)
Brake torque gauge (CCW)
7-11
DSR-2000/2000P
P1.4 x 3.5
L push plate
Protrusion
P1.4 x 3
P1.4 x 3
Claw
Claw
Pin
Pin
Reference
hole
Reference
hole Claw
Claw
Reel cover S
Reel cover T
8. Reattaching the reel cover
(1) Align the reference hole in the reel cover
with the pin in the reel motor, and hook the
two claws.
(2) Fix the reel cover S or T with the screw.
After fixing, apply screw locking compound.
Tightening Torque : 0.1 N.m {1 kgf.cm}
9. Reattaching the MIC assembly (only
when replacing the T-side brake
assembly)
Reattach the MIC assembly.
(Refer to Section 7-19.)
10. Reattaching the L push plate (only
when replacing the T-side brake
assembly)
Reattach the L-push plate with the two screws
with the two holes in the L push plate aligned
with the two protrusions on the RLR assembly.
Tightening Torque : 0.1 N.m {1 kgf.cm}
11. Reattaching the MD cover
Reattach the MD cover. (Refer to Section 7-2.)
7-3. S/T Brake Assembly Replacement
7-12 DSR-2000/2000P
7-4. Brake Solenoid Replacement
Outline
Replacement
Removing the MD cover
Disconnecting the connector
Removing the brake assembly
Replacing the brake solenoid
Reattaching the brake assembly
Reconnecting the connector
Reattaching the MD cover
Checking the performance
Note
Prepare a new stop washer when replacing the brake solenoid.
Stop washer (1.5) : 3-669-465-01 x 1
Preparation
1. Set the unit to the unthreading end status.
2. Power off the unit.
3. Remove the top panel. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
4. Remove the bottom panel. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
5. Remove the right side panel. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
6. Remove the cassette compartment. (Refer to Section 3-4.)
Tools
.Torque screwdriver’s bit (for M1.4) : J-6325-110-A
.Torque screwdriver’s bit (for M2) : J-6325-380-A
.Torque screwdriver (for 3 kgf.cm) : J-6325-400-A
.Washer extracting fixture (A) : J-6082-234-A
.Washer mounting fixture Ø1.5 : J-6082-231-A
.Tweezers
7-4. Brake Solenoid Replacement
7-13
DSR-2000/2000P
Chassis
Harness
P1.4 x 3.5
P1.4 x 3.5
P1.4 x 3.5
Brake assembly
CN9
Hole
Replacement
1. Removing the MD cover
Remove the MD cover. (Refer to Section 7-2.)
2. Disconnecting the connector
Disconnect the harness from the connector (CN9)
on the MS-64 board located on the back side of
the MD chassis with tweezers.
n
Be careful not to suffer injury at hand by chassis
during the disconnection.
3. Removing the brake assembly
(1) Remove the three screws securing the brake
assembly.
(2) Pull out the harness of the solenoid from the
square hole in the left side of the chassis with
the brake assembly lifted up.
7-4. Brake Solenoid Replacement
7-14 DSR-2000/2000P
Brake slider assembly
Slide shaft
Brake slider assembly
Spring pin
Specification :
0.5±0.1mm
Brake slider assembly
Widen a little in the downward direction
Solenoid iron core
Spring pin
Solenoid
Compression spring
Iron core
Brake slider assembly
Brake base assembly
W2.6
P2.6 x 2.8
4. Replacing the brake solenoid
Serial No. 100911-: UC
401551-: CE
(1) Remove the two screws and remove the
solenoid from the brake base assembly.
n
During this operation, the two washers come
off together with the two screws, and further
the compressed coil spring comes off from
the iron core of the solenoid. Be careful not
to lose them.
(2) Widen slightly the clearance shown in the
brake slider assembly figure by a finger to
remove the iron core of the solenoid.
n
Applying an excessive force may cause
deformation of the brake slider assembly.
(3) Reattach an iron core pin of a new solenoid to
the brake slider assembly following the same
step (2).
(4) After fitting the compressed coil spring
removed in step (1) on the iron core, insert
the iron core in a new solenoid.
(5) Fix temporally the solenoid positioning as
shown in the figure to the brake base assem-
bly with the two screws and two washers.
(6) Ensure that the compressed coil spring is
placed between the upper and lower plates of
the brake slider assembly (within the double
headed arrow) as shown in the figure.
(7) Adjust the solenoid position to satisfy the
specification of the clearance between the
slide shaft and the slotted hole in the brake
base assembly under the condition that the
iron core is fully pulled in, and tighten
securely the two screws.
Tightening Torque : 0.5 N.m {5 kgf.cm}
(8) Reattach the brake slider assembly to the
brake base assembly with a new stop washer.
7-4. Brake Solenoid Replacement
7-15
DSR-2000/2000P
Brake base pin
Brake slider assembly
Specification : 0.2 to 0.4 mm
Brake slider assembly
Spring pin
Brake slider assembly
Stop washer
Widen a little in the upward direction
Solenoid iron core
Spring pin
Solenoid
Compression spring
Iron core
Brake slider assembly
Brake base assembly
W2.6
P2.6 x 2.8
4. Replacing the brake solenoid
Serial No. 100001-100910: UC
400001-401550: CE
(1) Remove the two screws and remove the
solenoid from the brake base assembly.
n
During this operation, the two washers come
off together with the two screws, and further
the compressed coil spring comes off from
the iron core of the solenoid. Be careful not
to lose them.
(2) Remove the stop washer shown in the brake
slider assembly figure.
(3) Widen slightly the clearance shown in the
brake slider assembly figure by a finger to
remove the iron core of the solenoid.
n
Applying an excessive force may cause
deformation of the brake slider assembly.
(4) Reattach an iron core pin of a new solenoid to
the brake slider assembly following the same
step (3).
(5) After fitting the compressed coil spring
removed in step (1) on the iron core, insert
the iron core in a new solenoid.
(6) Fix temporally the solenoid positioning as
shown in the figure to the brake base assem-
bly with the two screws and two washers.
(7) Ensure that the compressed coil spring is
placed between the upper and lower plates of
the brake slider assembly (within the double
headed arrow) as shown in the figure.
(8) Adjust the solenoid position to satisfy the
specification of the clearance between the pin
of the solenoid iron core and the slotted hole
in the brake base assembly under the condi-
tion that the iron core is fully pulled in, and
tighten securely the two screws.
Tightening Torque : 0.5 N.m {5 kgf.cm}
(9) Reattach the brake slider assembly to the
brake base assembly with a new stop washer.
7-4. Brake Solenoid Replacement
7-16 DSR-2000/2000P
P1.4 x 3.5
Chassis
CN9
Reference pins
Harness
P1.4 x 3.5
P1.4 x 3.5
Pin of break release plate
Brake assembly
Brake base assembly
Slotted hole
Slotted hole
Hole
Hole
7-4. Brake Solenoid Replacement
5. Reattaching the brake assembly
(1) Insert the harness of the brake assembly in a
square hole on the left side of the chassis to
bring it to the back side of the unit.
(2) Fit the slotted hole shown in the brake
assembly figure on the pin on the brake
release plate and further more fit the hole and
slotted hole in the brake base assembly on the
two reference pins of the MD chassis respec-
tively, and fix it with the three screws.
Tightening Torque : 0.1 N.m {1 kgf.cm}
6. Reconnecting the connector
(1) Draw out the harness of the brake solenoid to
bring it to the back side of the unit with
tweezers.
(2) Reconnect the harness to the connector
(CN9) on the MS-64 board.
7. Reattaching the MD cover
Reattach the MD cover. (Refer to Section 7-2.)
8. Checking the performance
(1) Power on the unit and press the [DEL],
[TRIM+], [MENU] keys simultaneously to
activate the maintenance menu.
(2) Following the pop-up menu in the mainte-
nance menu, enter SERVO CHECK,
PLUNGER CHECK, REEL BRAKE in order
and select REEL BRAKE.
(3) Check that the brake solenoid ON/OFF
switches smoothly by presing the
[AUDIO|IN] key and the [IN] key.
7-17
DSR-2000/2000P
7-5. Pinch Roller Replacement
Outline
Replacement
Removing the pinch limiter assembly.
Reattaching the pinch limiter assembly.
Adjustment after replacement
Checking the tape path adjustment
Note
.The pinch roller is a part of the pinch limiter assembly, therefore replace the pinch
limiter assembly itself when the pinch roller needs to be replaced.
.Prepare a new stop washer when replacing the pinch roller assembly.
Stop washer (1.5) : 3-669-465-01
Preparation
1. Set the unit to the unthreading end status.
2. Power off the unit.
3. Remove the top panel. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
4. Remove the cassette compartment. (Refer to Section 3-4.)
Tools
.Washer extracting fixture (A) : J-6082-234-A
.Washer mounting fixture Ø1.5 : J-6082-231-A
.Cleaning cloth : 3-184-527-01
.Cleaning fluid : 9-919-573-01
. Grease (SG-941) : 7-662-001-39
.Tweezers
7-5. Pinch Roller Replacement
7-18 DSR-2000/2000P
Grease
Shaft
Pinch solenoid
assembly
Compression coil
spring
Pinch limitter
assembly
Stop washer
Cleaning
7-5. Pinch Roller Replacement
Replacement
1. Removing the pinch limiter assembly
Remove the stop washer and remove the pinch
limiter assembly.
n
During this operation, if the compressed coil
spring comes off together with the assembly,
return the spring in place.
2. Reattaching the pinch limiter
assembly
(1) Wipe a pinch roller in a new pinch limiter
assembly with a cleaning cloth moistened
with cleaning fluid.
(2) Wipe the shaft on the MD chassis with a
cleaning cloth moistened with cleaning fluid.
(3) Apply grease about the quarter size of a tip of
a cotton swab, to two portions of the shaft
marked in the figure.
(4) Fit the hole in the pinch limiter assembly on
the shaft on the MD chassis, while fitting the
slotted hole in the pinch limiter assembly on
the shaft on the pinch solenoid assembly, and
fix it with a new stop washer (1.5).
Adjustment after replacement
3. Checking the tape path adjustment
(Refer to Section 8-4.)
7-19
DSR-2000/2000P
7-6. Elevator Cam Replacement
Outline
Replacement
Removing the pinch limiter assembly
Replacing the elevator cam
Reattaching the pinch limiter assembly
Adjustment after replacement
Chacking the tape path adjustment
Note
Prepare two kinds of new stop washers when replacing the elevator cam.
Stop washer (1.5) : 3-669-465-01 x 1 (for mounting the pinch limiter assembly)
Stop washer (2.3) : 3-669-596-01 x 1 (for mounting the elevator cam)
Preparation
1. Set the unit to the unthreading end status.
2. Power off the unit.
3. Remove the top panel. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
4. Remove the cassette compartment. (Refer to Section 3-4.)
Tools
.Washer extracting fixture (A) : J-6082-234-A
.Washer mounting fixture Ø1.5 : J-6082-231-A
.Cleaning cloth : 3-184-527-01
.Cleaning fluid : 9-919-573-01
.Grease (SGL-941) : 7-662-001-39
.Tweezers
7-6. Elevator Cam Replacement
7-20 DSR-2000/2000P
7-6. Elevator Cam Replacement
Replacement
1. Removing the pinch limiter assembly
Remove the pinch limiter assembly.
(Refer to Section 7-5.)
2. Replacing the elevator cam
(1) Lift off the compressed coil spring from the
shaft on the MD chassis.
(2) Remove the stop washer and remove the
elevator cam.
(3) Wipe the shaft on the MD chassis with a
cleaning cloth moistened with cleaning fluid.
(4) Fit the elevator cam on the shaft on the
chassis with the intermittent portion of the
elevator cam joined to the intermittent
portion of the No.7 gear as shown in the
figure.
(5) Apply grease about the quarter size of a tip of
a cotton swab, to two portions of the shaft
shown in the figure.
(6) Reattach the elevator cam with a new stop
washer (2.3).
(7) Fit the compressed coil spring on the shaft.
3. Reattaching the pinch limiter
assembly
Reattach the pinch limiter assembly.
(Refer to Section 7-5.)
Adjustment after replacement
4. Checking the tape path adjustment.
(Refer to Section 8-4.)
Grease
No.7 gear
No.7 gear
Intermittent portion
Intermittent
portion
Shaft
Stop washer 2.3
Elevator cam
Elevator cam
Compression coil spring
7-21
DSR-2000/2000P
7-7. Pinch Solenoid Assembly Replacement
Outline
Replacement
Removing the pinch limiter assembly.
Disconnecting the connector.
Replacing the pinch solenoid assembly.
Reconnecting the connector.
Reattaching the pinch limiter assembly.
Adjustment after replacement
Checking the tape path adjustment
Note
Without removal/reattachment of the pinch limiter assembly, the pinch solenoid
assembly cannot be replaced.
Therefore prepare a new stop washer for replacing the pinch limiter assembly.
Stop washer (1.5) : 3-669-465-01 x 1
Preparation
1. Set the unit to the unthreading end status.
2. Power off the unit.
3. Remove the top panel. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
4. Remove the cassette compartment. (Refer to Section 3-4.)
Tools
.Torque screwdriver’s bit (for M1.4) : J-6325-110-A
.Torque screwdriver (for 3 kgf.cm) : J-6325-400-A
.Washer extracting fixture (A) : J-6082-234-A
.Washer mounting fixture Ø1.5 : J-6082-231-A
.Tweezers
7-7. Pinch Solenoid Assembly Replacement
7-22 DSR-2000/2000P
Replacement
1. Removing the pinch limiter assembly
Remove the pinch limiter assembly.
(Refer to Section 7-5.)
2. Disconnecting the connectors
Disconnect the harness from the connector (CN2)
on the MS-64 board with tweezers.
3. Replacing the pinch solenoid
assembly
(1) Remove the two screws with the pinch slider
assembly drawn into the arrow direction and
lift off the pinch solenoid assembly.
(2) Align two holes in a new pinch solenoid
assembly with the two positioning pins on the
MD chassis respectively.
(3) Reattach the pinch solenoid utilizing the two
screws with the pinch slider assembly drawn
in the arrow direction.
Tightening Torque : 0.1 N.m {1 kgf.cm}
4. Reconnecting the connector
Reconnect the harness to the connector (CN2) on
the MS-64 board with tweezers.
5. Reattaching the pinch limiter
assembly
Reattach the pinch limiter assembly.
(Refer to Section 7-5.)
Adjustment after replacement
6. Checking the tape path adjustment
(Refer to Section 8-4.)
7-7. Pinch Solenoid Assembly Replacement
P1.4 x 3.5
Pinch solenoid assembly
Pinch slider assembly
Positioning pins
CN2
MS-64 board
Harness
7-23
DSR-2000/2000P
7-8. Reel Motor (T) Assembly Replacement
Outline
Replacement
Removing the MD cover
Disconnecting the connector
Moving the S/T reel tables
Removing the L push plate
Removing the MIC assembly
Removing the RMP (T1) retainer assembly
Replacing the reel motor (T) assembly
Reattaching the RMP (T1) retainer assembly
Reattaching the MIC assembly
Reattaching the L push plate
Reconnecting the connector
Checking the performance
Reattaching the MD cover
Adjustment after replacement
T-REEL ONLY adjustment
TENSION adjustment
Tape path adjustment
Note
Without removal/reattachment of the MIC assembly, the reel motor (T) assembly
cannot be replaced. Prepare a new stop washer when reattaching the MIC assembly.
Stop washer (1.5) : 3-669-465-01 x 1
Use care not to lose the polyethylene washer between the base plate and the MIC
assembly.
Preparation
1. Set the unit to the unthreading end status.
2. Power off the unit.
3. Remove the top panel. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
4. Remove the bottom panel. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
5. Remove the right side panel. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
6. Remove the cassette compartment. (Refer to Section 3-4.)
7-8. Reel Motor (T) Assembly Replacement
7-24 DSR-2000/2000P
P1.4 x 3.5 (a)
P1.4 x 3.5 (b)
RMP retainer (T1) assembly
T drawer arm assembly
MS-64 board
T reel motor assembly
flexible card wire
Connector (CN6)
7-8. Reel Motor (T) Assembly Replacement
Tools
.Torque screwdriver’s bit (for M1.4) : J-6325-110-A
.Torque screwdriver’s bit (for M2) : J-6325-380-A
.Torque screwdriver (for 3 kgf.cm) : J-6325-400-A
.Washer extracting fixture (A) : J-6082-234-A
.Washer mounting fixture Ø1.5 : J-6082-231-A
.Cleaning cloth : 3-184-527-01
.Cleaning fluid : 9-919-573-01
Replacement
1. Removing the MD cover
Remove the MD cover. (Refer to Section 7-2.)
2. Disconnecting the connector
Disconnect the flexible card wire from the
connector (CN6) on the MS-64 board located on
the back side of the MD chassis.
3. Moving the S/T reel tables
Turn the reel shift motor gear by a finger and
bring the S/T reel tables to the standard cassette
position.
(Refer to Section 7-19.)
4. Removing the L push plate
Remove the L push plate. (Refer to Section 7-3.)
5. Removing the MIC assembly
Remove the MIC assembly.
(Refer to Section 7-19.)
6. Removing the RMP (T1) retainer
assembly
(1) Remove the screw (a) with the T-drawer arm
assembly drawn lightly in the arrow direc-
tion.
(2) Remove the screw (b) and remove the RMP
(T1) retainer assembly.
7-25
DSR-2000/2000P
Slot
K2 x 4
K2 x 4 Reel moter (T) assembly
Shaft
Slide shaft
Flexible card wire
RS plate assembly
Square hole
a
b
Cleaning
7. Replacing the reel motor (T) assembly
(1) Remove the two screws (a, b) securing the
slide shaft and remove the reel motor (T)
assembly.
(2) Extract the slide shaft from the reel motor (T)
assembly.
(3) Wipe the shaded portion in the figure with a
cleaning cloth moistened with cleaning fluid.
(4) Apply grease about the quarter size of a tip of
a cotton swab, to the center of the shaded
portion.
(5) Wipe the slide shaft with dry cloth such as
gauze, and then insert it in a hole of a new
reel motor T assembly.
n
Use extreme care not to scratch the shaft and
hole during extracting and inserting opera-
tion.
(6) Insert a shaft located on the back side of the
reel motor (T) assembly in the slot in the RS
plate assembly.
(7) Insert the flexible card wire in the square hole
in the MD chassis.
(8) Tighten the screw a and next b to reattach
the slide shaft.
Tightening Torque : 0.1 N.m {1 kgf.cm}
7-8. Reel Motor (T) Assembly Replacement
7-26 DSR-2000/2000P
P1.4 x 3.5 (a)
P1.4 x 3.5 (b)
RMP retainer (T1) assembly
Positioning hole
Positioning hole
T drawer arm assembly
Positioning pin
8. Reattaching the RMP (T1) retainer
assembly
(1) Fit the two positioning holes in the RMP (T1)
retainer assembly on the two positioning pins
on the MD chassis.
(2) Tighten the two screws to fix the RMP (T1)
retainer assembly while drawing lightly the T
drawer arm assembly in the arrow direction.
9. Reattaching the MIC assembly
Reattach the MIC assembly.
(Refer to Section 7-19.)
10. Reattaching the L push plate
Reattach the L push plate. (Refer to Section 7-3.)
11. Reconnecting the connector
Reconnect the flexible card wire to the connector
(CN6) on the MS-64 board located on the back
side of the MD chassis.
m
.Be careful not to insert the flexible card wire
obliquely.
.Do insert the flexible card wire straight and
securely as far as it will go.
.Take care not to fold the flexible card wire.
This shortens the life of the flexible card wire.
12. Checking the performance
Check the S/T reel tables move smoothly by
turning the reel shift motor gear by a finger.
13. Reattaching the MD cover
Reattach the MD cover. (Refer to Section 7-2.)
Adjustment after replacement
14. T-REEL ONLY adjustment
(Refer to Section 5-3-3.)
15. TENSION adjustment
(Refer to Section 5-3-3.)
16. Tape path adjustment
(Refer to Section 8-2.)
7-8. Reel Motor (T) Assembly Replacement
7-27
DSR-2000/2000P
7-9. Reel Motor (S) Assembly Replacement
Outline
Replacement
Removing the MD cover
Disconnecting the connector
Moving the S/T reel tables
Removing the RMP (S1) retainer assembly
Replacing the reel motor (S) assembly
Reattaching the RMP (S1) retainer assembly
Reconnecting the connector
Checking the performance
Reattaching the MD cover
Adjustment after replacement
S-RELL ONLY adjustment
TENSION adjustment
Tape path adjustment
Preparation
1. Set the unit to the unthreading end status.
2. Power off the unit.
3. Remove the top panel. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
4. Remove the bottom panel. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
5. Remove the right side panel. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
6. Remove the cassette compartment. (Refer to Section 3-4.)
Tools
.Torque screwdriver’s bit (for M1.4) : J-6325-110-A
.Torque screwdriver’s bit (for M2) : J-6325-380-A
.Torque screwdriver (for 3 kgf.cm) : J-6325-400-A
.Cleaning cloth : 3-184-527-01
.Cleaning fluid : 9-919-573-01
7-9. Reel Motor (S) Assembly Replacement
7-28 DSR-2000/2000P
MS-64 board
S reel motor assembly
flexible card wire
Connector (CN11)
7-9. Reel Motor (S) Assembly Replacement
Replacement
1. Removing the MD cover
Remove the MD cover. (Refer to Section 7-2.)
2. Disconnecting the connector
Disconnect the flexible card wire from the
connector (CN11) on the MS-64 board located on
the back side of the MD chassis.
3. Moving the S/T reel tables
Turn the reel shift motor gear by a finger and
bring the S/T reel tables to the standard cassette
position. (Refer to Section 7-19.)
4. Removing the RMP (S1) retainer
assembly
(1) Remove the screw (a) with the S tension
regulator arm assembly drawn lightly in the
arrow direction.
(2) Remove the screw (b), then remove the RMP
(S1) retainer assembly.
RMP retainer
(S1) assembly
P1.4 x 3.5 (b)
P1.4 x 3.5 (a)
S tension regulator arm
assembly
Screw (a)
7-29
DSR-2000/2000P
Reel motor (S)
assembly
Shaft
Flexible card wire
Square hole
Slot
RS plate assembly
MD chassis
Cleaning
Reel motor (S) assembly
Slide shaft
a K2 x 4 b K2 x 4
7-9. Reel Motor (S) Assembly Replacement
5. Replacing the reel motor (S) assembly
(1) Remove the two screws (a, b) securing the
slide shaft and remove the reel motor (S)
assembly.
(2) Extract the slide shaft from the reel motor (S)
assembly.
(3) Wipe the shaded portion in the figure with a
cleaning cloth moistened with cleaning fluid.
(4) Apply grease about the quarter size of a tip of
a cotton swab, to the center of the shaded
portion.
(5) Wipe the slide shaft with dry cloth such as
gauze, and then insert it in a hole of a new
reel motor S assembly.
n
Use extreme care not to scratch the shaft and
hole during extracting and inserting opera-
tion.
(6) Insert a shaft located on the back side of the
reel motor (S) assembly in the slot in the RS
plate assembly.
(7) Insert the flexible card wire in the square hole
in the MD chassis.
(8) Tighten the screw a and next b to reattach
the slide shaft.
Tightening Torque : 0.1 N.m {1 kgf.cm}
7-30 DSR-2000/2000P
6. Reattaching the RMP (S1) retainer
assembly
(1) Fit the two positioning holes in the RMP (S1)
retainer assembly on the two positioning pins
on the MD chassis.
(2) Tighten the two screws to fix the RMP (S1)
retainer assembly while drawing lightly the S
tension regulator arm assembly in the arrow
direction.
7. Reconnecting the connector
Reconnect the flexible card wire to the connector
(CN11) on the MS-64 board located on the back
side of the MD chassis.
m
.Be careful not to insert the flexible card wire
obliquely.
.Do insert the flexible card wire straight and
securely as far as it will go.
.Take care not to fold the flexible card wire.
This shortens the life of the flexible card wire.
8. Checking the performance
Check the S/T reel tables move smoothly by
turning the reel shift motor gear by a finger.
9. Reattaching the MD cover
Reattach the MD cover. (Refer to Section 7-2)
Adjustment after replacement
10. S-REEL ONLY alignment
(Refer to Section 5-3-3.)
11. TENSION alignment
(Refer to Section 5-3-3.)
12. Tape path adjustment
(Refer to Section 8-2.)
7-9. Reel Motor (S) Assembly Replacement
RMP retainer
(T1) assembly
P1.4 x 3.5
P1.4 x 3.5
S tension regulator arm
assembly
Screw (a)
(a)
(b)
Positioning pins
Positioning holes
7-31
DSR-2000/2000P
7-10. M Stop Solenoid Assembly Replacement
Outline
Replacement
Removing the MD cover
Removing the stopper driving plate (M) assembly
Replacing the M stop solenoid assembly
Reattaching the stopper driving plate (M) assembly
Reattaching the MD cover
Preparation
1. Set the unit to the unthreading end status.
2. Power off the unit.
3. Remove the bottom panel. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
4. Remove the right side panel. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
Tools
.Torque screwdriver’s bit (for M1.4) : J-6325-110-A
.Torque screwdriver’s bit (for M2) : J-6325-380-A
.Torque screwdriver (for 3 kgf.cm) : J-6325-400-A
.Screw locking compound : 7-432-114-11
7-10. M Stop Solenoid Assembly Replacement
7-32 DSR-2000/2000P
Stopper driving plate
Plunger solenoid
Compression spring
Iron core
P2 x 2
Stopper driving plate (M) assembly
P1.4 x 3.5 P1.4 x 3.5
Connector (CN8)
7-10. M Stop Solenoid Assembly Replacement
Replacement
1. Removing the MD cover.
Remove the MD cover. (Refer to Section 7-2.)
2. Removing the stopper driving plate
(M) assembly
(1) Disconnect the harness of the M stop sole-
noid assembly from the connector (CN8) on
the MS-64 board.
(2) Remove the two screws and remove the
stopper driving plate (M) assembly.
3. Replacing the M stop solenoid
assembly
(1) Remove the two screws to remove the
stopper driving plate (M) assembly.
(2) Extract the compressed coil spring from the
iron core of the plunger solenoid removed in
step (2) and fit the spring on a new solenoid
iron core.
7-33
DSR-2000/2000P
P2 x 2
Specification:
1.5±0.1 mm
Stopper
driving plate
Plunger solenoid
Pins
Hole for
screw
Hole for
screw
M stopper (S) assembly
M stopper (T) assembly
Shaft cShaft b
Connector (CN8)
P1.4 x 3.5 P1.4 x 3.5
Stopper driving plate (M) assembly
Slotted hole
MIC driving (M) assembly
slotted hole
Shaft c
Projection
MIC driving (M)
assembly
Shaft b
(3) Fit the two notches of the stopper driving
plate on both ends of the iron-core pin, then
temporary reattached the stopper driving
plate to the plunger solenoid by the two
screws.
(4) In a state of plunger solenoid current is on,
slide the stopper driving plate to satisfy the
speficication. And tighten securely the two
screws.
Tightening Torque : 0.2 N.m {2 kgf.cm}
(5) Ensure the stopper driving plate returns to the
original position after being pressed in the
arrow direction and released.
4. Reattaching the stopper driving plate
(M) assembly
(1) Move the shaft b on the M stopper (T)
assembly and the shaft c on the M stopper (S)
assembly toward the drum by a finger.
(2) Insert the projection located on the back side
of the stopper driving plate (M) assembly in
the slotted hole in the MIC drive (M) assem-
bly. Fit the two slotted holes in the stopper
driving plate (M) assembly shown in the
figure on the shafts on M stopper (T) and (S)
assemblies, and then fix it on the MD chassis
with the two screws.
Tightening Torque : 0.1 N.m {1 kgf.cm}
(3) Ensure that the M stopper (T) and (S) assem-
blies and MIC drive (M) assembly move
smoothly with the iron core of the solenoid
drawn in the pulled-in direction.
(4) Reconnect the harness of the M stop solenoid
to the connector (CN8) on the MS-64 board.
5. Reattaching the MD cover
Reattach the MD cover. (Refer to Section 7-2.)
7-10. M Stop Solenoid Assembly Replacement
7-34 DSR-2000/2000P
7-11. S Tension Regulator Assembly Replacement
7-11. S Tension Regulator Assembly Replacement
Outline
Replacement
Removing the TG1 arm assembly
Removing the loading motor assembly
Removing the SE-521 board
Replacing the S tension regulator assembly
Reattaching the SE-521 board
Reattaching the loading motor assembly
Reattaching the TG1 arm assembly
Cleaning the tape guide
Adjustment after replacement
TENSION adjustment
Tape path adjustment
Notes
Use extreme care not to scratch the drum when replacing the S tension regulator
assembly.
Never loosen the screw shown in the figure. If the screw is loosened, replace the S
tension regulator with a new one.
Preparation
1. Set the unit to the unthreading end status.
2. Power off the unit.
3. Remove the top panel. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
4. Remove the cassette compartment. (Refer to Section 3-4.)
Tools
.Torque driver’s bit (for M1.4) : J-6325-110-A
.Torque driver (for 3 kgf.cm) : J-6325-400-A
.Cleaning cloth : 3-184-527-01
.Cleaning fluid : 9-919-573-01
.Tweezers
7-35
DSR-2000/2000P
Connector
(CN3)
SE-521 board
Connector
(CN4)
Flexible card
wire
Flexible
card
wire
P1.4 x 3.5
Claw of warm holder
P1.4 x 3.5
P1.4 x 3.5
(a)
(b)
No.3 gear
Tension regulator
assembly
Spring Notch
Manual eject
cover
S tension regulator
assembly
Positioning pin Post of No.3 gear
7-11. S Tension Regulator Assembly Replacement
Replacement
1. Removing the TG1 arm assembly
Remove the TG1 arm assembly.
(Refer to Section 7-13.)
2. Removing the loading motor assembly
Remove the loading motor assembly.
(Refer to Section 7-17.)
3. Removing the SE-521 board
(1) Disconnect the flexible card wire from the
connector (CN3) on the SE-521 board.
(2) Disconnect the flexible card wire from the
connector (CN4) on the SE-521 board.
(3) Remove the screw and remove the SE-521
board.
n
Use care about the claw of the worm holder.
4. Replacing the S tension regulator
assembly
(1) Remove the S tension regulator assembly by
removing the two screws.
(2) Turn the manual eject cover clockwise until
No.3 gear comes to the position shown in the
figure.
(3) Engage a gear on a new S tension regulator
assembly with No.3 gear as shown in the
figure, and align the notch of the S tension
regulator with the positioning pin on the
chassis, then attach the new assembly to the
chassis with the screw (a).
(4) Turn the manual eject cover counterclock-
wise to bring to the unthreading end position.
(5) Reattach the S tension regulator assembly to
the MD chassis with the screw (b).
Tightening Torque : 0.1 N.m {1 kgf.cm}
(6) Turn the manual eject cover clockwise to
enter the threading condition. At this opera-
tion, check the two points below.
The spring of the S tension regulator assem-
bly shown in the figure do not contact the
post of No.3 gear.
The column pushes the spring under
unthreading end status.
Unless satisfy these conditions, perform the
step (2) and after.
(7) Turn the manual eject cover counterclock-
wise to bring to the unthreading end position.
7-36 DSR-2000/2000P
A
Connector (CN3)
SE-521 board
Connector (CN4) Slotted hole
P1.4 x 3.5
Flexible card wire
Flexible card wire
Worm holder claw
Worm holder
SE-521 board
View from the A point
5. Reattaching the SE-521 board
(1) Fit the hole and slotted hole on the SE-521
board on the two shafts on the MD chassis
respectively and fix it with the screw.
m
.At this operation, be careful not to pinch
the tip of the flexible card wire of the S
tension regulator assembly between the SE-
521 board and the chassis.
.Insert the SE-521 board under the claw of
the worm holder.
(2) Reconnect the flexible card wire to the
connector (CN4) on the SE-521 board.
(3) Reconnect the flexible card wire of the S
tension regulator assembly to the connector
(CN3) on the SE-521 board.
6. Reattaching the loading motor
assembly
Reattach the loading motor assembly.
(Refer to Section 7-17.)
7. Reattaching the TG1 arm assembly
Reattach the TG1 arm assembly.
(Refer to Section 7-13.)
8. Cleaning the tape guide
Wipe the tape guides of the S tension regulator
and the TG1 arm assemblies with a cleaning cloth
moistened with cleaning fluid.
Adjustment after replacement
9. TENSION adjustment
(Refer to Section 5-3-3.)
10. Tape path adjustment
(Refer to Section 8-2.)
7-11. S Tension Regulator Assembly Replacement
7-37
DSR-2000/2000P
7-12. T Drawer Arm Assembly Replacement
7-12. T Drawer Arm Assembly Replacement
Outline
Replacement
Removing the T drawer arm assembly
Checking the mounting position of the T gear
Reattaching the T drawer arm assembly
Cleaning the tape guide
Adjustment after replacement
Checking the tape path adjustment
Note
Use extreme care no to scratch the drum when replacing the T drawer arm assembly.
Preparation
1. Let the unit into the unthreading position.
2. Power off the unit.
3. Remove the top panel. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
4. Remove the cassette compartment. (Refer to Section 3-4.)
Tools
.Cleaning cloth : 3-184-527-01
.Cleaning fluid : 9-919-573-01
.Tweezers
7-38 DSR-2000/2000P
No.6 gear
T gear
T gear MD chassis
T spring Grease
T spring
a portion
T drawer arm assembly
Stop washer
Spring washer
T drawer arm assembly
Hole
Sleeve
Tape guide
Notch
SlitShaft
T gear
MD chassis
MD chassis
T spring
T spring a
portion
T drawer arm
assembly
T drawer arm
assembly
Notch
Stop washer
Spring washer
7-12. T Drawer Arm Assembly Replacement
Replacement
1. Removing the T drawer arm assembly
(1) Remove the stop washer from the shaft on the
MD chassis and remove the T drawer arm
assembly.
(2) Remove the portion “a” of the T spring
shown in the figure from the notch in the
T drawer arm assembly with tweezers.
(3) Remove the T drawer arm assembly.
2. Checking the mounting position of the
T gear
Check that the engagement between the T gear
and No. 6 gear is in the position shown in the
figure.
3. Reattaching the T drawer arm
assembly
(1) Apply grease above 1/3 size of a tip of a
cotton swab, to the shaft on the MD chassis.
(2) Fit a new T drawer arm assembly on the shaft
and fit the hole in the T drawer arm assembly
on the protrusion on the T gear.
(3) Hook again the portion “a” of the T spring
unhooked in step 1- (2) on the notch in the
T drawer arm assembly with tweezers.
(4) Fit the spring washer on the shaft on the MD
chassis and fix it with the stop washer.
4. Cleaning the tape guide
Wipe the tape guide on the T drawer arm assem-
bly with a cleaning cloth moistened with cleaning
fluid.
Adjustment after cleaning
5. Checking the tape path adjustment
(Refer to Section 8-4.)
7-39
DSR-2000/2000P
7-13. TG1 Arm Assembly Replacement
7-13. TG1 Arm Assembly Replacement
Outline
Replacement
Replacing the TG1 arm assembly
Cleaning the tape guide
Adjustment after replacement
TENSION adjustment
Checking the tape path adjustment
Note
Do avoid touching with bare hands to the tape cleaner a part of in TG1 arm assem-
bly. Sharpness of the edge on the tape cleaner may cause a hand cut, therefore use
extreme care when replacing the TG1 arm assembly.
Preparation
1. Set the unit to the unthreading end status.
2. Power off the unit.
3. Remove the top panel. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
4. Remove the cassette compartment. (Refer to Section 3-4.)
Tools
.Torque screwdriver’s bit (for M1.4) : J-6325-110-A
.Torque screwdriver (for 3 kgf.cm) : J-6325-400-A
.Cleaning cloth : 3-184-527-01
.Cleaning fluid : 9-919-573-01
7-40 DSR-2000/2000P
P1.4 x 3.5
TG1 arm assembly
(Part No. A-8279-399-B)
Pins
Tape guide
Serial No, 100911 - 101390 : UC
401551 - 401850 : CE
Fig. 1
P1.4 x 3.5
TG1 arm assembly
(Part No. A-8279-399-C)
Pins
Tape guide Tape cleaner
Serial No, 100001 - 100910, 101391 - : UC
400001 - 401550, 401851 - : CE
Fig. 2
Replacement
1. Replacing the TG1 arm assembly
(1) Remove the screw and remove the TG1 arm
assembly from the MD chassis.
(2) Fit two holes in a new TG1 arm assembly on
the two pins on the MD chassis respectively
and fix the assembly with the screw.
Tightening Torque : 0.1 N.m {1 kgf.cm}
2. Cleaning the tape guide
Wipe the tape guide on the TG1 arm assembly
and the tape cleaner with a cleaning cloth moist-
ened with cleaning fluid.
n
The tape cleaner is not used for Serial No.
100911 - 101390 : UC
401551 - 401850 : CE
The set of above serial number, provided ARM
ASSY, TG1 (A-8279-399-C) for repair parts to
stabilize the tape path.
(Refer to Fig. 1 and Fig. 2)
Adjustment after replacement
3. TENSION adjustment
(Refer to Section 5-3-3.)
4. Checking the tape path adjustment
(Refer to Section 8-4.)
7-13. TG1 Arm Assembly Replacement
7-41
DSR-2000/2000P
7-14. TG8 Arm Assembly Replacement
7-14. TG8 Arm Assembly Replacement
Outline
Replacement
Replacing the TG8 arm assembly
Cleaning the tape guide
Adjustment after replacement
Checking the tape path adjustment
Preparation
1. Set the unit to the unthreading end status.
2. Power off the unit.
3. Remove the top panel. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
4. Remove the cassette compartment. (Refer to Section 3-4.)
Tools
.Torque screwdriver’s bit (for M1.4) : J-6325-110-A
.Torque screwdriver (for 3 kgf.cm) : J-6325-400-A
.Washer extracting fixture (A) : J-6082-234-A
.Washer mounting fixture Ø1.5 : J-6082-231-A
.Cleaning cloth : 3-184-527-01
.Cleaning fluid : 9-919-573-01
.Tweezers
7-42 DSR-2000/2000P
P1.4 x 3.5
TG8 arm assembly
Tape guide
Pin
Suare hole of the
pinch limiter assembly
Replacement
1. Replacing the TG8 arm assembly
(1) Insert a torque screwdriver through the
square hole of the pinch limiter assembly to
access the screw securing TG8 arm assembly.
Remove the screw to remove the TG8 arm
assembly.
(2) Fit a hole and a slotted hole in a new TG8
arm assembly on the two pins on the MD
chassis and fix it with the screw.
Tightening Torque : 0.1 N.m {1 kgf.cm}
2. Cleaning the tape guide
Wipe the tape guide on the TG8 arm assembly
with a cleaning cloth moistened with cleaning
fluid.
Adjustment after replacement
3. Adjustment after replacement
Checking the tape path adjustment
(Refer to Section 8-4.)
7-14. TG8 Arm Assembly Replacement
7-43
DSR-2000/2000P
7-15. Rail Assembly Replacement
7-15. Rail Assembly Replacement
Outline
Replacement
Moving the S/T reel tables
Removing the S tension regulator assembly
Removing the T drawer arm assembly
Removing the RMP retainer (T1) assembly
Removing the head cleaner assembly
Removing the rail assembly
Reattaching the rail assembly
Reattaching the head cleaner assembly
Reattaching the RMP retainer (T1) assembly
Reattaching the T drawer arm assembly
Reattaching the S tension regulator assembly
Checking the threading/unthreading performance
Cleaning the tape guide
Adjustment after replacement
TENSION adjustment
Tape path adjustment
Note
Use extreme care not to scratch the drum and the tape guide when replacing the rail
assembly.
Preparation
1. Set the unit to the unthreading end status.
2. Power off the unit.
3. Remove the top panel. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
4. Remove the cassette compartment. (Refer to Section 3-4.)
Tools
.Torque screwdriver’s bit (for M1.4) : J-6325-110-A
.Torque screwdriver (for 3 kgf.cm) : J-6325-400-A
.Cleaning cloth : 3-184-527-01
.Cleaning fluid : 9-919-573-01
.Tweezers
7-44 DSR-2000/2000P
SE-522 board
Connector (CN2)
Flexible card wire
Reel shift
motor gear
T reel table
S reel table
Replacement
1. Moving the S/T reel tables
Bring the S/T reel tables to the L cassette position
(the most front side) by turning the reel shift
motor gear in the arrow direction by a finger.
[Reference][Reference]
[Reference][Reference]
[Reference]
This provides easy operation of succeeding tasks.
2. Removing the S tension regulator
assembly
Remove the S tension regulator assembly.
(Refer to Section 7-11.)
3. Removing the T drawer arm assembly
Remove the T drawer arm assembly.
(Refer to Section 7-12.)
4. Removing the RMP retainer (T1)
assembly
Remove the two screws and remove the RMP
retainer (T1) assembly.
5. Removing the head cleaner
Remove the head cleaner. (Refer to Section 7-21.)
6. Removing the rail assembly
(1) Disconnect the flexible card wire from the
connector (CN2) on the SE-522 board.
n
Use extreme care not to fold and not to
scratch the flexible card wire when discon-
necting.
7-15. Rail Assembly Replacement
7-45
DSR-2000/2000P
P1.4 x 3.5
Flexible card wire
Rail assembly
Phase determining hole
Phase determining hole
Mode gear
No.3 gear
Manual eject
cover
Phase
determining
hole
7-15. Rail Assembly Replacement
(2) Turn the manual eject cover clockwise and
align the two phase determining holes in the
mode gear assembly and in No.3 gear.
(3) Remove the three screws and remove the rail
assembly.
n
Use extreme care not to scratch the drum and
the tape guide when removing. Also great
care should be taken; not to fold and not to
scratch the flexible card wire of the LED
holder assembly when disconnecting.
7-46 DSR-2000/2000P
Claw
Claw
LED holder assembly
Shuttle (L) assembly
Gear
Rail assembly
Shuttle (R) assembly
7-15. Rail Assembly Replacement
(4) Bring both shuttle (R) and shuttle (L) assem-
blies to the threading position shown in the
figure, by turning the gear on the back side of
the rail assembly by a finger
(5) Unlock each two claws located on the left,
right and middle side of the LED holder
assembly with tweezers, and remove the LED
holder assembly from the rail assembly.
7-47
DSR-2000/2000P
No.6 gear No.7 gear Phase determining hole
Phase determining hole
No.6 gear No.7 gear
Phase determining
hole
Phase determining
hole
Shuttle (L) assembly
Shuttle (L) asembly
Gear
Rail assembly
Shuttle (R) assembly
Positioning hole
Positioning hole Rail plate
7-15. Rail Assembly Replacement
7. Reattaching the rail assembly
(1) Reattach a new rail assembly to the LED
holder assembly.
(2) Ensure that the two phase determining holes
in the mode gear assembly and in No.3 gear,
which are already aligned in step 7- (2), are
respectively aligned with the two holes in the
MD chassis underneath each gear.
(3) Adjust the two phases determining holes in
No.6 and No.7 gears to align respectively
with the two holes in the MD chassis under-
neath each gear by turning No.7 gear by a
finger.
(4) Turn the gear on the back side of the rail
assembly until the shuttle (R) and shuttle (L)
assemblies push the LED holder assembly as
far as it will go, and align the positioning
hole of the shuttle (L) assembly with the
positioning hole of the rail assembly.
7-48 DSR-2000/2000P
P1.4 x 3.5
Rail assembly
Slotted hole
Hole
Flexible card wire
Pin
Pin
Pin
(5) Keeping the state in step (4) and further more
holding the gear phase between S side and T
side, fit the hole and slotted hole in the rail
assembly on the two pins on the MD chassis
respectively.
(6) Fit the hole in the flexible card wire of LED
holder assembly on the pin on the MD
chassis.
(7) Fix the rail assembly with the three screws.
Tightening Torque : 0.1 N.m {1 kgf.cm}
(8) Reconnect the flexible card wire to the
connector (CN2) on the SE-522 board.
8. Reattaching the head cleaner
Reattach the head cleaner. (Refer to Section 7-21.)
9. Reattaching the RMP retainer (T1)
assembly
Fit the hole and slotted hole in the RMP retainer
(T1) assembly on the pins on the MD chassis
respectively, then fix it with the two screws.
10. Reattaching the T drawer arm
assembly
Reattach the T drawer arm assembly.
(Refer to Section 7-12.)
11. Reattaching the S tension regulator
assembly
Reattach the S tension regulator assembly.
(Refer to Section 7-11.)
12. Checking the threading/unthreading
performance
Check the threading/unthreading is performed
smoothly by turning the manual eject cover.
13. Cleaning the tape guide
Wipe the tape guides placed in followings with a
cleaning cloth moistened with cleaning fluid.
.T drawer arm assembly
.S tension regulator assembly
.Shuttle (R) assembly
.Shuttle (L) assembly
Adjustment after replacement
14. TENSION adjustment
(Refer to Section 5-3-3.)
15. Tape path adjustment
(Refer to Section 8-2.)
7-15. Rail Assembly Replacement
7-49
DSR-2000/2000P
7-16. Capstan Motor Replacement
7-16. Capstan Motor Replacement
Outline
Replacement
Removing the MD cover
Replacing the capstan motor
Reattaching the MD cover
Cleaning the capstan shaft
Adjustment after replacement
CAPSTAN ONLY adjustment
Checking the tape path adjustment
Preparation
1. Set the unit in to the unthreading end status.
2. Power off the unit.
3. Remove the top panel. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
4. Remove the bottom panel. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
5. Remove the right side panel. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
6. Remove the cassette compartment. (Refer to Section 3-4.)
Tools
.Torque screwdriver’s bit (for M1.4) : J-6325-110-A
.Torque screwdriver (for 3 kgf.cm) : J-6325-400-A
.Cleaning cloth : 3-184-527-01
.Cleaning fluid : 9-919-573-01
7-50 DSR-2000/2000P
P 1.4 x 3.5
Capstan motor
Cleaning
CN1 Flexible card wire
MS-64 board
Replacement
1. Removing the MD cover.
Remove the MD cover. (Refer to Section 7-2.)
2. Replacing the capstan motor
(1) Disconnect the flexible card wire from the
connector (CN1) on the MS-64 board.
(2) While supporting the capstan motor by hand
from the back side of the MD chassis, remove
the two screws in the upper side of the
chassis to remove the capstan motor.
(3) Wipe the mounting surfaces of a new capstan
motor and the MD chassis with a cleaning
cloth moistened with cleaning fluid.
(4) Insert the new capstan motor into the hole in
the MD chassis positioning as shown in the
figure and fix it with the two screws.
Tightening torque : 0.1 N.m {1 kgf.cm}
n
Use care not to scratch the capstan motor
pivot when inserting the capstan motor.
(5) Reconnect the flexible card wire of the
capstan motor on the back side of the unit to
the connector (CN1) on the MS-64 board.
3. Reattaching the MD cover
Reattach the MD cover. (Refer to Section 7-2.)
4. Cleaning the Capstan shaft
Wipe the capstan shaft with a cleaning cloth
moistened with cleaning fluid.
Adjustment after replacement
5. CAPSTAN ONLY adjustment
(Refer to Section 5-3-3.)
6. Checking the tape path adjustment
(Refer to Section 8-4.)
7-16. Capstan Motor Replacement
7-51
DSR-2000/2000P
7-17. Loading Motor Replacement
Outline
Replacement
Disconnecting the connector
Replacing the loading motor assembly
Reconnecting the connector
Preparation
1. Set the unit to the unthreading end status.
2. Power off the unit.
3. Remove the top panel. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
4. Remove the cassette compartment. (Refer to Section 3-4.)
Tools
.Torque screwdriver’s bit (for M1.4) : J-6325-110-A
.Torque screwdriver (for 3 kgf.cm) : J-6325-400-A
.Tweezers
Replacement
1. Disconnecting the connector
Disconnect the harness from the connector
(CN19) on the MS-64 board with tweezers.
2. Replacing the loading motor assembly
(1) Remove the two screws to remove the
loading motor assembly.
(2) Align a positioning hole in a new loading
motor with the positioning pin on the MD
chassis and engage the motor gear with the
FG gear.
(3) Fix the loading motor assembly with the two
screws.
Tightening Torque : 0.1 N.m {1 kgf.cm}
3. Reconnecting the connector
Reconnect the harness to the connector (CN19)
on the MS-64 board with tweezers.
7-17. Loading Motor Replacement
P1.4 x 3.5
P1.4 x 3.5
Loading motor
assembly
Pin
MS-64 board
CN19
Harness
Motor gear
FG gear assembly
7-52 DSR-2000/2000P
7-18. Reel Shift Motor Assembly Replacement
Outline
Replacement
Removing the pinch limiter assembly
Removing the pinch solenoid assembly
Replacing the reel shift motor assembly
Reattaching the pinch solenoid assembly
Reattaching the pinch limiter assembly
Note
Prepare a new stop washer when replacing the reel shift motor assembly.
Stop washer (1.5) : 3-669-465-01 x 1 (for mounting the pinch limiter assembly)
Preparation
1. Set the unit to the unthreading end status.
2. Power off the unit.
3. Remove the top panel. (Refer to Section 3-3)
4. Remove the cassette compartment. (Refer to Section 3-4)
Tools
.Torque screwdriver’s bit (for M1.4) : J-6325-110-A
.Torque screwdriver (for 3 kgf.cm) : J-6325-400-A
.Washer extracting fixture (A) : J-6082-234-A
.Washer mounting fixture Ø1.5 : J-6082-231-A
.Cleaning cloth : 3-184-527-01
.Cleaning fluid : 9-919-573-01
.Tweezers
7-18. Reel Shift Motor Assembly Replacement
7-53
DSR-2000/2000P
7-18. Reel Shift Motor Assembly Replacement
Replacement
1. Removing the pinch limiter assembly
Remove the pinch limiter assembly.
(Refer to Section 7-5.)
2. Removing the pinch solenoid
assembly
Remove the pinch solenoid assembly.
(Refer to Section 7-7.)
3. Replacing the reel shift motor
assembly
(1) Disconnect the harness of the reel shift motor
assembly from the connector (CN5) on the
MS-64 board with tweezers.
(2) Remove the screw to remove the reel shift
motor assembly.
(3) Fit two holes in a new reel shift motor
assembly shown in the figure on the two pins
on the MD chassis and engage it with the
gear A.
(4) Reattach the reel shift motor assembly with
the screw.
Tightening Torque : 0.1 N.m {1 kgf.cm}
(5) Reconnect the harness of the reel shift motor
to the connector (CN5) on the MS-64 board.
4. Reattaching the pinch solenoid
assembly
Reattach the pinch solenoid assembly.
(Refer to Section 7-7.)
5. Reattaching the pinch limiter
assembly
Reattach the pinch limiter assembly.
(Refer to Section 7-5.)
CN5
P1.4 x 3.5
MS-64 board
Gear
Pin
Positioning hole
Reel shift mortor assembly
7-54 DSR-2000/2000P
7-19. MIC Assembly Replacement
Outline
Replacement
Removing the MD cover
Disconnecting the flexible card wire
Moving the S/T reel tables
Removing the L push plate
Removing the MIC spring
Replacing the MIC assembly
Moving the S/T reel tables
Reattaching the MIC spring
Reattaching the L push plate
Reconnecting the flexible card wire
Reattaching the MD cover
Note
Prepare a new stop washer when replacing the MIC holder.
Stop washer (1.2) : 3-559-408-11
Do avoid touching the terminal on the MIC holder and wiping it with cleaning fluid.
When need cleaning, wipe it carefully with a soft dry cloth.
Use care not to lose a poly-slider washer between the base plate and the MIC
assembly.
Preparation
1. Set the unit to the unthreading end status.
2. Power off the unit.
3. Remove the top panel. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
4. Remove the bottm panel. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
5. Remove the right side panel. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
6. Remove the cassette compartment. (Refer to Section 3-4.)
Tools
.Torque screwdriver’s bit (for M1.4) : J-6325-110-A
.Torque screwdriver (for 3 kgf.cm) : J-6325-400-A
.Washer extracting fixture (A) : J-6082-234-A
.Washer mounting fixture Ø1.5 : J-6082-231-A
.Tweezers
7-19. MIC Assembly Replacement
7-55
DSR-2000/2000P
Reel shift
motor gear
T reel table
S reel table
MIC spring
RLR assembly
MIC assembly
MS-64 board
Connector (CN7)
MIC assembly
flexible card wire
7-19. MIC Assembly Replacement
Replacement
1. Removing the MD cover
Remove the MD cover. (Refer to Section 7-2.)
2. Disconnecting the flexible card wire
Disconnect the flexible card wire from the
connector (CN7) on the MS-64 board located on
the back side of the MD chassis.
3. Moving the S/T reel tables
Turn the reel shift motor gear in the arrow
direction by a finger and bring the S/T reel tables
to the standard cassette position (the most front
side).
4. Removing the L push plate
Remove the L push plate. (Refer to Section 7-3.)
5. Removing the MIC spring
Unhook the hooks on the both ends of the MIC
spring which hold the MIC arm and the RLR
assemblies.
7-56 DSR-2000/2000P
P1.4 x 3.5
P1.4 x 3.5
Stop washer
MIC assembly
Guide hole
Guide hole
Pin
Pin
Flexible card wire
Boss of MIC arm
Recess
Reel plate shaft
6. Replacing the MIC assembly
(1) Remove the stop washer and the two screws
which secure the MIC assembly to the MD
chassis, and remove the MIC assembly.
(2) Insert a tip of the flexible card wire of a new
MIC assembly between the chassis and the
front MD chassis to bring it to the back side
of the unit.
n
Use great care not to fold and scratch the
flexible card wire during this operation.
(3) Fit the boss of the MIC arm on the shaft of
the MD chassis and also fit the recess on the
reel plate shaft.
Fit the two guide holes in the MIC assembly
on the pins on the MD chassis, and fix the
assembly with the two screws and a new stop
washer.
Tightening Torque : 0.1 N.m {1 kgf.cm}
7-19. MIC Assembly Replacement
7-57
DSR-2000/2000P
Reel shift
motor gear
T reel table
S reel table
MIC spring
RLR assembly
MIC assembly
7-19. MIC Assembly Replacement
7. Moving the S/T reel tables
Turn the reel shift motor gear in the arrow
direction by a finger and bring the S/T reel tables
to the S-cassette position (the drum side).
Confirm that the S/T reel tables and the MIC
assembly shift smoothly.
8. Reattaching the MIC spring
Reattach the MIC spring removed in step 5 to the
MIC arm and RLR assemblies.
9. Reattaching the L push plate
Reattach the L push plate. (Refer to Section 7-3.)
10. Reconnecting the flexible card wire
Reconnect the flexible card wire to the connector
(CN7) on the MS-64 board located on the back
side of the MD chassis.
11. Reattaching the MD cover.
Reattach the MD cover. (Refer to Section 7-2.)
7-58 DSR-2000/2000P
7-20. MIC Holder Assembly Replacement
Outline
Replacement
Removing the MD cover
Removing the MIC assembly
Replacing the MIC holder assembly
Reattaching the MIC assembly
Reattaching the MD cover
Note
Prepare new stop washers when replacing the MIC holder.
Stop washer (1.2) : 3-559-408-11 x 2 (for mounting the MIC holder assembly)
Stop washer (1.5) : 3-669-465-01 x 1 (for mounting the MIC assembly)
Do avoid touching the terminal on the MIC holder and wiping it with cleaning fluid.
When need cleaning, wipe it carefully with a soft dry cloth.
Use care not to lose a poly-slider washer between the base plate and the MIC
assembly.
Preparation
1. Set the unit to the unthreading end status.
2. Power off the unit.
3. Remove the top panel. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
4. Remove the bottm panel. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
5. Remove the right side panel. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
6. Remove the cassette compartment. (Refer to Section 3-4.)
Tools
.Torque screwdriver’s bit (for M1.4) : J-6325-110-A
.Torque screwdriver (for 3 kgf.cm) : J-6325-400-A
.Washer extracting fixture (A) : J-6082-234-A
.Washer mounting fixture Ø1.5 : J-6082-231-A
.Washer mounting fixture Ø1.2 : J-6082-232-A
.Tweezers
7-20. MIC Holder Assembly Replacement
7-59
DSR-2000/2000P
AMIC holder assembly
Flexible card wire
Stop washer
Stop washer
MIC arm assembly
Flexible card wire
MIC arm assembly
7-20. MIC Holder Assembly Replacement
Replacement
1. Removing the MD cover
Remove the MD cover. (Refer to Section 7-2.)
2. Removing the MIC assembly
Remove the MIC assembly.
(Refer to Section 7-19.)
3. Replacing the MIC holder
subassembly
(1) Remove the portion A shown of the flexible
card wire from the MIC arm assembly as
shown in the figure.
(2) Remove the two stop washers from the back
side of the MIC assembly and remove the
MIC holder assembly.
(3) Fix a new MIC holder assembly to the MIC
assembly with two new stop washers (1.2).
n
Use great care not to fold and not to scratch
the flexible card wire when reattaching.
(4) Fix the flexible card wire to the MIC arm
assembly as shown in the figure.
(5) Insert a tip of the flexible card wire of the
MIC assembly between the chassis and the
front MD chassis to bring it to the back side
of the unit.
n
Use extreme care not to fold and not to
scratch the flexible card wire at this opera-
tion.
4. Reattaching the MIC assembly
Reattach the MIC assembly.
(Refer to Section 7-19.)
5. Reattaching the MD cover
Reattach the MD cover. (Refer to Section 7-2.)
7-60 DSR-2000/2000P
7-21. HC Roller Assembly Replacement
Outline
Replacement
Disconnecting the connector
Removing the head cleaner assembly
Replacing the HC roller assembly
Reattaching the head cleaner assembly
Reconnecting the connector
Note
Prepare a new stop washer when replacing the HC roller assembly.
Stop washer (0.8) : 3-315-414-31 x 1
Bare-handed touch to the HC roller assembly is prohibited. Do put on cloth gloves
before replacing.
Preparation
1. Set the unit to the unthreading end status.
2. Power off the unit.
3. Remove the top panel. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
Tools
.Torque screwdriver’s bit (for M1.4) : J-6325-110-A
.Torque screwdriver (for 3 kgf.cm) : J-6325-400-A
.Washer extracting fixture (A) : J-6082-234-A
.Washer mounting fixture Ø1.8 : J-6082-233-A
7-21. HC Roller Assembly Replacement
7-61
DSR-2000/2000P
P1.4 x 3.5
Head cleaner assembly
CN12
P1.4 x 3.5
7-21. HC Roller Assembly Replacement
Replacement
1. Disconnecting the connector
Disconnect the harness from the connector
(CN12) on the MS-64 board with tweezers.
2. Removing the head cleaner assembly
Remove the two screws and pull off the head
cleaner assembly in the arrow direction.
3. Replacing the HC roller assembly
(1) Remove the stop washer to remove the HC
roller assembly.
(2) Attach a new HC roller assembly with a new
stop washer.
n
Avoid bare-handed touch to the HC roller
assembly.
In addition, do not give an excessive force to
it at removal and reattachment, it may cause
deformation.
Operation supporting the back side of the HC
roller assembly by fingers is required.
HC roller assembly
HC roller arm assembly
Stop washer
7-62 DSR-2000/2000P
P1.4 x 3.5
Head cleaner assembly
Iron core
CN12
Positioning hole
Positioning hole
Positioning pin
Positioning pin
P1.4 x 3.5
Drum Roller
Upper and lowerspaces
are same : OK Only lowerspace : NG Only upperspace : NG
4. Reattaching the head cleaner
assembly
Align the two positioning holes in the head
cleaner assembly with the two positioning pins on
the MD chassis and fix the assembly with the two
screws.
Tightening torque : 0.1 N.m {1 kgf.cm}
5. Checking the performance of the head
cleaner assembly
Check that the HC roller assembly contacts the
drum assembly in parallel when the solenoid’s
iron core of the head cleaner assembly is in the
pull-in state by being pressed in the arrow
direction.
6. Reconnecting the connector
Reconnect the harness to the connector (CN12)
on the MS-64 board.
7-21. HC Roller Assembly Replacement
7-63
DSR-2000/2000P
7-22. Head Cleaner Solenoid Replacement
7-22. Head Cleaner Solenoid Replacement
Outline
Replacement
Removing the head cleaner assembly
Replacing the head cleaner solenoid
Reattaching the head cleaner assembly
Checking the performance of the head cleaner assembly
Preparation
1. Set the unit to the unthreading end status.
2. Power off the unit.
3. Remove the top panel. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
Tools
.Torque screwdriver’s bit (for M1.4) : J-6325-110-A
.Torque screwdriver (for 3 kgf.cm) : J-6325-400-A
7-64 DSR-2000/2000P
Solenoid
HC slider
Iron core
Specification:1.5 to 1.8 mm
HC slider
Replacement
1. Removing the head cleaner assembly
Remove the head cleaner assembly.
(Refer to Section 7-21.)
2. Replacing the head cleaner solenoid
(1) Remove the two screws on the back side of
the head cleaner assembly.
(2) Remove the solenoid with the spring on it.
(3) Remove the compression coil spring from the
solenoid.
(4) Fit the compression coil spring on a new
solenoid’s iron core.
(5) Pull out the iron core until a recess comes in
sight, then fix the solenoid to the head cleaner
assembly.
(6) Align the two holes in the solenoid with the
two slotted holes in the HC base assembly
and fix temporally with the two screws.
n
Tighten the screws just enough to move the
head cleaner solenoid.
(7) Adjust the solenoid position to meet the
specification of the clearance between the HC
roller arm assembly and the tip of the HC
slider under the condition that the iron core
comes to the pull-in state by being pressed in
the arrow direction, then tighten the two
screws.
Tightening torque : 0.2 N.m {2 kgf.cm}
3. Reattaching the head cleaner
assembly
Reattach the head cleaner assembly.
(Refer to Section 7-21.)
4. Checking the performance of the head
cleaner assembly
Check the performance of the head cleaner
assembly. (Refer to Section 7-21.)
7-22. Head Cleaner Solenoid Replacement
Solenoid
Recess
Iron core
Compression
coil spring
Head cleaner base
assembly
Head cleaner assembly
Slotted hole
PSW2.6 x 4
7-65
DSR-2000/2000P
Motor gear assembly
CC-83 board
Harness
CN3
Screw M2
Screw M2
7-23. Cassette Compartment Motor Replacement
7-23. Cassette Compartment Motor Replacement
Outline
Replacement
Removing the motor gear assembly
Replacing the motor assembly
Reattaching the motor gear assembly
Preparation
1. Set the unit to the unthreading end status.
2. Power off the unit.
3. Remove the top panel. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
4. Remove the cassette compartment. (Refer to Section 3-4.)
Tools
.Torque screwdriver (for 3 kgf.cm) : J-6325-400-A
.Torque screwdriver’s bit (for M2) : J-6325-380-A
.Grease (SGL-941) : 7-662-001-39
.Tweezers
Replacement
1. Removing the motor gear assembly
(1) Remove the harness of the motor gear from
the connector (CN3) on the CC-83 board in
the cassette compartment.
(2) Remove the motor gear assembly from the
cassette compartment by removing the two
screws.
7-66 DSR-2000/2000P
Motor gear assembly
Grease
Gear B
Worm gear
Screw M2
Screw M2
Protrusions
Positioning hole
Driving gear (L)
assembly
Specification
CN3
45d ±10d
Claw
Claw
Pivot bracket
Pivot bracket
Motor bracket
Screw M2
Worm gear
Motor assembly Gear B
Gear A
2. Replacing the motor assembly
(1) Release the upper and lower claws of the
pivot bracket to remove the pivot bracket.
n
Be careful not to lose the worm gear, which
also comes off at this operation.
(2) Remove the gear B from the shaft of the
motor bracket assembly.
(3) Remove the two screws to remove the motor
assembly from the motor bracket.
(4) Fix a new motor assembly to the motor
bracket positioning as shown in the figure
with the two screws.
n
Be reminded a new motor assembly has the
gear A on its shaft.
Tightening torque : 0.2 N.m {2 kgf.cm}
(5) Reattach the gear B to the shaft of the motor
bracket assembly.
(6) Make a coupling between the worm gear and
the gear B and insert the pivot bracket shaft
from another side of the worm gear.
(7) Fix the upper and lower claws to the motor
bracket.
3. Reattaching the motor gear assembly
(1) Bend the two terminals in the motor gear
assembly to meet the specification of their
bent angle shown in the figure.
(2) With the worm gear in the motor gear
assembly engaged with the worm wheel,
insert the two protrusions of the motor gear
assembly into the holes in the cassette
compartment and fix with two screws.
(3) Align the hole in the drive gear (L) assembly
with the hole in the cassette compartment by
turning the gear B of the motor gear assembly
by a finger.
(4) Apply a grain of grease on the worm gear in
the motor gear assembly.
(5) Reconnect the harness of the motor gear
assembly to the connector (CN3) on the
CC-83.
7-23. Cassette Compartment Motor Replacement
7-67
DSR-2000/2000P
Switching regulator
BVTT3 x 6
(S tight)
BVTT3 x 6 (S tight)
Connector (7P)
Connector (4P)
Connector (10P)
a
b
Rear chassis
M chassis
7-24. Switching Regulator Replacement
Outline
Replacement
Disconnecting the connectors
Replacing the switching regulator
Reconnecting the connectors
Preparation
1. Power off the unit.
2. Remove the top panel. (Refer to Section 3-3.)
Replacement
1. Disconnecting the connectors
Disconnect the three connectors, the two connec-
tors (4P and 10P) on the upper side of the switch-
ing regulator, and one connector (7P) on the side.
2. Replacing the switching regulator
(1) Remove the two screws.
(2) Pull out the switching regulator in the arrow
direction.
(3) Set a new switching regulator at the base of
the unit and slide it along the chassis M in the
reverse direction of the arrow as far as it
pushes the rear chassis.
(4) Tighten the two screws (a and b) to fix the
switching regulator.
3. Reconnecting the connectors
Reconnect the three connectors removed in step 1.
7-24. Switching Regulator Replacement
8-1
DSR-2000/2000P
Tape path adjustment is very important adjustment to run tape under the optimum
conditions for tape.
If this adjustment is not performed correctly, tape may be damaged.
Perform this adjustment with utmost attention.
Perform this adjustment after the cassette compartment assembly is removed from
VTR.
8-1. General Information for Tape Path Adjustment
Tools
1. Alignment tape
The following alignment tapes are necessary for tape path adjustment.
.XH2-1AST (Standard cassette) : 8-967-999-02
.XH5-1A2 (Mini cassette) : 8-967-999-22 (NTSC)
.XH5-1AP2 (Mini cassette) : 8-967-999-26 (PAL)
2. Tape guide adjustment driver
The following tape guide adjustment driver which is available as the Sony service
tool is necessary for height adjustment of tape guide.
.Tape guide adjustment driver : J-6082-362-A
3. Tape path adjustment board
Use the tape path adjustment board (DJ-461) to parforme the tape path adjustment.
.Tape path adjustment board, DJ-461 : J-6444-610-B
4. The required tools in addition to the above listed tools.
.Oscilloscope (Tektronix 2445B or equivalent)
.Small mirror for adjustment : J-6080-029-A
.Cleaning cloth : 3-184-527-01
.Cleaning fluid : 9-919-573-01
Preparation of Tape Path Adjustment
1. Cassette compartment assembly
It is not necessary to remove the cassette compartment assembly during tape path
adjustment.
2. Cleaning the tape running surface
Clean the tape running surface of tape guides, head drum and video heads using the
cleaning cloth moistened with cleaning fluid.
.Cleaning cloth : 3-184-527-01
.Cleaning fluid : 9-919-573-01
Section 8
Tape Path Alignment
Tape guide
adjustment driver
Tape guide
TG1 arm assembly
8-2 DSR-2000/2000P
3. Information to use the tracking alignment tape (XH2-1AST)
Check the following items before entering the tracking adjustment mode.
.How to enter the maintenance menu, refer to Section 5-2-2.
.How to exit the maintenance menu, refer to Section 5-2-3.
4. Operating procedures of tracking adjustment
(1) Enter the maintenance menu.
(2) Move the cursor to “TAPE PATH ADJUST” which is
displayed with a white background using the
[AUDIO|IN] (9) or [IN] (0) key.
(3) Press the [ENTRY|SHIFT] (8) key.
This selects “TAPE PATH ADJUST” and menu of the
lower level directory appears.
(4) Move the cursor to “TRACKING ADJUST” which is
displayed with a white background using the
[AUDIO|IN] (9), or [IN] (0) key.
DELETE ENTRY SHIFT
AUDIO
TC IN OUT
IN OUT
CH-4
REVIEW
EDIT
(9)
(0)
DELETE ENTRY SHIFT
AUDIO
TC IN OUT
IN OUT
CH-4
REVIEW
EDIT
(8)
DELETE ENTRY SHIFT
AUDIO
TC IN OUT
IN OUT
CH-4
REVIEW
EDIT
(9)
(0)
8-1. General Information for Tape Path Adjustment
8-3
DSR-2000/2000P
(5) Press the [ENTRY|SHIFT] (8) key to show the
“START OK?” display.
(6) Press the [SET] key.
(7) Display the “TRACKING ADJUST” on the screen.
The adjustments that are described in sections 8-2, 8-4
to 8-8 are performed under this mode.
n
This unit does not have the tracking shift function.
Instead of having the tracking shift function, the
tracking alignment tape XH2-1AST has already been
recorded in the factory so that the servo is locked at 50
% off-track automatically.
DELETE ENTRY SHIFT
AUDIO
TC IN OUT
IN OUT
CH-4
REVIEW
EDIT
(8)
REC
SET HOLDMENUPB
COUNTER SEL
EDIT
PREROLL
8-1. General Information for Tape Path Adjustment
8-4 DSR-2000/2000P
S1
S2
S3 (Tension regulator) T1 T2
T4
Head drum
S4
Capstan Pinch roller
T reelMini cassetteM cassette
Standard cassetteS reel
T3
The hatched areas (marked by /////) are contacting with tape or pressing tape.
5. Tape guide locations
6. Tape running condition
FWD
T1 T2 T3 T4S1S2S3S4
()
S reel
Tension
regulator Head drum
Capstan shaft
T reel
8-1. General Information for Tape Path Adjustment
8-5
DSR-2000/2000P
S1
[0]
[1]
[0]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[2]
[3]
[2]
[3]
[2]
[3]
SWITCHING
H
H
L
L
H
H
L
L
H
H
L
L
S2
SW
HEAD [2]
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
[5]
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
WJPB E1
WJPB E2
WJPB O1
WJPB O2
REC E
REC O
PRE E
PRE O
NJPB E1
NJPB E2
NJPB O1
NJPB O2
TP1
E1
TP3
TP2
E2
Tape path adjustment
board, DJ-461
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
ON
S2 S1
81
Tape path adjustment
board, DJ-461
CN1
EX-752 board (CN303)
SY-278 board
(CN113)
Harness (supplied with the board)
CN2
7. Preparation of signal measurement
Use the tape path adjustment board DJ-461 (J-6444-610-B)
to perform the tape path adjustment.
(1) Setting of the tape path adjustment board
Connect the connector CN1 on the tape path adjust-
ment board with the connector CN303 on the EX-752
board of the unit.
Connect the connector CN2 on the tape path adjust-
ment board with the connector CN113 on the SY-278
board using the harness supplied with the board.
(2) Switch setting of the tape path adjustment board
SW Bit Setting Function
S1 - 0 Select the REC head.
S2 1 OFF
2 OFF
3 OFF
4 OFF
5 OFF
6 OFF
7 OFF
8 ON Activate the switch setting of DJ-461
8-1. General Information for Tape Path Adjustment
(3) Measuring points/signal for adjustment
Signal name Board Measuring point
RF output DJ-461 TP2
(signal after envelope detection)
Switching pulse output DJ-461 TP3
GND DJ-461 E1
DJ-461 E2
[Preference][Preference]
[Preference][Preference]
[Preference]
8-6 DSR-2000/2000P
8-2. Tape Path Adjustment
Basic knowledge
To perform the tracking adjustment using the alignment tape (XH2-1AST), refer
the following items.
.For the procedure to enter the maintenance menu, refer to Section 5-2-2.
.For the procedure to exit the maintenance menu, refer to Section 5-2-3.
.For the operating procedure of the maintenance menu during the tracking adjust-
ment, refer to Section 8-1.
Tools
.Alignment tape, XH2-1AST : 8-967-999-02
.Tape path adjustment board, DJ-461 : J-6444-610-B
.Dual trace oscilloscope
Check procedure
1. Connect the oscilloscope as follows :
CH-1 : TP2 / DJ-461
CH-2 : TP3 / DJ-461
TRIG : CH-2
2. Insert the alignment tape XH2-1AST on the VTR.
3. Put the unit into PLAY mode.
4. Adjust the variable VOLTS/DIV control of the
oscilloscope so that the maximum amplitude of the RF
waveform becomes the three DIVISIONs on the
oscilloscope.
4/5 Div
max.
min. 3 Div
Specification : max. _ min. < 4/5 Div
max.
3 Div
min.
4/5 Div
Fig.1
Specification : max. _ min. < 4/5 Div
2
Guide S2
Entrance side Exit side
5. Adjust the RF waveform until it satisfies the specifica-
tion by changing the height of the S2 and T2 guides.
.When the RF waveform at the entrance side forms
the shape of the solid line shown in Fig.1, turn the
guide S2 clockwise to obtain the flat waveform.
n
This adjustment must end with the clockwise
rotation of the guide S2
8-2. Tape Path Adjustment
8-7
DSR-2000/2000P
.When the RF waveform at the entrance side forms
the shape of the solid line shown in Fig.2, turn the
guide S2 counterclockwise to waveform as shown by
the solid line in Fig.1. Then turn the guide S2
clockwise to obtain the desired waveform.
n
This adjustment must end with the clockwise rotation
of the guide S2.
.When the RF waveform at the exit side forms the
shape of the solid line shown in Fig.3, turn the guide
T2 clockwise to obtain the flat waveform.
n
This adjustment must end with the clockwise rotation
of the guide S2.
max.
3 Div
min.
4/5 Div
Fig.2
Specification : max. _ min. < 4/5 Div
3
Guide S2
Entrance side Exit side
max.
3 Div
min.
4/5 Div
Fig.3
2
Guide T2
Exit side
Entrance
side
Specification : max. _ min. < 4/5 Div
8-2. Tape Path Adjustment
8-8 DSR-2000/2000P
.When the RF waveform at the exit side forms the
shape of the solid line shown in Fig.4, turn the guide
T2 counterclockwise to waveform as shown by the
solid line in Fig.3. Then turn the guide T2 clockwise
to obtain the desired waveform.
n
This adjustment must end with the clockwise rotation
of the guide T2.
6. Measure the minimum amplitude of the RF waveform,
and confirm that the amplitude difference between the
maximum and the minimum of the RF waveform
satisfies the specification.
max.
3 Div
min.
4/5 Div
Fig.4
Specification : max. _ min. < 4/5 Div
3
Guide T2
Exit side
Entrance
side
4/5 Div
max.
min. 3 Div
Specification : max. _ min. < 4/5 Div
8-2. Tape Path Adjustment
8-9
DSR-2000/2000P
8-3. RF Switching Position Adjustment
Be sure to perform the RF switching position adjustment whenever the tape path
adjustment (refer to Section 8-2) is performed.
Perform this adjustment in the AUTO mode.
Basic knowledge
To perform the RF switching position adjustment using the alignment tape (XH5-
1A2 for NTSC or XH5-1AP2 for PAL), refer the following items.
.For the procedure to enter the maintenance menu, refer to Section 5-2-2.
.For the procedure to exit the maintenance menu, refer to Section 5-2-3.
Tools
Alignment tape, XH5-1A2 : 8-967-999-22 (for NTSC)
XH5-1AP2 : 8-967-999-26 (for PAL)
Adjustment procedure
RF switching position adjustment using the
[AUTO adjustment]
1. Enter the maintenance menu.
2. Move the cursor to “TAPE PATH ADJUST” which is
displayed with a white background using the
[AUDIO|IN] (9) or [IN] (0) key.
3. Press the [ENTER|SHIFT] (8) key.
“TAPE PATH ADJUST” is selected and its lower
layer submenu appears.
DELETE ENTRY SHIFT
AUDIO
TC IN OUT
IN OUT
CH-4
REVIEW
EDIT
(9)
(0)
DELETE ENTRY SHIFT
AUDIO
TC IN OUT
IN OUT
CH-4
REVIEW
EDIT
(8)
8-3. RF Switching Position Adjustment
8-10 DSR-2000/2000P
4. Move the cursor to “RF SWITCHING POSITION”
which is displayed with a white background using the
[AUDIO|IN] (9) or [IN] (0) key.
5. Select “START OK?” by pressing the
[ENTRY|SHIFT] (8) key.
6. Press the [SET] key.
7. Playback the alignment tape XH5-1A2 for NTSC or
XH5-1AP2 for PAL. (display 2)
Then the unit starts the RF switching position automat-
ic adjustment. (display 3)
DELETE ENTRY SHIFT
AUDIO
TC IN OUT
IN OUT
CH-4
REVIEW
EDIT
(9)
(0)
DELETE ENTRY SHIFT
AUDIO
TC IN OUT
IN OUT
CH-4
REVIEW
EDIT
(8)
REC
SET HOLDMENUPB
COUNTER SEL
EDIT
PREROLL
1
2
3
8-3. RF Switching Position Adjustment
8-11
DSR-2000/2000P
8. When the adjustment is completed, the display 5
“COMPLETE” appears and alignment tape is automat-
ically ejected.
n
When the “ADJUST INCOMPLETE” appears on the
monitor screen, check that the alignment tape which is
played back is XH5-1A2 for NTSC, or XH5-1AP2 for
PAL.
9. Press the [MENU] key to return to the maintenance
menu.
8-3. RF Switching Position Adjustment
4
5
8-12 DSR-2000/2000P
8-4. Tape Path Adjustment Confirmation
Be sure to perform tracking adjustment described in Section 8-3 after performing
the tracking adjustment in Section 8-2.
Basic knowledge
To perform tracking adjustment using the alignment tape (XH2-1AST), refer to
the following items.
.For the procedure to enter the maintenance menu, refer to Section 5-2-2.
.For the procedure to exit the maintenance menu, refer to Section 5-2-3.
.For the operating procedure of the maintenance menu during the tracking adjust-
ment, refer to Section 8-1.
Tools
.Alignment tape, XH2-1AST : 8-967-999-02
.Tape path adjustment board, DJ-461 : J-6444-610-B
.Dual trace oscilloscope
Check procedure
1. Connect the oscilloscope as follows :
CH-1 : TP2 / DJ-461
CH-2 : TP3 / DJ-461
TRIG : CH-2
2. Insert the alignment tape XH2-1AST on the VTR.
3. Put the unit into PLAY mode.
4. Adjust the variable VOLTS/DIV control of the
oscilloscope so that the maximum amplitude of the RF
waveform becomes the three DIVISIONs on the
oscilloscope.
5. Measure the minimum amplitude of the RF waveform,
and confirm that the amplitude difference between the
maximum and the minimum of the RF waveform
satisfies the specification.
6. Confirm that fluctuation of the RF waveform satisfies
the specification.
4/5 Div
max.
min. 3 Div
Specification : max. _ min. < 4/5 Div
3 Div
Fluctuations
Specification :
4/5 Div
or less
Fluctuation ( ) with in
4/5 divisions or less.
8-4. Tape Path Adjustment Confirmation
8-13
DSR-2000/2000P
8-5. Search Forward (xx
xx
x5) Waveform Check
Basic knowledge
To perform tracking adjustment using the alignment tape (XH2-1AST), refer to
the following items.
.For the procedure to enter the maintenance menu, refer to Section 5-2-2.
.For the procedure to exit the maintenance menu, refer to Section 5-2-3.
.For the operating procedure of the maintenance menu during the tracking adjust-
ment, refer to Section 8-1.
Tools
.Alignment tape, XH2-1AST : 8-967-999-02
.Tape path adjustment board, DJ-461 : J-6444-610-B
.Dual trace oscilloscope
Check procedure
1. Connect the oscilloscope as follows :
CH-1 : TP2 / DJ-461
CH-2 : TP3 / DJ-461
TRIG : CH-2
2. Insert the alignment tape XH2-1AST on the VTR.
3. Set the JOG dial search FORWARD to the x5 posi-
tion.
4. Adjust the variable VOLTS/DIV control of the
oscilloscope so that the maximum amplitude of the RF
waveform becomes the three DIVISIONs on the
oscilloscope.
5. Confirm that the RF waveform should be almost the
same amplitude with constant intervals as shown in
Fig.1.
6. Confirm that the RF waveform raises up within two
seconds at the specified amplitude when the mode is
changed from search FORWARD (x5) to PLAY.
3 Div
Fig.1
3/5 Div
or less
4/5 Div
max.
min. 3 Div
Specification : max. _ min. < 4/5 Div
8-5. Search Forward (x5) Waveform Check
8-14 DSR-2000/2000P
8-6. Search Reverse (xx
xx
x5) Waveform Check
Basic knowledge
To perform tracking adjustment using the alignment tape (XH2-1AST), refer to
the following items.
.For the procedure to enter the maintenance menu, refer to Section 5-2-2.
.For the procedure to exit the maintenance menu, refer to Section 5-2-3.
.For the operating procedure of the maintenance menu during the tracking adjust-
ment, refer to Section 8-1.
Tools
.Alignment tape, XH2-1AST : 8-967-999-02
.Tape path adjustment board, DJ-461 : J-6444-610-B
.Dual trace oscilloscope
Check procedure
1. Connect the oscilloscope as follows :
CH-1 : TP2 / DJ-461
CH-2 : TP3 / DJ-461
TRIG : CH-2
2. Insert the alignment tape XH2-1AST on the VTR.
3. Set the JOG dial search REVERSE to the x5 position.
4. Adjust the variable VOLTS/DIV control of the
oscilloscope so that the maximum amplitude of the RF
waveform becomes the three DIVISIONs on the
oscilloscope.
5. Confirm that the RF waveform should be almost the
same amplitude with constant intervals as shown in
Fig.1.
6. Confirm that the RF waveform raises up within two
seconds at the specified amplitude when the mode is
changed from search REVERSE (x5) to PLAY.
3 Div
Fig.1
3/5 Div
or less
4/5 Div
max.
min. 3 Div
Specification : max. _ min. < 4/5 Div
8-6. Search Reverse (x5) Waveform Check
8-15
DSR-2000/2000P
8-7. RF Waveform Raiseup Check
Basic knowledge
To perform tracking adjustment using the alignment tape (XH2-1AST), refer to
the following items.
.For the procedure to enter the maintenance menu, refer to Section 5-2-2.
.For the procedure to exit the maintenance menu, refer to Section 5-2-3.
.For the operating procedure of the maintenance menu during the tracking adjust-
ment, refer to Section 8-1.
Tools
.Alignment tape, XH2-1AST : 8-967-999-02
.Tape path adjustment board, DJ-461 : J-6444-610-B
.Dual trace oscilloscope
Check procedure
1. Connect the oscilloscope as follows :
CH-1 : TP2 / DJ-461
CH-2 : TP3 / DJ-461
TRIG : CH-2
2. Insert the alignment tape XH2-1AST on the VTR.
3. Confirm that the RF waveform raises up within two
seconds at the specified amplitude when the mode is
changed from EJECT → PLAY → EJECT → PLAY
repeatedly.
4. Confirm that the RF waveform raises up within two
seconds at the specified amplitude when the mode is
changed from FF → PLAY and from REW → PLAY.
4/5 Div
max.
min. 3 Div
Specification : max. _ min. < 4/5 Div
8-7. RF Waveform Raiseup Check
8-16 DSR-2000/2000P
The hatched areas (marked by /////) are contacting with tape or pressing tape.
8-8. Tape Curl Check at Tape Guide
Tools
.Alignment tape, XH2-1AST : 8-967-999-02
.Dental mirror : J-6080-029-A
Check procedure
Confirm that tape runs at each tape guide as specified by the following figure when the unit put into the
modes of PLAY, FF, REW, search FORWARD x5 and search REVERSE x5 respectively.
Tape running condition
FWD
T1 T2 T3 T4S1S2S3S4
()
S reel
Tension
regulator Head drum
Capstan shaft
T reel
Tape running condition
Tape A B C D E F
guide (Contact with upper flange) (Runs in the center) (Contact with lower flange) (Curled) (Folded) (Dropped)
S4 OOO XXX
S3 OOO XXX
S2 OXX XXX
T2 OXX XXX
T3 OOO XXX
T4 OOO XXX
ABCDEF
A : B : C : D : Curled E : Folded F : Dropped
Contact with
upper flange
Runs in center Contact with
lower flange
8-8. Tape Curl Check at Tape Guide
9-1
DSR-2000/2000P
9-1. Adjustment/Check Items When Replacing Board
No adjustment is required for the board other than below.
Board name Setting/Adj. after replacement Contents
(Reference Section)
APR-45 board 10-2. Audio Adjustment 10-2-1. Audio OUTPUT Level Adjustment
10-2-2. Audio EE Level Adjustment
MS-64 board 5. Maintenance Menu 5-3-3. Servo Adjust
S/T-REEL & CAPSTAN Adjustment
TENTION Adjustment
6-2. Hours Meter Initialize the Resetable Hours Meter
Operating Instructions Resetting of Setup Menu Data
Chapter 6. Setup Menu
SV-212 board 5. Maintenance Menu 5-3-3. Servo Adjust
S/T-REEL & CAPSTAN Adjustment
TENTION Adjustment
SY-278 board 5. Maintenance Menu 5-3-1. Menu Data Control
MENU/SW DATA SAVE/LOAD
RP-111 board 5. Maintenance Menu 5-3-5. Electrical Adjust
PLL F0 Adjustment
EQ (DVCAM) Adjustment
EQ (DV) Adjustment
VPR-62 board 10-3. Video Adjustment 10-3-1. to 10-3-32.
Section 9
Adjustment When Replacing Board
10-1
DSR-2000/2000P
Section 10
Electrical Alignment
VPR-62
CT500 SPCK Error ................................................ 10-21
RV101 REC S VIDEO Chroma Level................... 10-29
RV103 REC A/D Y Level ..................................... 10-26
RV200 REC COMPOSITE Y Level...................... 10-27
RV201 REC COMPOSITE Chroma Level............ 10-28
RV202 REC COMPOSITE Chroma Level............ 10-28
RV300 COMPOSITE 4Fsc PLL DC ..................... 10-22
RV400 REC Y Level ............................................. 10-24
RV401 REC COMPONENT B-Y Level ............... 10-25
RV402 REC COMPONENT R-Y Level ............... 10-25
RV403 REC Y Clamp Level.................................. 10-23
RV404 REC COMPOSITE Y/B-Y Delay ............. 10-30
RV405 REC S VIDEO Y/B-Y Delay .................... 10-32
RV406 REC COMPONENT Y/B-Y Delay ........... 10-31
RV407 REC COMPOSITE Y/R-Y Delay ............. 10-30
RV408 REC S VIDEO Y/R-Y Delay .................... 10-32
RV409 REC COMPONENT Y/R-Y Delay ........... 10-31
RV602 PB COMPOSITE Y/C Delay .................... 10-16
RV603 PB COMPOSITE C/C Delay..................... 10-15
RV604 PB COMPONENT Y/B-Y Delay .............. 10-17
RV605 COMPONENT B-Y OUT Level ................. 10-7
RV606 PB COMPONENT Y/R-Y Delay .............. 10-17
RV607 COMPONENT R-Y OUT Level ................. 10-8
RV701 ENC R-Y Level ......................................... 10-13
RV702 ENC B-Y Level ......................................... 10-13
RV703 ENC V SC Leak ........................................ 10-11
RV704 ENC U SC Leak ........................................ 10-11
RV705 PB Burst Level .......................................... 10-14
RV801 COMPONENT Y OUT Level ..................... 10-7
RV802 PB S VIDEO Chroma Level...................... 10-15
RV803 VIDEO OUT 1 Video/Sync Level .............. 10-9
RV804 VIDEO OUT 1 Video/Sync Level .............. 10-9
RV805 COMPONENT Y OUT Level ..................... 10-7
RV806 VIDEO OUT 3 Y Level ............................ 10-10
RV901 REF. INT SCH Phase ................................ 10-20
RV902 U-V Axis (B-Y, R-Y) Phase...................... 10-12
RV903 PB INT SCH Phase ................................... 10-18
RV904 REF. VIDEO OUT Sync Level ................. 10-19
RV906 REF. VIDEO OUT Burst Level ................ 10-19
RV1001 HCK Frequency ........................................... 10-6
RV1002 INT SC Frequency ...................................... 10-6
10-1. Electrical Alignment Overview
10-1-1. List of Adjustment Parts
APR-45
RV1 CH-1 EE Level ............................................ 10-3
RV4 CH-2 EE Level ............................................ 10-3
RV101 CH-3 EE Level ............................................ 10-3
RV104 CH-4 EE Level ............................................ 10-3
RV201 CH-1 OUTPUT Level ................................. 10-3
RV202 CH-2 OUTPUT Level ................................. 10-3
RV203 CH-3 OUTPUT Level ................................. 10-3
RV204 CH-4 OUTPUT Level ................................. 10-3
RV701 SDTI IN FREE RUN ................................. 10-33
RV751 SDTI OUT FREE RUN ............................. 10-33
RV801 SDI IN FREE RUN ................................... 10-33
RV1501 SDI OUT FREE RUN ............................... 10-33
RV1551 SDI OUT FREE RUN ............................... 10-33
10-2 DSR-2000/2000P
10-1-2. Measuring Equipment and Tools
Type of measuring equipment Equivalent Remarks
Oscilloscope Tektronix 2445 150 MHz or more
Video signal generator TSG-130A (Op.02) for NTSC
TSG-131A (Op.02) for PAL
Waveform monitor Tektronix 1760 Op. SC/1765 Op. SC
Audio signal generator HP339A
Audio level meter HP3400A/MeguroMN-446
Frequency counter Advantest TR5821
Extension board DJ-493 (J-6444-930-A)
Blank tape DVM30ME, DVM30NME On the market
10-1-3. Reference Tape for Alignment
XH5-1A2 (8-967-999-22) (for NTSC)
Recording contents are followings.
*1 Audio levels are __
__
_20 dBFS (Reference), except 1 kHz 0 dBFS part.
10-1. Electrical Alignment Overview
10-1-2. Measuring Equipment and Tools
10-1-3. Reference Tape for Alignment
VIDEO
Black Burst
75 % Full Color Bars
60 % Multi Burst
Bowtie with Mod 12.5T
Shallow Ramp
Cross Hatch (index)
Line 17
75 % Full Color Bars
Quad Phase
Black Burst
60 % Multi Burst (for Composite)
Mod 12.5T
Shallow Ramp (B-Y/R-Y OFF)
Cross Hatch (index)
Chroma Noise
Line 17
75 % Full Color Bars
60 % Multi Burst
Mod 12.5T
Shallow Ramp
75 % Full Color Bars
75 % Full Color Bars (R-Y OFF)
75 % Full Color Bars (B-Y OFF)
Blanking Marker
Line 17 (R-Y OFF)
Line 17 (B-Y OFF)
TIME CODE
(h) (m) (s)
23 : 59 : 00
00 : 00
01 : 00
02 : 00
02 : 30
03 : 00
03 : 30
04 : 00
04 : 40
05 : 20
06 : 00
06 : 40
06 : 45
06 : 50
07 : 50
08 : 20
08 : 50
09 : 20
09 : 50
10 : 20
10 : 50
13 : 50
14 : 50
15 : 20
16 : 20
18 : 00
21 : 00
24 : 00
27 : 00
30 : 00
REC
(s)
60
60
60
30
30
30
30
40
40
40
40
5
5
60
30
30
30
30
30
30
180
60
30
60
100
180
180
180
180
180
No Signal
1 kHz
20 Hz
14.5 kHz
10 kHz
No Signal
1 kHz 0 dBFS
1 ch
2 ch 1 kHz
3 ch
4 ch
No Signal
1 kHz
20 Hz
20 kHz
10 kHz
1 kHz 0 dBFS
1 kHz
32 kHz
4 ch
48 kHz
2 ch
AUDIO
10-3
DSR-2000/2000P
XH5-1AP2 (8-967-999-26) (for PAL)
Recording contents are followings.
*1 Audio levels are __
__
_18 dBFS (Reference), except 1 kHz 0 dBFS part.
VIDEO
Black Burst
100 % Full Color Bars
60 % Multi Burst
Bowtie with Mod 10T
Shallow Ramp
Cross Hatch (index)
Line 17
100 % Full Color Bars
Quad Phase
Black Burst
60 % Multi Burst (for Composite)
Mod 10T
Shallow Ramp (B-Y/R-Y OFF)
Cross Hatch (index)
Chroma Noise
Line 17
100 % Full Color Bars
60 % Multi Burst
Mod 10T
Shallow Ramp
100 % Full Color Bars
100 % Full Color Bars (R-Y OFF)
100 % Full Color Bars (B-Y OFF)
Blanking Marker
Line 17 (R-Y OFF)
Line 17 (B-Y OFF)
TIME CODE
(h) (m) (s)
23 : 59 : 00
00 : 00
01 : 00
02 : 00
02 : 30
03 : 00
03 : 30
04 : 00
04 : 40
05 : 20
06 : 00
06 : 40
06 : 45
06 : 50
07 : 50
08 : 20
08 : 50
09 : 20
09 : 50
10 : 20
10 : 50
13 : 50
14 : 50
15 : 20
16 : 20
18 : 00
21 : 00
24 : 00
27 : 00
30 : 00
REC
(s)
60
60
60
30
30
30
30
40
40
40
40
5
5
60
30
30
30
30
30
30
180
60
30
60
100
180
180
180
180
180
No Signal
1 kHz
20 Hz
14.5 kHz
10 kHz
No Signal
1 kHz 0 dBFS
1 ch
2 ch 1 kHz
3 ch
4 ch
No Signal
1 kHz
20 Hz
20 kHz
10 kHz
1 kHz 0 dBFS
1 kHz
32 kHz
4 ch
48 kHz
2 ch
AUDIO
10-1. Electrical Alignment Overview
10-1-3. Reference Tape for Alignment
10-4 DSR-2000/2000P
Specification
AUDIO OUTPUT 1/3 & 2/4 (600 Z loaded)
Spec. +4.0 ±0.1 dBm
Specification
AUDIO OUTPUT 1/3 & 2/4 (600 Z loaded)
Spec. +4.0 ±0.3 dBm
Conditions for adjustment
.MENU
ENHANCED
↓
AU REF LEVEL ; _20 dB (for NTSC)
_18 dB (for PAL)
OUTPUT LEVEL ; +4 dB
VIDEO INPUT SELECT ; SG
AUDIO INPUT SELECT ; SG
.AUDIO REC & PB AUDIO VR/
Control panel ; PRESET
.PB mode
1 kHz Ref. level (32 kHz ; 4CH)/SG (1 kHz)
10-2. Audio Adjustment
10-2-1. Audio OUTPUT Level Adjustment
10-2-2. Audio EE Level Adjustment
Adjustment
CH-1 ;
1RV201/APR-45 (L-1)
CH-2 ;
1RV202/APR-45 (L-1)
CH-3 ;
1RV203/APR-45 (L-1)
CH-4 ;
1RV204/APR-45 (M-1)
Conditions for adjustment
.MENU
ENHANCED
↓
AU REF LEVEL ; _20 dB (for NTSC)
_18 dB (for PAL)
OUTPUT LEVEL ; +4 dB
VIDEO INPUT SELECT ; SG
AUDIO INPUT SELECT ; ANALOG
.AUDIO REC & PB AUDIO VR/
Control panel ; PRESET
.AUDIO INPUT CH-1/CH-2/CH-3/CH-4 ;
1 kHz, +4 dBu
.EE mode
Adjustment
CH-1 ;
1RV1/APR-45 (M-3)
CH-2 ;
1RV4/APR-45 (N-3)
CH-3 ;
1RV101/APR-45 (P-3)
CH-4 ;
1RV104/APR-45 (P-3)
10-2. Audio Adjustment
10-2-1. Audio OUTPUT Level Adjustment
10-5
DSR-2000/2000P
10-3. Video Adjustment
[Switch Setting]
For NTSC
This setting should be fixed in position unless otherwise specified.
LOCAL/REMOTE ; LOCAL PROCESS CONTROL ; LOCAL
CHARACTER ; ON VIDEO
MENU ITEM 713-1, INPUT LEVEL ; 0.0 % CHROMA
MENU ITEM 713-2, OUTPUT LEVEL ; 0.0 % SET UP ; PRESET
Y/C DELAY
HUE
For PAL
LOCAL/REMOTE ; LOCAL VIDEO
CHARACTER ; ON Y/C DELAY ; PRESET
PROCESS CONTROL ; LOCAL
[Connection]
Connect some equipment as following unless otherwise specified.
(Connection 1)
(Connection 2)
10-3. Video Adjustment
EXT REF
CH-1
CH-2
CH-3
WFM or Oscilloscope
(Terminated at 75 Z)
COMPONENT OUT
TP
REF. VIDEO IN
(75 Z : OFF)
DSR-2000/2000P
COMPONENT IN
Oscilloscope
Video signal generator
(NTSC : TSG-130A)
(PAL : TSG-131A) BB
Oscilloscope
A
EXT REF
WFM
(VIDEO OUT 3)
(VIDEO OUT 2)
REF.VIDEO OUT
S VIDEO OUT
VIDEO OUT 1
Video signal genelator
(NTSC : TSG-130A)
(PAL : TSG-131A)
TP
REF. VIDEO IN
(75 Z : OFF)
DSR-2000/2000P
VIDEO IN (75 Z : ON)
S VIDEO IN
BB
10-6 DSR-2000/2000P
Specification
TP1004/VPR-62 (G-4)
Spec. f = 13,500,000 ±35 Hz
Conditions for adjustment
Oscilloscope or voltmeter
.STOP mode
Connection 1
Specification
1Mesure the voltage (Vo) at TP1003/
VPR-62 (H-4).
2Measure the voltage at the center terminal
of RV1002.
Spec. V = Vo ±0.1 Vdc
Conditions for adjustment
Frequency counter
.STOP mode
.REF. VIDEO IN ; No signal
.VIDEO IN Select ; Composite
.VIDEO IN ; No signal
10-3-1. INT SC Frequency Adjustment
10-3-2. HCK Frequency Adjustment
(Connection)
Adjustment
1RV1002/VPR-62 (G-4)
Adjustment
1RV1001/VPR-62 (G-4)
10-3. Video Adjustment
10-3-1. INT SC Frequency Adjustment
Oscilloscope
Frequency counter
Video signal generator
(NTSC : TSG-130A)
(PAL : TSG-131A)
TP
REF. VIDEO IN
VIDEO IN
DSR-2000/2000P
No. REF.
RV1002
Voltage measuring point
10-7
DSR-2000/2000P
Specification
COMPONENT Y OUT (75 Z terminated)
(A) Y/S-Y Level
(B) Y/S-Y SYNC
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
Spec.
[For NTSC]
A = 0.714 ±0.007 V (100 ±1 IRE)
B = 0.286 ±0.003 V (40 ±0.5 IRE)
[For PAL]
A = 0.700 ±0.007 V
B = 0.300 ±0.003 V
Specification
COMPONENT B-Y OUT (75 Z terminated)
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
Spec.
[For NTSC]
A = 0.700 ±0.007 V (98 ±1 IRE)
[For PAL]
A = 0.700 ±0.700 V
Conditions for adjustment
[For NTSC]
WFM or Oscilloscope
.
MENU ITEM 713-2, OUTPUT LEVEL ; 7.5 %
.PB mode
75 % Color bars/XH5-1A2
[For PAL]
WFM or Oscilloscope
.PB mode
100 % Color bars/XH5-1AP2
Connection 1
10-3-3. COMPONENT Y OUT Level Adjustment
10-3-4. COMPONENT B-Y OUT Level Adjustment
Adjustment
1RV801/VPR-62 (M-4)
1RV805/VPR-62 (L-4)
Conditions for adjustment
[For NTSC]
WFM or Oscilloscope
.
MENU ITEM 713-2, OUTPUT LEVEL ; 7.5 %
.PB mode
75 % Color bars/XH5-1A2
[For PAL]
WFM or Oscilloscope
.PB mode
100 % Color bars/XH5-1AP2
Connection 1
Adjustment
1RV605/VPR-62 (K-4)
10-3. Video Adjustment
10-3-3. COMPONENT Y OUT Level Adjustment
10-3-4. COMPONENT B-Y OUT Level Adjustment
A
B
10-8 DSR-2000/2000P
Specification
COMPONENT R-Y OUT (75 Z terminated)
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
Spec.
[For NTSC]
A = 0.700 ±0.007 V p-p (98 ±1 IRE)
[For PAL]
A = 0.700 ± 0.007 V p-p
Specification
COMPONENT R-Y OUT (75 Z terminated)
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
Spec. A = 0.757 ±0.007 V p-p (106 ±1 IRE)
Conditions for adjustment
[For NTSC]
WFM or Oscilloscope
.
MENU ITEM 713-2, OUTPUT LEVEL ; 7.5 %
.PB mode
75 % Color bars/XH5-1A2
[For PAL]
WFM or Oscilloscope
.PB mode
100 % Color bars/XH5-1AP2
Connection 1
10-3-5. COMPONENT R-Y OUT Level Adjustment
10-3-6. SETUP OFF Chroma Level Check (NTSC only)
Adjustment
1RV607/VPR-62 (K-3)
Conditions for adjustment
WFM or Oscilloscope
.PB mode
75 % Color bars/XH5-1A2
n
Check that MENU ITEM 713-2,
OUTPUT LEVEL ; 0.0 %
Connection 1
Adjustment
10-3. Video Adjustment
10-3-5. COMPONENT R-Y OUT Level Adjustment
10-3-6. SETUP OFF Chroma Level Check
10-9
DSR-2000/2000P
Specification
S VIDEO (Y) OUT (75 Z terminated)
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
Spec.
[For NTSC]
A = 0.714 ±0.007 V (100 ±1 IRE)
[For PAL]
A = 0.700 ±0.007 V
Specification
VIDEO OUT 1 (75 Z terminated)
(A) Video Level
(B) Sync Level
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
Spec.
[For NTSC]
A = 0.714 ±0.007 V (100 ±1 IRE)
B = 0.286 ±0.003 V (40 ±0.5 IRE)
[For PAL]
A = 0.700 ±0.007 V
B = 0.300 ±0.003
Conditions for adjustment
WFM or Oscilloscope
.PB mode
75 % Color bars/XH5-1A2 (for NTSC)
100 % Color bars/XH5-1AP2 (for PAL)
Connection 2
10-3-7. S VIDEO OUT Y Level Check
10-3-8. VIDEO OUT 1 Video/Sync Level Adjustment
Adjustment
Conditions for adjustment
WFM or Oscilloscope
.PB mode
75 % Color bars/XH5-1A2 (for NTSC)
100 % Color bars/XH5-1AP2 (for PAL)
Connection 2
Adjustment
1RV803/VPR-62 (M-4)
1RV804/VPR-62 (L-4)
10-3. Video Adjustment
10-3-7. S VIDEO OUT Y Level Check
10-3-8. VIDEO OUT 1 Video/Sync Level Adjustment
A
B
A
10-10 DSR-2000/2000P
Specification
VIDEO OUT 2 (75 Z terminated)
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
Spec.
[For NTSC]
A = 0.714 ±0.007 V (100 ±1 IRE)
[For PAL]
A = 0.700 ±0.007 V
Specification
VIDEO OUT 3 (75 Z terminated)
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
Spec.
[For NTSC]
A = 0.714 ±0.007 V (100 ±1 IRE)
[For PAL]
A = 0.700 ±0.007 V
Conditions for adjustment
WFM or Oscilloscope
.PB mode
75 % Color bars/XH5-1A2 (for NTSC)
100 % Color bars/XH5-1AP2 (for PAL)
Connection 2
10-3-9. VIDEO OUT 2 Video Level Check
10-3-10. VIDEO OUT 3 Y Level Adjustment
Adjustment
Conditions for adjustment
WFM or Oscilloscope
.PB mode
75 % Color bars/XH5-1A2 (for NTSC)
100 % Color bars/XH5-1AP2 (for PAL)
Connection 2
Adjustment
1RV806/VPR-62 (L-4)
10-3. Video Adjustment
10-3-9. VIDEO OUT 2 Video Level Check
10-3-10. VIDEO OUT 3 Y Level Adjustment
A
A
10-11
DSR-2000/2000P
Conditions for adjustment
Step 1
.PB mode
75 % Color bars/XH5-1A2 (for NTSC)
100 % Color bars/XH5-1AP2 (for PAL)
.Set the time axis of the WFM to magnifi-
cation mode
Connection 2
Step 2 (Check)
.PB mode
75 % Color bars/XH5-1A2 (for NTSC)
100 % Color bars/XH5-1AP2 (for PAL)
Connection 2
Specification
VIDEO OUT 1 (75 Z terminated)
(A) V SC Leak
(B) U SC Leak
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
WFM
(Spec. Adjust the A and B alternately.)
Spec. Minimize the A, B.
A, B < 0.007 V (1 IRE)
VIDEO OUT 1 (75 Z terminated)
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
Vector
Spec. Maximum the gain of the Vector and
check the dot is at center.
10-3-11. ENC SC Leak Adjustment
Adjustment
1RV703/VPR-62 (D-1)
1RV704/VPR-62 (D-1)
10-3. Video Adjustment
10-3-11. ENC SC Leak Adjustment
10-12 DSR-2000/2000P
Specification
VIDEO OUT 1 (75 Z terminated)
(A) Burst preset
(B) V-axis (U/V OFFSET)
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
Vector
(Before adjustment)
(After Adjustment)
Spec. (A) Set the dot of the burst in the right
position on the scale.
(B) Set the dots of the R-Y on the V
axis of the vector.
C = 0 ±0.5 d
Conditions for adjustment
.PB mode
[Flow]
(A) Burst preset
.PB mode
Quad Phase/XH5-1A2 or XH5-1AP2
(05:20-06:00)
(B) V-axis phase adjustment
.PB mode
Quad Phase/XH5-1A2 or XH5-1AP2
(05:20-06:00)
Connection 2
10-3-12. U-V Axis (B-Y, R-Y) Phase Adjustment
Adjustment
1PHASE control/Vector
1RV902/VPR-62 (F-1)
10-3. Video Adjustment
10-3-12. U-V Axis (B-Y, R-Y) Phase Adjustment
Burst
10-13
DSR-2000/2000P
Specification
VIDEO OUT 1 (75 Z terminated)
Step 1 Chroma Level
(A) Burst preset
(B) ENC R-Y LEVEL
ENC B-Y LEVEL
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
Vector (for NTSC)
Vector (for PAL)
Spec. (A) Set the dot of the burst in the right
position on the scale.
(B) All dots should be inside the “4”
mark on the vector by adjustment
RV200 and RV201 alternately.
Conditions for adjustment
WFM or Oscilloscope
.PB mode
75 % Color bars/XH5-1A2 (for NTSC)
100 % Color bars/XH5-1AP2 (for PAL)
n
The “Setup ON/OFF” setting of the DSR-
2000 and that a vectorscope must have
been set to the same position beforehand.
Connection 2
10-3-13. PB VIDEO OUT 1 Chroma/Burst Level Adjustment
Adjustment
1PHASE control/Vector
1RV701/VPR-62 (D-1)
1RV702/VPR-62 (C-1)
10-3. Video Adjustment
10-3-13. PB VIDEO OUT 1 Chroma/Burst Level Adjustment
10-14 DSR-2000/2000P
Conditions for adjustment
WFM or Oscilloscope
.PB mode
75 % Color bars/XH5-1A2 (for NTSC)
100 % Color bars/XH5-1AP2 (for PAL)
Connection 2
Specification
Step 2 Burst Level
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
Spec.
[For NTSC]
A = 0.286 ±0.003 V (40 ±0.5 IRE)
[For PAL]
A = 0.300 ±0.003 V
Adjustment
1RV705/VPR-62 (D-2)
10-3. Video Adjustment
10-3-13. PB VIDEO OUT 1 Chroma/Burst Level Adjustment
10-15
DSR-2000/2000P
Specification
CH-1/Oscilloscope
TP602/VPR-62 (D-2)
CH-2/Oscilloscope
TP603/VPR-62 (D-1)
Conditions for adjustment
WFM or Oscilloscope
.
MENU ITEM 713-2, OUTPUT LEVEL ; 7.5 %
.PB mode
75 % Color bars/XH5-1A2 (for NTSC)
100 % Color bars/XH5-1AP2 (for PAL)
Connection 2
Specification
S VIDEO (C) OUT (75 Z terminated)
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
Spec.
[For NTSC]
A = 0.627 ±0.007 V p-p (87.7 ±1 IRE)
[For PAL]
A = 0.885 ±0.006 V p-p
10-3-14. PB S VIDEO Chroma Level Adjustment
10-3-15. PB COMPOSITE C/C Delay Adjustment
Adjustment
1RV802/VPR-62 (N-5)
Conditions for adjustment
Oscilloscope
Vertical mode : INV +ADD
.PB mode
Bowtie/XH5-1A2 or XH5-1AP2
(02:00-02:30)
Connection 2
Adjustment
1RV603/VPR-62 (B-1)
10-3. Video Adjustment
10-3-14. PB S VIDEO Chroma Level Adjustment
10-3-15. PB COMPOSITE C/C Delay Adjustment
Spec. Minimize
10-16 DSR-2000/2000P
Conditions for adjustment
.PB mode
Mod 12.5T/XH5-1A2 or XH5-1AP2
(07:50-08:20)
Connection 2
Specification
VIDEO OUT 1 (75 Z terminated)
TRIG : INT/WFM
WFM
10-3-16. PB COMPOSITE Y/C Delay Adjustment
Adjustment
1RV602/VPR-62 (B-1)
10-3. Video Adjustment
10-3-16. PB COMPOSITE Y/C Delay Adjustment
10-17
DSR-2000/2000P
Conditions for adjustment
.PB mode
Bowtie/XH5-1A2 or XH5-1AP2
(02:00-02:30)
Connection 1
Specification
COMPONENT OUT (75 Z terminated)
(A) B-Y Delay
(B) R-Y Delay
TRIG : INT/WFM
Bowtie mode
Spec. Set the each Bowtie dip point of (A)
and (B) on the center marker.
0 ±20 ns
10-3-17. PB COMPONENT Y/C Delay Adjustment
Adjustment
1RV604/VPR-62 (J-4)
1RV606/VPR-62 (J-3)
10-3. Video Adjustment
10-3-17. PB COMPONENT Y/C Delay Adjustment
[Connection for reference] Using for an oscilloscope
DSR-2000/2000P
(B)
(A)
(A) 1RV308
(B) 1RV309
INV/ADD mode
TRIG : CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
COMPONENT R-Y OUT
COMPONENT B-Y OUT
COMPONENT Y OUT
Oscilloscope
10-18 DSR-2000/2000P
Specification
VIDEO OUT 1 (75 Z terminated)
(A) Burst Preset
(B) INT SC
TRIG : INT/WFM
SCH mode
Spec. (A) Set the dot of the burst in the right
position on the scale.
(B) The SYNC should be in the same
phase as the burst (SCH = 0 d).
Conditions for adjustment
.PB mode
75 % Color bars/XH5-1A2 (for NTSC)
100 % Color bars/XH5-1AP2 (for PAL)
.REF. VIDEO INPUT ; No signal
.AFTER ADJUSTMENT IS COMPLETED,
RE-CONNECT THE REF. VIDEO INPUT.
Connection 2
10-3-18. PB INT SCH Phase Adjustment
Adjustment
1PHASE control/Vector
1RV903/VPR-62 (F-1)
10-3. Video Adjustment
10-3-18. PB INT SCH Phase Adjustment
10-19
DSR-2000/2000P
Specification
REF. VIDEO OUT (75 Z terminated)
(A) Sync Level
(B) Burst Level
TRIG : INT/WFM
Spec.
[For NTSC]
A, B = 0.286 ±0.003 V (40 ±0.5 IRE)
[For PAL]
A, B = 0.300 ±0.003 V
Conditions for adjustment
WFM or Oscilloscope
.PB mode
75 % Color bars/XH5-1A2 (for NTSC)
100 % Color bars/XH5-1AP2 (for PAL)
.REF. VIDEO INPUT ; No signal
.AFTER ADJUSTMENT IS COMPLETED,
RE-CONNECT THE REF. VIDEO INPUT.
Connection 2
10-3-19. REF. VIDEO OUT Sync/Burst Level Adjustment
Adjustment
1RV904/VPR-62 (L-3)
1RV906/VPR-62 (M-3)
10-3. Video Adjustment
10-3-19. REF. VIDEO OUT Sync/Burst Level Adjustment
10-20 DSR-2000/2000P
Specification
REF. VIDEO OUT (75 Z terminated)
(A) Burst Preset
(B) Sync Phase
TRIG : INT/WFM
SCH mode
Spec. (A) Set the dot of the burst in the right
position on the scale.
(B) The SYNC should be in the same
phase as the burst. (SCH = 0 ±3 d)
Conditions for adjustment
.PB mode
75 % Color bars/XH5-1A2 (for NTSC)
100 % Color bars/XH5-1AP2 (for PAL)
.REF. VIDEO INPUT ; No signal
.AFTER ADJUSTMENT IS COMPLETED,
RE-CONNECT THE REF. VIDEO INPUT.
Connection 2
Adjustment
1PHASE control/Vector
1RV901/VPR-62 (L-3)
10-3-20. REF. INT SCH Phase Adjustment
10-3. Video Adjustment
10-3-20. REF. INT SCH Phase Adjustment
10-21
DSR-2000/2000P
Video signal generator
(NTSC : TSG-130A)
(PAL : TSG-131A)
VIDEO IN
REF VIDEO INBB
75 % CB (NTSC)
100 % CB (PAL) DSR-2000/2000P
Specification
TP500/VPR-62 (A-3)
Spec. A = 1.5 ±0.1 V dc
Conditions for adjustment
Oscilloscope
.EE mode
.VIDEO IN ; 75 % Color bars (for NTSC)
100 % Color bars (for PAL)
10-3-21. SPCK Error Adjustment
(Connection)
Adjustment
1CT500/VPR-62 (A-4)
10-3. Video Adjustment
10-3-21. SPCK Error Adjustment
10-22 DSR-2000/2000P
Specification
TP301/VPR-62 (P-2)
[Check]
Spec. A = 2.5 ±0.5 V dc
TP300/VPR-62 (P-2)
Spec. A = 2.5 ±0.5 V dc
Conditions for adjustment
Oscilloscope
.EE mode
.VIDEO IN ; 75 % Color bars (for NTSC)
100 % Color bars (for PAL)
.VIDEO IN select/MENU ; COMPOSITE
Connection 1
10-3-22. COMPOSITE 4Fsc PLL DC Check/Adjustment
Adjustment
1RV300/VPR-62 (P-2)
10-3. Video Adjustment
10-3-22. COMPOSITE 4Fsc PLL DC Check/Adjustment
10-23
DSR-2000/2000P
Conditions for adjustment
WFM or Oscilloscope
.EE mode
.COMPONENT IN ; Pluse & Bar
n
Check that only NTSC MENU ITEM 713-1,
INPUT
LEVEL ; 0.0 %
Connection 1
Specification
COMPONENT Y OUT (75 Z terminated)
Spec. A = Minimize the level difference A at
setup.
10-3-23. REC Y Clamp Level Adjustment
Adjustment
1RV403/VPR-62 (J-2)
10-3. Video Adjustment
10-3-23. REC Y Clamp Level Adjustment
A
10-24 DSR-2000/2000P
Conditions for adjustment
WFM or Oscilloscope
.EE mode
.COMPONENT IN ;
75 % Color bars (for NTSC)
100 % Color bars (for PAL)
Connection 1
Specification
COMPONENT Y OUT (75 Z terminated)
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
Spec.
[For NTSC]
A = 0.714 ±0.007 V (100 ±1 IRE)
[For PAL]
A = 0.700 ±0.007 V
10-3-24. REC Y Level Adjustment
Adjustment
1RV400/VPR-62 (J-2)
10-3. Video Adjustment
10-3-24. REC Y Level Adjustment
10-25
DSR-2000/2000P
Conditions for adjustment
WFM or Oscilloscope
.EE mode
.COMPONENT IN ;
75 % Color bars (for NTSC)
100 % Color bars (for PAL)
Connection 1
Specification
COMPONENT R-Y OUT (75 Z terminated)
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
Spec.
[For NTSC]
A = 0.700 ±0.007 V p-p (98 ±1 IRE)
[For PAL]
A = 0.700 ±0.007 V p-p
10-3-25. REC COMPONENT R-Y Level Adjustment
Adjustment
1RV402/VPR-62 (K-2)
Conditions for adjustment
WFM or Oscilloscope
.EE mode
.COMPONENT IN ;
75 % Color bars (for NTSC)
100 % Color bars (for PAL)
Connection 1
Specification
COMPONENT B-Y OUT (75 Z terminated)
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
Spec.
[For NTSC]
A = 0.700 ±0.007 V p-p (98 ±1 IRE)
[For PAL]
A = 0.700 ±0.007 V p-p
10-3-26. REC COMPONENT B-Y Level Adjustment
Adjustment
1RV401/VPR-62 (K-1)
10-3. Video Adjustment
10-3-25. REC COMPONENT R-Y Level Adjustment
10-3-26. REC COMPONENT B-Y Level Adjustment
10-26 DSR-2000/2000P
Specification
COMPONENT Y OUT (75 Z terminated)
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
Spec.
[For NTSC]
A = 0 ±0.007 V (0 ±1 IRE)
[For PAL]
A = 0 ±0.007 V
Conditions for adjustment
WFM or Oscilloscope
.EE mode
.VIDEO IN ; 75 % Color bars (for NTSC)
100 % Color bars (for PAL)
.VIDEO IN select/MENU ; COMPOSITE
.S101-1/SV-212 (L-1) ; ON
.S200/VPR-62 (M-1) ; ON
.After Adjustment, S101-1, S200 ; OFF
10-3-27. REC A/D Y Level Adjustment
(Connection)
Adjustment
1RV103/VPR-62 (P-5)
10-3. Video Adjustment
10-3-27. REC A/D Y Level Adjustment
Video signal generator
(NTSC : TSG-130A)
(PAL : TSG-131A)
VIDEO IN
REF VIDEO INBB
75 % CB (for NTSC)
100 % CB (for PAL)
DSR-2000/2000P
COMPONENT
Y OUT
WFM or Oscilloscope
10-27
DSR-2000/2000P
Specification
VIDEO OUT 1 (75 Z terminated)
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
Spec.
[For NTSC]
A = 0.714 ±0.007 V (100 ±1 IRE)
[For PAL]
A = 0.700 ±0.007 V
Conditions for adjustment
WFM or Oscilloscope
.EE mode
.VIDEO IN ; 75 % Color bars (for NTSC)
100 % Color bars (for PAL)
.VIDEO IN select/MENU ; COMPOSITE
Connection 2
10-3-28. REC COMPOSITE Y Level Adjustment
Adjustment
1RV200/VPR-62 (L-1)
10-3. Video Adjustment
10-3-28. REC COMPOSITE Y Level Adjustment
A
10-28 DSR-2000/2000P
Specification
VIDEO OUT 1 (75 Z terminated)
(A) Burst
(B) Composite Chroma Level
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
Vector (for NTSC)
Vector (for PAL)
Spec. (A) Set the dot of the burst in the right
position on the scale.
(B) All dots should be inside the “4”
mark on the vector.
Conditions for adjustment
.EE mode
.VIDEO IN ; 75 % Color bars (for NTSC)
100 % Color bars (for PAL)
.VIDEO IN select/MENU ; COMPOSITE
n
The “Setup ON/OFF” setting of the DSR-
2000 and that a vectorscope must have
been set to the same position beforehand.
Connection 2
10-3-29. REC COMPOSITE Chroma Level Adjustment
Adjustment
1PHASE control/Vector
1RV201/VPR-62 (L-1)
1RV202/VPR-62 (M-1)
10-3. Video Adjustment
10-3-29. REC COMPOSITE Chroma Level Adjustment
10-29
DSR-2000/2000P
Specification
S VIDEO (C) OUT (75 Z terminated)
(A) Burst
(B) S-C Level
TRIG : REF. VIDEO
Vector (for NTSC)
Vector (for PAL)
Spec. (A) Set the dot of the burst in the right
position on the scale.
(B) All dots should be inside the “4”
mark on the vector.
Conditions for adjustment
.EE mode
.S VIDEO IN ; 75 % Color bars (for NTSC)
100 % Color bars (for PAL)
.VIDEO IN select/MENU ; S VIDEO
n
The “Setup ON/OFF” setting of the DSR-
2000 and that a vectorscope must have
been set to the same position beforehand.
Connection 2
10-3-30. REC S VIDEO Chroma Level Adjustment
Adjustment
1PHASE control/Vector
1RV101/VPR-62 (P-6)
10-3. Video Adjustment
10-3-30. REC S VIDEO Chroma Level Adjustment
10-30 DSR-2000/2000P
Specification
COMPONENT OUT (75 Z terminated)
B-Y
R-Y
Spec. 0 ±20 ns
Conditions for adjustment
.EE mode
.VIDEO IN ; 75 % Color bars (for NTSC)
100 % Color bars (for PAL)
.VIDEO IN select/MENU ; COMPOSITE
10-3-31. REC COMPOSITE Y/C Delay Adjustment
(Connection)
Adjustment
B-Y : 1RV404/VPR-62
(K-1)
R-Y : 1RV407/VPR-62
(K-2)
10-3. Video Adjustment
10-3-31. REC COMPOSITE Y/C Delay Adjustment
DSR-2000/2000P
BB REF. VIDEO IN
VIDEO IN
Video signal generator
(NTSC : TSG-130A)
(PAL : TSG-131A)
COMPOSITE
CH-1
CH-2
TRIG
Oscilloscope
Y
B-Y
R-Y
COMPONENT OUT
Y
50% Level point
B-Y
R-Y
A portion
A portion
(Detail of A portion)
10-31
DSR-2000/2000P
Conditions for adjustment
.EE mode
.COMPONENT IN ; Bowtie
Connection 1
Specification
COMPONENT OUT (75 Z terminated)
(A) B-Y Delay
(B) R-Y Delay
TRIG : INT/WFM
Bowtie mode
Spec. Set the each Bowtie dip point of (A)
and (B) on the center marker.
0 ±20 ns
10-3-32. REC COMPONENT Y/C Delay Adjustment
Adjustment
1RV406/VPR-62 (K-1)
1RV409/VPR-62 (K-2)
10-3. Video Adjustment
10-3-32. REC COMPONENT Y/C Delay Adjustment
DSR-2000/2000P
(B)
(A)
(A) 1RV406
(B) 1RV409
INV/ADD mode
TRIG : CH-1
CH-2
CH-1
COMPONENT R-Y OUT
COMPONENT B-Y OUT
COMPONENT Y OUT
[Connection for reference] Using for an oscilloscope
Oscilloscope
10-32 DSR-2000/2000P
Specification
COMPONENT OUT (75 Z terminated)
B-Y
R-Y
Spec. 0 ±20 ns
Conditions for adjustment
.EE mode
.S VIDEO IN ; 75 % Color bars (for NTSC)
100 % Color bars (for PAL)
.VIDEO IN select/MENU ; S VIDEO
10-3-33. REC S VIDEO Y/C Delay Adjustment
(Connection)
Adjustment
B-Y : 1RV405/VPR-62
(K-1)
R-Y : 1RV408/VPR-62
(K-2)
10-3. Video Adjustment
10-3-33. REC S VIDEO Y/C Delay Adjustment
DSR-2000/2000P
BB REF. VIDEO IN
S VIDEO IN
Video signal generator
(NTSC : TSG-130A)
(PAL : TSG-131A)
S
CH-1
CH-2
TRIG
Oscilloscope
Y
B-Y
R-Y
COMPONENT OUT
Y
50% Level point
B-Y
R-Y
A portion
A portion
(Detail of A portion)
10-33
DSR-2000/2000P
Adjustment
1RV751/APR-45 (A-1)
1RV1501/APR-45 (A-1)
1RV1551/APR-45 (F-1)
1RV701/APR-45 (A-2)
1RV801/APR-45 (C-2)
Conditions for adjustment
Step 1
.E-E mode
.Connect jumper wire between TP1501/
APR-45 (C-2) and E704/APR-45 (A-1).
.After adjustment, remove jumper wire.
Step 2
.E-E mode
.Connect jumper wire between TP1551/
APR-45 (E-2) and E1501/APR-45 (E-1).
.After adjustment, remove jumper wire.
.E-E mode
.Connect jumper wire between TP801/
APR-45 (B-1) and E704/APR-45 (A-1).
.Select SDTI with INPUT SELECT.
.After adjustment, remove jumper wire.
10-4. SDI/SDTI
10-4-1. Free Run Adjustment
(Connection)
Specification
TP751/APR-45 (A-1)
TP1502/APR-45 (E-1)
Spec. 27.0 ±0.1 MHz
TP1552/APR-45 (E-1)
Spec. 27.0 ±0.1 MHz
Step 1
TP701/APR-45 (A-2)
Spec. 27.0 ±0.1 MHz
Step 2
TP802/APR-45 (B-4)
Spec. 27.0 ±0.1 MHz
10-4. SDI/SDTI
10-4-1. Free Run Adjustment
DSR-2000/2000P
APR-45 (TP)
Oscilloscope Frequency counter
DSR-2000/2000P
SAFETY CHECK-OUT
After correcting the original service problem,
perform the following safety checks before
releasing the set to the customer :
Check the metal trim, “metallized” knobs, screws,
and all other exposed metal parts for AC
leakage. Check leakage as described below.
LEAKAGE TEST
The AC leakage from any exposed metal part to
earth ground and from all exposed metal parts to
any exposed metal part having a return to
chassis, must not exceed 0.5 mA. Leakage
current can be measured by any one of three
methods.
1. A commercial leakage tester, such as the
Simpson 229 or RCA WT-540A. Follow the
manufacturers’ instructions to use these
instruments.
2. A battery-operated AC milliammeter. The
Data Precision 245 digital multimeter is
suitable for this job.
3. Measuring the voltage drop across a resistor
by means of a VOM or battery-operated AC
voltmeter. The “limit” indication is 0.75 V, so
analog meters must have an accurate low-
voltage scale. The Simpson 250 and Sanwa
SH-63Trd are examples of a passive VOM
that is suitable. Nearly all battery operated
digital multimeters that have a 2 V AC range
are suitable. (See Fig. A)
To Exposed Metal
Parts on Set
Fig A. Using an AC voltmeter to check AC leakage.
AC
voltmeter
(0.75V)
Earth Ground
0.15
µ
F 1.5 k
Z
Printed in Japan
Sony Corporation 2001. 6 08
B&P Company ©2000
DSR-2000 (UC)
DSR-2000P (CE) E
9-955-186-12

Navigation menu